Volvo 2016 V60 Owners Manual V1

User Manual: Volvo 2016 Volvo V60 Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 402 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Contents
Introduction
Safety
Instruments and controls
Climate
Loading and storage
Locks and alarm
Driver support
Starting and driving
Wheels and tires
Maintenance and servicing
Specifications

W E B E D I T I O N

O W N E R ' S M A N U A L

WELCOME TO THE WORLD-WIDE FAMILY OF VOLVO OWNERS.

We trust that you will enjoy many years of safe

driving in your Volvo, an automobile designed

with your safety and comfort in mind. We encour-

age you to familiarize yourself with the equipment

descriptions and operating instructions in this

manual.

We also urge you and your passengers to wear

seat belts at all times in this (or any other) vehicle.

And, of course, please do not operate a vehicle if

you may be affected by alcohol, medication or

any impairment that could hinder your ability to

drive.

Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable fed-

eral safety and emission standards. If you have

any questions regarding your vehicle, please con-

tact your Volvo retailer or see the article "Contact-

ing Volvo" for information on getting in touch with

Volvo in the United States and Canada.

Contents
2
01
01 Introduction
On-board owner's manual........................ 11
Owner's information.................................. 13
Contacting Volvo....................................... 13
About this manual..................................... 14
Change of ownership................................ 18
Crash event data....................................... 18
Volvo Structural Parts Statement.............. 19
Information on the Internet....................... 20
Volvo ID..................................................... 21
Open Source Software Notice.................. 21
Volvo and the environment....................... 22
Important warnings................................... 23
Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance.......... 24
Technician certification............................. 24
02
02 Safety
Occupant safety........................................ 26
Recall information..................................... 26
Reporting safety defects........................... 27
Seat belts – general.................................. 28
Seat belts – buckling/unbuckling.............. 29
Seat belt reminder..................................... 30
Seat belts – pregnancy............................. 31
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)..... 31
Front airbags............................................. 33
Occupant Weight Sensor.......................... 36
Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags...... 39
Inflatable Curtain (IC)................................ 41
Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS)...... 42
Crash mode – general information............ 44
Crash mode – starting the vehicle............ 45
Crash mode – moving the vehicle............. 45
Child safety............................................... 46
Child restraints.......................................... 47
Infant seats............................................... 49
Convertible seats...................................... 51
Booster cushions...................................... 54
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors.................. 55
Top tether anchors.................................... 56
02
   
Integrated booster cushion – general
information................................................ 57
Integrated booster cushion – using.......... 59
Integrated booster cushion – stowing...... 60
Child safety locks...................................... 61

Contents
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3
03
03 Instruments and controls
Instrument overview ................................. 63
Information displays – introduction........... 66
Eco Guide* and Power Meter*.................. 69
Information displays – indicator symbols. 70
Information displays – warning symbols... 72
My Car – introduction............................... 74
Information displays – ambient tempera-
ture sensor................................................ 75
Information displays – trip odometer and
clock......................................................... 76
Inserting/removing remote key................. 76
Ignition modes.......................................... 77
Front seats................................................ 78
Front seats – folding backrest*................. 79
Front seats – power seat.......................... 79
Key memory – power driver's seat* and
door mirrors.............................................. 81
Rear seats – head restraints..................... 82
Rear seats – folding backrest................... 84
Steering wheel.......................................... 85
Electrically heated* steering wheel........... 86
Lighting panel........................................... 87
High/low beam headlights........................ 88
Active high beams (AHB)*......................... 88
03
   
Tunnel detection (models with the rain
sensor* only)............................................. 90
Active Bending Lights (ABL)*.................... 90
Auxiliary lights*.......................................... 91
Instrument and "theater" lighting.............. 91
Parking lights............................................ 92
Rear fog lights........................................... 92
Hazard warning flashers........................... 93
Turn signals............................................... 93
Front interior lighting................................. 94
Rear interior lighting.................................. 95
Home safe lighting.................................... 95
Approach lighting...................................... 96
Windshield wipers..................................... 96
Rain sensor*.............................................. 97
Windshield washer.................................... 97
Tailgate wiper/washer............................... 98
Power windows......................................... 99
Power door mirrors................................. 100
Power door mirrors – automatic tilting/
retraction................................................. 101
Heated windshield*, rear window and
door mirror defrosters............................. 102
Interior rearview mirror............................ 103
03
   
Digital compass*..................................... 103
Power moonroof* – introduction............. 104
Power moonroof* – operation................. 105
HomeLink® Wireless Control System* –
introduction............................................. 106
HomeLink® Wireless Control System* –
programming........................................... 107
Volvo Sensus.......................................... 110
Information display – menu controls....... 111
Information display – menu overview..... 111
Information display – messages............. 112
Trip computer – introduction ................. 113
Trip computer – functions, analog instru-
ment panel.............................................. 114
Trip computer – functions, digital instru-
ment panel.............................................. 117
Trip computer – Supplementary informa-
tion.......................................................... 119
Trip computer – Trip statistics................ 120

Contents
4* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04
04 Climate
Climate – general information................. 122
Climate – sensors................................... 122
Air quality................................................ 123
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)*.......... 123
Climate – menu settings......................... 124
Air distribution – general......................... 124
Electronic climate control (ECC)............. 126
Heated seats........................................... 127
Temperature and blower control............ 128
Automatic climate control....................... 128
Air conditioning....................................... 129
Max. defroster and electrically heated
windshield*.............................................. 129
Air distribution – function........................ 130
Air distribution – recirculation................. 131
Air distribution – table............................. 132
05
05 Loading and storage
Storage spaces....................................... 135
Tunnel console........................................ 137
Tunnel console – 12-volt sockets........... 137
Glove compartment................................ 138
Vanity mirror............................................ 138
12-volt socket in the cargo area*............ 138
Loading – general................................... 139
Loading – roof load carriers.................... 139
Load anchoring eyelets........................... 140
Grocery bag holder................................. 141
Cargo net – general information............. 141
Cargo area cover.................................... 143
Steel cargo grid....................................... 143
06
06 Locks and alarm
Remote key and key blade..................... 146
Remote key – loss................................... 146
Key memory............................................ 147
Locking/unlocking confirmation.............. 147
Immobilizer (start inhibitor)...................... 148
Remote key – functions.......................... 149
Remote key – range................................ 150
Detachable key blade – general informa-
tion.......................................................... 151
Detachable key blade – detaching/rein-
serting..................................................... 151
Detachable key blade – unlocking.......... 152
Private locking........................................ 152
Remote key – replacing the battery........ 153
Keyless drive*– locking/unlocking.......... 155
Keyless drive* – unlocking with key
blade....................................................... 156
Keyless drive* – key memory.................. 156
Keyless drive* – messages..................... 157
Keyless drive* – antenna locations......... 158
Locking/unlocking – from the outside..... 159
Manual locking........................................ 160
Locking/unlocking – from inside............. 160
Locking/unlocking – glove compartment 162

Contents
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5
06
   
Locking/unlocking – tailgate................... 162
Alarm – general information.................... 164
Alarm indicator........................................ 165
Alarm – arming/disarming....................... 165
Alarm signal............................................ 166
Alarm – turning off................................... 166
Alarm-related functions........................... 166
07
07 Driver support
Active chassis* (Four C).......................... 169
Stability system – introduction................ 169
Stability system – operation.................... 170
Stability system – symbols and mes-
sages....................................................... 172
Adjustable steering force*....................... 174
Road Sign Information (RSI)* – introduc-
tion.......................................................... 174
Road Sign Information (RSI) – operation 175
Road Sign Information (RSI) – limitations 175
Cruise control (CC) – introduction.......... 176
Cruise control (CC) – engaging and set-
ting speed............................................... 176
Toggling between ACC and CC (stand-
ard Cruise Control).................................. 178
Cruise control (CC) – deactivating.......... 178
Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction... 179
Adaptive Cruise Control – function......... 180
Adaptive Cruise Control – engaging....... 182
Adaptive Cruise Control – setting speed 183
Adaptive Cruise Control – setting time
interval..................................................... 184
Adaptive Cruise Control – deactivating.. 184
Adaptive Cruise Control – passing
another vehicle........................................ 186
07
   
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) – Queue
Assist...................................................... 186
Radar sensor........................................... 188
Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations...... 188
Adaptive Cruise Control – symbols and
messages................................................ 190
Adaptive Cruise Control – troubleshoot-
ing........................................................... 192
Distance Alert – introduction................... 193
Distance Alert – operation....................... 193
Distance Alert – limitations...................... 194
Distance Alert – symbols and messages 196
City Safety – introduction........................ 197
City Safety – function.............................. 198
City Safety – operation............................ 199
City Safety – limitations.......................... 199
City Safety – troubleshooting.................. 200
City Safety – symbols and messages..... 202
City Safety – Laser sensor...................... 203
Collision warning – introduction.............. 204
Collision warning* – function................... 206
Collision warning* – operation................ 207
Collision warning* – Cyclist detection..... 208
Collision warning* – Pedestrian detec-
tion.......................................................... 209

Contents
6* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07
   
Collision warning* – limitations............... 210
The camera’s limitations......................... 212
Collision warning – troubleshooting........ 213
Collision warning – symbols and mes-
sages....................................................... 215
Driver Alert System................................. 217
Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction 217
Driver Alert Control (DAC) – operation.... 218
Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function...... 219
Driver Alert Control (DAC) – limitations... 219
Driver Alert Control (DAC) – symbols and
messages................................................ 220
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – intro-
duction.................................................... 222
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – opera-
tion.......................................................... 223
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita-
tions........................................................ 224
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – sym-
bols and messages................................. 225
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction... 227
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – operation....... 228
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – limitations...... 230
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – symbols and
messages................................................ 231
07
   
Park assist – introduction....................... 232
Park assist – function.............................. 232
Park assist – operation........................... 234
Park assist – limitations.......................... 235
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – introduction.... 236
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – function.......... 236
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – operation........ 237
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – limitations....... 239
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – symbols and
messages................................................ 240
Park assist – troubleshooting.................. 240
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – intro-
duction.................................................... 241
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – func-
tion.......................................................... 241
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – opera-
tion.......................................................... 242
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – guiding
and marker lines...................................... 243
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – limita-
tions........................................................ 245
BLIS* – introduction................................ 245
BLIS* – function...................................... 246
BLIS* – operation.................................... 247
BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)............. 247
07
   
BLIS* – limitations................................... 249
BLIS* – messages................................... 250

Contents
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 7
08
08 Starting and driving
Starting the engine.................................. 252
Switching off the engine......................... 254
Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – introduc-
tion.......................................................... 254
Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – starting the
engine..................................................... 255
Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – switching
off the engine.......................................... 255
Jump starting.......................................... 256
Transmission – general information........ 257
Transmission – positions........................ 257
Transmission – Geartronic...................... 259
Transmission – shiftlock override........... 261
Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA)......... 262
Start/Stop – introduction........................ 262
Start/Stop – function............................... 262
Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions......... 263
Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions......... 264
Start/Stop – settings............................... 265
Start/Stop – symbols and messages...... 266
ECO*....................................................... 267
All Wheel Drive (AWD)............................. 269
Hill Descent Control (HDC) – introduc-
tion.......................................................... 269
Hill Descent Control (HDC) – operation.. 270
08
   
Brakes – general..................................... 271
Brakes – symbols ................................... 273
Anti-lock braking system (ABS).............. 273
Brake lights............................................. 273
Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA)....... 274
Parking brake – general information....... 274
Parking brake – applying........................ 275
Parking brake – releasing........................ 276
Parking brake – symbols and messages 277
Driving through water.............................. 278
Engine and cooling system..................... 279
Conserving electrical current.................. 279
Before a long distance trip...................... 279
Driving in cold weather........................... 280
Refueling – fuel requirements................. 281
Refueling – octane rating........................ 282
Refueling – opening/closing fuel filler
door......................................................... 283
Refueling – opening/closing fuel cap...... 284
Emission controls.................................... 285
Economical driving.................................. 285
Towing a trailer....................................... 287
Trailer Stability Assist (TSA).................... 288
Towing the vehicle.................................. 289
08
   
Towing eyelet.......................................... 290
Towing by tow truck............................... 291

Contents
8* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
09
09 Wheels and tires
Tires – general information...................... 293
Tires – storage and age.......................... 294
Tires – tread wear indicator.................... 295
Tires – tire economy................................ 295
Changing a wheel – direction of rotation 296
Changing a wheel – removing wheel...... 296
Changing a wheel – spare wheel............ 299
Changing a wheel – accessing the spare
wheel....................................................... 300
Changing a wheel – installing a wheel.... 300
Tire inflation – general information.......... 301
Tire inflation – checking pressure........... 302
Tire specifications................................... 303
Tire inflation – pressure table.................. 305
Loading specifications............................ 306
Loading specifications – load limit.......... 306
Tire specifications – terminology............ 307
Tire specifications – Uniform Tire Quality
Grading................................................... 308
Snow chains............................................ 309
Snow tires/studded tires......................... 310
Tire pressure monitoring - introduction.. 310
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
– general information.............................. 311
09
   
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
– changing wheels.................................. 312
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
– recalibrating......................................... 313
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
– activating/deactivating......................... 314
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
– messages............................................. 314
Tire Monitor - introduction...................... 315
Calibrating Tire Monitor.......................... 316
Tire Monitor status information............... 316
Tire Monitor – messages......................... 317
Tire sealing system* – general informa-
tion.......................................................... 318
Tire sealing system* – overview.............. 320
Tire sealing system* – sealing hole......... 321
Tire sealing system – checking inflation
pressure.................................................. 323
Tire sealing system* – inflating tires........ 323
Tire sealing system* – sealing compound
container................................................. 324
10
10 Maintenance and servicing
Maintenance – introduction.................... 326
Maintenance – owner maintenance........ 327
Maintenance – hoisting........................... 328
Onboard Diagnostic System................... 329
Booking service and repairs .................. 329
Maintenance – opening/closing hood..... 331
Engine compartment – overview............ 332
Engine compartment – engine oil........... 333
Engine compartment – coolant............... 335
Engine compartment – brake fluid.......... 336
Engine compartment – power steering
fluid......................................................... 337
Bulbs – introduction................................ 338
Bulbs – headlight housing....................... 339
Bulbs – cover.......................................... 340
Bulbs – low beam, Halogen.................... 341
Bulbs – high beam, Halogen................... 341
Bulbs – extra high beam......................... 342
Bulbs – front turn signals........................ 343
Bulbs – taillight housing.......................... 343
Bulbs – license plate lighting.................. 344
Bulbs – cargo area lighting..................... 344
Bulbs – vanity mirror lighting.................. 345
Bulbs – specifications............................. 345

Contents
9
10
   
Wiper blades – service position.............. 346
Wiper blades – windshield...................... 347
Wiper blades – tailgate........................... 348
Engine compartment – washer fluid....... 348
Battery – symbols................................... 349
Battery – handling................................... 349
Battery – maintenance............................ 350
Battery – changing.................................. 351
Fuses – introduction............................... 353
Fuses – engine compartment................. 354
Fuses – glove compartment................... 358
Fuses – cargo area/trunk........................ 361
Fuses – engine compartment cold zone
(Start/Stop only)...................................... 362
Washing the car...................................... 364
Automatic car wash................................ 365
Polishing and waxing.............................. 365
Cleaning the interior................................ 366
Touching up paintwork........................... 368
11
11 Specifications
Label information.................................... 371
Dimensions............................................. 374
Weights................................................... 378
Engine specifications.............................. 380
Oil specifications..................................... 381
Oil volume............................................... 382
Coolant – specification and volume........ 383
Transmission oil – specification and vol-
umes....................................................... 383
Brake fluid – specification and volume... 383
Power steering – specification................ 384
Fuel tank volume – specification and vol-
ume......................................................... 384
Air conditioning – specification and vol-
ume......................................................... 384
Battery specifications............................. 385
Symbols – general information............... 386
Warning symbols.................................... 386
Indicator symbols.................................... 387
Information symbols............................... 388
Information symbols – ceiling console.... 389
Information symbols – center console.... 389
12
12 Index
Index....................................................... 390

I N T R O D U C T I O N

01 Introduction

}}

On-board owner's manual

The owner's manual can be displayed on the

center console screen and you can carry out

searches for the information that you require.

To open the owner's manual, press the MY

CAR button on the center console, press OK/

MENU and select Owner's manual.

For basic information, see "Infotainment -

operating the system." The following sections

also provide more detailed information.

The on-board owner's manual start page

There are four ways of finding information

articles in the on-board owner's manual:

•Searching: search for an article.

•Categories: All of the articles are sorted

by category.

•Favorites: Quick access to frequently

read articles.

•Quick Guide: A selection of articles cov-

ering commonly used functions.

Select the symbol in the lower right-hand cor-

ner for additional information about the on-

board owner's manual.

NOTE

•The on-board owner's manual cannot

be accessed while the vehicle is mov-

ing.

•Specifications regarding your vehicle

are not found in the on-board informa-

tion. This information is listed in the

printed owner's manual.

Searching for information

Searching using the text wheel

List of characters

Switching between character entry

modes (see the following table)

Surf history

Use the text wheel to enter a web address.

1. Turn TUNE to the desired letter and press

OK/MENU to confirm. The number/letter

keys on the center console can also be

used.

2. Continue to the next letter, etc. The

results of the search will be displayed in

the phone book.

01 Introduction

3. To switch from letter entry mode to the

entry mode for numbers or special char-

acters, or to go view surf history, turn

TUNE to one of the selections (see the

explanation in the following table) in the

list for switching character entry mode (2)

and press OK/MENU.

123/A

Toggle between letters and num-

bers by pressing OK/MENU.

=> This leads to surf history. Turn

TUNE to select a web address

and press OK/MENU to go to the

website.

Go Go to the website by pressing

OK/MENU.

a|A Toggle between upper and lower

case letters by pressing OK/

MENU.

| | }Switch from the text wheel to the

Address: field. Use TUNE to

move the cursor and erase char-

acters by pressing EXIT. Press

OK/MENU to return to the text

wheel.

The number/letter keys on the

center console can also be used

to edit the Address: field.

Press EXIT briefly to erase a single character.

Press and hold EXIT to erase all characters.

Pressing a number key on the center console

while the text wheel is displayed (see the pre-

vious illustration) will display a list of charac-

ters. Press the desired key repeatedly to

enter the desired letter and continue to the

next letter, etc.

To enter a number, press and hold the but-

ton.

Categories

The articles in the on-board owner's manual

are divided into main categories and sub-cat-

egories. The same article may be listed in

several applicable categories to help make

searches easier.

Turn TUNE to navigate in the category struc-

ture and press OK/MENU to open a category

(indicated by the symbol) or an article

(indicated by the symbol). Press EXIT to

return to the previous view.

Favorites

Articles that have been marked as favorites

can be found here. For information about

marking an article as a favorite, see "Navigat-

ing in an article" below.

Turn TUNE to navigate in the list of favorites

and press OK/MENU to open an article.

Press EXIT to return to the previous view.

Quick Guide

This is a selection of articles that will help you

become familiar with some of the vehicle's

most common functions. These articles can

also be found in their respective categories

but are listed here for quick access.

Turn TUNE to navigate in the Quick Guide

and press OK/MENU to open an article.

Press EXIT to return to the previous view.

Navigating in an article

Home: Returns you to the owner's man-

ual start page.

Favorites: Add/remove an article from

the list of favorites. This can also be done

by pressing the FAV button on the center

console keypad.

Highlighted link: takes you to the linked

article.

Important information: if the article con-

tains warnings, cautions or notes, sym-

01 Introduction

bols for these types of information and

the number of such texts in the article will

be displayed here.

Turn TUNE to navigate among the links or

scroll in an article. When you have scrolled to

the beginning/end of an article, you can

return to the start page or a favorite by scroll-

ing one additional step up/down. Press OK/

MENU to activate a selection or highlighted

link. Press EXIT to return to the previous

view.

Related information

•Information on the Internet (p. 20)

Owner's information

Your vehicle is equipped with a screen on

which you can display information about your

vehicle's features and functions. The printed

owner's manual supplements the on-board

information and contains important texts, the

latest updates and instructions that can be

useful in situations when it is not practical to

read the information on the screen.

Changing the language used for the on-board

information could mean that some of the

information displayed may not comply with

national or local statutes and regulations.

WARNING

The driver is always responsible for oper-

ating the vehicle in a safe manner and for

complying with current statutes and regu-

lations.

It is also essential to maintain and service

the vehicle according to Volvo's recom-

mendations as stated in the owner's infor-

mation and the service and warranty book-

let.

If the on-board information differs from the

printed owner's manual, the printed infor-

mation always takes precedence.

Contacting Volvo

In the USA:

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive,

P.O. Box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

www.volvocars.com/us

In Canada:

Volvo Cars of Canada

National Customer Service

9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101

Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9

1-800-663-8255

www.volvocars.com/ca

Related information

•About this manual (p. 14)

•Important warnings (p. 23)

•Crash event data (p. 18)

•Volvo Structural Parts Statement (p. 19)

01 Introduction

About this manual

Reading your owner's manual is a good way

to familiarize yourself with the features and

systems in your vehicle.

•Before you operate your vehicle for the

first time, we recommend that you look

through the information found in the

chapters "Your Driving Environment" and

"During Your Trip."

•Information contained in the balance of

the manual is extremely useful and should

be read after operating the vehicle for the

first time.

•The manual is structured so that it can be

used for reference. For this reason, it

should be kept in the vehicle for ready

access.

On-board owner's manual

When the printed manual refers to the on-

board owner's manual, this pertains to the

information displayed on the center console

screen.

The language used on the center console

screen and instrument panel can be changed

in the MY CAR system settings menu.

There are four ways of finding information

articles in the on-board owner's manual:

•Searching: search for an article.

•Categories: All of the articles are sorted

by category.

•Favorites: Quick access to frequently

read articles.

•Quick Guide: A selection of articles cov-

ering commonly used functions.

Select the symbol in the lower right-hand cor-

ner for additional information about the on-

board owner's manual.

NOTE

•The on-board owner's manual cannot

be accessed while the vehicle is mov-

ing.

•Specifications regarding your vehicle

are not found in the on-board informa-

tion. This information is listed in the

printed owner's manual.

The owner's manual in mobile devices

NOTE

The owner's manual mobile app can be

downloaded at www.volvocars.com.

The mobile app also contains videos and

searchable content, and provides easy

navigation between the various articles.

Footnotes

Certain pages of this manual contain informa-

tion in the form of footnotes at the bottom of

the page. This information supplements the

text that the footnote number refers to (a let-

ter is used if the footnote refers to text in a

table).

Display texts

There are several displays in the driver’s field

of vision that show messages generated by

various systems and functions in the vehicle.

These texts are indicated in the Owner’s

Manual by being in slightly larger type than

the surrounding text and are printed in gray,

(for example: Change doors unlock

setting).

Decals

There are various types of decals in the vehi-

cle whose purpose is to provide important

information in a clear and concise way. The

importance of these decals is explained as

follows, in descending order of importance.

01 Introduction

}}

Risk of injury

G031590

Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning back-

ground, white text/image on a black back-

ground. Decals of this type are used to indi-

cate potential danger. Ignoring a warning of

this type could result in serious injury or

death.

Risk of damage to the vehicle

G031592

White ISO symbols and white text/image on a

black or blue warning background and space

for a message. If the information on decals of

this type is ignored, damage to the vehicle

could result.

Information

G031593

White ISO symbols and white text/image on a

black background. These decals provide gen-

eral information.

NOTE

The decals shown in the Owner’s Manual

are examples only and are not intended to

be reproductions of the decals actually

used in the vehicle. The purpose is to give

an indication of how they look and their

approximate location in the vehicle. The

applicable information for your particular

vehicle can be found on the respective

decals in the vehicle.

01 Introduction

Types of lists used in the owner's

information

Procedures

Procedures (step-by-step instructions), or

actions that must be carried out in a certain

order, are arranged in numbered lists in this

manual.

If there is a series of illustrations associ-

ated with step-by-step instructions, each

step in the procedure is numbered in the

same way as the corresponding illustra-

tion.

Lists in which letters are used can be

found with series of illustrations in cases

where the order in which the instructions

are carried out is not important.

Arrows with or without numbers are used

to indicate the direction of a movement.

Arrows containing letters are used to indi-

cate movement.

If there are no illustrations associated with a

step-by-step list, the steps in the procedure

are indicated by ordinary numbers.

Position lists

Red circles containing a number are used

in general overview illustrations in which

certain components are pointed out. The

corresponding number is also used in the

position list's description of the various

components.

Bullet lists

Bullets are used to differentiate a number of

components/functions/points of information

that can be listed in random order.

For example:

•Coolant

•Engine oil

Continues on next page

} }This symbol can be found at the lower

right corner to indicate that the current topic

continues on the following page.

Continuation from previous page

|| This symbol can be found at the upper left

corner to indicate that the current topic is a

continuation from the previous page.

Options and accessories

Optional or accessory equipment described

in this manual is indicated by an asterisk.

Optional or accessory equipment may not be

available in all countries or markets. Please

note that some vehicles may be equipped dif-

ferently, depending on special legal require-

ments.

Contact your Volvo retailer for additional

information.

NOTE

•Do not export your Volvo to another

country before investigating that coun-

try's applicable safety and exhaust

emission requirements. In some cases

it may be difficult or impossible to

comply with these requirements. Mod-

ifications to the emission control sys-

tem(s) may render your Volvo not certi-

fiable for legal operation in the U.S.,

Canada and other countries.

•All information, illustrations and speci-

fications contained in this manual are

based on the latest product informa-

tion available at the time of publica-

tion. Please note that some vehicles

may be equipped differently, depend-

ing on special legal requirements.

Optional equipment described in this

manual may not be available in all mar-

kets.

•Some of the illustrations shown are

generic and may not depict the exact

model for which this manual is

intended.

•Volvo reserves the right to make model

changes at any time, or to change

specifications or design without notice

and without incurring obligation.

01 Introduction

WARNING

If your vehicle is involved in an accident,

unseen damage may affect its drivability

and safety.

WARNING

CALIFORNIA proposition 65

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,

and certain vehicle components contain or

emit chemicals known to the state of Cali-

fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects

or other reproductive harm. In addition,

certain fluids contained in vehicles and

certain products of component wear con-

tain or emit chemicals known to the State

of California to cause cancer, and birth

defects or other reproductive harm.

WARNING

Certain components of this vehicle such as

air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners,

adaptive steering columns, and button cell

batteries may contain Perchlorate material.

Special handling may apply for service or

vehicle end of life disposal.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/

perchlorate.

Shiftlock

When your vehicle is parked, the gear selec-

tor is locked in the P (Park) position. To

release the selector from this position, the

ignition must be in mode II (p. 77) or the

engine must be running. Depress the brake

pedal, press the button on the front side of

the gear selector and move the selector from

P (Park).

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

The ABS system performs a brief self-diag-

nostic test when the engine has been started

and driver releases the brake pedal. Another

automatic test may be performed when the

vehicle first reaches a speed of approximately

6 mph (10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate

several times and a sound may be audible

from the ABS control module. This is normal.

Fuel filler door

Press the button on the light switch panel

(see the illustration in Refueling – opening/

closing fuel filler door (p. 283)) when the vehi-

cle is at a standstill to unlock the fuel filler

door. It will relock when closed and there will

be an audible click.

Points to keep in mind

•Do not export your Volvo to another

country before investigating that coun-

try's applicable safety and exhaust emis-

sion requirements. In some cases it may

be difficult or impossible to comply with

these requirements. Modifications to the

emission control system(s) may render

your Volvo not certifiable for legal opera-

tion in the U.S., Canada and other coun-

tries.

•All information, illustrations and specifica-

tions contained in this manual are based

on the latest product information availa-

ble at the time of publication. Please note

that some vehicles may be equipped dif-

ferently, depending on special legal

requirements. Optional equipment descri-

bed in this manual may not be available in

all markets.

•Some of the illustrations shown are

generic and may not depict the exact

model for which this manual is intended.

•Volvo reserves the right to make model

changes at any time, or to change speci-

fications or design without notice and

without incurring obligation.

Related information

•Information on the Internet (p. 20)

•Volvo and the environment (p. 22)

•Important warnings (p. 23)

01 Introduction

Change of ownership

When the vehicle changes owners, all per-

sonal settings should be reset to the factory

defaults.

To reset, press the MY CAR button in the

center console followed by OK/MENU and

select Settings Reset to factory settings.

User data e.g., for apps, the web browser

and for personal settings in menus such as

the climate system and vehicle settings

should be reset to factory defaults.

For vehicles equipped with the optional Volvo

On Call with Sensus Connect (VOC), personal

settings stored in the vehicle should be

deleted, see Changing ownership of a vehicle

with Volvo On Call.

Related information

•Volvo ID (p. 21)

Crash event data

This vehicle is equipped with an event data

recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR

is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like

situations, such as an air bag deployment or

hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in

understanding how a vehicle's systems per-

formed. The EDR is designed to record data

related to vehicle dynamics and safety sys-

tems for a short period of time, typically 30

seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is

designed to record such data as:

•How various systems in your vehicle were

operating;

•Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened;

•How far (if at all) the driver was depress-

ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;

and,

•How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better under-

standing of the circumstances in which

crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle

only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;

no data are recorded by the EDR under

normal driving conditions and no personal

data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash

location) are recorded. However, other

parties, such as law enforcement, could

combine the EDR data with the type of

personally identifying data routinely

acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required, and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to

the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such

as law enforcement, that have the special

equipment, can read the information if they

have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Furthermore, your vehicle is equipped with a

number of computers whose task is to con-

tinuously control and monitor the vehicle’s

operation. They can also register information

during normal driving conditions if they detect

a fault relating to the vehicle’s operation and

functionality. Some of the stored information

is required by technicians when carrying out

service and maintenance to enable them to

diagnose and rectify any faults that have

occurred in the vehicle and to enable Volvo to

fulfill legal and other regulatory requirements.

This information may be stored in the vehi-

cle’s computers for a certain period of time.

01 Introduction

}}

Volvo will not contribute to spreading the

above-mentioned information to third parties

without the consent of the vehicle’s owner.

However, due to national legal requirements

and regulations, Volvo may be compelled to

provide information of this type to authorities

such as law enforcement agencies or others

who may assert a legal right to obtain such

information.

Volvo and service and repair facilities with

agreements with Volvo have access to the

special technical equipment required in order

to read and interpret the information stored

by the vehicle’s computers. Volvo is responsi-

ble for ensuring that the information transmit-

ted to Volvo during service and maintenance

is stored and handled in a secure manner and

that this handling is done in accordance with

applicable legal requirements. For additional

information, contact:

For additional information, contact:

In the United States

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive, P.O. box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

www.volvocars.com/us

In Canada

Volvo Cars of Canada

National Customer Service

9130 Leslie Street

Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9

1-800-663-8255

www.volvocars.com/ca

Related information

•Information on the Internet (p. 20)

•Contacting Volvo (p. 13)

Volvo Structural Parts Statement

Volvo has always been and continues to be a

leader in automotive safety.

Volvo engineers and manufactures vehicles

designed to help protect vehicle occupants in

the event of a collision.

Volvos are designed to absorb the impact of

a collision. This energy absorption system

including, but not limited to, structural com-

ponents such as bumper reinforcement bars,

bumper energy absorbers, frames, rails,

fender aprons, A-pillars, B-pillars and body

panels must work together to maintain cabin

integrity and protect the vehicle occupants.

The supplemental restraint system including

but not limited to air bags, side curtain air

bags, and deployment sensors work together

with the above components to provide proper

timing for air bag deployment.

Due to the above, Volvo Cars of North Amer-

ica does not support the use of aftermarket,

alternative or anything other than original

Volvo parts for collision repair.

In addition Volvo does not support the use or

re-use of structural components from an

existing vehicle that has been previously

damaged. Although these parts may appear

equivalent, it is difficult to tell if the parts have

been previously replaced with non-OE parts

or if the part has been damaged as a result of

a prior collision. The quality of these used

01 Introduction

20 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

parts may also have been affected due to

environmental exposure.

Related information

•Important warnings (p. 23)

•Information on the Internet (p. 20)

•Contacting Volvo (p. 13)

Information on the Internet

Additional information regarding your vehicle

can be found at www.volvocars.com.

Support on the Internet

Go to support.volvocars.com or use the QR

code below to visit the site, which is available

in most markets.

QR code to the support site

The information on the support site is search-

able and is grouped into different categories.

It includes support for e.g., Internet-based

services and functions, Volvo On Call (VOC),

the navigation system* and apps. Video and

step-by-step instructions explain various pro-

cedures such as how to connect the vehicle

to the Internet via a cell phone.

Downloadable information

Maps

Sensus Navigation system* maps can be

downloaded from the support site.

Mobile apps

For certain model year 2014 and 2015 Volvos,

the owner's manual is available in the form of

an app. The VOC* app can also be found

here.

Owner's manuals for earlier model

Volvos

Owner's manuals for earlier model Volvos are

available in PDF format. Quick Guides and

supplements can also be found on the sup-

port site. Select a model and a model year

and download the desired information.

Contact

Contact information for customer support and

the nearest Volvo retailer are available on the

site.

Related information

•About this manual (p. 14)

•Contacting Volvo (p. 13)

01 Introduction

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 21

Volvo ID

This is your personal ID that can be used to

access a number of services1

Creating a Volvo ID

To create a Volvo ID, provide your personal

email address and then follow the instructions

provided in the email that you will receive

from Volvo. This can be done from:

•From an Internet-connected vehicle:

Enter your email address in the app that

requires a Volvo ID and follow the instruc-

tions provides or press the Internet con-

nect ( ) button on the center console

and select Apps, Settings and follow the

instructions provided.

•Volvo On Call (VOC*): download the latest

version of the VOC app and create a

Volvo ID on the start page.

Open Source Software Notice

The systems in your Volvo contain certain

free/open source and other software.

This product uses certain free / open source

and other software originating from third

parties, that is subject to the GNU General

Public License version 2 and 3 (GPLv2/

GPLv3), GNU Lesser General Public License

version 3 (LGPLv3), The FreeType Project

License (“FreeType License”) and other

different and/or additional copyright licenses,

disclaimers and notices. The links how to

access the exact terms of GPLv2, GPLv3,

LGPLv3, and the other open source software

licenses, disclaimers, acknowledgements and

notices are provided to you below. Please

refer to the exact terms of the relevant

License, regarding your rights under said

licenses. Volvo Car Corporation (VCC) offers

to provide the source code of said free/open

source software to you for a charge covering

the cost of performing such distribution, such

as the cost of media, shipping and handling,

upon written request. Please contact your

nearest Volvo retailer.

This offer is valid for a period of at least three

(3) years from the date of the distribution of

this product by VCC / or for as long as VCC

offers spare parts or customer support.

Portions of this product uses software

copyrighted © v2.4.3/2010 The

FreeTypeProject (www.freetype.org). All rights

reserved.

This product includes software under

following licenses:

GPL v2 : http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-

licenses/gpl-2.0.html

•Linux kernel (merge between MontaVista

2.6.31 kernel and kernel from

L2.6.31_MX51_ER_1007 BSP)

•uBoot (based on v2009.08)

•busybox (based on version 1.13.2.)

GCC runtime library exception: http://

www.gnu.org/licenses/gcc-exception.html

•libgcc_s.so.1

LGPL v3: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/

lgpl.html

•Libc.so.6, libpthread.so.0, Librt.so.1

The FreeType Project License: http://

www.freetype.org/FTL.TXT

•libfreetype.so.6 (version 2.4.3)

Related information

•About this manual (p. 14)

1These services vary and may be subject to change. Consult your Volvo retailer.

01 Introduction

Volvo and the environment

Volvo is committed to the well being of its

customers. As a natural part of this commit-

ment, we care about the environment in

which we all live. Concern for the environment

means an everyday involvement in reducing

our environmental impact.

Volvo's environmental activities are based on

a holistic view, which means we consider the

overall environmental impact of a product

throughout its complete life cycle. In this con-

text, design, production, product use, and

recycling are all important considerations. In

production, Volvo has partly or completely

phased out several chemicals including

CFCs, lead chromates, asbestos, and cad-

mium; and reduced the number of chemicals

used in our plants 50% since 1991.

Volvo was the first in the world to introduce

into production a three-way catalytic con-

verter with a Lambda sond, now called the

heated oxygen sensor, in 1976. The current

version of this highly efficient system reduces

emissions of harmful substances (CO, HC,

NOx) from the exhaust pipe by approximately

95 – 99% and the search to eliminate the

remaining emissions continues. Volvo is the

only automobile manufacturer to offer CFC-

free retrofit kits for the air conditioning system

of all models as far back as the 1975

model 240. Advanced electronic engine con-

trols and cleaner fuels are bringing us closer

to our goal. In addition to continuous environ-

mental refinement of conventional gasoline-

powered internal combustion engines, Volvo

is actively looking at advanced technology

alternative-fuel vehicles.

When you drive a Volvo, you become our

partner in the work to lessen the car's impact

on the environment. To reduce your vehicle's

environmental impact, you can:

•Maintain proper air pressure in your tires.

Tests have shown decreased fuel econ-

omy with improperly inflated tires.

•Follow the recommended maintenance

schedule in your Warranty and Service

Records Information booklet.

•Drive at a constant speed whenever pos-

sible.

•See a trained and qualified Volvo service

technician as soon as possible for

inspection if the check engine (malfunc-

tion indicator) light illuminates, or stays

on after the vehicle has started.

•Properly dispose of any vehicle-related

waste such as used motor oil, used bat-

teries, brake pads, etc.

•When cleaning your vehicle, please use

genuine Volvo car care products. All

Volvo car care products are formulated to

be environmentally friendly.

FSC®

The FSC® (Forest Stewardship Council®)

symbol indicates that the wood pulp used in

this publication comes from FSC® certified

forests and other responsible sources.

Related information

•Economical driving (p. 285)

•Tires – tire economy (p. 295)

01 Introduction

Important warnings

Please keep the following warnings in mind

when operating/servicing your vehicle.

Driver distraction

A driver has a responsibility to do everything

possible to ensure his or her own safety and

the safety of passengers in the vehicle and

others sharing the roadway. Avoiding distrac-

tions is part of that responsibility.

Driver distraction results from driver activities

that are not directly related to controlling the

vehicle in the driving environment. Your new

Volvo is, or can be, equipped with many fea-

ture-rich entertainment and communication

systems. These include hands-free cellular

telephones, navigation systems, and multi-

purpose audio systems. You may also own

other portable electronic devices for your own

convenience. When used properly and safely,

they enrich the driving experience. Improperly

used, any of these could cause a distraction.

For all of these systems, we want to provide

the following warning that reflects the strong

Volvo concern for your safety. Never use

these devices or any feature of your vehicle in

a way that distracts you from the task of driv-

ing safely. Distraction can lead to a serious

accident. In addition to this general warning,

we offer the following guidance regarding

specific newer features that may be found in

your vehicle:

WARNING

•Never use a hand-held cellular tele-

phone while driving. Some jurisdic-

tions prohibit cellular telephone use by

a driver while the vehicle is moving.

•If your vehicle is equipped with a navi-

gation system, set and make changes

to your travel itinerary only with the

vehicle parked.

•Never program your audio system

while the vehicle is moving. Program

radio presets with the vehicle parked,

and use your programmed presets to

make radio use quicker and simpler.

•Never use portable computers or per-

sonal digital assistants while the vehi-

cle is moving.

Accessory installation

•We strongly recommend that Volvo own-

ers install only genuine, Volvo-approved

accessories, and that accessory installa-

tions be performed only by a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician.

•Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to

ensure compatibility with the perform-

ance, safety, and emission systems in

your vehicle. Additionally, a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician knows

where accessories may and may not be

safely installed in your Volvo. In all cases,

please consult a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician before installing

any accessory in or on your vehicle.

•Accessories that have not been approved

by Volvo may or may not be specifically

tested for compatibility with your vehicle.

Additionally, an inexperienced installer

may not be familiar with some of your

car's systems.

•Any of your car's performance and safety

systems could be adversely affected if

you install accessories that Volvo has not

tested, or if you allow accessories to be

installed by someone unfamiliar with your

vehicle.

•Damage caused by unapproved or

improperly installed accessories may not

be covered by your new vehicle warranty.

See your Warranty and Service Records

Information booklet for more warranty

information. Volvo assumes no responsi-

bility for death, injury, or expenses that

may result from the installation of non-

genuine accessories.

Related information

•About this manual (p. 14)

•Volvo Structural Parts Statement (p. 19)

01 Introduction

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance

Your new Volvo comes with a four year ON

CALL roadside assistance.

Additional information, features, and benefits

of this program are described in a separate

information package in your glove compart-

ment.

If you require assistance, dial:

In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63-

VOLVO)

In Canada 1-800-263-0475

NOTE

Some vehicles may be equipped with

Volvo On Call with Sensus Connect,

which will allow access to the call center

and additional features directly from the

vehicle. This is in addition to the Volvo On

Call Roadside Assistance program men-

tioned above.

Volvo On Call with Sensus Connect will

be a customer pay subscription offer after

an initial complimentary trial period.

Related information

•Information on the Internet (p. 20)

Technician certification

In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo

supports certification by the National Institute

for Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.).

Certified technicians have demonstrated a

high degree of competence in specific areas.

Besides passing exams, each technician

must also have worked in the field for two or

more years before a certificate is issued.

These professional technicians are best able

to analyze vehicle problems and perform the

necessary maintenance procedures to keep

your Volvo at peak operating condition.

S A F E T Y

02 Safety

Occupant safety

Safety is Volvo's cornerstone.

Volvo's concern for safety

Our concern for safety dates back to 1927

when the first Volvo rolled off the production

line. Three-point seat belts (a Volvo inven-

tion), safety cages, and energy-absorbing

impact zones were designed into Volvo vehi-

cles long before it was fashionable or

required by government regulation.

We will not compromise our commitment to

safety. We continue to seek out new safety

features and to refine those already in our

vehicles. You can help. We would appreciate

hearing your suggestions about improving

automobile safety. We also want to know if

you ever have a safety concern with your

vehicle. Call us in the U.S. at:

1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at:

1-800-663-8255.

Occupant safety reminders

How safely you drive doesn't depend on how

old you are but rather on:

•How well you see.

•Your ability to concentrate.

•How quickly you make decisions under

stress to avoid an accident.

The following suggestions are intended to

help you cope with the ever changing traffic

environment.

•Never drink and drive.

•If you are taking any medication, consult

your physician about its potential effects

on your driving abilities.

•Take a driver-retraining course.

•Have your eyes checked regularly.

•Keep your windshield and headlights

clean.

•Replace wiper blades when they start to

leave streaks.

•Take into account the traffic, road, and

weather conditions, particularly with

regard to stopping distance.

•Never send text messages while driving.

•Refrain from using or minimize the use of

a cell phone while driving.

Related information

•Recall information (p. 26)

•Reporting safety defects (p. 27)

Recall information

Information regarding recalls or other service

campaigns is available on our website at

www.volvocars.com/us/.

On our website, select the tab YOUR VOLVO

and the heading RECALL INFORMATION will

be displayed at the lower left side of the

screen. Enter your Vehicle Identification Num-

ber for your vehicle (found at the base of the

windshield). If your vehicle has any open

Recalls, they will be displayed on this page.

Volvo customers in Canada

For any questions regarding open recalls for

your vehicle, please contact your authorized

Volvo retailer. If your retailer is unable to

answer your questions, please contact Volvo

Customer Relations at 905 695-9626, Mon-

day through Friday, 8:30 A.M. to 5:00 P.M.

EST or by e-mail at vclcust@volvocars.com.

You may also write us at:

Volvo Cars of Canada

National Customer Service

9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101

Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9

Related information

•Occupant safety (p. 26)

•Reporting safety defects (p. 27)

02 Safety

Reporting safety defects

The following information will help you report

any perceived safety-related defects in your

vehicle.

Reporting safety defects in the U.S.

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the

National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition

to notifying Volvo Cars of North

America, LLC. If NHTSA receives

similar complaints, it may open an

investigation, and if it finds that a

safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may order a recall and

remedy campaign. However, NHTSA

cannot become involved in individ-

ual problems between you, your

retailer, or Volvo Cars of North

America, LLC. To contact NHTSA,

you may either call the Auto Safety

Hotline toll-free at

1-888-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to:

NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans-

portation, Washington D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other informa-

tion about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov, where you

can also enter your vehicle's VIN

(Vehicle Identification Number) to

see if it has any open recalls.

Volvo strongly recommends that if

your vehicle is covered under a

service campaign, safety or emis-

sion recall or similar action, it should

be completed as soon as possible.

Please check with your local retailer

or Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

if your vehicle is covered under

these conditions.

NHTSA can be reached at:

Internet:

http://www.nhtsa.gov

Telephone:

1-888-DASH-2-DOT

(1-888-327-4236).

Reporting safety defects in Canada

If you believe your vehicle has a defect that

could cause a crash or could cause injury or

death, you should immediately inform Trans-

port Canada in addition to notifying Volvo

Cars of Canada Corp.

Transport Canada can be contacted at:

1-800-333-0510

Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500

Fax: 1-819-994-3372

Mailing Address: Transport Canada - Road

Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, (Quebec) J8Z

0A1

Related information

•Occupant safety (p. 26)

•Recall information (p. 26)

02 Safety

Seat belts – general

Seat belts should always be worn by all occu-

pants of your vehicle. Children should be

properly restrained, using an infant, car, or

booster seat determined by age, weight and

height.

Volvo also believes no child should sit in the

front seat of a vehicle.

Adjusting the seat belt

Most states and provinces make it mandatory

for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts.

Seat belt pretensioners

All seat belts are equipped with pretensioners

that reduce slack in the belts. These preten-

sioners are triggered in situations where the

front or side impact airbags deploy, and in

certain impacts from the rear. The front seat

belts also include a tension reducing device

which, in the event of a collision, limits the

peak forces exerted by the seat belt on the

occupant.

Seat belt maintenance

Check periodically that the seat belts are in

good condition. Use water and a mild deter-

gent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanism

function as follows: attach the seat belt and

pull rapidly on the strap.

WARNING

Never use a seat belt for more than one

occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion

of the belt under the arm, behind the back

or otherwise out of position. Such use

could cause injury in the event of an acci-

dent. As seat belts lose much of their

strength when exposed to violent stretch-

ing, they should be replaced after any col-

lision, even if they appear to be undam-

aged.

WARNING

•Never repair the belt yourself; have this

work done by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician only.

•Any device used to induce slack into

the shoulder belt portion of the three-

point belt system will have a detrimen-

tal effect on the amount of protection

available to you in the event of a colli-

sion.

•The seat back should not be tilted too

far back. The shoulder belt must be

taut in order to function properly.

•Do not use child safety seats or child

booster cushions/backrests in the

front passenger's seat. We also rec-

ommend that children who have out-

grown these devices sit in the rear

seat with the seat belt properly fas-

tened.

Related information

•Seat belts – buckling/unbuckling (p. 29)

•Seat belt reminder (p. 30)

•Seat belts – pregnancy (p. 31)

02 Safety

}}

Seat belts – buckling/unbuckling

Seat belts should be used by all occupants in

the vehicle when it is in motion.

Buckling a seat belt

Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latch

plate into the receptacle until a distinct click

is heard. The seat belt retractor is normally

"unlocked" and you can move freely, provi-

ded that the shoulder belt is not pulled out

too far.

Adjusting seat belt height (front seat

belts only)

Adjusting seat belt height

The height of the shoulder section of the seat

belt must be correctly adjusted. Press the

button and move the upper seat belt anchor

to position it as high as possible so that the

shoulder section of the belt is across the seat

occupant's collarbone and not across the

throat.

Correct height adjustment

Incorrect height adjustment

Seat belt retractor

The seat belt retractor will lock up in the

following situations:

•if the belt is pulled out rapidly

•during braking and acceleration

•if the vehicle is leaning excessively

•when driving in turns

•if the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer-

gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) is

activated

NOTE

Each seat belt (except for the driver's belt)

is equipped with the ALR/ELR function,

which is designed to help keep the seat

belt taut. ALR/ELR activates if the seat belt

is pulled out as far as possible. If this is

done, a sound from the seat belt retractor

will be audible, which is normal, and the

seat belt will be pulled taut and locked in

place. This function is automatically disa-

bled when the seat belt is unbuckled and

fully retracted.

See also Child restraints (p. 47) for informa-

tion about using a seat belt's ALR/ELR func-

tion to anchor a child seat.

When wearing the seat belt remember:

•The belt should not be twisted or turned.

•The lap section of the belt must be posi-

tioned low on the hips (not pressing

against the abdomen).

•Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled

up into its retractor and that the shoulder

and lap belts are taut.

Unbuckling the seat belt

To remove the seat belt, press the red section

on the seat belt receptacle. Before exiting the

vehicle, check that the seat belt retracts fully

02 Safety

after being unbuckled. If necessary, guide the

belt back into the retractor slot.

Related information

•Seat belt reminder (p. 30)

•Seat belts – pregnancy (p. 31)

Seat belt reminder

The seat belt reminder is intended to alert all

occupants of the vehicle that their seat belts

should be fastened before the vehicle begins

to move.

G017726

Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console

The seat belt reminder consists of an audible

signal, an indicator light near the rearview

mirror and a symbol in the instrument panel

that alert all occupants of the vehicle to fas-

ten their seat belts (p. 28). The indicator light

will be on for several seconds from the time

the ignition is switched on. There will also be

an audible signal if the driver's seat belt is not

fastened.

If the front seat belts are unbuckled while the

vehicle is in motion, the audible signal and

warning light will be active for a several sec-

onds.

Rear seats

The seat belt reminder in the rear seat has

two additional functions:

•It provides information about which seat

belts are fastened in the rear seat. A mes-

sage will appear in the information display

when a belt is being used. This message

will disappear after several seconds or

can be erased by pressing the OK button

on the left steering wheel lever.

•It also provides a reminder if one of the

occupants of the rear seat has unbuckled

his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in

motion. A visual and audible signal will be

given. These signals will stop when the

seat belt has been re-buckled or can be

stopped by pressing the OK button.

•The message Unbelted in rear seat will

appear in the information display if one of

the rear doors has been opened.

The message in the information display can

always be accessed, even if it has been

erased, by pressing the OK button to display

stored messages.

Related information

•Seat belts – pregnancy (p. 31)

02 Safety

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 31

Seat belts – pregnancy

The seat belt should always be worn during

pregnancy. However, it is crucial that it be

worn correctly.

G020998

The diagonal section should wrap over the

shoulder then be routed between the breasts

and to the side of the belly. The lap section

should lay flat over the thighs and as low as

possible under the belly. It must never be

allowed to ride upward. Remove all slack

from the belt and ensure that it fits close to

the body without any twists.

As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers

should adjust their seats and steering wheel

such that they can easily maintain control of

the vehicle as they drive (which means they

must be able to easily operate the foot pedals

and steering wheel). Within this context, they

should strive to position the seat with as large

a distance as possible between their belly

and the steering wheel.

Related information

•Seat belts – buckling/unbuckling (p. 29)

•Seat belt reminder (p. 30)

•Child restraints (p. 47)

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

As an enhancement to the three-point seat

belts (p. 28), your Volvo is equipped with a

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).

Models with an analog instrument panel

Models with an digital instrument panel*

Volvo's SRS consists of seat belt pretension-

ers, front airbags (p. 33), side impact air-

||
02 Safety
02
32
bags (p. 39), a front passenger occupant
weight sensor (p. 36), and inflatable cur-
tains (p. 41). All of these systems are moni-
tored by the SRS control module. An SRS
warning light in the instrument panel (see the
illustration) illuminates when the ignition is in
modes I or II, and will normally go out after
approximately 6 seconds if no faults are
detected in the system.
Where applicable, a text message will also be
displayed when the SRS warning light illumi-
nates. If this warning symbol is not function-
ing properly, the general warning symbol illu-
minates and a text message will be displayed.
See also Information displays – indicator
symbols (p. 70) and Information displays –
warning symbols (p. 72) for more informa-
tion about indicator and warning lights.
WARNING
•If the SRS warning light stays on after
the engine has started or if it illumi-
nates while you are driving, have the
vehicle inspected by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician as
soon as possible.
•Never try to repair any component or
part of the SRS yourself. Any interfer-
ence in the system could cause mal-
function and serious injury. All work on
these systems should be performed by
a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
WARNING
If your vehicle has become flood-damaged
in any way (e.g., soaked carpeting/stand-
ing water on the floor of the vehicle), do
not attempt to start the vehicle or insert
the remote key into the ignition slot before
disconnecting the battery (see below). This
may cause airbag deployment which could
result in serious injury. Have the vehicle
towed to a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician for repairs.
Before attempting to tow the vehicle:
1. Switch off the ignition for at least
10 minutes and disconnect the bat-
tery.
2. Follow the instructions for manually
overriding the shiftlock system Trans-
mission – shiftlock override (p. 261).
Related information
•Crash mode – general information
(p. 44)

02 Safety

}}

Front airbags

The front airbags supplement the three-point

seat belts (p. 28). For these airbags to provide

the protection intended, seat belts must be

worn at all times.

G018665

The front airbag system

The front airbag system includes gas genera-

tors surrounded by the airbags, and decelera-

tion sensors that activate the gas generators,

causing the airbags to be inflated with nitro-

gen gas.

Location of the passenger's side front airbag

As the movement of the seats' occupants

compresses the airbags, some of the gas is

expelled at a controlled rate to provide better

cushioning. Both seat belt pretensioners also

deploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entire

process, including inflation and deflation of

the airbags, takes approximately one fifth of a

second.

The location of the front airbags is indicated

by SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering

wheel pad and above the glove compartment,

and by decals on both sun visors and on the

front and far right side of the dash.

The driver's side front airbag is folded and

located in the steering wheel hub.

The passenger's side front airbag is folded

behind a panel located above the glove com-

partment.

WARNING

•The airbags in the vehicle are designed

to be a SUPPLEMENT to–not a

replacement for–the three-point seat

belts. For maximum protection, wear

seat belts at all times. Be aware that

no system can prevent all possible

injuries that may occur in an accident.

•Never drive with your hands on the

steering wheel pad/airbag housing.

•The front airbags are designed to help

prevent serious injury. Deployment

occurs very quickly and with consider-

able force. During normal deployment

and depending on variables such as

seating position, one may experience

abrasions, bruises, swellings, or other

injuries as a result from deployment of

one or both of the airbags.

•When installing any accessory equip-

ment, make sure that the front airbag

system is not damaged. Any interfer-

ence in the system could cause mal-

function.

Front airbag deployment

•The front airbags are designed to deploy

during certain frontal or front-angular col-

lisions, impacts, or decelerations,

depending on the crash severity, angle,

speed and object impacted. The airbags

may also deploy in certain non-frontal

02 Safety

collisions where rapid deceleration

occurs.

•The SRS (p. 31) sensors, which trigger

the front airbags, are designed to react to

both the impact of the collision and the

inertial forces generated by it, and to

determine if the intensity of the collision is

sufficient for the seat belt pretensioners

and/or airbags to be deployed.

However, not all frontal collisions activate the

front airbags.

•If the collision involves a nonrigid object

(e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid,

fixed object at a low speed, the front air-

bags will not necessarily deploy.

•Front airbags do not normally deploy in a

side impact collision, in a collision from

the rear or in a rollover situation.

•The amount of damage to the bodywork

does not reliably indicate if the airbags

should have deployed or not.

WARNING

If any of the airbags have deployed:

•Do not attempt to drive the vehicle.

Have it towed to a qualified repair

facility.

•If necessary seek medical attentIon.

WARNING

•Do not use child safety seats or child

booster cushions/backrests in the

front passenger's seat. We also rec-

ommend that occupants under 4 feet

7 inches (140 cm) in height who have

outgrown these devices sit in the rear

seat with the seat belt fastened1.

•Never drive with the airbags deployed.

The fact that they hang out can impair

the steering of your vehicle. Other

safety systems can also be damaged.

•The smoke and dust formed when the

airbags are deployed can cause skin

and eye irritation in the event of pro-

longed exposure.

Should you have questions about any com-

ponent in the SRS system, please contact a

trained and qualified Volvo service technician

or Volvo customer support:

In the USA

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive

P.O. Box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

www.volvocars.com/us

In Canada

Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.

National Customer Service

9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101

Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9

1-800-663-8255

www.volvocars.com/ca

1See also the Occupant Weight Sensor information, (p. 36).

02 Safety

}}

NOTE

•Deployment of front airbags occurs

only one time during an accident. In a

collision where deployment occurs,

the airbags and seat belt pretensioners

activate. Some noise occurs and a

small amount of powder is released.

The release of the powder may appear

as smoke-like matter. This is a normal

characteristic and does not indicate

fire.

•Volvo's front airbags use special sen-

sors that are integrated with the front

seat buckles. The point at which the

airbag deploys is determined by

whether or not the seat belt is being

used, as well as the severity of the col-

lision.

•Collisions can occur where only one of

the airbags deploys. If the impact is

less severe, but severe enough to

present a clear injury risk, the airbags

are triggered at partial capacity. If the

impact is more severe, the airbags are

triggered at full capacity.

Airbag decals

Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors

Passenger's side airbag decal

WARNING

•Children must never be allowed in the

front passenger's seat.

•Occupants in the front passenger's

seat must never sit on the edge of the

seat, sit leaning toward the instrument

panel or otherwise sit out of position.

•The occupant's back must be as

upright as comfort allows and be

against the seat back with the seat

belt properly fastened.

•Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on

the dash, seat or out of the window.

02 Safety

WARNING

•No objects or accessory equipment,

e.g. dashboard covers, may be placed

on, attached to, or installed near the

air bag hatch (the area above the glove

compartment) or the area affected by

airbag deployment.

•There should be no loose articles,

such as coffee cups on the floor, seat,

or dashboard area.

•Never try to open the airbag cover on

the steering wheel or the passenger's

side dashboard. This should only be

done by a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician.

•Failure to follow these instructions can

result in injury to the vehicle occu-

pants.

Related information

•Occupant Weight Sensor (p. 36)

•Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags

(p. 39)

•Inflatable Curtain (IC) (p. 41)

•Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

(p. 31)

Occupant Weight Sensor

The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is

designed to meet the regulatory requirements

of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard

(FMVSS) 208 and is designed to disable (will

not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag

under certain conditions.

G017724

Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light

Disabling the passenger's side front

airbag

Volvo recommends that ALL occupants

(adults and children) shorter than 4 feet

7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back seat

of any vehicle with a front passenger side air-

bag (p. 33), and be properly restrained for

their size and weight. For child safety recom-

mendations, see Child safety (p. 46).

The OWS works with sensors that are part of

the front passenger's seat and seat

belt (p. 28). The sensors are designed to

detect the presence of a properly seated

occupant and determine if the passenger's

side front airbag should be enabled (may

inflate) or disabled (will not inflate).

The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the pas-

senger's side front airbag when:

•the front passenger's seat is unoccupied,

or has small/medium objects in the front

seat,

•the system determines that an infant is

present in a rear-facing infant seat that is

installed according to the manufacturer's

instructions,

•the system determines that a small child

is present in a forward-facing child

restraint that is installed according to the

manufacturer's instructions,

•the system determines that a small child

is present in a booster seat,

•a front passenger takes his/her weight off

of the seat for a period of time,

•a child or a small person occupies the

front passenger's seat.

The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF

indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay

on to remind you that the passenger's side

front airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER

AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is located in the

overhead console, near the base of the rear-

view mirror.

02 Safety

}}

NOTE

When the ignition is switched on, the OWS

indicator light will go on for up to 10 sec-

onds while the system performs a self-

diagnostic test.

However, if a fault is detected in the system:

•The OWS indicator light will stay on

•The SRS warning light (p. 31) will come

on and stay on

•The message Pass. Airbag OFF Service

urgent will be displayed in the informa-

tion display.

WARNING

If a fault in the system is detected and

indicated as described, be aware that the

passenger's side front airbag will not

deploy in the event of a collision. In this

case, the SRS system and Occupant

Weight Sensor should be inspected by a

trained and qualified Volvo service techni-

cian as soon as possible.

WARNING

•Never try to open, remove, or repair

any components in the OWS system.

This could result in system malfunc-

tion. Maintenance or repairs should

only be carried out by an a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician.

•The front passenger's seat should not

be modified in any way. This could

reduce pressure on the seat cushion,

which might interfere with the OWS

system's function.

Passeng-

er's seat

occu-

pancy sta-

tus

OWS

indicator

light sta-

tus

Passeng-

er's side

front air-

bag status

Seat unoc-

cupied

OWS indi-

cator light

lights up.

Passenger's

side front air-

bag disabled

Seat occu-

pied by low

weight

occupant/

objectA

OWS indi-

cator light

lights up

Passenger's

side front air-

bag disabled

Seat occu-

pied by

heavy occu-

pant/object

OWS indi-

cator light

is not lit

Passenger's

side front air-

bag enabled

AVolvo recommends that children always be properly

restrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats.

Do not assume that the passenger's side front airbag is

disabled unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator

lamp is lit. Make sure the child restraint is properly instal-

led. If there is any doubt as to the status of the passeng-

er's side front airbag, move the child restraint to the rear

seat.

The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate)

the passenger's side front airbag in the event

of a collision anytime the system senses that

a person of adult size is sitting properly in the

front passenger's seat. The PASSENGER

AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will be off and

remain off.

02 Safety

If a person of adult size is sitting in the front

passenger's seat, but the PASSENGER AIR-

BAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible

that the person isn't sitting properly in the

seat. If this happens:

•Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to

place the seatback in an upright position.

•Have the person sit upright in the seat,

centered on the seat cushion, with the

person's legs comfortably extended.

•Restart the vehicle and have the person

remain in this position for about two

minutes. This will allow the system to

detect that person and enable the pas-

senger's frontal airbag.

•If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica-

tor lamp remains on even after this, the

person should be advised to ride in the

rear seat.

This condition reflects limitations of the OWS

classification capability. It does not indicate

OWS malfunction.

Modifications

If you are considering modifying your vehicle

in any way to accommodate a disability, for

example by altering or adapting the driver's

or front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag

systems, please contact Volvo at:

In the USA

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive

P.O. Box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

In Canada

Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.

National Customer Service

9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101

Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9

1-800-663-8255

WARNING

•No objects that add to the total weight

on the seat should be placed on the

front passenger's seat. If a child is

seated in the front passenger's seat

with any additional weight, this extra

weight could cause the OWS system

to enable the airbag, which might

cause it to deploy in the event of a col-

lision, thereby injuring the child.

•The seat belt should never be wrapped

around an object on the front pas-

senger's seat. This could interfere with

the OWS system's function.

•The front passenger's seat belt should

never be used in a way that exerts

more pressure on the passenger than

normal. This could increase the pres-

sure exerted on the weight sensor by a

child, and could result in the airbag

being enabled, which might cause it to

deploy in the event of a collision,

thereby injuring the child.

02 Safety

}}

WARNING

•Keep the following points in mind with

respect to the OWS system. Failure to

follow these instructions could

adversely affect the system's function

and result in serious injury to the occu-

pant of the front passenger's seat:

•The full weight of the front seat pas-

senger should always be on the seat

cushion. The passenger should never

lift him/herself off the seat cushion

using the armrest in the door or the

center console, by pressing the feet on

the floor, by sitting on the edge of the

seat cushion, or by pressing against

the backrest in a way that reduces

pressure on the seat cushion. This

could cause OWS to disable the front,

passenger's side airbag.

WARNING

•Do not place any type of object on the

front passenger's seat in such a way

that jamming, pressing, or squeezing

occurs between the object and the

front seat, other than as a direct result

of the correct use of the Automatic

Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking

Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat belt (Child

restraints (p. 47)).

•No objects should be placed under the

front passenger's seat. This could

interfere with the OWS system's func-

tion.

Related information

•Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

(p. 31)

Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags

As an enhancement to the structural side

impact protection built into your vehicle, it is

also equipped with Side Impact Protection

System (SIPS) airbags.

G032949

Location of the side impact (SIPS) airbags (front

seats only)

The SIPS airbag system is designed to help

increase occupant protection in the event of

certain side impact collisions. The SIPS air-

bags are designed to deploy only during cer-

tain side-impact collisions, depending on the

crash severity, angle, speed and point of

impact.

02 Safety

Driver's side SIPS airbag

Passenger's side SIPS airbag

NOTE

SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag)

occurs only on the side of the vehicle

affected by the impact. The airbags are not

designed to deploy in all side impact situa-

tions.

Components in the SIPS airbag system

This SIPS airbag system consists of a gas

generator, the side airbag modules built into

the outboard sides of both front seat back-

rests, and electronic sensors/wiring.

WARNING

•The SIPS airbag system is a supple-

ment to the structural Side Impact

Protection System and the three-point

seat belt system. It is not designed to

deploy during collisions from the front

or rear of the vehicle or in rollover sit-

uations.

•The use of seat covers on the front

seats may impede SIPS airbag deploy-

ment.

•No objects, accessory equipment or

stickers may be placed on, attached to

or installed near the SIPS airbag sys-

tem or in the area affected by SIPS air-

bag deployment.

•Never try to open or repair any compo-

nents of the SIPS airbag system. This

should be done only by a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician.

•In order for the SIPS airbag to provide

its best protection, both front seat

occupants should sit in an upright

position with the seat belt properly fas-

tened.

•Failure to follow these instructions can

result in injury to the occupants of the

vehicle in the event of an accident.

02 Safety

}}

Related information

•Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

(p. 31)

•Front airbags (p. 33)

•Inflatable Curtain (IC) (p. 41)

Inflatable Curtain (IC)

The inflatable curtain is designed to help pro-

tect the heads of the occupants of the front

seats and the occupant of the outboard rear

seating positions in certain side impact colli-

sions.

This system consists of inflatable curtains

located along the sides of the roof liners,

stretching from the center of both front side

windows to the rear edge of the rear side

door windows.

In certain side impacts, both the Inflatable

Curtain (IC) and the Side Impact Airbag Sys-

tem (p. 39) (SIPS airbag) will deploy. The IC

and the SIPS airbag deploy simultaneously.

NOTE

If the inflatable curtain deploys, it remains

inflated for approximately 6 seconds.

WARNING

•The IC system is a supplement to the

Side Impact Protection System. It is

not designed to deploy during colli-

sions from the rear of the vehicle.

•Never try to open or repair any compo-

nents of the IC system. This should be

done only by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician.

•Never hang heavy items from the ceil-

ing handles. This could impede

deployment of the Inflatable Curtain.

•The cargo area and rear seat should

not be loaded to a level higher than

2 in. (5 cm) below the upper edge of

the rear side windows. Objects placed

higher than this level could impede the

function of the Inflatable Curtain.

02 Safety

WARNING

In order for the IC to provide its best pro-

tection, both front seat occupants and

both outboard rear seat occupants should

sit in an upright position with the seat belt

properly fastened; adults using the seat

belt and children using the proper child

restraint system. Only adults should sit in

the front seats. Children must never be

allowed in the front passenger seat, Child

safety (p. 46) for guidelines. Failure to

follow these instructions can result in injury

to the vehicle occupants in an accident.

Related information

•Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

(p. 31)

•Front airbags (p. 33)

•Child safety (p. 46)

Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS)

The WHIPS system consists of specially

designed hinges and brackets on the front

seat backrests designed to help absorb some

of the energy generated in a collision from the

rear (when the vehicle is rear-ended).

In the event of a rear-end collision, the hinges

and brackets of the front seat backrests are

designed to change position slightly to allow

the backrest/head restraint to help support

the occupant's head before moving slightly

02 Safety

}}

rearward. This movement helps absorb some

of the forces that could result in whiplash.

WARNING

•The WHIPS system is designed to

supplement the other safety systems

in your vehicle. For this system to

function properly, the three-point seat

belt must be worn. Please be aware

that no system can prevent all possible

injuries that may occur in an accident.

•The WHIPS system is designed to

function in certain collisions from the

rear, depending on the crash severity,

angle and speed.

WARNING

•Occupants in the front seats must

never sit out of position. The occu-

pant's back must be as upright as

comfort allows and be against the seat

back with the seat belt properly fas-

tened.

•If your vehicle has been involved in a

rear-end collision, the front seat back-

rests must be inspected by a trained

and qualified Volvo service technician,

even if the seats appear to be undam-

aged. Certain components in the

WHIPS system may need to be

replaced.

•Do not attempt to service any compo-

nent in the WHIPS system yourself.

WARNING

•Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behind

the front seats could impede the func-

tion of the WHIPS system.

•If the rear seat backrests are folded

down, cargo must be secured to pre-

vent it from sliding forward against the

front seat backrests in the event of a

collision from the rear. This could

interfere with the action of the WHIPS

system.

WARNING

Any contact between the front seat back-

rests and the folded rear seat or a rear-

facing child seat could impede the function

of the WHIPS system. If the rear seat is

folded down, the occupied front seats

must be adjusted forward so that they do

not touch the folded rear seat.

02 Safety

44 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Related information

•Seat belts – general (p. 28)

Crash mode – general information

After a collision, the functionality of some of

the vehicle's systems may be reduced as a

safety precaution.

Warning symbol: analog instrument panel

Warning symbol: digital instrument panel*

If the vehicle has been involved in a collision,

the text Safety mode See manual may

appear in the information display.

NOTE

This text can only be shown if the display

is undamaged and the vehicle's electrical

system is intact.

Crash mode is a feature that is triggered if

one or more of the safety systems (e.g.

front (p. 33) or side airbags (p. 39), an inflat-

able curtain (p. 41), or one or more of the seat

belt pretensioners) has deployed. The colli-

sion may have damaged an important func-

tion in the vehicle, such as the fuel lines, sen-

sors for one of the safety systems, the brake

system, etc.

02 Safety
02
45
WARNING
•Never attempt to repair the vehicle
yourself or to reset the electrical sys-
tem after the vehicle has displayed
Safety mode See manual. This could
result in injury or improper system
function.
•Restoring the vehicle to normal operat-
ing status should only be done by a
trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
•After Safety mode See manual has
been displayed, if you detect the odor
of fuel vapor, or see any signs of fuel
leakage, do not attempt to start the
vehicle. Leave the vehicle immediately.
Related information
•Crash mode – starting the vehicle
(p. 45)
•Crash mode – moving the vehicle
(p. 45)
Crash mode – starting the vehicle
If Crash mode has been set Crash
mode (p. 44)) and damage to the vehicle is
minor and there is no fuel leakage, you may
attempt to start the engine.
To do so:
1. Remove the remote key from the ignition
slot and open the driver's door. If a mes-
sage is displayed that the ignition is on,
press the start button.
2. Close the driver's door and reinsert the
remote key in the ignition slot.
3. Try to start the vehicle.
WARNING
If the message Safety mode See manual
is still displayed, the vehicle should not be
driven and must be towed. Concealed
faults may make the vehicle difficult to
control.
Related information
•Crash mode – general information (p. 44)
•Crash mode – moving the vehicle
(p. 45)
Crash mode – moving the vehicle
If the message Normal mode appears after
an attempt has been made to start the engine,
Starting the vehicle after a crash (p. 45), the
vehicle may be moved carefully from its pres-
ent position, if for example, it is blocking traf-
fic. It should, however, not be moved farther
than is absolutely necessary.
WARNING
Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable
after Crash mode has been set, it should
not be driven or towed (pulled by another
vehicle). There may be concealed damage
that could make it difficult or impossible to
control. The vehicle should be transported
on a flatbed tow truck to a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician for
inspection/repairs.
Related information
•Crash mode – general information (p. 44)

02 Safety

Child safety

Children should always be seated safely when

traveling in the vehicle.

General information

Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint

systems (p. 47) for all occupants including

children. Remember that, regardless of age

and size, a child should always be properly

restrained in a vehicle.

Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/

LATCH attachments (p. 55), which make it

more convenient to install child seats.

Some restraint systems for children are

designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap

belts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.

Such child restraint systems can help protect

children in vehicles in the event of an acci-

dent only if they are used properly. However,

children could be endangered in a crash if the

child restraints are not properly secured in the

vehicle. Failure to follow the installation

instructions for your child restraint can result

in your child striking the vehicle's interior in a

sudden stop.

Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable

substitute for a child restraint system. In an

accident, a child held in a person's arms can

be crushed between the vehicle's interior and

an unrestrained person. The child could also

be injured by striking the interior, or by being

ejected from the vehicle during a sudden

maneuver or impact. The same can also hap-

pen if the infant or child rides unrestrained on

the seat. Other occupants should also be

properly restrained to help reduce the chance

of injuring or increasing the injury of a child.

All states and provinces have legislation gov-

erning how and where children should be car-

ried in a vehicle. Find out the regulations

existing in your state or province. Recent

accident statistics have shown that children

are safer in rear seating positions than front

seating positions when properly restrained. A

child restraint system can help protect a child

in a vehicle. Here's what to look for when

selecting a child restraint system:

It should have a label certifying that it meets

applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards (FMVSS 213) – or in Canada,

CMVSS 213.

Make sure the child restraint system is

approved for the child's height, weight and

development – the label required by the

standard or regulation, or instructions for

infant restraints, typically provide this infor-

mation.

In using any child restraint system, we urge

you to carefully look over the instructions that

are provided with the restraint. Be sure you

understand them and can use the device

properly and safely in this vehicle. A misused

child restraint system can result in increased

injuries for both the infant or child and other

occupants in the vehicle.

When a child has outgrown the child safety

seat, you should use the rear seat with the

standard seat belt fastened. The best way to

help protect the child here is to place the

child on a cushion so that the seat belt is

properly located on the hips (see Booster

cushions (p. 54) for illustration). Legislation

in your state or province may mandate the

use of a child seat or cushion in combination

with the seat belt, depending on the child's

age and/or size. Please check local regula-

tions.

A specially designed and tested booster

cushion and backrest can be obtained from

your Volvo retailer.

USA: for children weighing 33 – 80 lbs. (15 –

36 kg) and 38 – 54 inches (97 – 137 cm) in

height

Canada: for children weighing 40 – 80 lbs.

(18 – 36 kg) and 40 – 54 inches (102 –

137 cm) in height

02 Safety
02
}}
47
WARNING
•Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the
front passenger's seat. We also rec-
ommend that children under 4 feet
7 inches (140 cm) in height who have
outgrown these devices sit in the rear
seat with the seat belt fastened.
•On hot days, the temperature in the
vehicle interior can rise very quickly.
Exposure to these high temperatures
for even a short period of time can
cause heat-related injury or death.
Small children are particularly at risk.
Child seat should always be registered. See
Child restraints (p. 47) for more information.
Volvo's recommendations
Why does Volvo believe that no child should
sit in the front seat of a car? It's quite simple
really. A front airbag (p. 33) is a very powerful
device designed, by law, to help protect an
adult.
Because of the size of the airbag and its
speed of inflation, a child should never be
placed in the front seat, even if he or she is
properly belted or strapped into a child safety
seat. Volvo has been an innovator in safety
for over seventy-five years, and we'll continue
to do our part. But we need your help. Please
remember to put your children in the back
seat, and buckle them up.
Volvo has some very specific
recommendations:
•Always wear your seat belt (p. 28).
•Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety
device which, when used with a three-
point seat belt can help reduce serious
injuries during certain types of accidents.
Volvo recommends that you do not dis-
connect the airbag system in your vehi-
cle.
•Volvo strongly recommends that every-
one in the vehicle be properly restrained.
•Volvo recommends that ALL occupants
(adults and children) shorter than 4 feet
7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back
seat of any vehicle with a front passenger
side airbag.
•Drive safely!
Related information
•Infant seats (p. 49)
•Convertible seats (p. 51)
•Booster cushions (p. 54)
•Integrated booster cushion – general
information (p. 57)
•Child safety locks (p. 61)
•Top tether anchors (p. 56)
Child restraints
Suitable child restraints should always be
used when children travel in the vehicle.
Child restraint systems
G022840
Infant seat
There are three main types of child restraint
systems: infant seats (p. 49), convertible
seats (p. 51), and booster cush-
ions (p. 54). They are classified according to
the child's age and size.
The following section provides general infor-
mation on securing a child restraint using a
three-point seat belt (p. 28). Refer to ISOFIX/
LATCH lower anchors (p. 55) and Top tether
anchors (p. 56) for information on securing
a child restraint using ISOFIX/LATCH lower
anchors and/or top tether anchorages.

02 Safety

G022847

Convertible seat

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in the

front passenger seat of any vehicle with a

front passenger airbag – not even if the

"Passenger airbag off" symbol near the

rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles

equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If

the severity of an accident were to cause

the airbag to inflate, this could lead to seri-

ous injury or death to a child seated in this

position.

G023269

Booster cushion

WARNING

Always refer to the child restraint manufac-

turer's instructions for detailed information

on securing the restraint.

WARNING

•When not in use, keep the child

restraint system secured or remove it

from the passenger compartment to

help prevent it from injuring passen-

gers in the event of a sudden stop or

collision.

•A small child's head represents a con-

siderable part of its total weight and its

neck is still very weak. Volvo recom-

mends that children up to age 4 travel,

properly restrained, facing rearward. In

addition, Volvo recommends that chil-

dren should ride rearward facing,

properly restrained, as long as possi-

ble.

Automatic Locking Retractor/

Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/

ELR)

To make child seat installation easier, each

seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equip-

ped with a locking mechanism to help keep

the seat belt taut.

02 Safety

}}

When attaching the seat belt to a child

seat:

1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat

according to the child seat manufactur-

er's instructions.

2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible.

3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the

buckle (lock) in the usual way.

4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut

around the child seat.

A sound from the seat belt retractor will be

audible at this time and is normal. The belt

will now be locked in place. This function is

automatically disabled when the seat belt is

unlocked and the belt is fully retracted.

WARNING

Do not use child safety seats or child

booster cushions/backrests in the front

passenger's seat. We also recommend

that children who have outgrown these

devices sit in the rear seat with the seat

belt properly fastened.

Child restraint registration and recalls

Child restraints could be recalled for safety

reasons. You must register your child

restraint to be reached in a recall. To stay

informed about child safety seat recalls, be

sure to fill out and return the registration card

that comes with new child restraints.

Child restraint recall information is readily

available in both the U.S. and Canada. For

recall information in the U.S., call the U.S.

Government's Auto Safety Hotline at

1-800-424-9393 or go to http://www-

odi.nhtsa.dot.gov/cars/problems/recalls/

Transport Canada's Child Safety website at

http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/childsafety/

menu.htm.

Related information

•Child safety locks (p. 61)

•Integrated booster cushion – general

information (p. 57)

Infant seats

Suitable child restraints should always be

used when children (depending on their age/

size) are seated in the vehicle.

Securing an infant seat with a seat belt

G022844

Do not place the infant seat in the front passeng-

er's seat

NOTE

Refer to (p. 55) and (p. 56) for infor-

mation on securing a child restraint using

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and/or top

tether anchorages.

1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of

the vehicle.

2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat

according to the manufacturer's instruc-

tions.

02 Safety

G023270

Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat

WARNING

•An infant seat must be in the rear-facing

position only.

•The infant seat should not be positioned

behind the driver's seat unless there is

adequate space for safe installation.

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in the

front passenger seat of any vehicle with a

front passenger airbag – not even if the

"Passenger airbag off" symbol near the

rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles

equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If

the severity of an accident were to cause

the airbag to inflate, this could lead to seri-

ous injury or death to a child seated in this

position.

3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch

plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct

click is audible.

G023271

Fasten the seat belt

G022846

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt

4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt

out as far as possible to activate the

belt's automatic locking function.

02 Safety

}}

NOTE

The locking retractor will automatically

release when the seat belt is unbuckled

and allowed to retract fully.

5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let

the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A

sound from the seat belt retractor's auto-

matic locking function will be audible at

this time and is normal. The seat belt

should now be locked in place.

G022850

Ensure that the seat is securely in place

6. Push and pull the infant seat along the

seat belt path to ensure that it is held

securely in place by the seat belt.

WARNING

It should not be possible to move the child

restraint (child seat) more than 1 in.

(2.5 cm) in any direction along the seat belt

path.

The infant seat can be removed by unbuck-

ling the seat belt and letting it retract com-

pletely.

Related information

•Child safety (p. 46)

•Child restraints (p. 47)

•Convertible seats (p. 51)

•Integrated booster cushion – general

information (p. 57)

•ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 55)

•Top tether anchors (p. 56)

Convertible seats

Suitable child restraints should always be

used when children (depending on their age/

size) are seated in the vehicle.

Securing a convertible seat with a seat

belt

G018630

Do not place the convertible seat in the front

passenger's seat

NOTE

Refer to (p. 55) and (p. 56) for informa-

tion on securing a child restraint using

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and/or top

tether anchorages.

Convertible seats can be used in either a for-

ward or rearward-facing position, depending

on the age and size of the child.

02 Safety

G022847

Route the seat belt through the convertible seat

WARNING

Always use a convertible seat that is suita-

ble for the child's age and size. See the

convertible seat manufacturer's recom-

mendations.

1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat

of the vehicle.

WARNING

•A small child's head represents a con-

siderable part of its total weight and its

neck is still very weak. Volvo recom-

mends that children up to age 4 travel,

properly restrained, facing rearward. In

addition, Volvo recommends that chil-

dren should ride rearward facing, prop-

erly restrained, as long as possible.

•Convertible child seats should be instal-

led in the rear seat only.

•A rear-facing convertible seat should

not be positioned behind the driver's

seat unless there is adequate space for

safe installation.

2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible

seat according to the manufacturer's

instructions.

G022848

Fasten the seat belt

3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch

plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct

click is audible.

4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt

out as far as possible to activate the

belt's automatic locking function.

02 Safety

NOTE

The locking retractor will automatically

release when the seat belt is unbuckled

and allowed to retract fully.

5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place,

let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A

sound from the seat belt retractor's auto-

matic locking function will be audible at

this time and is normal. The seat belt

should now be locked in place.

G022849

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt

6. Push and pull the convertible seat along

the seat belt path to ensure that it is held

securely in place by the seat belt.

WARNING

It should not be possible to move the child

restraint (child seat) more than 1 in.

(2.5 cm) in any direction along the seat belt

path.

The convertible seat can be removed by

unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract

completely.

G022850

Ensure that the seat is securely in place

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in the

front passenger seat of any vehicle with a

front passenger airbag – not even if the

"Passenger airbag off" symbol near the

rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the

severity of an accident were to cause the

airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious

injury or death to a child seated in this

position.

Related information

•Child safety (p. 46)

•Child restraints (p. 47)

•Infant seats (p. 49)

•Integrated booster cushion – general

information (p. 57)

•ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 55)

•Top tether anchors (p. 56)

02 Safety

Booster cushions

Booster cushions should be properly posi-

tioned in the vehicle.

Securing a booster cushion

G022851

Position the child correctly on the booster cush-

ion

Booster cushions are recommended for chil-

dren who have outgrown convertible

seats (p. 51).

1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat

of the vehicle.

2. With the child properly seated on the

booster cushion, attach the seat belt to or

around the cushion according to the

manufacturer's instructions.

3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch

plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct

click is audible.

G022852

Positioning the seat belt

4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut

and fits snugly around the child.

WARNING

•The hip section of the three-point seat

belt must fit snugly across the child's

hips, not across the stomach.

•The shoulder section of the three-point

seat belt should be positioned across

the chest and shoulder.

•The shoulder belt must never be

placed behind the child's back or

under the arm.

Related information

•Child safety (p. 46)

•Child restraints (p. 47)

•Infant seats (p. 49)

•Convertible seats (p. 51)

•ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 55)

•Top tether anchors (p. 56)

02 Safety

}}

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors

Lower anchors for ISOFIX/LATCH-equipped

child seats are located in the rear, outboard

seats, hidden below the backrest cushions.

Using the ISOFIX/LATCH lower child

seat anchors

Symbols on the seat back upholstery mark

the ISOFIX/LATCH anchor positions as

shown. To access the anchors, kneel on the

seat cushion and locate the anchors by feel.

Always follow your child seat manufacturer's

installation instructions, and use both ISOFIX/

LATCH lower anchors and top teth-

ers (p. 56) whenever possible.

To access the anchors

1. Put the child restraint in position.

2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down

the seat cushion and locate the anchors

by feel.

3. Fasten the attachment on the child

restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX/

LATCH/LATCH lower anchors.

4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps

according to the manufacturer's instruc-

tions.

WARNING

Volvo's ISOFIX/LATCH anchors conform to

FMVSS/CMVSS standards. Always refer to

the child restraint system's manual for

weight and size ratings.

NOTE

•The rear seat's center position is not

equipped with ISOFIX/LATCH lower

anchors. When installing a child

restraint in this position, attach the

restraint's top tether strap (if it is so

equipped) to the top tether anchorage

point and secure the restraint with the

vehicle's center seat belt.

•Always follow your child seat manufac-

turer's installation instructions, and

use both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors

and top tethers whenever possible.

G018631

Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX/

LATCH lower anchors

WARNING

•Be sure to fasten the attachment cor-

rectly to the anchor (see the illustra-

tion). If the attachment is not correctly

fastened, the child restraint may not

be properly secured in the event of a

collision.

•The ISOFIX/LATCH lower child

restraint anchors are only intended for

use with child seats positioned in the

outboard seating positions. These

anchors are not certified for use with

any child restraint that is positioned in

the center seating position. When

securing a child restraint in the center

seating position, use only the vehicle's

center seat belt.

02 Safety

Related information

•Child safety (p. 46)

•Infant seats (p. 49)

•Convertible seats (p. 51)

•Integrated booster cushion – general

information (p. 57)

Top tether anchors

Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint top

tether anchorages in the rear seat. They are

located on the rear side of the backrests.

Child restraint anchorages

Securing a child seat

1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat.

2. Route the top tether strap under the head

restraint and attach it to the anchor.

3. Attach lower tether straps to the lower

ISOFIX/LATCH anchors. If the child

restraint is not equipped with lower tether

straps, or the restraint is used in the cen-

ter seating position, follow instructions for

securing a child restraint using the Auto-

matic Locking Retractor seat belt (see

Child restraints (p. 47)).

4. Firmly tension all straps.

Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's

instructions for information on securing the

child seat.

NOTE

On models equipped with the optional

cargo area cover, this cover should be

removed before a child seat is attached to

the child restraint anchors.

WARNING

•Always refer to the recommendations

made by the child restraint manufac-

turer.

•Volvo recommends that the top tether

anchors be used when installing a for-

ward-facing child restraint.

•Never route a top tether strap over the

top of the head restraint. The strap

should be routed beneath the head

restraint.

•Child restraint anchorages are

designed to withstand only those

loads imposed by correctly fitted child

restraints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used for adult seat belts or

harnesses. The anchorages are not

able to withstand excessive forces on

them in the event of collision if full har-

ness seat belts or adult seat belts are

installed to them. An adult who uses a

belt anchored in a child restraint

anchorage runs a great risk of suffer-

02 Safety
02
}}
57
ing severe injuries should a collision
occur.
•Do not install rear speakers that
require the removal of the top tether
anchors or interfere with the proper
use of the top tether strap.
Related information
•Child safety (p. 46)
•Infant seats (p. 49)
•Convertible seats (p. 51)
•Integrated booster cushion – general
information (p. 57)
•ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 55)
Integrated booster cushion – general
information
The booster cushions are designed to raise
the child higher so that the shoulder strap
crosses over the child's collarbone, not over
the neck.
Integrated two-stage booster cushion2
Volvo's optional integrated booster cushions
are located in the outboard seating positions.
These booster cushions have been specially
designed to help safeguard children in the
rear seat. They should be stowed (p. 60)
(folded down into the seat cushion) when not
in use. When using an integrated booster
cushion (p. 59), the child must be secured
with the vehicle's three-point seat belt.
Use these booster cushions only
with children whose weight is
between:
•Stage 1: 48 – 80 lbs (22 – 36 kg)
•Stage 2: 33 – 55 lbs (15 – 25 kg)
and whose height is between:
•Stage 1: 45 – 55 in. (115 –
 140 cm)
•Stage 2: 37 – 47 in. (95 – 120 cm)
In Canada, Transport Canada's
weight recommendation is 40 –
 80 lbs (18 – 36 kg).
If using a booster cushion does not result in
proper positioning of the shoulder strap, then
the child should be placed in a properly
secured child restraint (see (p. 47) ). The
shoulder belt must never be placed behind
the child's back or under the arm.
Correct seating position: child's head is below
the head restraint and the shoulder belt is across
the collarbone
2Canada only: This cushion may be referred to as a built-in booster cushion.

02 Safety

Incorrect seating position: the child's head is

above the head restraint and the shoulder belt is

not across the collarbone

Before driving, check that:

•The integrated two-stage booster cushion

is set in the correct position according to

the child's height and weight (see the

table below) and is locked in position.

Stage 1 Stage 2

Weight 48 – 80 lbs

22 – 36 kg

33 – 55 lbs

15 – 25 kg

Height 45 – 55 in.

115 – 140 cm

37 – 47 in.

95 – 120 cm

•That the seat belt (p. 28) is properly posi-

tioned and is taut.

•The shoulder section of the seat belt is

across the child's collarbone, not over the

neck.

•The lap section of the seat belt is across

the child's hips and not the abdomen.

WARNING

DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can

occur

Follow all instructions on the

booster cushion and in the vehi-

cle's owner's manual.

MAKE SURE THE BOOSTER

CUSHION IS SECURELY

LOCKED BEFORE THE CHILD IS

SEATED.

•In the event of a collision while the

integrated booster cushion was occu-

pied, the entire booster cushion and

seat belt must be replaced. The

booster cushion should also be

replaced if it is badly worn or damaged

in any way. This work should be per-

formed by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician only.

Related information

•Child safety (p. 46)

•Infant seats (p. 49)

•Convertible seats (p. 51)

•Booster cushions (p. 54)

02 Safety

Integrated booster cushion – using

The Integrated booster cushion (p. 57) in the

rear seat can be folded up in two stages,

depending on the child's height and weight.

Stage 1

Pull the handle (1) forward and upward (2)

to release the booster cushion.

Press the booster cushion rearward to

lock it in position.

Stage 2

With the booster cushion in the stage 1

position, press the button (see the arrow

in illustration 1).

Lift the front edge of the booster cushion

and press it rearward toward the backrest

to lock it in position.

WARNING

DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can

occur

Follow all instructions on the

booster cushion and in the vehi-

cle's owner's manual.

MAKE SURE THE BOOSTER

CUSHION IS SECURELY

LOCKED BEFORE THE CHILD IS

SEATED.

•In the event of a collision while the

integrated booster cushion was occu-

pied, the entire booster cushion and

seat belt must be replaced. The

booster cushion should also be

replaced if it is badly worn or damaged

in any way. This work should be per-

formed by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician only.

Related information

•Integrated booster cushion – stowing

(p. 60)

02 Safety

Integrated booster cushion – stowing

The integrated booster cushion (p. 57) can be

folded down completely (stowed) from either

the stage 1 or stage 2 positions.

NOTE

The booster cushion cannot be moved

from the stage 2 (upper) position to the

stage 1 (lower) position. It must first be

folded down completely to the stowed

position, and then adjusted to stage 1.

Pull the handle forward to release the

booster cushion.

Press down on the center of the booster

cushion to return it to the stowed posi-

tion.

NOTE

The booster cushion must be in the

stowed position before the rear seat back-

rests are folded down.

CAUTION

Be sure there are no loose objects under

the booster cushion before it is stowed.

WARNING

DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can

occur

Follow all instructions on the

booster cushion and in the vehi-

cle's owner's manual.

MAKE SURE THE BOOSTER

CUSHION IS SECURELY

LOCKED BEFORE THE CHILD IS

SEATED.

•In the event of a collision while the

integrated booster cushion was occu-

pied, the entire booster cushion and

seat belt must be replaced. The

booster cushion should also be

replaced if it is badly worn or damaged

in any way. This work should be per-

formed by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician only.

Related information

•Integrated booster cushion – using (p. 59)

02 Safety

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 61

Child safety locks

Power child safety locks* help prevent chil-

dren from inadvertently opening one of the

rear doors or windows from inside the vehicle.

Manual child safety locks

Child safety locks – rear doors

The controls are located on the rear door

jambs. Use the remote control's key blade or

a screwdriver to adjust these controls.

The rear doors can only be opened from

the outside when the slot is in the hori-

zontal position.

The rear doors can be opened from the

inside when the slot is in the vertical posi-

tion.

Power child safety locks and

disengaging rear door windows*

Driver's door control panel

The power child safety locks can be acti-

vated/deactivated when the remote key is in

mode I (p. 77) or higher. Activation/deacti-

vation can be done up to 2 minutes after the

engine has been switched off (if no door has

been opened).

To activate the child safety locks:

1. Put the ignition in mode I or higher, or

start the engine.

2. Press the button on the driver's door con-

trol panel (see the illustration).

>Rear child locks Activated will be

displayed in the instrument panel and

the indicator light in the button will illu-

minate when the function is activated.

When the child safety locks are activated:

•The rear door windows can only be

opened from the driver's door control

panel

•The rear doors cannot be opened from

the inside

The child safety locks' current setting is

stored when the engine is switched off. If

these locks were activated when the engine

was switched off, they will also be active

when the engine is restarted.

Related information

•Detachable key blade – general informa-

tion (p. 151)

•Locking/unlocking – from inside (p. 160)

I N S T R U M E N T S A N D C O N T R O L S

03 Instruments and controls

}}

Instrument overview

This overview shows the location of the

instrument panel and center console displays,

and controls/buttons/switches.

03 Instruments and controls

03 Instruments and controls
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 65
Function See
Controls for menus
and messages, turn
signals, high/low
beams, trip computer
(p. 74),
(p. 93),
(p. 87),
(p. 113)
Paddles for manually
shifting gears*
(p. 259)
Cruise control (p. 176)
Horn, airbag (p. 85),
(p. 33)
Main instrument
panel
(p. 66)
Infotainment system/
Bluetooth hands-free
controls
Sensus Info-
tainment
supplement
START/STOP
ENGINE button
(p. 76)
Ignition slot (p. 76)
Display for infotain-
ment system func-
tions and menus
(p. 111),
Sensus Info-
tainment
supplement
Door handle -
Function See
In-door control pan-
els (power windows,
mirrors, central lock-
ing button)
(p. 99),
(p. 100),
(p. 160)
Hazard warning
flashers
(p. 93)
Controls for the info-
tainment system and
menus
(p. 74),
(p. 126),
Sensus Info-
tainment
supplement
Climate system con-
trols
(p. 126)
Gear selector (p. 257)
Controls for active
chassis (Four-C)*
(p. 169)
Wipers and washers (p. 96),
(p. 97)
Steering wheel
adjustment
(p. 85)
Hood opening control (p. 331)
Parking brake (p. 274)
Function See
Power seat* adjust-
ment controls
(p. 79)
Lighting panel, but-
tons for opening fuel
filler door and
unlocking the tailgate
(p. 87),
(p. 283),
(p. 162)
Related information
•Information displays – ambient tempera-
ture sensor (p. 75)
•Information displays – trip odometer and
clock (p. 76)

03 Instruments and controls

66 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Information displays – introduction

The displays show information on some of the

vehicle's functions, such as cruise control, the

trip computer and messages. The information

is shown with text and symbols.

Information displays: analog instrument panel

Information displays: digital instrument panel*

More detailed information can be found in the

descriptions of the functions that use the

information displays.

Gauges and indicators: analog

instrument panel

Fuel gauge: When the indicator shows

one white marking1, a yellow indicator

light will illuminate to indicate a low fuel

level. See also Trip computer – introduc-

tion (p. 113) and Refueling – fuel require-

ments (p. 281) for additional information.

Eco meter: Indicates how economically

the vehicle is being driven. The higher the

needle moves on the scale, the more

economically the vehicle is being driven.

Speedometer

Tachometer: Shows engine speed in

thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm)

Gear indicator: Shows the currently

selected gear

Gauges and indicators: digital

instrument panel*

Different themes (display alternatives) can be

selected for the digital instrument panel:

•Elegance

•Eco

•Performance

To change themes, press the OK button on

the left steering wheel lever and use the

thumb wheel to scroll to Themes. Press OK

to confirm your choice.

1When the message Distance to empty fuel tank: shows "----", the marker turns red

03 Instruments and controls
03
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 67
Theme Elegance: gauges and indicators
Fuel gauge. When the indicator shows
one white marking, a yellow indicator light
will illuminate to indicate a low fuel level.
See also Trip computer – introduction
(p. 113) and Refueling – fuel require-
ments (p. 281) for additional information.
Coolant temperature gauge
Speedometer
Tachometer (engine speed in thousands
of revolutions per minute (rpm))
Gear indicator: Shows the currently
selected gear
Theme Eco: gauges and indicators
Fuel gauge. When the indicator shows a
white marking, a yellow indicator light will
illuminate to indicate a low fuel level. See
also Trip computer – introduction (p. 113)
and Refueling – fuel requirements
(p. 281) for additional information.
Eco Guide (see Eco Guide* and Power
Meter* (p. 69))
Speedometer
Tachometer (engine speed in thousands
of revolutions per minute (rpm))
Gear indicator: Shows the currently
selected gear
Theme Performance: gauges and indicators
Fuel gauge. When the indicator shows a
white marking, a yellow indicator light will
illuminate to indicate a low fuel level. See
also Trip computer – introduction (p. 113)
and Refueling – fuel requirements
(p. 281) for additional information.
Coolant temperature gauge
Speedometer
Tachometer (shows engine speed in
thousands of revolutions per minute
(rpm))
Power Meter (see Eco Guide* and Power
Meter* (p. 69)).
Gear indicator: Shows the currently
selected gear

03 Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning symbols

Indicator and warning symbols: analog instru-

ment panel

Indicator symbols

Indicator and warning symbols

Warning symbols

Indicator and warning symbols: digital instrument

panel

Indicator symbols

Indicator and warning symbols

Warning symbols

Function check

All indicator and warning symbols light up in

ignition mode II or when the engine is started.

When the engine has started, all the symbols

should go out except the parking brake sym-

bol, which only goes out when the brake is

disengaged.

If the engine does not start or if the function

check is carried out in ignition mode II, all

symbols go out after 5 seconds except the

malfunction indicator light, which may indi-

cate a fault in the vehicle's emissions system,

and the symbol for low oil pressure.

Some of the symbols shown may not be

available in all markets or models.

Related information

•Instrument overview (p. 63)

•Information displays – indicator symbols

(p. 70)

•Information displays – warning symbols

(p. 72)

03 Instruments and controls

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 69

Eco Guide* and Power Meter*

Eco guide and Power guide are two gauges in

the instrument panel that help improve driving

economy.

The vehicle also stores driving-related statis-

tics in the form of a bar graph, see Trip com-

puter – Trip statistics (p. 120).

Introduction

To display or remove these functions from the

instrument panel, select the "Eco" theme (see

Information displays – introduction (p. 66)).

Driving statistics are also stored and can be

displayed in the form of a bar chart (see Trip

computer – Trip statistics (p. 120)).

Eco Guide

This gauge gives an indication of how eco-

nomically the vehicle is being driven.

Current (instantaneous) reading

Average

Current (instantaneous) reading

This is the current level of economical driving;

the higher the reading, the more economically

the vehicle is being driven.

This value is calculated based on the vehi-

cle's speed, engine speed (rpm), engine load

and brake use.

The optimal speed range is between approxi-

mately 30–50 mph (50–80 km/h), preferably at

as low rpm as possible. The markers fall

when the brake or accelerator pedal is

pressed.

If the current reading is very low, the red field

in the gauge will illuminate after a slight delay,

indicating low driving economy.

Average

The average reading changes gradually

according to changes in the current reading

to indicate how economically the vehicle has

been driven recently. The higher the average

reading, the more economically the vehicle

has been driven.

Power Meter

This gauge indicates the engine power that

has been utilized and the amount of power

remaining.

Available power

Utilized power

03 Instruments and controls

70 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Available power

The smaller, upper indicator shows the

engine's available power2. The higher the

reading on the scale, the greater the amount

of power remaining in the current gear.

Utilized power

The larger, lower indicator shows the amount

of engine power that has been utilized2. The

higher the reading on the scale, the greater

the amount of power that is being utilized.

The larger the gap between the two indica-

tors, the greater the amount of power remain-

ing.

Information displays – indicator

symbols

The indicator symbols alert the driver when

certain functions are activated, that a system

is actively working or that a fault may have

occurred in a system or function.

Symbol Description

Fault in the Active Bending

Light (ABL)*system

Malfunction indicator light

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

Rear fog lights on

Stability system

The stability system's Sport

mode is activated

Low fuel level

Information symbol, read the

text displayed in the instrument

panel

High beam indicator

Symbol Description

Left turn signal indicator

Right turn signal indicator

Tire pressure monitoring sensor

(TPMS)A

The Eco function is on.

TheStart/Stop function is active

(the engine has auto-stopped)

AOption in Canada

Fault in the Active Bending Light (ABL)

system

This symbol will illuminate if there is a fault in

the ABL system. See Active Bending Lights

(ABL)* (p. 90) for more information about

this system.

2Depending on rpm

03 Instruments and controls
03
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 71
Malfunction Indicator Light
As you drive, a computer called On-Board
Diagnostics II (OBDII) monitors your vehicle's
engine, transmission, electrical and emission
systems.
The malfunction indicator light will illuminate if
the computer senses a condition that poten-
tially may need correcting. When this hap-
pens, please have your vehicle checked by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician
as soon as possible.
A malfunction indicator light may have many
causes. Sometimes, you may not notice a
change in your car's behavior. Even so, an
uncorrected condition could hurt fuel econ-
omy, emission controls, and drivability.
Extended driving without correcting the cause
could even damage other components in
your vehicle.
This light may illuminate if the fuel filler cap is
not closed tightly or if the engine was running
while the vehicle was refueled.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
If the warning light comes on, there may be a
malfunction in the ABS system (the standard
braking system will still function). Check the
system by:
1. Stopping in a safe place and switching off
the ignition.
2. Restart the engine.
3. If the warning light goes off, no further
action is required.
If the indicator light remains on, the vehicle
should be driven to a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician for inspection, see
Brakes – general (p. 271) for additional infor-
mation.
Rear fog lights
This symbol indicates that the rear fog lights
are on.
Stability system
This indicator symbol flashes when the stabil-
ity system is actively working to stabilize the
vehicle, see Stability system – introduction
(p. 169) for more detailed information.
Stability system - Sport mode
This symbol illuminates to indicate that the
stability system's Sport mode has been acti-
vated to help provide maximum tractive force,
for example when driving with snow chains,
or driving in deep snow or loose sand.
Low fuel level
When this light comes on, the vehicle should
be refueled as soon as possible. See Refuel-
ing – fuel requirements (p. 281) for informa-
tion about fuel and refueling.
Information symbol
The information symbol lights up and a text
message is displayed to provide the driver
with necessary information about one of the
vehicle's systems. The message can be
erased and the symbol can be turned off by
pressing the OK button (see Information dis-
play – menu controls (p. 111) for information)
or this will take place automatically after a
short time (the length of time varies, depend-
ing on the function affected).
The information symbol may also illuminate
together with other symbols.
High beam indicator
This symbol illuminates when the high beam
headlights are on, or if the high beam flash
function is used.
Left turn signal indicator
Right turn signal indicator
NOTE
•Both turn signal indicators will flash
when the hazard warning flashers are
used.
•If either of these indicators flash faster
than normal, the direction indicators
are not functioning properly.
Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS)*
This symbol illuminates to indicate that tire
pressure in one or more tires is low, see Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – general
information (p. 311) for detailed information.
Eco* function on
The symbol will illuminate when the Eco func-
tion is activated.

||
03 Instruments and controls
03
72 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Start/stop*
The symbol illuminates when the engine has
auto-stopped.
Related information
•Information displays – introduction (p. 66)
•Information displays – warning symbols
(p. 72)
Information displays – warning
symbols
The warning lights alert the driver that an
important function is activated or that a seri-
ous fault has occurred.
Symbol Description
Low oil pressureA
Parking brake appliedB
SRS airbags
Seat belt reminder
Generator not charging
Fault in the brake system
Warning symbol, read the text
displayed in the instrument
panel
ACertain engines do not use this symbol to indicate low oil
pressure. On these models, a text message will be dis-
played on the instrument panel instead, see Engine com-
partment – engine oil (p. 333).
BThe symbol is Park only on models with the optional digital
instrument panel.
Low oil pressure
If the light comes on while driving, stop the
vehicle, stop the engine immediately, and
check the engine oil level. Add oil if neces-
sary. If the oil level is normal and the light
stays on after restart, have the vehicle towed
to the nearest trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.
Parking brake applied
This symbol flashes while the brake is being
applied and then glows steadily when the
parking brake has been set.
See Parking brake – general information
(p. 274) for more information about using the
parking brake.
Airbags – SRS
If this light comes on while the vehicle is
being driven, or remains on for longer than
approximately 10 seconds after the vehicle
has been started, the SRS system's diagnos-
tic functions have detected a fault in a seat
belt lock or pretensioner, a front airbag, side
impact airbag, and/or an inflatable curtain.
Have the system(s) inspected by a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician as
soon as possible.
See Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
(p. 31) for more information about the airbag
system.
Seat belt reminder
This symbol comes on for approximately
6 seconds if the driver has not fastened his or
her seat belt.

03 Instruments and controls

}}

Generator not charging

This symbol comes on during driving if a fault

has occurred in the electrical system. Contact

an authorized Volvo workshop.

Engine temperature

Engine overheating can result from low oil or

coolant levels, towing or hard driving at high

heat and altitude, or mechanical malfunction.

Engine overheating will be signaled with text

and a red warning triangle in the middle of the

instrument display. The exact text will depend

on the degree of overheating. It may range

from High engine temp Reduce speed to

High engine temp Stop engine. If appropri-

ate, other messages, such as Coolant level

low, Stop safely will also be displayed. If

your engine does overheat so that you must

stop the engine, always allow the engine to

cool before attempting to check oil and cool-

ant levels.

See Engine compartment – coolant (p. 335)

for more information.

Fault in brake system

If this symbol lights, the brake fluid level may

be too low. Stop the vehicle in a safe place

and check the level in the brake fluid reser-

voir, see Engine compartment – brake fluid

(p. 336). If the level in the reservoir is below

MIN, the vehicle should be transported to an

authorized Volvo workshop to have the brake

system checked.

If the and symbols come on

at the same time, there may be a fault in the

brake force distribution system.

1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn

off the engine.

2. Restart the engine.

•If both symbols extinguish, continue driv-

ing.

•If the symbols remain on, check the level

in the brake fluid reservoir, see Engine

compartment – brake fluid (p. 336). If the

brake fluid level is normal but the sym-

bols are still lit, the vehicle can be driven,

with great care, to an authorized Volvo

workshop to have the brake system

checked.

•If the level in the reservoir is below MIN,

the vehicle should be transported to an

authorized Volvo workshop to have the

brake system checked.

WARNING

•If the fluid level is below the MIN mark

in the reservoir or if a warning mes-

sage is displayed in the text window:

DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle

towed to a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician and have the brake

system inspected.

•If the and symbols

are on at the same time, there is a risk

of reduced vehicle stability.

Warning symbol

The red warning symbol lights up to indicate

a problem related to safety and/or drivability.

A message will also appear in the instrument

panel. The symbol remains visible until the

fault has been rectified but the text message

can be cleared with the OK button, see Infor-

mation display – menu controls (p. 111). The

warning symbol can also come on in conjunc-

tion with other symbols.

Action:

1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the

vehicle further.

2. Read the information on the display.

Implement the action in accordance with

the message in the display. Clear the

message using OK.

03 Instruments and controls

Reminder – doors not closed

If one of the doors is not closed properly, the

information or warning symbol illuminates

(depending on the vehicle's speed), a graphic

will be displayed in instrument panel and an

explanatory text message3 will also be dis-

played in the instrument panel. Stop the vehi-

cle in a safe place as soon as possible and

close the door.

If the vehicle is driven at a speed

lower than approximately 5 mph

(7 km/h), the information symbol illu-

minates.

If the vehicle is driven at a speed

higher than approximately 5 mph

(7 km/h), the warning symbol illumi-

nates.

If the hood is not closed properly, the warn-

ing symbol illuminates, a graphic will be dis-

played in instrument panel and an explana-

tory text message3 will also be displayed in

the instrument panel. Stop the vehicle in a

safe place as soon as possible and close the

hood.

If the tailgate is not closed properly, the

information symbol illuminates and a graphic

will be displayed in instrument panel. Stop

the vehicle in a safe place as soon as possi-

ble and close the tailgate.

Related information

•Information displays – introduction (p. 66)

•Information displays – indicator symbols

(p. 70)

My Car – introduction

The MY CAR menu system provides access

to menus for operating many of the vehicle's

functions, such as setting the clock, door mir-

rors, lock and alarm settings, etc.

Some of the features or functions are stand-

ard; others are optional and vary according to

model/market.

Operation

Use the buttons on the center console or the

steering wheel keypad to navigate in the

menus.

3Text message applies only to models with the optional digital instrument panel

03 Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 75

The center console control panel and the steer-

ing wheel keypad. The illustration is generic and

the appearance/location of the buttons may vary.

MY CAR: opens the MY CAR menu sys-

tem.

OK/MENU: Press the button on the cen-

ter console or the thumb wheel on the

steering wheel keypad to select a menu

alternative or to store a selected function

in the system's memory.

TUNE: Turn this control on the center

console or the thumb wheel on the steer-

ing wheel keypad to navigate up/down in

a menu.

EXIT

EXIT functions

Depending on which function the cursor is

pointing to and the menu level, briefly press-

ing EXIT will result in:

•An in-coming phone call will be rejected

•The current function will be cancelled

•Characters entered will be erased

•The most recent selection will be cancel-

led

•Go back/up in the menu system

Pressing and holding EXIT takes you to the

normal view for MY CAR. If you are already in

normal view, this will take you to the main

source menu.

Menu selections and paths

Please consult your Sensus Infotainment sup-

plement for a description of the MY CAR

menu selections and paths.

Information displays – ambient

temperature sensor

Location of the ambient temperature sensor, A:

digital instrument panel*, B: analog instrument

panel

NOTE

When the ambient temperature is between

23° and 36 °F (–5° and +2 °C), a snowflake

symbol will be displayed next to the tem-

perature. This symbol serves as a warning

for possible slippery road surfaces. Please

note that this symbol does not indicate a

fault with your vehicle.

At low speeds or when the vehicle is not

moving, the temperature readings may be

slightly higher than the actual ambient

temperature.

Related information

•Information displays – introduction (p. 66)

03 Instruments and controls

76 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Information displays – trip odometer

and clock

The trip odometers T1 and T2 and clock are

displayed in the instrument panel.

Trip odometers

Trip odometer4

Odometer display

Turn the thumb wheel on the left steering

wheel lever to display the desired trip odome-

ter.

Press and hold the RESET button on the left

steering wheel lever for at least 1 second to

reset the selected trip odometer5.

Clock

Clock, digital instrument panel*

Display6

Setting the clock

The clock can be set in the MY CAR menu

system. See My Car – introduction (p. 74) for

additional information about these menus.

Go to Settings System options Time

settings. Set Auto time to ON (check the

box) and select the correct time zone under

Location.

Related information

•Information displays – introduction (p. 66)

Inserting/removing remote key

The remote key is used to start the engine or

to use various electrical functions without

starting the engine.

Inserting and removing the remote key

Ignition slot with remote key and START/STOP

ENGINE button.

Inserting the remote key7

Holding the end of the remote key with the

base of the key blade, insert the remote key

into the ignition slot as shown in the illustra-

tion and press it in as far as possible.

CAUTION

Foreign objects in the ignition slot can

impair function or cause damage.

4The trip odometer will be displayed differently in analog and digital instrument panels

5Models with a digital information panel: press and hold RESET for more than approximately 4 seconds to reset all trip computer information

6Models with an analog instrument panel: the time will be displayed in the center of the instrument panel

7Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

03 Instruments and controls

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 77

Removing the remote key

The remote key can be removed from the

ignition slot by pulling it out.

Related information

•Ignition modes (p. 77)

Ignition modes

The vehicle's ignition has 3 modes: 0, I, and II

that can be used without starting the engine.

The following table shows examples of which

functions are available in the respective

modes.

NOTE

To access ignition modes I or II without

starting the engine, the brake pedal must

not be depressed.

Mode Function

0The odometer, clock and tem-

perature gauge are illuminated.

Power seats* can be adjusted

and the infotainment system can

be used for a limited time (to min-

imize battery drain, see the Sen-

sus Infotainment Supplement).

IThe Moonroof*, power windows,

12-volt sockets in the passenger

compartment, navigation sys-

tem*, climate system blower,

windshield wipers can be used.

II The headlights/taillights illumi-

nate. Warning/indicator lights illu-

minate for 5 seconds. Other sys-

tems are activated. However, the

heated seats* and heated rear

window function can only be acti-

vated when the engine is running.

Mode II should only be used for

very short periods to help avoid

draining the battery.

Ignition modes

Ignition mode 0

–The vehicle is unlocked.

||
03 Instruments and controls
03
78 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Ignition mode I
–With the remote key fully pressed into the
ignition slot8, press START/STOP
ENGINE briefly.
Ignition mode II
–With the remote key fully pressed into the
ignition slot8, press START/STOP
ENGINE for approximately 2 seconds.
Returning to mode 0
To return to mode 0 from mode II or I, press
START/STOP ENGINE briefly.
Starting and stopping the engine
See Starting the engine (p. 252) and Switch-
ing off the engine (p. 254) for information on
starting the engine and switching it off.
Emergency towing
See Towing the vehicle (p. 289) for important
information about the remote key when the
vehicle is being towed.
Related information
•Inserting/removing remote key (p. 76)
Front seats
The front seats can be adjusted in a number
of ways to help provide the most comfortable
seating position.
Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.
Front-rear adjustment: lift the bar and
move the seat to the position of your
choice.
Raise/lower front edge of seat cushion,
pump up/down.
Backrest tilt: turn the control to adjust the
angle of the backrest.
Electronic lumbar support*. Press the
button to adjust.
Control panel for power seat*, see Front
seats – power seat (p. 79).
WARNING
•Do not adjust the seat while driving.
The seat should be adjusted so that
the brake pedal can be depressed
fully. In addition, position the seat as
far rearward as comfort and control
allow.
•Check that the seat is securely locked
into position after adjusting.
Related information
•Front seats – power seat (p. 79)
•Rear seats – folding backrest (p. 84)
•Rear seats – head restraints (p. 82)
8Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

03 Instruments and controls

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79

Front seats – folding backrest*10

The front passenger's seat backrest can be

folded down to make it easier to transport

long objects.

The front passenger seat backrest can be

folded to a horizontal position to make room

for a long load. Fold the backrest as follows:

Move the seat as far back and down as

possible.

Adjust the backrest to an upright position.

Lift the catches on the rear of the back-

rest.

Without releasing the catches, push the

backrest forward.

Move the seat as far forward as possible

so that the head restraint slides under the

glove compartment.

Return the seat to its upright position in the

reverse order.

WARNING

•When transporting long objects, cover

sharp edges on the load to help pre-

vent injury to occupants. Secure the

load to help prevent shifting during

sudden stops.

•When the seat's backrest is returned

to the upright position, push and pull it

to be sure that it is securely locked in

this position.

Related information

•Front seats (p. 78)

•Front seats – power seat (p. 79)

•Rear seats – folding backrest (p. 84)

•Rear seats – head restraints (p. 82)

Front seats – power seat12

The power seat(s) can be adjusted for a short

period after unlocking the door with the

remote control without the key in the ignition

slot. Seat adjustment is normally made when

the ignition is on and can always be made

when the engine is running.

Power seat

Power seat adjustment controls

Front edge of seat cushion up/down

Raise/lower the seat

Seat forward/rearward

Backrest tilt

Electronic lumbar support*

10 The front passenger's seat backrest on models equipped with the optional sport seat cannot be folded down

12 Optional on certain models

03 Instruments and controls

80 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Operation

NOTE

•Only one of the power seat's controls

can be used at the same time.

•The power seats have an overload

protector that activates if a seat is

blocked by any object. If this occurs,

switch off the ignition (key in posi-

tion 0) and wait for a short period

before operating the seat again.

Power seat memory function

Power seat memory buttons

Button for storing a position

M (memory) button

Programming the seat's memory

Three different seating and door mirror posi-

tions can be stored in the driver seat's mem-

ory.

The following example explains how button

(1) can be programmed. Buttons (2) and (3)

are programmed in the same way.

To program (store) a seat and door mirror

position in button (1):

1. Move the seat (and door mirrors) to the

desired positions using the seat and mir-

ror adjustment controls.

2. Press and hold down the M (memory)

button (4).

3. With the memory button depressed,

press button (1) briefly to store the cur-

rent position for the seat/mirrors.

To move the seat and mirrors to the posi-

tion that they were in when a button was

programmed:

–Press and hold down button (1) until the

seat and mirrors stop moving.

NOTE

As a safety precaution, the seat will stop

automatically if the button is released

before the seat has reached the preset

position.

Heated seats*

See Heated seats (p. 127).

Related information

•Front seats (p. 78)

•Rear seats – folding backrest (p. 84)

•Rear seats – head restraints (p. 82)

03 Instruments and controls

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 81

Key memory – power driver's seat*

and door mirrors

Each remote key has a memory that enables it

to store (remember) the position of the power

driver's seat and door mirrors when the vehi-

cle is locked with that remote key.

Remote key memory and the power

driver's seat* and door mirrors13

The key memory has to be activated for each

of the remote keys used in the vehicle as

follows:

1. Insert a remote key in the ignition slot.

2. Go into the MY CAR menu and go to

Settings Car settings Car key

memory

3. To activate the remote key memory fea-

ture, press ENTER (check the box).

> The remote key is now ready to store

the position of the power driver's seat

and door mirrors.

Repeat this procedure for each of the vehi-

cle's remote keys.

See My Car – introduction (p. 74) for a

description of the menu system.

Storing the positions of the power

driver's seat/mirrors in the remote key

1. Move the seat and door mirrors to the

desired position using the seat and mirror

adjustment controls.

2. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors with

the remote key (or close the driver's door

and press the lock button on the door

handle with the remote key in your pos-

session on vehicles with the optional key-

less drive).

> The positions of the power driver's

seat and door mirrors are now stored

in the remote key's memory.

NOTE

The remote key's memory feature and the

power driver's seat memory function (the

settings made using the buttons on the

side of the seat, see the section "Power

seat memory function" in Front seats –

power seat (p. 79)) work independently of

each other.

13 This information also applies to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

03 Instruments and controls

Returning the seat/mirrors to the stored

positions

To move the seat and door mirrors to the

position stored in the remote key:

1. Unlock the driver's door with the same

remote key (the one used to lock the

doors). For models equipped with the

optional keyless drive, you must have the

same remote key in your possession.

2. Open the driver's door within 2 minutes.

The driver's seat and door mirrors will auto-

matically move to the position in which you

left them (if the vehicle has been unlocked

with one of the other keys and new seat/

mirror adjustments have been made).

NOTE

•The seat will move to this position

even if someone else has moved it to a

different position and locked the vehi-

cle with a different remote key.

•This feature will work in the same way

with all of the remote keys that you

use with your vehicle.

Emergency stop

WARNING

•Because the driver's seat can be

adjusted with the ignition off, children

should never be left unattended in the

vehicle.

•Movement of the seat can be STOP-

PED at any time by pressing any but-

ton on the power seat control panel.

•Do not adjust the seat while driving.

The seat should be adjusted so that

the brake pedal can be depressed

fully. In addition, position the seat as

far rearward as comfort and control

allow.

•The seat rails on the floor must not be

obstructed in any way when the seat is

in motion.

Related information

•Remote key – functions (p. 149)

Rear seats – head restraints

The rear seat head restraints can be folded

down. The center head restraint can be

raised/lowered according to the passenger's

height.

Rear center head restraint

03 Instruments and controls

}}

The center head restraint should be adjusted

according to the passenger's height. The

restraint should be carefully adjusted to sup-

port the occupant's head.

•Pull the head restraint up as required.

•To lower, press and hold the button

(located at the center, between the back-

rest and the head restraint) while pressing

the head restrain down carefully.

WARNING

The center rear seat head restraint should

only be in its lowest position when this

seat is NOT occupied. When the center

position is occupied, the head restraint

should be correctly adjusted to the pas-

senger’s height. The upper edge of the

head restraint should be at least on a level

with the upper-most point of the seat

occupant's ear.

Manually folding down the rear seat's

outboard head restraints

•Pull the handle closest to the head

restraint to fold it down.

•To return the head restraint to the upright

position, push it up until it clicks into

place.

NOTE

•The head restraint must be returned to

the upright position manually.

•The outboard head restraints cannot

be folded down on models that are not

equipped with this button.

CAUTION

The rear head restraints should not be

kept folded down for prolonged periods.

This could result in pressure marks in

leather upholstery.

WARNING

For safety reasons, no one should be

allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat

positions if the head restraints are folded

down. If these positions are occupied, the

head restraints should be in the upright

(fixed) position.

Automatically folding down the rear

seat’s outboard head restraints

1. The ignition must be in mode II.

2. Press the button to lower the rear head

restraints for improved visibility.

03 Instruments and controls

NOTE

•The head restraint must be returned to

the upright position manually.

•The outboard head restraints cannot

be folded down on models that are not

equipped with this button.

CAUTION

The rear head restraints should not be

kept folded down for prolonged periods.

This could result in pressure marks in

leather upholstery.

WARNING

For safety reasons, no one should be

allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat

positions if the head restraints are folded

down. If these positions are occupied, the

head restraints should be in the upright

(fixed) position.

Related information

•Front seats (p. 78)

•Front seats – power seat (p. 79)

•Rear seats – head restraints (p. 82)

Rear seats – folding backrest

The rear seat head restraints and backrests

can be folded down. The center head

restraint can be raised/lowered according to

the passenger's height.

Folding down the rear seat backrests

The three sections of the rear seat backrest

can be folded down in different combinations

to make it easier to transport long objects.

•The left (driver's side) section can be

folded down separately.

•The center section can be folded down

separately.

•The right (passenger's side) section can

only be folded down together with the

center section.

•All three sections can be folded down

together.

CAUTION

To help avoid damage to the upholstery,

there should be no objects on the rear seat

and the seat belt should not be buckled

when the backrest is folded down.

Release and lower the center head

restraint (see Rear seats – head restraints

(p. 82)) if the center and/or right section of

the backrest is to be lowered. The out-

board head restraints fold down automat-

ically.

Pull up the backrest release control on

the respective section(s) ( ) and fold the

section(s) down. A red indicator ( )

shows that the backrest is not locked in

the upright position.

03 Instruments and controls

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 85

NOTE

It may be necessary to move the front

seats forward or put their backrests in a

more upright position before folding down

the rear seat backrests.

WARNING

•When one or more sections of the

backrest is returned to the upright

position, check that it is properly

locked in place by pushing and pulling

it. The red indicators should also not

be visible.

•Return the outboard head restraints to

the upright position.

•Long loads should always be securely

anchored to help avoid injury in the

event of a sudden stop.

•Always turn the engine off and apply

the parking brake when loading/

unloading the vehicle.

•Place the transmission in the Park (P)

position to help prevent inadvertent

movement of the gear selector.

•On hot days, the temperature in the

vehicle interior can rise very quickly.

Exposure of people to these high tem-

peratures for even a short period of

time can cause heat-related injury or

death. Small children are particularly at

risk.

Related information

•Front seats (p. 78)

•Front seats – power seat (p. 79)

•Rear seats – head restraints (p. 82)

Steering wheel

The steering wheel can be adjusted to various

positions and has controls for the horn, cruise

control*, menus, the infotainment system and

Bluetooth

-connected cell phone.

Adjusting

G021138

Adjusting the steering wheel

Lever for releasing/locking the steering

wheel

Possible positions

To adjust the steering wheel's height and

reach:

1. Pull the lever toward you to release the

steering wheel.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position

that suits you.

||
03 Instruments and controls
03
86 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
3. Push back the lever to lock the steering
wheel in place. If the lever is difficult to
push into place, press the steering wheel
lightly at the same time as you push the
lever.
WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel while driv-
ing.
With the optional speed-dependent power
steering the level of steering force can be
adjusted, see Active chassis* (Four C)
(p. 169).
Keypads and steering wheel paddles*
Steering wheel keypads and paddles*
Cruise control, see Cruise control (CC) –
introduction (p. 176). Adaptive cruise
control*, see Adaptive Cruise Control –
introduction (p. 179).
Paddles for manually shifting gears (Gear-
tronic), see Transmission – Geartronic
(p. 259).
Infotainment system controls, see Sensus
Infotainment supplement.
Horn
Horn
–Press the steering wheel hub to sound
the horn.
Related information
•Electrically heated* steering wheel
(p. 86)
Electrically heated* steering wheel
The steering wheel can be heated electrically.
Button for steering wheel heating
With the engine running, press this button
once to begin warming the steering wheel
(press again to switch off). The indicator light
in the button will illuminate when the function
is active.
This function can also be started automati-
cally (the setting can be activated/deactivated
in the MY CAR menu) if the vehicle is cold
and the ambient temperature is below
approximately 50° F (10° C).

03 Instruments and controls

Lighting panel

The lighting panel is used to control the day-

time running lights, parking lights, etc., and to

adjust the instrument panel lighting and "the-

ater" lighting (p. 91).

Lighting panel overview

Thumb wheel for adjusting display, instru-

ment and "theater" lighting (see Instru-

ment and "theater" lighting (p. 91))

Rear fog lights (see Rear fog lights

(p. 92))

Headlight switch

Volvo recommends using the posi-

tion whenever possible.

Headlight switch positions

Daytime running lights function as follows:

With the headlight switch in the

position:

•In the US: the daytime running lights will

be off

•In Canada: the daytime running lights will

be on

With the headlight switch in the 16

position and the ignition in mode II or if the

engine is running (see Ignition modes (p. 77))

•In the US: the daytime running lights will

be off

•In Canada: the daytime running lights will

be on

With the headlight switch in the posi-

tion:

•The daytime running lights will be on (the

low beam headlights will automatically

switch on in dark conditions)

US models only: The daytime running lights

in mode can be switched on or off in

the MY CAR menu system under Settings

Car settings Light settings Daytime

running lights.

NOTE

The use of Daytime Running Lights is rec-

ommended in the United States and is

mandatory in Canada.

With the headlight switch in the posi-

tion:

•The daytime running lights will be off and

the low beam headlights will be on

16 The parking lights will be on in this position, even if the ignition is switched off.

03 Instruments and controls

88 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

High/low beam headlights

When the engine is started, the low beams

are activated automatically if the headlight

control is in position .

Headlight switch and steering wheel lever

High beam flash

Toggle between high and low beams

Continuous high beam headlights

With the headlight switch in the (in dark

conditions only, when the daytime running

lights have automatically switched off and the

low beam headlights have switched on) or

position:

•Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to

position 2 and release it to toggle

between low and high beams.

High beam flash

Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to

position 1. The high beams come on until the

lever is released.

Related information

•Active Bending Lights (ABL)* (p. 90)

•Active high beams (AHB)* (p. 88)

•Lighting panel (p. 87)

•Tunnel detection (models with the rain

sensor* only) (p. 90)

Active high beams (AHB)*

AHB uses a camera at the upper edge of the

windshield to detect the headlights of oncom-

ing vehicles or the taillights of a vehicle

directly ahead. When this happens, the head-

lights will automatically switch from high

beams to low beams. When the camera no

longer detects the headlights/taillights of

other vehicles, your headlights will switch

back to high beams after several seconds.

To activate AHB:

•Turn the headlight control to the

position.

The feature will begin functioning if the engine

has been running for at least 20 seconds and

the vehicle's speed is at least 12 mph

(20 km/h).

Headlight switch in the AUTO position

03 Instruments and controls

Switch AHB on or off by pulling the left steer-

ing wheel lever rearward (toward the steering

wheel) as far as possible and releasing it. If

AHB is switched off while the high beams are

on, the headlights will change to low beams.

Models with an analog instrument panel

When AHB is activated, the symbol will

illuminate in the instrument panel. The high

beam indicator ( ) in the instrument panel

will also illuminate when the high beams are

on.

Models with a digital instrument panel

When AHB is activated, will illuminate

as a white symbol in the instrument panel.

When the high beams are on, the symbol will

change to blue.

NOTE

•Keep the windshield in front of the

camera free of ice, snow, dirt, etc.

•Do not mount or in any way attach

anything on the windshield that could

obstruct the camera.

If Active high beam Temporary

unavailable Switch manually is displayed in

the instrument panel, switching between high

and low beams will have to be done man-

ually. However, the light switch can remain in

the position. The same applies if

Windscreen Sensors blocked is displayed

and the symbol is displayed. The

symbol will go out when these messages are

displayed.

AHB may be temporarily unavailable (e.g., in

heavy fog or rain). When AHB becomes active

again or if the sensors in the windshield are

no longer obscured, the messages will disap-

pear and the symbol will illuminate.

CAUTION

In the following situations, it may be nec-

essary to switch between high and low

beams manually:

•In heavy fog or rain

•In blowing snow or slush

•In bright moonlight

•In freezing rain

•In areas with dim street lighting

•When oncoming vehicles have dim

front lighting

•If there are pedestrians on or near the

road

•If there are reflective objects, such as

signs, near the road

•When oncoming vehicles' lights are

obscured by e.g., fences, bushes, etc.

•When there are vehicles on connecting

roads

•At the top of hills or in dips in the road

•In sharp curves

See The camera’s limitations (p. 212) for

more information about the camera's limita-

tions.

Related information

•High/low beam headlights (p. 88)

•Lighting panel (p. 87)

03 Instruments and controls

90 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Tunnel detection (models with the rain

sensor* only)

For models without automatic low beams,

tunnel detection activates the low beams

when the vehicle enters a tunnel. The low

beams are switched off approx. 20 seconds

after the vehicle leaves the tunnel.

The rain sensor reacts to the change in light-

ing conditions when, for example, the vehicle

enters a tunnel and the tunnel detection fea-

ture will then activate the low beam head-

lights. The low beams will be switched off

approx. 20 seconds after the vehicle leaves

the tunnel.

The rain sensor does not have to be activated

for tunnel detection to function.

Related information

•Lighting panel (p. 87)

•High/low beam headlights (p. 88)

Active Bending Lights (ABL)*

With ABL activated, the headlight beams

adjust laterally to help light up a curve

according to movements of the steering

wheel (see the right-pointing beam in the fol-

lowing illustration).

Headlight pattern with the Active Bending Light

function deactivated (left) and activated (right)

ABL is activated automatically17 when the

engine is started.

The function can be deactivated/reactivated

in the MY CAR menu system under My V60

Active Bending Lights or under Settings

Car settings Light settings Active

Bending Lights.

See My Car – introduction (p. 74) for a

description of the menu system.

NOTE

This function is only active in twilight or

dark conditions, and only when the vehicle

is in motion.

If a fault should occur in the system, the sym-

bol will illuminate and a message will be dis-

played as shown in the table.

Symbol Display Explanation

Headlamp

failure

Service

required

The system is

not functioning

properly and

should be

inspected/

repaired by a

trained and

qualified Volvo

service techni-

cian.

17 The factory default setting is on.

03 Instruments and controls
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 91
Cornering lights18
Models equipped with ABL also have front
cornering lights that temporarily provide extra
light to the front left or right of the vehicle at
low speeds when making a sharp turn (for
example, when turning into a parking space)
or when the turn signals are used.
This feature is activated when:
•High or low beam headlights are on
and
•The vehicle's speed is below
20 mph (30 km/h)
The feature is also activated when the vehicle
is backing up.
The cornering lights are deactivated when the
vehicle's speed exceeds approx. 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Related information
•Lighting panel (p. 87)
•High/low beam headlights (p. 88)
•Active high beams (AHB)* (p. 88)
Auxiliary lights*
If the vehicle is fitted with auxiliary lights, the
driver can use the MY CAR menu system to
choose to deactivate and turn these lights on
and off along with the high beam headlights.
The auxiliary lights must be connected to the
vehicle's electrical system, which should only
be done by a trained and authorized Volvo
service technician. See My Car – introduction
(p. 74) for more information about the menu
system.
Instrument and "theater" lighting
Instrument lighting
Illumination of the display and instrument
lights will vary, depending on ignition mode.
The display lighting is automatically subdued
in darkness and the sensitivity is set with the
thumb wheel.
The intensity of the instrument lighting is
adjusted with the thumb wheel.
"Theater" lighting
When the overhead courtesy lighting has
gone out and the engine is running, several
LEDs located near the roof console illuminate
to provide faint lighting for the occupants of
the front seats. This lighting goes out just
after the overhead courtesy lighting when the
vehicle is locked.
Related information
•Lighting panel (p. 87)
•Front interior lighting (p. 94)
•Rear interior lighting (p. 95)
•Ignition modes (p. 77)
18 Certain models only

03 Instruments and controls

Parking lights

Turn the headlight switch to the posi-

tion (the license plate lighting comes on at the

same time).

Headlight switch in the parking light position

Canadian models: If the ignition is in position

II or the engine is running, the daytime run-

ning lights will also be on.

With the headlight switch in this position, the

parking lights will remain on even when the

ignition is switched off.

In dark ambient lighting conditions, the rear

parking lights also illuminate when the tailgate

is opened to alert anyone traveling behind

your vehicle. This happens regardless of the

position that the headlight control is in or

which mode the ignition is in.

Related information

•Lighting panel (p. 87)

Rear fog lights

The rear fog lights are considerably brighter

than the normal taillights and should be used

only when conditions such as fog, rain, snow,

smoke or dust reduce visibility for other vehi-

cles to less than 500 ft. (150 meters).

The rear fog lights will only function in combi-

nation with the high/low beam headlights.

–Press the button to switch the rear fog

lights on/off.

> The rear fog light indicator symbol

on the instrument panel and the

light in the button illuminate when the

rear fog lights are switched on.

NOTE

•The rear fog lights are considerably

brighter than the normal taillights and

should be used only when conditions

such as fog, rain, snow, smoke or dust

reduce visibility for other vehicles to

less than 500 ft. (150 meters).

•Condensation may form temporarily on

the inside of the lenses of exterior

lights such as headlights, fog lights, or

taillights. This is normal and the lights

are designed to withstand moisture.

Normally, condensation will dissipate

after the lights have been on for a

short time.

Related information

•Lighting panel (p. 87)

03 Instruments and controls

}}

Hazard warning flashers

The hazard warning flasher should be used to

indicate that the vehicle has become a traffic

hazard.

When the function is activated, both turn sig-

nal indicators in the instrument panel will

flash.

Location of the hazard warning flasher button

–To activate the flashers, press the button

in the center dash. Press the button again

to turn off the flashers.

NOTE

•Regulations regarding the use of the

hazard warning flasher may vary,

depending on where you live.

•The hazard warning flashers will be

activated automatically if an airbag

deploys.

Related information

•Turn signals (p. 93)

Turn signals

The turn signals are controlled by the left

steering wheel lever.

Turn signals

When changing lanes

The driver can automatically flash the turn

signals 3 times by moving the turn signal

lever up or down to the first position and

releasing it.

When turning

Move the lever as far up or down as pos-

sible to start the turn signals. The turn signals

will be cancelled automatically by the move-

ment of the steering wheel, or the lever can

be returned to its initial position by hand.

03 Instruments and controls

94 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

•This automatic flashing sequence can

be interrupted by immediately moving

the lever in the opposite direction.

•If the turn signal indicator flashes

faster than normal, check for a

burned-out turn signal bulb.

Related information

•Hazard warning flashers (p. 93)

Front interior lighting

The lighting in the front part of the passenger

compartment is controlled with the buttons in

the ceiling console.

G021149

Light switches, front roof lighting

Drivers side front reading light, on/off

Passenger's side front reading light,

on/off

Overhead courtesy lighting.

Switch (3) has three positions for all passen-

ger compartment lighting:

•Off: right side depressed, automatic light-

ing off.

•Neutral position: automatic lighting is

on.

•On – left side depressed, passenger

compartment lighting on.

Overhead courtesy lighting

The passenger compartment lighting is

switched on and off automatically when but-

ton (3) is in the neutral position.

The lighting comes on and remains on for

30 seconds if:

•the vehicle is unlocked from the outside

with the key or remote control

•the engine is switched off and the ignition

is in mode 0.

The lighting switches off when:

•the engine is started

•the vehicle is locked from the outside.

The lighting comes on and remains on for two

minutes if one of the doors is open.

The passenger compartment lighting can be

switched on and off manually within

30 minutes after the vehicle has been

unlocked.

If the lighting is switched on manually and the

vehicle is locked, the courtesy lighting will

switch off automatically after one minute.

Courtesy lights/door step lighting*

The courtesy lights/door step lighting switch

on/off automatically when one of the front

doors is opened/closed.

Glove compartment lighting

The glove compartment lighting switches

on/off automatically when the lid is opened/

closed.

03 Instruments and controls

Related information

•Rear interior lighting (p. 95)

Rear interior lighting

The lights are switched on or off by pressing

each respective button.

G021150

Rear reading lights

Cargo area lighting

The cargo area lighting comes on automati-

cally when the tailgate is opened.

Related information

•Front interior lighting (p. 94)

Home safe lighting

When you leave your vehicle at night, you can

make use of the home safe lighting function

to illuminate the area in front of the vehicle.

This function illuminates the headlights, park-

ing lights, lights in the door mirrors, license

plate lights, front ceiling lighting and footwell

lighting. These lights will remain on for 30 19,

60 or 90 seconds. The time interval can be

set in MY CAR under Settings Car

settings Light settings Home safe

light duration. See My Car – introduction

(p. 74) for a description of the menu system.

1. Remove the key from the ignition slot to

put the ignition in mode 0 (see Ignition

modes (p. 77) for information about the

ignition modes).

2. Pull the turn signal lever as far as possible

towards the steering wheel and release it.

3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors.

Related information

•Approach lighting (p. 96)

19 Factory setting

03 Instruments and controls
03
96 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Approach lighting
Approach lighting activates the parking lights,
door mirror lights, license plate lighting, dome
lighting and door step lighting when you
approach the vehicle.
This function is activated by pressing the
approach light button on the remote key (see
the illustration in Remote key – functions
(p. 149)).
The time interval for this lighting can be set
by pressing MY CAR and going to Car
settings Light settings Approach light
duration. See My Car – introduction (p. 74)
for a description of the menu system.
Related information
•Home safe lighting (p. 95)
Windshield wipers
Move the lever toward the steering wheel to
start the windshield and headlight washers.
After the lever is released the wipers make
several extra sweeps.
Windshield wipers and washers
Rain sensor* on/off
Thumb wheel sensitivity/frequency
CAUTION
•Use ample washer fluid when washing
the windshield. The windshield should
be thoroughly wet when the wipers are
in operation.
•Before using the wipers, ice and snow
should be removed from the wind-
shield/rear window. Be sure the wiper
blades are not frozen in place.
Windshield wipers off
Move the lever to position 0 to
switch off the windshield wipers.
Single sweep
Move the lever upward from posi-
tion 0 to sweep the windshield one
stroke at a time for as long as the
lever is held up.
Intermittent wiping
With the lever in this position, you
can set the wiper interval by twisting
the thumb wheel upward to increase
wiper speed or downward to decrease the
speed.
Continuous wiping
The wipers operate at normal
speed.
The wipers operate at high speed.
Windshield wiper service position
The windshield wipers must be in the service
position before the wiper blades can be
cleaned or replaced. See Wiper blades –
service position (p. 346) for additional infor-
mation.
Related information
•Engine compartment – washer fluid
(p. 348)

03 Instruments and controls

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 97

Rain sensor*

The rain sensor automatically regulates wiper

speed according to the amount of water on

the windshield.

The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be

adjusted moving the thumb wheel up (the

wipers will sweep the windshield more fre-

quently) or down (the wipers will sweep the

windshield less frequently).

NOTE

The wipers will make an extra sweep each

time the thumb wheel is adjusted upward.

When the rain sensor is activated, the symbol

will illuminate in the instrument panel.

Activating and setting the sensitivity

When activating the rain sensor, the vehicle

must be running or in ignition mode II and the

windshield wiper lever must be in position 0

or in the single sweep position.

Activate the rain sensor by pressing the but-

ton . The windshield wipers will make

one sweep.

Press the lever up for the wipers to make an

extra sweep. The rain sensor returns to active

mode when the stalk is released back to

position 0.

Deactivating

Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the

button or press the lever down to

another wiper position.

The rain sensor is automatically deactivated

when the key is removed from the ignition

slot or five minutes after the ignition has been

switched off.

CAUTION

The rain sensor should be deactivated

when washing the car in an automatic car

wash, etc. If the rain sensor function is left

on, the wipers will start inadvertently in the

car wash and could be damaged.

Windshield washer

Move the lever toward the steering wheel to

start the windshield and headlight washers.

After the lever is released the wipers make

several extra sweeps.

Washing function

Heated washer nozzles*

The washer nozzles are heated automatically

in cold weather to help prevent the washer

fluid from freezing.

High-pressure headlight washing*

High-pressure headlight washing consumes a

large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid,

the headlights are washed using two alterna-

tives:

•Low/high beam headlights on. The

headlights will be washed the first time

the windshield is washed. Thereafter, the

headlights will only be washed once for

03 Instruments and controls

every five times the windshield is washed

within a 10-minute period.

•Parking lights on. Optional Active Bend-

ing Lights will be washed once for every

five times the windshield is washed. Nor-

mal halogen headlights will not be

washed.

CAUTION

•Use ample washer fluid when washing

the windshield. The windshield should

be thoroughly wet when the wipers are

in operation.

•When approx. 1 US quart (1 liter) of

washer fluid remains in the reservoir,

the headlights will no longer be

washed. A text message will also be

displayed to remind the driver to fill the

washer fluid reservoir.

Related information

•Engine compartment – washer fluid

(p. 348)

Tailgate wiper/washer

The tailgate wiper operates at two speeds:

intermittent and continuous.

Move the lever forward to start the tailgate

washer.

Intermittent wiping

Normal (continuous) wiping

NOTE

The rear wiper is equipped with a cut-off

function, which means that it will not oper-

ate if its electric motor overheats. The

wiper will function again after a cool-down

period (30 seconds or longer, depending

on the heat of the motor and ambient tem-

perature conditions).

Tailgate wiper and reverse gear

If the windshield wipers are on and the trans-

mission is put into reverse gear, the tailgate

wiper will go into intermittent wiping func-

tion20. This function is deactivated when a dif-

ferent gear is selected.

NOTE

On vehicles with the optional rain sensor,

the tailgate wiper will be activated when

reverse is selected, if the rain sensor is

activated and it is raining.

If the tailgate wiper is in the normal (continu-

ous) wiping mode, selecting different gears

will not affect its function.

Related information

•Engine compartment – washer fluid

(p. 348)

20 Consult your Volvo retailer if you would like to have this function deactivated.

03 Instruments and controls

}}

Power windows

All power windows can be operated using the

control panel in the driver's door. The control

panels in the other doors only operate the

window in the respective doors.

Driver's door control panel

Switch for disengaging rear door power

window buttons

Rear door window controls

Front door window controls.

WARNING

•Always remove the ignition key when

the vehicle is unattended to put the

ignition in mode 0 (see Ignition modes

(p. 77) for information about the igni-

tion modes).

•Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.

•Make sure that the windows are com-

pletely unobstructed before they are

operated.

Operating

Operating the power windows

Manual up/down

Auto up/down.

For the power windows to function, the igni-

tion must be in at least mode I. When the

vehicle has been running, the power windows

can be operated for several minutes after the

remote key has been removed from the igni-

tion slot, or until a door has been opened.

NOTE

•Movement of the windows will stop if

they are obstructed in any way.

•To reduce buffeting wind noise if the

rear windows are opened, also open

the front windows slightly.

Manual up/down

–Move one of the controls up/down

slightly.

> The power windows move up/down as

long as the control is held in position.

Auto up/down

–Move one of the controls up/down as far

as possible and release it.

> The window will open or close com-

pletely.

Resetting

If the battery has been disconnected, the

auto open function must be reset so that it

will work properly.

1. Gently raise the front section of the but-

ton to close the window and hold it for

one second.

2. Release the button briefly.

03 Instruments and controls

100 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

3. Raise the front section of the button again

for one second.

Power door mirrors

The control on the driver's door is used to

adjust the position of the door mirrors.

Door mirror controls

Adjusting

1. Press the L button for the left door mirror

or the R button for the right door mirror.

The light in the button comes on.

2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the

center.

3. Press the L or R button again. The light

should no longer be on.

WARNING

Objects seen in the mirrors may appear

further away than they actually are.

Retractable power door mirrors*

The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driv-

ing in narrow spaces:

1. Press down the L and R buttons at the

same time.

2. Release them after approximately one

second. The mirrors automatically stop in

the fully retracted position.

Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L

and R buttons at the same time. The mirrors

automatically stop in the fully extended posi-

tion.

Storing the position*

The mirror positions are stored in the key

memory when the vehicle has been locked

with the remote key. When the vehicle is

unlocked with the same remote control the

mirrors and the driver's seat adopt the stored

positions when the driver's door is opened.

The function can be activated/deactivated in

MY CAR under Settings Car settings

Car key memory Personal settings in

key memory. See My Car – introduction

(p. 74) for a description of the menu system.

03 Instruments and controls
03
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 101
Tilting the door mirrors when parking*
The door mirrors can be tilted down to help
give the driver a better view along the sides of
the vehicle, for example when parallel park-
ing.
To activate this function, select reverse gear
and press the L or R mirror control button to
tilt the mirror down.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
MY CAR under Settings Car settings
Side mirror settings Tilt left mirror or Tilt
right mirror. See My Car – introduction
(p. 74) for a description of the menu system.
The door mirror will reset to its normal posi-
tion:
•after 10 seconds when reverse is disen-
gaged and the car remains stopped.
•immediately when reverse is disengaged
and the vehicle's forward speed exceeds
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
•immediately if you press the correspond-
ing L or R button again.
•when the engine is turned off.
•when the side mirrors are folded in.
NOTE
Only one mirror can be tilted down at a
time.
Home safe and approach lighting
The light on the door mirrors comes on when
approach lighting or home safe lighting is
selected, see Approach lighting (p. 96) and
Home safe lighting (p. 95).
Related information
•Interior rearview mirror (p. 103)
•Heated windshield*, rear window and
door mirror defrosters (p. 102)
•Power door mirrors – automatic tilting/
retraction (p. 101)
Power door mirrors – automatic
tilting/retraction
The control on the driver's door is used to
adjust the position of the door mirrors.
Automatically tilting the door mirrors
when parking
The door mirrors can tilt down automatically
to help give the driver a better view along the
sides of the vehicle, for example when paral-
lel parking. When the transmission is no
longer in reverse, the mirrors will automati-
cally return to their original position.
This function can be activated/deactivated in
MY CAR under Settings Car settings
Side mirror settings In reverse gear tilt
left mirror or In reverse gear tilt right
mirror. See My Car – introduction (p. 74) for
information about the MY CAR menu system.
Automatic retraction when locking
When the vehicle is locked/unlocked with the
remote key the door mirrors are automatically
retracted/extended.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
MY CAR under Settings Car settings
Side mirror settings Retract side mirrors
when locking. See My Car – introduction
(p. 74) for a description of the menu system.

03 Instruments and controls

102 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Resetting to neutral

Mirrors that have been moved out of position

by an external force must be electrically reset

to the neutral position for electric retracting/

extending to work.

•Retract the mirrors with the L and R but-

tons.

•Fold them out again with the L and R but-

tons.

The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.

Related information

•Interior rearview mirror (p. 103)

•Heated windshield*, rear window and

door mirror defrosters (p. 102)

Heated windshield*, rear window and

door mirror defrosters

The heating function is used to defrost/de-ice

the windshield and/or the rear window and

door mirrors.

Max. defroster/heated windshield (1), rear win-

dow and door mirror defroster (2)

Press button (1) to defrost/de-ice the wind-

shield and/or button (2) to defrost the rear

window and door mirrors. The indicator lights

in the respective buttons indicate that the

function is active. Switch the function off

when then windshield/rear window/mirrors

have cleared to help avoid battery drain. The

heating function will also switch off automati-

cally after a certain amount of time.

Auto-defrosting for the rear window and door

mirrors (if the vehicle is started when the

ambient temperature is below 45 °F (7 °C)

can be selected in MY CAR under Settings

Climate settings Automatic rear

defroster. See My Car – introduction (p. 74)

for a description of the menu system.

03 Instruments and controls

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 103

Interior rearview mirror

The interior rearview mirror has an auto-dim

function that helps reduce glare from follow-

ing vehicle's headlights.

Auto-dim function

The interior rearview mirror’s auto-dim func-

tion is controlled by two sensors: one point-

ing forward (located on the forward-facing

side of the mirror, which monitors the amount

of ambient light) and one pointing rearward

(located on the side of the mirror facing the

driver at the upper edge, which senses the

strength of following vehicles' headlights),

and work together to help eliminate glare.21

NOTE

Obstructing the forward sensor with e.g.,

parking stickers, transponders, etc., or the

rear sensor by loading the cargo area or

the rear seat in such a way that light is

prevented from reaching the sensor will

reduce the auto-dim function in the interior

rearview mirror and optional auto-dim

function in the door mirrors.

Related information

•Power door mirrors (p. 100)

Digital compass*

The rear-view mirror has an integrated display

that shows the compass direction in which

the vehicle is traveling.

Operation

Rearview mirror with compass.

Eight different directions are shown with the

abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E

(east), SE (southeast), S (south), SW (south-

west), W (west) and NW (northwest).

The compass is displayed automatically when

the vehicle is started or in ignition mode II. To

switch the compass on/off use a pen, paper-

clip or similar object and press in the button

on the underside of the mirror.

Calibration

North America is divided into 15 magnetic

zones and the compass will need to be cali-

brated if the vehicle is driven into a new one

(see the magnetic zones on the map in the

following section "Selecting a magnetic

zone"). To do so:

1. Stop the vehicle in a large open area,

safely out of traffic and away from steel

structures and high-tension electrical

wires.

2. Start the vehicle.

NOTE

•For best calibration results, switch off

all electrical equipment in the vehicle

(climate system, windshield wipers,

audio system, etc.) and make sure that

all doors are closed.

•Calibration may not succeed or be

incorrect if the vehicle's electrical

equipment is not switched off.

3. Using a pen, paperclip or similar object,

press and hold the button on the under-

side of mirror for approx. 6 seconds until

C is displayed in the mirror.

21 The auto-dim function is also available as an option on the door mirrors.

03 Instruments and controls

104 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

4. Press and hold the button for 3 seconds

until the number of the current magnetic

zone is displayed.

5. Press the button repeatedly until the

number of the desired magnetic zone

(1-15) is displayed. See the magnetic

zones on the map in the following section

"Selecting a magnetic zone").

6. Wait until C is again displayed in the mir-

ror.

7. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no

more than 6 mph (10 km/h) until a direc-

tion is displayed. This indicates that cali-

bration is complete.

8. Drive around in a circle an additional two

times to fine-tune the calibration.

9. Vehicles with an electrically heated

windshield:* if C is displayed when the

heating function is activated, perform

step 7 with the heating function on. See

also Max. defroster and electrically

heated windshield* (p. 129) for additional

information about the heated windshield.

Repeat the calibration procedure if neces-

sary.

Selecting a magnetic zone

G018632

Magnetic zones.

The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.

The correct zone must be selected for the

compass to work correctly.

1. Put the ignition in mode II.

2. Using a pen or similar object, press and

hold the button on the rear side of mirror

for at least 3 seconds. The number for the

current area will be shown.

3. Press the button repeatedly until the

number for the required geographic area

(1 – 15) is shown.

4. The display will revert to showing the

compass direction after several seconds.

Power moonroof* – introduction

The moonroof controls are located in the ceil-

ing console near the rearview mirror.

The moonroof's sun visor opens automatically

but has to be closed manually.

There is a wind blocker in the moonroof's

front edge.

The moonroof controls are located in the ceil-

ing console near the rearview mirror. The

moonroof can be opened vertically and hori-

zontally. The vehicle's ignition must be in

mode I or II for the moonroof to be operated.

CAUTION

•Remove ice and snow before opening

the moonroof.

•Do not operate the moonroof if it is

frozen closed.

•Never place heavy objects on the

moonroof.

Visor

The moonroof features a sliding visor. The

visor slides open automatically when the

moonroof is opened, and must be closed

manually.

03 Instruments and controls

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 105

Wind blocker

The moonroof is equipped with a wind

blocker that folds up when the moonroof is

open.

Power moonroof* – operation

The moonroof controls are located in the ceil-

ing console near the rearview mirror.

The moonroof's sun visor opens automatically

but has to be closed manually.

There is a wind blocker in the moonroof's

front edge.

Sliding moonroof

G017823

Sliding moonroof, forward/rearward

Opening, automatic

Opening, manual

Closing, manual

Closing, automatic

Automatic opening

–Pull the switch as far back as possible (to

the position for automatic opening) and

release it to automatically fully slide open

the moonroof.

Manual opening

–Pull the switch back to the first stop (the

position for manual opening) and hold it

until the moonroof has opened to the

position of your choice.

Manual closing

–Push the switch forward to the first stop

(the position for manual closing) and hold

it until the moonroof has closed to the

position of your choice, or has closed

completely.

03 Instruments and controls

106 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Automatic closing

–Push the switch as far forward as possi-

ble (the position for automatic closing)

and release it to automatically close the

moonroof.

WARNING

•During manual closing, if the moonroof

is obstructed, immediately open it

again.

•Never open or close the moonroof if it

is obstructed in any way.

•Never allow a child to operate the

moonroof.

•Never leave a child alone in a vehicle.

•When leaving the vehicle, ensure that

the ignition is in mode 0 (see Ignition

modes (p. 77) for information about the

various ignition modes) to disable the

moonroof. Never leave the remote key

in the vehicle.

•Never extend any object or body part

though the open moonroof, even if the

vehicle's ignition is completely

switched off.

Tilt position

G028900

Tilt position, raised at the rear edge

Open by pressing the rear edge of the

control upward.

Close by pulling the rear edge of the con-

trol downward and hold it until the moon-

roof has closed completely.

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

– introduction

HomeLink

can be used to open garage

doors, gates, etc.

03 Instruments and controls
03
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 107
WARNING
•If you use HomeLink® to open a
garage door or gate, be sure no one is
near the gate or door while it is in
motion.
•When programming a garage door
opener, it is advised to park outside of
the garage.
•Do not use HomeLink® with any
garage door opener that lacks safety
stop and reverse features as required
by U.S. federal safety standards (this
includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1,
1982). A garage door that cannot
detect an object - signaling the door to
stop and reverse - does not meet cur-
rent U.S. federal safety standards. For
more information, contact HomeLink
at: www.homelink.com.
The HomeLink®22 Wireless Control System
provides a convenient way to replace up to
three hand-held radio-frequency (RF) trans-
mitters used to activate devices such as gate
operators, garage door openers, entry door
locks, security systems, even home lighting.
Additional information can be found on the
Internet at, www.homelink.com/
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or by
phoning the hotline at 1–800–355–3515.
Retain the original transmitter of the RF
device you are programming for use in other
vehicles as well as for future HomeLink pro-
gramming. It is also suggested that upon the
sale of the vehicle, the programmed Home-
Link buttons be erased for security purposes.
Refer to “Resetting HomeLink Buttons” in
HomeLink® Wireless Control System* – pro-
gramming (p. 107).
Using HomeLink
To operate, simply press and hold the pro-
grammed HomeLink button until the trained
device begins to operate (this may take sev-
eral seconds). Activation will now occur for
the trained device (i.e., garage door opener,
gate operator, security system, entry door
lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For conven-
ience, the hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time. In the event
that there are still programming difficulties or
questions, contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com/www.youtube.com/
HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at
1–800–355–3515.
NOTE
If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink
will function for 30 minutes after the driv-
er's door has been opened.
HomeLink® Wireless Control System*
– programming
The HomeLink Wireless Control System pro-
vides a convenient way to replace up to three
hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters
used to activate devices such as gate opera-
tors, garage door openers, entry door locks,
security systems, even home lighting. Addi-
tional information can be found on the Inter-
net atwww.homelink.com/www.youtube.com/
HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at
1–800–355–3515.
NOTE
Some vehicles may require the ignition to
be switched on or be in the “accessories”
position for programming and/or operation
of HomeLink. It is also recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being pro-
grammed to HomeLink for quicker training
and accurate transmission of the radio-fre-
quency signal. The HomeLink buttons
must be reset first. When this has been
completed, Homelink is in learning mode
so that you can perform programming.
1. Position the end of your hand-held trans-
mitter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away from
the HomeLink button you wish to pro-
gram while keeping the indicator light in
view.
22 HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.

03 Instruments and controls

108

2. Simultaneously press and hold both the

chosen HomeLink and hand-held trans-

mitter buttons until the HomeLink indica-

tor light changes from a slow to a rapidly

blinking light. Now you may release both

the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter

buttons.

NOTE

Some devices may require you to replace

this Programming Step 2 with procedures

noted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian

Programming” section. If the HomeLink

indicator light does not change to a rapidly

blinking light after performing these steps,

contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com/

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or by

phoning the hotline at 1–800–355–3515.

3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and

release the programmed HomeLink but-

ton up to two separate times to activate

the door. If the door does not activate,

press and hold the just-trained HomeLink

button and observe the indicator light.

•If the indicator light stays on con-

stantly, programming is complete

and your device should activate when

the HomeLink button is pressed and

released.

•If the indicator light blinks rapidly for

two seconds and then turns to a

constant light continue with “Pro-

gramming” steps 4-6 to complete the

programming of a rolling code equip-

ped device (most commonly a garage

door opener).

4. At the garage door opener receiver

(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate

the “learn” or “smart” button. This can

usually be found where the hanging

antenna wire is attached to the motor-

head unit.

5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or

“smart” button. (The name and color of

the button may vary by manufacturer.)

There are 30 seconds to initiate step 6.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,

hold for two seconds and release the pro-

grammed HomeLink button. Repeat the

“press/hold/release” sequence a second

time, and, depending on the brand of the

garage door opener (or other rolling code

equipped device), repeat this sequence a

third time to complete the programming

process.

HomeLink should now activate your rolling

code equipped device.

03 Instruments and controls

109

Gate Operator/Canadian Programming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans-

mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after sev-

eral seconds of transmission – which may not

be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the

signal during programming. Similar to this

Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are

designed to “time-out” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-

culties programming a gate operator or

garage door opener by using the “Program-

ming” procedures, replace “Programming

HomeLink” step 2 with the following:

•Continue to press and hold the HomeLink

button while you press and release -

every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand-

held transmitter until the HomeLink indi-

cator light changes from a slow to a rap-

idly blinking light. Now you may release

both the HomeLink and hand-held trans-

mitter buttons.

Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to com-

plete.

Resetting HomeLink Buttons

Use the following procedure to reset (erase

programming) from the three HomeLink but-

tons (individual buttons cannot be reset but

can be “reprogrammed” as outlined in the fol-

lowing section):

1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink

buttons until the indicator light begins to

flash.

2. Release both buttons.

> HomeLink is now in the training (or

learning) mode and can be pro-

grammed at any time beginning with

“Programming” - step 1.

Reprogramming a Single HomeLink

Button

To program a device to HomeLink using a

HomeLink button previously trained, follow

these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink

button. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after

20 seconds. Without releasing the Home-

Link button, proceed with “Programming”

- step 1.

For questions or comments, contact Home-

Link at: www.homelink.com/

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or by

phoning the hotline at 1–800–355–3515.

This device complies with FCC rules part 15

and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operation

is subject to the following two conditions: (1)

This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) This device must accept any

interference that may be received including

interference that may cause undesired opera-

tion.

NOTE

The transmitter has been tested and com-

plies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or

modifications not expressly approved by

the party responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate the

device.23

23 The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

03 Instruments and controls

110 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Volvo Sensus

Volvo Sensus is the core of the contact inter-

face with your vehicle. Sensus provides infor-

mation, entertainment and offers access to

functions that make owning and operating a

Volvo easier.

Volvo Sensus is the operating system in your

vehicle and it enables you to interact intui-

tively with the vehicle’s various features and

functions, including accessing the Internet,

when it suits you.

Volvo Sensus uses the center console screen

to display information and menus, and to

offer a user interface that enables you to

make personalized settings for e.g., vehicle,

infotainment and climate system functions.

The buttons on the center console or the

steering wheel keypad are used to activate/

deactivate functions and change numerous

settings.

Pressing the MY CAR button on the center

console displays all of the settings related to

driving and operating the vehicle, such as

City Safety, lock and alarm functions, auto-

matic blower speed, setting the clock, etc.

Pressing the source buttons on the center

console (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, , NAV* and

CAM*, etc.) make it possible to select e.g.,

AM or FM radio, play a CD or DVD, use the

Bluetooth® hands-free feature, the navigation

system* or the park assist camera*.

See your on-board owner’s manual or the

separate printed supplements for detailed

information about the functionality offered by

Volvo Sensus.

Center console control panel

Volvo Navigation System (VNS)* – NAV:

see the separate VNS manual for operat-

ing instructions.

Infotainment (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL)

Vehicle-related settings - MY CAR.

Internet connected vehicle.

Climate system.

Park assist camera - CAM*.

Related information

•My Car – introduction (p. 74)

•Climate – general information (p. 122)

•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – intro-

duction (p. 241)

03 Instruments and controls
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 111
Information display – menu controls
The controls on the left steering wheel lever
are used to access the menus (p. 111) that
are displayed in the instrument panel (p. 66).
The menus displayed depend on the current
ignition mode (p. 77).
Analog Instrument panel and menu controls
Digital Instrument panel* and menu controls
OK: access to the list of mes-
sages (p. 112) and message confirma-
tion.
Thumb wheel: browse among menus and
options in the list of functions.
RESET: reset the active function. Used in
certain cases to select/activate a func-
tion, see the explanation under each
respective function.
The menus shown on the information displays
in the instrument panel are controlled with the
left lever. The menus displayed depend on
ignition mode. Press OK to erase a message
and return to the menus.
Information display – menu overview
The menus displayed depend on the current
ignition mode (p. 77).
The following menu alternatives may vary,
depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle.
Analog instrument panel
Digital speed
Trip comp. opt.
Service status
Messages (##)24
Digital instrument panel*
Settings
Themes
Contrast mode/Color mode
Service status
Messages
Trip computer reset
Related information
•Information displays – introduction (p. 66)
•Information display – menu controls
(p. 111)
•Information display – messages (p. 112)
24 Number of messages in parentheses

03 Instruments and controls

112

Information display – messages

The controls on the left steering wheel lever

are used to scroll among messages displayed

in the instrument panel and to confirm selec-

tions.

When information, indicator or warning sym-

bols illuminate, an explanatory message will

be displayed in the instrument panel.

When a warning (p. 72), information (p. 70) or

indicator symbol (p. 70) comes on, a corres-

ponding message appears in the information

panel. An error message is stored in a mem-

ory list until the fault is rectified.

Press OK to acknowledge and scroll among

the messages.

NOTE

If a warning message appears while you

are using the trip computer, the message

must be read and confirmed by pressing

OK before the previous activity can be

resumed.

Message Description

Stop

engineA

Stop and switch off the

engine as soon as possi-

ble. Serious risk of dam-

age. Contact an author-

ized Volvo workshop.

Stop safelyAStop and switch off the

engine. Serious risk of

damage. Contact an

authorized Volvo work-

shop.

Service

urgentA

Have the vehicle checked

by an authorized Volvo

workshop immediately.

Service

requiredA

Have the vehicle checked

by an authorized Volvo

workshop as soon as pos-

sible.

See man-

ualA

Read the owner's manual.

Book time

for mainte-

nance

Time to book service at an

authorized Volvo retailer.

Message Description

Time for

regular

mainte-

nance

Time for regular service at

an authorized Volvo work-

shop. The timing is deter-

mined by the number of

miles driven, number of

months since the last

service, engine running

time.

Mainte-

nance over-

due

If the service intervals are

not followed, the warranty

does not cover any dam-

aged parts. Contact an

authorized Volvo work-

shop for service.

Temporarily

OFFA

A function has been tem-

porarily switched off and

is reset automatically while

driving or after starting

again.

Low battery

Power save

mode

The audio system is

switched off to save cur-

rent. Charge the battery.

AThere will also be a system-specific part of this message

03 Instruments and controls
03
113
Related information
•Information displays – introduction (p. 66)
•Information display – menu overview
(p. 111)
•Information display – menu controls
(p. 111)
Trip computer – introduction 
The content and appearance of the trip com-
puter varies depending on whether the vehi-
cle is equipped with an Analog or Digital
instrument panel.
Analog information display and controls
Digital information displays and controls
The instrument panel illuminates as soon as
the vehicle is unlocked and trip computer set-
tings can be made. If none of the trip com-
puter's controls are used within 30 seconds
after the driver's door has been opened, the
instrument panel lighting will go out and the
trip computer cannot be used again until:
•the ignition is put in mode II25
•the engine is started
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you
are using the trip computer, this message
must be acknowledged in order to return
to the trip computer function. Acknowl-
edge a message by pressing OK.
Related information
•Trip computer – functions, analog instru-
ment panel (p. 114)
•Trip computer – functions, digital instru-
ment panel (p. 117)
•Trip computer – Supplementary informa-
tion (p. 119)
•Trip computer – Trip statistics (p. 120)
25 See Ignition modes (p. 77) for information about the various ignition modes.

03 Instruments and controls

114

Trip computer – functions, analog

instrument panel

Information display and controls

OK–press to access the trip computer's

functions or acknowledge/confirm/erase

a message

Thumb wheel–turn to access the list of

trip computer information headings and

to scroll among the alternatives

RESET–press to cancel/reset/exit a func-

tion after a selection has been made

The trip computer has two different menu

groups:

•Trip computer functions

•Trip computer information headings in the

instrument panel

Functions

To open and make settings in the trip com-

puter functions:

1. Ensure that none of the trip computer

controls are being used in a command

sequence; reset them by pressing RESET

twice.

2. Press OK to open the list of functions.

3. Use the thumb wheel to scroll among the

functions and select/confirm your choice

by pressing OK.

4. After completing your selection, exit by

pressing RESET twice.

The following table lists the analog trip com-

puter's functions:

03 Instruments and controls

}}

115

Function Description

Digital speed

– km/h

– mph

– None

This displays the vehicle's speed digitally in the center of the instrument panel

•Open by pressing OK, scroll using the thumb wheel, confirm by pressing OK and exit by pressing

ENTER.

Trip comp. opt.

– Distance to empty

– Fuel consumption

– Average speed

– Trip odometer T1 and total dist.

– Trip odometer T2 and total dist.

Selections among the trip computer information headings are made here. The symbols that have already

been selected have a check mark and are displayed in white. Those not selected are not checked and

are displayed in gray:

1. Open the function by pressing OK and scroll to the desired heading using the thumb wheel.

2. Confirm by pressing OK. The symbol will change colors from gray to white and will be checked.

3. Continue this procedure or exit by pressing RESET.

Service status Shows the number of months and mileage until the next scheduled service.

Messages (##) For additional information, see Information display – menu controls (p. 111).

Information headings

Any of the information headings in the follow-

ing table can be displayed. To do so:

1. Ensure that none of the trip computer

controls are being used in a command

sequence; reset them by pressing RESET

twice.

2. Turn the thumb wheel to begin display-

ing the information headings. Stop on the

desired heading.

3. See the table for an explanation of the

heading or the actions that can be taken.

03 Instruments and controls

116

Information headings in the instrument

panel

Description

Trip odometer T1 and total dist. •Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T1.

Trip odometer T2 and total dist. •Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T2.

Distance to empty See Distance to empty in Trip computer – Supplementary information (p. 119).

Fuel consumption Current fuel consumption.

Average speed Press and hold RESET to reset Average speed.

- No information will be displayed. This also indicates the beginning/end of the list of information

headings.

Scroll among the trip computer information

headings at any time by turning the thumb

wheel until the desired heading is displayed.

Related information

•Trip computer – introduction (p. 113)

•Trip computer – functions, digital instru-

ment panel (p. 117)

•Trip computer – Supplementary informa-

tion (p. 119)

•Trip computer – Trip statistics (p. 120)

03 Instruments and controls

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 117

Trip computer – functions, digital

instrument panel

Information displays and controls

OK–press to access the trip computer's

functions or to activate a selection

Thumb wheel–turn to access the list of

trip computer information headings and

to scroll among the alternatives

RESET–press to cancel/reset/exit a func-

tion after a selection has been made

The trip computer has two different menu

groups:

•Trip computer functions

•Trip computer information headings in the

instrument panel

Functions

To open and make settings in the trip com-

puter functions:

1. Ensure that none of the trip computer

controls are being used in a command

sequence; reset them by pressing RESET

twice.

2. Press OK to open the list of functions.

3. Use the thumb wheel to scroll among the

functions and select/confirm your choice

by pressing OK.

4. After completing your selection, exit by

pressing RESET twice.

The following table lists the digital trip com-

puter's functions:

Function Description

Trip computer reset

– Average fuel consumption

– Average speed

NOTE: This function does not reset the trip odometers, see Trip computer – Supplementary information

(p. 119) for a description of how this is done.

Messages For additional information, see Information display – menu controls (p. 111).

Themes Set the way in which information is displayed in the instrument panel, see Information displays – intro-

duction (p. 66).

Settings*Select Auto On or Off.

03 Instruments and controls

118

Function Description

Contrast mode/Color mode Adjust the instrument panel's contrast and color.

Service status Shows the number of months and mileage until the next scheduled service.

Information headings

Three trip computer headings can be dis-

played at the same time; one in each of the

displays (see the previous illustration). One of

the combinations of information headings in

the following table can be displayed. To do

so:

1. Ensure that none of the trip computer

controls are being used in a command

sequence; reset them by pressing RESET

twice.

2. Turn the thumb wheel to begin display-

ing the combinations of information head-

ings. Stop on the desired combination.

3. See the table for an explanation of the

heading or the actions that can be taken.

Scroll among the combinations of trip com-

puter information headings at any time by

turning the thumb wheel until the desired

combination is displayed.

Heading combinations Description

Average fuel consump-

tion

Trip odometer T1 + mile-

age

Average speed •Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T1.

Current fuel consumption Trip odometer T2 + mile-

age

Distance to empty •Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T2.

Current fuel consumption Mileage mph<>km/h Change between mph<>km/h – see "Digital speed display" in Trip

computer – Supplementary information (p. 119).

- No trip computer informa-

tion displayed

- No information will be displayed. This also indicates the begin-

ning/end of the list of information headings.

Scroll among the trip computer information

headings at any time by turning the thumb

wheel until the desired heading is displayed.

Related information

•Trip computer – introduction (p. 113)

•Trip computer – functions, analog instru-

ment panel (p. 114)

•Trip computer – Supplementary informa-

tion (p. 119)

•Trip computer – Trip statistics (p. 120)

03 Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 119

Trip computer – Supplementary

information

General information for both Analog and Digi-

tal trip computer functions.

Average fuel consumption

Fuel consumption since the last time this

function was reset.

Average speed

The vehicle's average speed since the last

time this function was reset.

Current fuel consumption

Current fuel consumption is calculated

approximately once a second. When the vehi-

cle is moving at low speed, fuel consumption

is displayed per unit of time. At higher

speeds, it is displayed in terms of distance.

Miles or kilometers can be displayed, see the

heading "Changing units".

Distance to empty

This function shows the approximate dis-

tance that can be driven on the fuel remaining

in the tank. When Distance to empty shows

"----", there is very little useable fuel remain-

ing in that tank; refuel as soon as possible.

The calculation is based on average fuel con-

sumption during the last 20 miles (30 km) of

driving and the amount of fuel remaining in

the tank (the accuracy of this figure may vary

if your driving style changes). An economical

driving style will generally increase this dis-

tance.

See Economical driving (p. 285) for informa-

tion about driving economically.

Digital speed display*

Speed is expressed in the unit not used by

the instrument panel's speedometer e.g., if

the normal speedometer is in mph, the trip

computer will display in the speed in km/h

and vice versa.

Resetting an analog instrument panel

Trip odometer(s) and average speed

1. Display trip odometer T1 or T1, or Aver-

age speed.

2. Press and hold RESET until selected

function is reset.

Each trip computer heading must be reset

individually.

Resetting a digital instrument panel

Trip odometer

1. Turn the thumb wheel to select the com-

bination of headings containing the trip

odometer to be reset.

2. Press and hold RESET until selected trip

odometer is reset.

Average speed and fuel consumption

1. Select Trip computer reset and press

OK.

2. Select one of the following alternatives

using the thumb wheel and press OK:

•mpg

•mph

•Reset both

3. Finish by pressing RESET.

Changing units

To change the unit (miles/km) used to meas-

ure distance and speed, go to MY CAR

Settings System options Distance

and fuel units.

NOTE

In addition to changing units in the trip

computer, this also changes the units used

in the Volvo Navigation System (VNS)*.

Related information

•Trip computer – introduction (p. 113)

•Trip computer – functions, analog instru-

ment panel (p. 114)

•Trip computer – functions, digital instru-

ment panel (p. 117)

•Trip computer – Trip statistics (p. 120)

03 Instruments and controls
03
120 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Trip computer – Trip statistics
Trip information from previous trips regarding
average fuel consumption and average speed
is stored and can be displayed in the form of
a bar chart.
Function
Trip statistics26
Each bar represents a driving distance of
1 mile or 10 miles, depending on the current
scale; the bar at the far right shows the value
for the current mile/10 miles.
Use TUNE to change between 1 mile and
10 miles; the marker at the right will also
change according to the scale selected.
Settings
Settings can be made in the MY CAR menu
system as follows:
MY CAR My V60 Trip statistics:
•Start new trip: press ENTER to erase all
pervious statistics. Exit the menu by
pressing EXIT.
•Reset for every driving cycle: select by
pressing ENTER. Exit the menu by press-
ing EXIT.
Selecting Reset for every driving cycle era-
ses all trip statistics automatically if the igni-
tion is switched off for at least 4 hours. When
the engine is restarted, new statistics will be
stored.
To get new statistics if the engine is restarted
before 4 hours have elapsed, the existing
ones have to be erased manually by selecting
Start new trip.
For additional information, see Information
display – menu controls (p. 111).
See also the information about Eco Guide in
Eco Guide* and Power Meter* (p. 69).
Related information
•Trip computer – introduction (p. 113)
•Trip computer – functions, analog instru-
ment panel (p. 114)
•Trip computer – functions, digital instru-
ment panel (p. 117)
•Trip computer – Supplementary informa-
tion (p. 119)
26 The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model

C L I M A T E

04 Climate
04
122 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Climate – general information
The vehicle is equipped with Electronic Cli-
mate Control (ECC) (p. 126) that cools, heats
or dehumidifies the air in the passenger com-
partment.
Air conditioning
NOTE
•The air conditioning can be switched
off, but to ensure the best possible cli-
mate comfort in the passenger com-
partment and to prevent the windows
from misting, it should always be on.
•In warm weather, a small amount of
water may accumulate under the car
when it has been parked. This water is
condensation from the A/C system
and is normal.
Side windows and moonroof
To ensure that the air conditioning works
optimally, the side windows, and the optional
moonroof should be closed.
Fog on the inside of the windows
The defroster function (p. 129) should be
used to remove fog or mist from the inside of
the windows. Keeping the windows clean
with a commercially available window wash-
ing spray will also help prevent fogging or
misting.
Temporary shut-off of the air
conditioning
The air conditioning (p. 129) is momentarily
disengaged during full acceleration or when
driving uphill with a trailer. This may result in
a temporary increase in cabin temperature.
Ice and snow
Always keep the air intake grille at the base of
the windshield free of snow.
Climate system maintenance
Special tools and equipment are required to
maintain and carry out repairs on the climate
system. Work of this type should only be
done by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
Refrigerant
Volvo cares about the environment. The air
conditioning system in your car contains a
CFC-free refrigerant – R134a. This substance
will not deplete the ozone layer. The air con-
ditioning system contains 1.76 lbs (800 g) of
R134a. The systems uses PAG oil.
Related information
•Climate – sensors (p. 122)
•Climate – menu settings (p. 124)
Climate – sensors
The climate system utilizes a number of sen-
sors to help regulate the temperature and
humidity level in the passenger compartment.
Sensor location
•The sunlight sensor is located on the top
side of the dashboard.
NOTE
The sunlight sensor monitors which side of
the car that is most exposed to sunlight.
This can mean that the temperature may
differ between the right and left-side air
vents, even if the temperatures set for both
sides of the passenger compartment are
the same.
•The temperature sensor for the passen-
ger compartment is located below the cli-
mate control panel.
•The outside (ambient) temperature sensor
is located on the door mirror.
•The humidity sensor* is located in the
interior rearview mirror.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with
clothing or other objects.
Related information
•Climate – general information (p. 122)

04 Climate
04
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 123
Air quality
The passenger compartment has been
designed to be pleasant and comfortable,
even for people with asthma and contact
allergies.
Passenger compartment filter
Replace the cabin air filter with a new one at
the recommended intervals. Please refer to
your Warranty and Service Records Informa-
tion booklet, or consult a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician for these intervals.
The filter should be replaced more often when
driving under dirty and dusty conditions. The
filter cannot be cleaned and therefore should
always be replaced with a new one.
NOTE
There are different types of cabin air filters.
Ensure that the correct type is installed.
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)
A multifilter helps reduce gases and particles
in the incoming air, thereby reducing the lev-
els of odors and contaminants entering the
vehicle. The air quality sensor detects
increased levels of contaminants in the out-
side air. When the air quality sensor detects
contaminated outside air, the air intake closes
and the air inside the passenger compart-
ment is recirculated, i.e., no outside air enters
the vehicle. The filter also cleans recirculated
passenger compartment air.
NOTE
Contact your Volvo retailer for IAQS air fil-
ter replacement intervals.
Materials used in the cabin
The materials used in the cabin have been
developed to help minimize the amount of
dust and make the cabin easier to keep
clean. All floor mats can be easily removed
for cleaning. Use car cleaning products rec-
ommended by Volvo. See also the informa-
tion in Cleaning the interior (p. 366).
Related information
•Climate – general information (p. 122)
•Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)*
(p. 123)
•Climate – menu settings (p. 124)
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)*
The Air Quality System (IAQS) consists of a
multifilter and an air quality sensor. The filter
helps remove gases and particles from the
incoming air, thereby reducing the amounts of
odors and contaminants entering the vehicle.
The air quality (p. 123) sensor detects
increased levels of contaminants in the out-
side air. When the air quality sensor detects
contaminated outside air, the air intake closes
and the air inside the passenger compart-
ment is recirculated, i.e., no outside air enters
the vehicle. The filter also cleans recirculated
passenger compartment air. When the
AUTO (p. 128) button is depressed the air
quality sensor is always engaged.
Activate or deactivate this function in Climate
settings Interior air quality system.
NOTE
•The air quality sensor should always
be engaged in order to obtain the best
air in the passenger compartment.
•Recirculation is limited in cold weather
to avoid fogging.
•If the insides of the windows start fog-
ging, disengage the air quality sensor.
Use the defroster function to increase
airflow to the front, side, and rear win-
dows.

||
04 Climate
04
124 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Related information
•Climate – general information (p. 122)
•Max. defroster and electrically heated
windshield* (p. 129)
Climate – menu settings
The default settings for four of the climate
system's (p. 122) functions can be changed in
the menu system.
•Blower speed (p. 128) in automatic
mode (p. 128).
•Recirculation timer (p. 131) for passenger
compartment air.
•Automatic rear window defrost-
ing (p. 102).
•The optional Interior Air Quality Sys-
tem (p. 123) (IAQS).
The functions can also be returned to factory
settings in the menu system.
See My Car – introduction (p. 74) for a
description of the menu system.
Related information
•Electronic climate control (ECC) (p. 126)
Air distribution – general
The incoming air is distributed through a
number of different vents in the passenger
compartment.
Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO
mode (p. 128).
If desired, air distribution can be controlled
manually, see Air distribution – function
(p. 130).

04 Climate

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 125

Air vents in the dashboard

Open

Closed

Horizontal airflow

Vertical airflow

Direct the outer air vents toward the side win-

dows to defrost.

Air vents in the door pillars

Closed

Open

Horizontal airflow

Vertical airflow

Direct the outer air vents toward the side win-

dows to defrost.

Direct the vents into the passenger compart-

ment to help maintain the desired tempera-

ture in the rear seat.

Related information

•Climate – general information (p. 122)

•Air distribution – table (p. 132)

•Air distribution – recirculation (p. 131)

•Max. defroster and electrically heated

windshield* (p. 129)

04 Climate
04
126 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Electronic climate control (ECC)
ECC (Electronic Climate Control) helps main-
tain the selected temperature in the passen-
ger compartment and the temperature can be
set separately on the driver's and passenger's
sides.
The AUTO function (p. 128) automatically
regulates the temperature, air conditioning,
blower speed, recirculation and air distribu-
tion.
Temperature control (p. 128), driver's
side
Heated driver's seat* (p. 127)
Defroster (maximum effect), electrically
heated windshield* (p. 129)
Blower (p. 128)
Manual air distribution (p. 124)—floor
Manual air distribution—dashboard air
vents
Manual air distribution—defroster
Heated rear window and door mir-
rors (p. 102)
Heated front passenger's seat* (p. 127)
Temperature control (p. 128), passeng-
er's side
Recirculation (p. 131)
AUTO (p. 128)
A/C (p. 129) on/off
Related information
•Climate – general information (p. 122)

04 Climate

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 127

Heated seats

The front seat heating has three levels to

increase comfort for the driver and passenger

in cold weather.

The rear outboard seat heating has three lev-

els to increase comfort for the passengers in

cold weather.

Heated front seats*

The current seat temperature setting is shown in

the center console display

Press the lower section of

the button repeatedly until

the desired number of indi-

cator lights illuminate:

Highest heat level – three

indicator lights.

Medium heat level – two indicator lights.

Lowest heat level – one indicator light.

If no indicator lights are illuminated, the seat

heating is switched off.

Seat heating will automatically switch off

when the engine is switched off.

Starting the seat heating automatically

This setting starts heating the driver's seat (at

the highest level) automatically when the

engine is started if the ambient temperature is

below approx. 50° F (10° C).

Activate/deactivate this function in the

MY CAR menu system, under Settings

Climate settings Auto start driver seat

heater.

Heated rear seats*

Heat control for the outboard seating posi-

tions is done in the same way as for the front

seats.

Related information

•Climate – general information (p. 122)

•Electronic climate control (ECC) (p. 126)

04 Climate
04
128
Temperature and blower control
When the vehicle is started, the most recent
setting is resumed.
The blower should always be activated to
help avoid condensation and fogging on the
windows.
Temperature control
The temperatures on the
driver and passenger sides
can be set separately.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be speeded up
by selecting a higher/lower temperature
than the actual temperature required.
Blower control
Turn the control clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise
to decrease the blower
speed. If AUTO (p. 128) is
selected, blower speed will
be regulated automatically
and this will override manual
adjustment.
NOTE
If the blower is turned off completely, the
air conditioning is disengaged, which may
result in fogging on the windows.
Related information
•Climate – general information (p. 122)
•Electronic climate control (ECC) (p. 126)
•Air conditioning (p. 129)
•Climate – sensors (p. 122)
Automatic climate control
The Auto function automatically controls tem-
perature (p. 128), air conditioning (p. 129),
blower speed (p. 128), recirculation (p. 131)
and air distribution (p. 124).
If you select one or more
manual functions, the other
functions continue to be
controlled automatically. The
air quality (p. 123) sensor is
engaged and all manual set-
tings are switched off when
AUTO is pressed. The display shows AUTO
CLIMATE.
Blower speed in automatic mode can be set
under Climate settings Automatic blower
adjustment. Choose between Low, Normal
or High.
NOTE
Selecting the lowest blower speed may
increases the risk of fog forming on the
windows.
Related information
•Climate – general information (p. 122)

04 Climate

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 129

Air conditioning

The air conditioning function cools and dehu-

midifies the air in the passenger compart-

ment.

When the indicator light in

the button is on, the air con-

ditioning is controlled auto-

matically. This cools/heats

and dehumidifies the incom-

ing air. When the indicator

light in the button is off, the

air conditioning is disengaged. Other func-

tions are still controlled automatically. When

maximum defroster (p. 129) is selected, the

air conditioning system is set for maximum

blower speed and dehumidifies the cabin as

quickly as possible.

Related information

•Climate – general information (p. 122)

•Automatic climate control (p. 128)

Max. defroster and electrically heated

windshield*

The heated windshield and max. defroster

functions are used to clear the windshield and

front side windows of condensation and ice

as quickly as possible.

The selected settings are shown in the center

console display

Electrical heating*

Max. defroster

Models without an electrically heated wind-

shield

•Press the button once to start

defrosting/de-icing the windshield and

front side windows. The indicator light (2)

in the defroster button illuminates when

the function is active.

•Press the button twice to switch off the

defroster (the indicator light will switch

off).

Models with an electrically heated wind-

shield*

•If this feature is switched off, press the

button once to start heating the wind-

shield1. Symbol (1) will illuminate in the

center console display.

•Press the button twice to start both the

defroster and the windshield heating.

Symbols (1) and (2) will illuminate in the

center console display.

•If these features are on, press the button

to switch them off. The symbols will no

longer be displayed.

1If a "C" appears in the rear-view mirror when the button is pressed, the compass* has to be recalibrated, see Digital compass* (p. 103).

04 Climate

130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

•Triangular areas at the far sides of the

windshield are not heated electrically

and will take slightly longer to

defrost/de-ice.

•The heated windshield may affect the

performance/range of e.g., transpond-

ers used to automatically pay highway

tolls or other communication equip-

ment.

The following occurs when the defroster/

windshield heating functions have been acti-

vated:

•Blower speed increases automatically

and the air conditioning (p. 129) will

switch on (if not already on and if the pas-

senger compartment blower is not turned

off) to dehumidify the air in the passenger

compartment. Air conditioning can be

switched off by pressing the AC button.

•Recirculation (p. 131) will not function

while defrost is engaged.

The climate system will return to its previous

settings when the defroster/windshield heat-

ing function is switched off.

See also Heated windshield*, rear window

and door mirror defrosters (p. 102) for addi-

tional information.

Related information

•Climate – general information (p. 122)

•Automatic climate control (p. 128)

Air distribution – function

The air distribution function consists of three

buttons.

Manual air distribution—defroster

Manual air distribution—dashboard air

vents

Manual air distribution—floor

When a button is pressed, the corresponding

figure will appear in the display with an arrow

indicating which manual air flow has been

selected (see the following illustration). See

also the air distribution chart (p. 132).

04 Climate
04
131
Air distribution is shown in the center console
display
Related information
•Climate – general information (p. 122)
•Air distribution – general (p. 124)
•Air distribution – recirculation (p. 131)
Air distribution – recirculation
Recirculation can be used to shut out exhaust
fumes, smoke, etc., from the passenger com-
partment.
The air in the passenger
compartment is then recircu-
lated, i.e., no air from outside
the car is taken into the car
when this function is acti-
vated. The indicator light in
the button will illuminate
when recirculation is selected.
If the air in the car recirculates for too long,
there is a risk of condensation forming on the
insides of the windows, especially in winter.
Timer
The timer function minimizes the risk of fog-
ging, or stale air when the recirculation func-
tion is selected by automatically switching off
the function after a certain length of time,
depending on the ambient temperature. Acti-
vate/deactivate the function under Climate
settings Recirculation timer. See My Car
– introduction (p. 74) for a description of the
menu system.
NOTE
When Defroster is selected, recirculation is
always deactivated.
Related information
•Climate – general information (p. 122)
•Air distribution – general (p. 124)
•Air distribution – function (p. 130)
•Air distribution – table (p. 132)

04 Climate

132

Air distribution – table

Air distribution (p. 124) is selected using the

buttons in the center console climate panel.

Air distribution Use Air distribution Use

Air to windows. Some air

flows from the dashboard air

vents. The air is not recircula-

ted. Air conditioning is always

engaged.

To remove de-fog/de-

ice the front side win-

dows and windshield

quickly.

Air to the floor and

windows. Some air

flows from the dash-

board air vents.

To ensure comfortable

conditions and good de-

fogging in cold or humid

weather.

Air to windshield and side win-

dows. Some air flows from the

air dashboard vents.

In cold or humid

weather (blower

speed should be

moderate to high).

Air to floor and from

dashboard air vents.

In sunny weather with

cool outside tempera-

tures.

Airflow to windows and from

dashboard air vents.

To ensure good com-

fort in warm, dry

weather.

Air to floor. Some air

flows to the dashboard

air vents and windows.

To warm or cool the

feet.

Airflow to the head and chest

from the dashboard air vents.

To ensure efficient

cooling in warm

weather.

Airflow to windows,

from dashboard air

vents and to the floor.

To cool the feet or pro-

vide warmer air to the

upper body in cold

weather or hot, dry

weather.

04 Climate

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 133

Related information

•Climate – general information (p. 122)

•Air distribution – function (p. 130)

•Max. defroster and electrically heated

windshield* (p. 129)

L O A D I N G A N D S T O R A G E

05 Loading and storage

}}

135

Storage spaces

The following is an overview of the storage

compartments in the passenger compart-

ment.

05 Loading and storage

136 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Compartment in door panel

Storage pocket on the front edge of the

front seat cushions

Glove compartment (p. 138)

Storage compartment

Storage compartment (p. 137), 12-volt

socket (p. 137) and AUX input/USB con-

nector

Rear seat cup holders

Storage pocket

Related information

•Vanity mirror (p. 138)

•12-volt socket in the cargo area* (p. 138)

05 Loading and storage

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 137

Tunnel console

The tunnel console is located between the

front seats.

Storage compartment (for CDs, etc.)

under armrest, AUX input/USB connec-

tor.

Includes cup holder for driver and pas-

senger, 12-volt socket (p. 137) and a

small storage compartment.

Related information

•Storage spaces (p. 135)

Tunnel console – 12-volt sockets

The electrical sockets can be used for 12-volt

accessories such as cell phone chargers and

coolers. For the socket to supply current, the

ignition must be in at least mode I (p. 77). The

sockets are located between the cup holders

in the tunnel console and on the rear side of

the tunnel console (p. 137) for rear seat pas-

sengers.

12-volt socket in the front tunnel console

12-volt socket in the rear center console

The maximum current consumption is 10A

(120W) if only one of the 12-volt sockets in

the passenger compartment is in use. If both

the front and rear sockets are used at the

same time, the maximum current consump-

tion per socket is 7.5A (90W).

The auxiliary sockets can also be used to

power a cigarette lighter. Accessory cigarette

lighters and ashtrays can be purchased from

your Volvo retailer.

WARNING

Always keep the sockets covered when

not in use.

Related information

•Storage spaces (p. 135)

•12-volt socket in the cargo area* (p. 138)

05 Loading and storage

138 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Glove compartment

The glove compartment provides a lockable

storage compartment for small items.

The owner's manual and maps can be kept

here. There are also holders for pens and fuel

cards. The glove compartment can be locked

manually with the key blade, see Locking/

unlocking – glove compartment (p. 162).

Related information

•Storage spaces (p. 135)

Vanity mirror

The vanity mirrors are located on the upper

side of the sun visors.

Vanity mirror with lighting

The light comes on automatically when the

cover is lifted.

Related information

•Storage spaces (p. 135)

•Bulbs – vanity mirror lighting (p. 345)

12-volt socket in the cargo area*

The 12-volt socket can be used e.g., to con-

nect the tire sealing system's compressor

(certain models) and other 12-volt accesso-

ries.

Fold down the cover to access the electrical

socket.

NOTE

The 12-volt socket in the cargo area pro-

vides electrical current even when the igni-

tion is switched off. Using the socket while

the engine is not running will drain the bat-

tery.

Related information

•Storage spaces (p. 135)

•Tunnel console – 12-volt sockets (p. 137)

05 Loading and storage

}}

139

Loading – general

The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is

determined by factors such as the number of

passengers, the amount of cargo, the weight

of any accessories that may be installed, etc.

To increase loading space, the rear seat

backrests can be folded down, see Rear

seats – folding backrest (p. 84).

When loading the cargo area, keep the fol-

lowing in mind:

•Load objects in the cargo area against

the backrest whenever possible.

•Unstable loads can be secured to the

load anchoring eyelets with straps or web

lashings to help keep them from shifting.

•Stop the engine and apply the parking

brake when loading or unloading long

objects. The gear selector can be

knocked out of position by long loads,

which could set the vehicle in motion.

WARNING

•Stop the engine, put the gear selector

in P, and apply the parking brake

when loading or unloading long

objects.

•The vehicle's driving characteristics

may change depending on the weight

and distribution of the load.

•A 44-pound (20 kg) object produces a

force of 2,200 pounds (1,000 kg) in a

head-on collision at 30 mph (50 km/h).

•The cargo area and rear seat should

not be loaded to a level higher than

2 in. (5 cm) below the upper edge of

the rear side windows. Objects placed

higher than this level could impede the

function of the Inflatable Curtain.

Related information

•Load anchoring eyelets (p. 140)

•Steel cargo grid (p. 143)

•Loading – roof load carriers (p. 139)

Loading – roof load carriers

Using load carriers

Load carriers are available as Volvo accesso-

ries. Observe the following points when in

use:

•To avoid damaging your vehicle and to

achieve maximum safety when driving,

we recommend using the load carriers

that Volvo has developed especially for

your vehicle.

•Volvo-approved removable roof racks are

designed to carry the maximum allowable

roof load for this vehicle: 220 lbs (100 kg).

For non-Volvo roof racks, check the man-

ufacturer's weight limits for the rack.

•Never exceed the rack manufacturer's

weigh limits and never exceed the maxi-

mum rated roof load of 220 lbs (100 kg).

•Avoid single-point loads. Distribute loads

evenly.

•Place heavier cargo at the bottom of the

load.

•Secure the cargo correctly with appropri-

ate tie-down equipment.

•Check periodically that the load carriers

and load are properly secured.

•Remember that the vehicle's center of

gravity and handling change when you

carry a load on the roof.

05 Loading and storage

140

•The vehicle's wind resistance and fuel

consumption will increase with the size of

the load.

•Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid starts, fast

cornering and hard braking.

Related information

•Loading – general (p. 139)

•Load anchoring eyelets (p. 140)

Load anchoring eyelets

The load anchoring eyelets on both sides of

the vehicle are used to fasten straps, etc., to

help anchor items in the cargo area.

WARNING

The two upper hooks shown in the illustra-

tion are for holding grocery bags only.

They are not intended for anchoring heavy

objects.

WARNING

•Cover sharp edges on long loads to

help prevent injury to occupants.

Secure the load to help prevent shift-

ing during sudden stops.

•Always secure large and heavy objects

with a seat belt or cargo retaining

straps.

•Always secure the load to help prevent

it from moving in the event of sudden

stops.

•Switch off the engine, apply the park-

ing brake and put the gear selector in

P when loading and unloading the

vehicle.

Related information

•Loading – general (p. 139)

05 Loading and storage

}}

141

Grocery bag holder

The grocery bag holder holds shopping bags

in place.

Grocery bag holder under the floor of the cargo

area

The grocery bag holder holds shopping bags

in place.

1. Open the hatch in the floor of the cargo

area.

2. Secure the shopping bags with the strap.

Related information

•Loading – general (p. 139)

Cargo net – general information

The cargo net helps protect passengers from

objects in the cargo area in the event of a

sudden stop or hard braking.

Storage compartment for the cargo net

Two cassettes containing nylon cargo nets

are stored in a compartment under the cargo

area floor.

Attaching the cassette(s)

The two-sections of the net are attached to

the rear side of the rear seat backrest. The

cassettes have different widths, and the wid-

est section should be mounted on the right

side (seen from the rear of the vehicle).

1. Fold down the rear seat backrests.

2. Align the cassette’s mounting rail above

the mounting brackets on the backrest

3. Slide the cassette onto the mounting

brackets .

4. Return the backrest to the upright posi-

tion.

05 Loading and storage

142

Using the net(s)

G018246

With the backrests upright

The net is pulled up from the cassette and

locks in position after approximately 1

minute.

Pull up the right side of the net by grasp-

ing its strap.

Insert the net’s rod in the retaining

bracket on the right side near the ceiling

and press it forward. It will click into

place.

Extend the left section of the rod and

insert it in the bracket on the left side of

the cargo compartment. Press it forward

until it clicks into place.

Pull up the left side of the cargo net and

secure it on the rod.

NOTE

•The net can be fastened in the same

way if the rear seat backrests are

folded down. In this case, use the

retaining brackets near the ceiling,

above the front seats.

•The front passenger's seat backrest

can also be folded down for carrying

long objects.

Removing the cargo net cassettes

1. Retract the net(s) in the reverse order.

2. Fold the entire rear seat backrest down.

3. Slide the cassettes outward until they

release from the mounting brackets.

WARNING

•When not in use, return the cassettes

to their storage compartment under

the cargo area floor.

•Objects in the cargo area should be

securely anchored, even if the cargo

net is correctly installed and in use.

Using the cargo net with the cargo area

cover

Straps for pulling up the net

The cargo net(s) can also be pulled up from

the backrest when the cargo area cover is

pulled out.

The straps for pulling up the cargo net are

located at the arrows in the illustration. Follow

the same procedure as for using the nets with

the backrests upright.

05 Loading and storage

}}

143

Cargo area cover

The cargo area cover can be used to conceal

objects in the cargo area.

Use

•Pull the cover over the cargo and hook it

into the holes in the rear cargo area pil-

lars.

•To retract (roll up) the cover, release it

from the holes and guide it toward the

rear seat backrest.

Installing the cover

1. Press the end piece on one side of the

cargo area cover into the retaining

bracket in the side panel of the cargo

area .

2. Do the same on the opposite side .

3. Press both sides of the cover until they

click into place . The red mark will no

longer be visible.

4. Check that both ends of the cover are

securely locked in place.

Removing the cover

1. Press one of the end pieces of the cover

inward.

2. Pull the cover carefully upward and out-

ward. The other end will release automati-

cally from its retaining bracket.

Folding down the cargo area cover's

rear flap

The cargo area cover's rear flap points hori-

zontally when the cover is retracted (rolled

up). To fold it down:

–Pull the flap slightly rearward past its sup-

ports and fold it down.

NOTE

On models equipped with this cover, it

should be removed before a child seat is

attached to the child restraint anchors.

Related information

•Loading – general (p. 139)

Steel cargo grid

Your vehicle can be equipped with a steel grid

that helps prevent objects in the cargo area

from moving forward into the passenger com-

partment.

Folding the grid up/down

Grasp the lowering edge of the grid and pull it

rearward/upward, or push it downward/

forward.

NOTE

If the steel grid is to be used with the

optional cargo area cover, the grid must

be folded down before the cargo area

cover is put in place.

05 Loading and storage

144

Installing the steel cargo grid

For information about the necessary tools

and procedures for installing/removing the

steel cargo grid, please refer to the assembly

instructions1 that were included when the grid

was purchased.

Related information

•Cargo area cover (p. 143)

1Assembly instruction no. 30756681.

L O C K S A N D A L A R M

06 Locks and alarm

146

Remote key and key blade

Two remote keys are provided with your vehi-

cle. They enable you to unlock the doors and

tailgate, and also function as ignition keys to

start the vehicle or operate electrical compo-

nents. The remote keys contain detachable

metal key blades for manually locking or

unlocking the driver's door and the glove

compartment. The visible ends of these key

blades are unique to make it easier to identify

"your" remote key. Up to six remotes can be

programmed for use on the same vehicle.

WARNING

Never leave the remote key in the ignition

slot if children are to remain in the vehicle.

For more information on the various ignition

modes, see Ignition modes (p. 77).

Related information

•Remote key – functions (p. 149)

•Remote key – range (p. 150)

Remote key – loss

If either of the remote keys (p. 146) is lost, the

other should be taken with the vehicle to a

Volvo retailer. As an anti-theft measure, the

code of the lost remote key must be erased

from the system.

NOTE

Additional or duplicate remote control keys

can be obtained from any authorized Volvo

retailer.

You can also obtain additional or duplicate

remote control keys from certain inde-

pendent repair facilities and locksmiths

that are qualified to make remote control

keys. Each key must be programmed to

work with your vehicle.

California Only:

A list of independent repair facilities and/or

locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut

and code replacement keys can be found:

•on the Volvo website at

http://www.volvocars.com/us/keys

•by calling Volvo Customer Care at

1-800-458-1552

The number of registered keys for the vehicle

can be found by pressing MY CAR and going

into Settings Information Number of

keys. For a description of the menu system,

see My Car – introduction (p. 74).

USA-5WK49264

FCC ID:KR55WK49264 + Siemens VDO

5WK49236

FCC ID:KR55WK49236, 5WK49266

FCC ID:KR55WK49266 + Siemens VDO

5WK49233

FCC ID:KR55WK49233

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

rules and RSS-210. Operation is subject to

the following conditions: (1) This device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Canada-5WK49264

IC:267T-5WK49264 + Siemens VDO

5WK49236

IC:267T-5WK49236, 5WK49266

IC:267T-5WK49266 + Siemens VDO

5WK49233

IC:267T-5WK49233

Operation is subject to the following condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

Related information

•Remote key – functions (p. 149)

06 Locks and alarm
06
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 147
Key memory
The memory in the remote key makes it possi-
ble to store certain personal settings.
The position of the side door mirrors, power
driver's seat* and the selected instrument
panel theme1 are stored in the remote keys
when the vehicle is locked. The next time the
driver's door is unlocked with the same
remote key and the door is opened within
2 minutes, the power driver's seat and side
door mirrors will automatically move to the
position that they were in when the doors
were most recently locked with the same
remote key. If the seat/mirrors have not been
readjusted since the vehicle was locked, they
will already be in the position stored in that
particular remote key and will not move. For
more information on this feature, see Front
seats – power seat (p. 79).
This feature can be activated or deactivated
in the vehicle's menu by pressing MY CAR
and going into Settings Car settings
Car key memory. For a description of the
menu system, see My Car – introduction
(p. 74).
NOTE
If the vehicle is locked with the remote key
or is left unlocked for more than 30
minutes, the key memory function will be
deactivated.
To reactivate the key's memory:
•Press the unlock button on the remote
key.
For information regarding vehicles with the
optional keyless drive, see Keyless drive*–
locking/unlocking (p. 155).
Related information
•Locking/unlocking confirmation (p. 147)
Locking/unlocking confirmation
Settings can be made in the menu system for
audible and visual confirmation when the
vehicle has been locked or unlocked. With
these functions activated, the following will
occur when the vehicle is locked/unlocked:
Locking confirmation
•The turn signals flash once, an audible
signal sounds and the door mirrors will
fold* in.
Confirmation will only be given when all doors
and the tailgate are properly closed and
locked.
NOTE
If you do not receive confirmation when
locking the vehicle, check whether a door
or the tailgate is ajar, or if this feature has
been turned off in the menu.
Unlocking confirmation
•The turn signals will flash twice and the
door mirrors will fold* out.
1Optional digital instrument panel only

06 Locks and alarm

148

Making a setting

Different alternatives for locking/unlocking

confirmation can be selected in the menus by

pressing MY CAR on the center console con-

trol panel.

•To activate visual confirmation: go to

Settings Car settings Light

settings and select Door lock

confirmation light and/or Unlock

confirmation light by pressing OK/

MENU.

•To activate audible confirmation: go to

Settings Car settings Lock

settings and select Audible

confirmation by pressing OK/MENU.

For a description of the menu system, see My

Car – introduction (p. 74).

Lock indicator

Lock/alarm indicator light

A flashing indicator light at the base of the

windshield verifies that the vehicle is locked.

Related information

•Locking/unlocking – from the outside

(p. 159)

•Locking/unlocking – from inside (p. 160)

•Locking/unlocking – tailgate (p. 162)

Immobilizer (start inhibitor)

The immobilizer is a start inhibitor that helps

prevent unauthorized persons from starting

the engine.

Each of the keys supplied with your vehicle

contains a coded transponder. The code in

the key is transmitted to an antenna in the

ignition slot where it is compared to the code

stored in the start inhibitor module. The vehi-

cle will start only with a properly coded key. If

you misplace a key, take the other keys to a

trained and qualified Volvo service technician

for reprogramming as an anti-theft measure.

The following messages (which may appear in

the instrument panel display) are related to

the immobilizer:

06 Locks and alarm

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 149

Message Meaning

Insert car

key

Remote key not recognized

during start. Try to start the

vehicle again.

Car key

not found

Vehicles with keyless drive*

only. Remote key not recog-

nized during start. Try to

start the vehicle again.

If the problem continues,

insert the remote key into the

ignition slot and try to start

the vehicle again.

Immobil-

izer Try

start

again

Remote key fault during

start. Contact an authorized

Volvo workshop.

CAUTION

Never use force when inserting the remote

key in the ignition slot. The vehicle cannot

be started if the transponder is damaged.

USA–FCC ID: LTQWFS 125VO

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

rules. Operation is subject to the following

condition: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired opera-

tion.

Canada–IC: 3659A-WFS125VO

Operation is subject to the following condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

For information on starting the vehicle, see

Starting the engine (p. 252).

Remote key – functions

The remote key is used e.g., to unlock the

doors and start the engine.

Remote key

Lock

Unlock

Approach lighting

Tailgate unlock

Panic alarm

Buttons on the remote

Lock – Press the Lock button on the

remote once to lock all doors and the tailgate.

The turn signals will flash once to confirm

locking.

Unlock – Press the Unlock button on the

remote once to unlock the driver's door.

||
06 Locks and alarm
06
150 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
After a short pause, press the Unlock button
a second time within 10 seconds to unlock
the other doors and the tailgate.
This function can be changed so that all
doors unlock at the same time by pressing
My Car and going to Settings Car
settings Lock settings Change doors
unlock setting. For a description of the menu
system, see My Car – introduction (p. 74).
 Approach lighting – As you approach
the vehicle, press the button on the remote
key to light the interior lighting, parking lights,
license plate lighting and the lights in the door
mirrors*.
These lights will switch off automatically after
30, 60 or 90 seconds. For a description of the
menu system, see My Car – introduction
(p. 74).
 Unlock tailgate – Press the button twice
within several seconds to disarm the alarm
system (the alarm indicator light on the dash-
board will go out), and unlock only the tail-
gate.
NOTE
As an added safety precaution, the parking
lights will come on automatically for a
short period when the tailgate has been
opened.
After closing, the tailgate will not automati-
cally relock. Press Lock to relock it and rearm
the alarm.
For information on opening the tailgate from
the passenger compartment, see Locking/
unlocking – tailgate (p. 162)
 Panic alarm – This button can be used
to attract attention during emergency situa-
tions.
To activate the panic alarm, press and hold
this button for at least 3 seconds or press it
twice within 3 seconds. The turn signals and
horn will be activated. The panic alarm will
stop automatically after 2 minutes and
45 seconds.
To deactivate, wait approximately 5 seconds
and press the button again.
The Panic alarm button will not unlock the
vehicle.
Related information
•Locking/unlocking – from inside (p. 160)
•Locking/unlocking – from the outside
(p. 159)
•Locking/unlocking confirmation (p. 147)
Remote key – range
The remote key has a range of approximately
60 ft. (20 m) from the vehicle.
NOTE
Buildings or other obstacles may interfere
with the function of the remote key. The
vehicle can also be locked or unlocked
with the key blade, see Alarm-related func-
tions (p. 166).
If the remote key is removed from the vehicle
while the engine is running or if the ignition is
in mode I or II and all of the doors are closed,
a message will appear in the instrument panel
display and there will be an audible signal.
When the remote key is returned to the vehi-
cle, the message will be erased and the audi-
ble signal will stop after one of the following
has been done:
•The remote key is inserted in the ignition
slot
•The vehicle's speed exceeds 20 mph
(30 km/h)
•The OK button on the left steering wheel
lever is pressed
Related information
•Remote key – functions (p. 149)

06 Locks and alarm
06
151
Detachable key blade – general
information
Each remote key contains a detachable metal
key blade (p. 146) for mechanically locking or
unlocking the driver's door and the glove
compartment, and to enable the private lock-
ing(p. 152) function. For more information on
the key blade. The key blades have a unique
code, which is used if new ones need to be
produced. This code is available at an author-
ized Volvo retailer.
The visible ends of these key blades are
unique to make it easier to identify "your"
remote key.
Related information
•Detachable key blade – unlocking
(p. 152)
•Detachable key blade – detaching/rein-
serting (p. 151)
Detachable key blade – detaching/
reinserting
The detachable key blade (p. 151) can be
removed or reinserted in the remote key as
follows:
Removing the key blade
Slide the spring loaded catch to the side.
Pull the key blade straight out of the
remote key.
Reinserting the blade
1. Hold the remote key with the slot for the
key blade up.
2. Carefully slide the key blade into its
groove.
3. Gently press the key blade in the groove
until it clicks into place.
Related information
•Detachable key blade – unlocking
(p. 152)
•Child safety locks (p. 61)

06 Locks and alarm

152

Detachable key blade – unlocking

Your vehicle's remote key (p. 146) contains a

metal, detachable key blade that can be used

to unlock the driver's door, lock the glove

compartment, etc.

Driver's door keyhole cover

If the remote key does not function normally

(weak battery, etc.), the vehicle can be

unlocked with the detachable key blade.

1. Remove the detachable key

blade (p. 151) from the remote key.

2. Press the key blade approx. 0.5 in. (1 cm)

straight up in the hole on the underside of

the keyhole cover.

> The cover will come off due to the

pressure exerted when the key blade is

pushed upward.

3. Insert the key blade as far as possible in

the driver's door lock. Turn the key blade

to unlock the driver's door. This will trig-

ger the alarm.

4. To turn off the alarm, insert the remote

key in the ignition slot. This also applies

to vehicles equipped with the optional

keyless drive.

5. Press the cover back into place after the

door has been unlocked.

Related information

•Remote key and key blade (p. 146)

•Remote key – replacing the battery

(p. 153)

Private locking

By utilizing the remote key with the key blade

removed, the private locking feature enables

you to block access to the glove compart-

ment and disconnect the tailgate from the

central locking system for e.g., valet parking

or when the vehicle is brought to the retailer

for service.

G017869

Normal locking/unlocking points

06 Locks and alarm

}}

153

G017870

Locking/unlocking points with private locking

activated.

With the private locking function activated:

•The vehicle's doors can be locked or

unlocked with the remote

•The engine can be started

•The glove compartment cannot be

unlocked

•The tailgate cannot be unlocked or

opened with the remote

•The rear floor hatch cannot be opened

NOTE

The floor hatch must be closed completely

before the tailgate can be closed.

Activating the private locking function

Insert the key blade in the glove compart-

ment lock.

Turn the key blade180 degrees clock-

wise.

Remove the key blade from the lock. A

message will appear in the instrument

panel display.

Deactivating the private locking

function

Turn the key blade 180 degrees counter-

clockwise in the glove compartment lock to

deactivate private locking.

For information on locking the glove compart-

ment normally, without activating the private

locking function, see Locking/unlocking the

glove compartment (p. 162).

Remote key – replacing the battery

The remote key can be opened if the battery

needs to be replaced.

The battery should be replaced if:

•The information symbol illuminates and

Low battery in remote control. Please

change batteries. is shown in the dis-

play and/or

•if the locks do not react after several

attempts to unlock or lock the vehicle.

NOTE

The remote key's range is normally

approximately 60 ft (20 m) from the vehi-

cle.

06 Locks and alarm

154

Opening the remote key

The remote key has one CR 2430, 3V battery

only

To open the remote key

Slide the spring loaded catch to the

side.

Pull the key blade straight out of the

remote key.

Insert a small screwdriver in the hole

behind the spring loaded catch and care-

fully pry up the cover. Turn the remote

key with the buttons upward so that the

battery does not fall out when the cover is

removed.

Inserting a new battery

CAUTION

When handling batteries, avoid touching

their contact surfaces as this could result

in poor battery function in the remote key.

Note the position of the battery's (+) or (–)

sides.

1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old bat-

tery.

2. Insert a new one with the (+) side down-

ward.

Closing the remote key

1. Press the remote key's cover into place.

2. Hold the remote key with the slot for the

key blade up.

3. Carefully slide the key blade into its

groove.

4. Gently press the key blade in the groove

until it clicks into place.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that the batteries used

in the remote control meet the UN Manual

of Test and Criteria, Part III, sub-section

38.3.

Batteries installed in the key from the fac-

tory and batteries exchanged by an

authorized Volvo workshop fulfill the above

criteria.

Old batteries should be disposed of prop-

erly at a recycling center or at your Volvo

retailer.

Related information

•Remote key – functions (p. 149)

06 Locks and alarm

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 155

Keyless drive*– locking/unlocking

This system makes it possible to unlock and

lock the vehicle without having to press any

buttons on the remote key. It is only neces-

sary to have a keyless drive remote key in

your possession to operate the central locking

system.

Range of the keyless drive remote key–5 ft

(1.5 meters)

NOTE

•The gear selector must in the P posi-

tion before the vehicle can be locked

and the alarm can be armed.

•The buttons on the keyless drive

remote key can also be used to lock

and unlock the vehicle. For more infor-

mation, see Remote key and key blade

(p. 146).

Both of the remote keys provided with the

vehicle have the keyless function, and addi-

tional ones can be ordered. The system can

accommodate up to six remote keys.

The red rings in the illustration indicate the

area around the vehicle that is within range of

the keyless drive antennas.

Locking the vehicle

Models with keyless drive have a pressure-sensi-

tive area on the outside door handles and a rub-

ber-covered button next to the tailgate opening

control

The doors and the tailgate can be locked by

pressing the pressure-sensitive area on each

of the outside door handles or the rubber-

covered button next to the tailgate opening

control. The lock indicator on the dash will

begin to flash.

NOTE

On keyless drive vehicles, the gear selec-

tor must be in the Park (P) position, all

doors and the tailgate must be closed and

the ignition must be switched off before

the vehicle can be locked.

Unlocking the vehicle

•A keyless drive remote key must be on

the same side of the vehicle as the door

to be opened, and be within 5 feet

(1.5 meters) of the door's lock or the tail-

gate (see the shaded areas in the illustra-

tion).

•Pull a door handle to unlock and open the

door or pull the tailgate opening control.

The number of doors that are unlocked at the

same time can be set in the vehicle's menu

system. Press MY CAR and go to Car

settings Lock settings Keyless entry.

For a description of the menu system, see My

Car – introduction (p. 74).

NOTE

In some cases, wearing thick gloves or

pulling the door handle too quickly may

affect the unlocking function. If this

occurs, try pulling the door handle again or

pull it after taking off the glove.

Related information

•Alarm indicator (p. 165)

06 Locks and alarm

156 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Keyless drive* – unlocking with key

blade

If the remote key does not function normally

(weak battery, etc.), the vehicle can be

unlocked with the detachable key blade.

Driver's door keyhole cover

1. Remove the key blade from the remote

key (see Detachable key blade – detach-

ing/reinserting (p. 151) for instructions).

2. Press the key blade approx. 0.5 in. (1 cm)

straight up in the hole on the underside of

the keyhole cover.

> The cover will come off due to the

pressure exerted when the key blade is

pushed upward.

3. Insert the key blade as far as possible in

the driver's door lock. Turn the key blade

to unlock the driver's door. This will trig-

ger the alarm.

4. To turn off the alarm, insert the remote

key in the ignition slot. This also applies

to vehicles equipped with the optional

keyless drive.

5. Press the cover back into place after the

door has been unlocked.

Related information

•Keyless drive*– locking/unlocking (p. 155)

•Alarm – general information (p. 164)

Keyless drive* – key memory

When you leave the vehicle with a remote key

in your possession and lock any door, the

06 Locks and alarm

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 157

position of the driver's seat2 and door mirrors

will be stored in the remote key's memory.

The next time a door is opened by a person

with the same remote key in his/her posses-

sion, the driver's seat and door mirrors will

automatically move to the position that they

were in when the door was most recently

locked.

NOTE

If several people carrying remote keys

approach the vehicle at the same time, the

driver's seat and door mirrors will assume

the positions they were in for the person

who opens the driver's door.

See also power seats (p. 79) for information

on adjusting and storing the seat's position in

the seat memory.

NOTE

If the vehicle is locked by pressing the but-

ton on one of the door handles or by

pressing the lock button on the remote

key, or if it is left unlocked for more than

30 minutes, the key memory function will

be deactivated.

To reactivate the key's memory:

•Unlock the vehicle by pulling a door

handle with the remote key in your

possession or by pressing the unlock

button on the remote key.

Related information

•Keyless drive*– locking/unlocking (p. 155)

•Remote key – functions (p. 149)

Keyless drive* – messages

If all of the remote keys are removed from the

vehicle while the engine is running or if the

ignition modes (p. 77) is in mode II and all of

the doors are closed, a message will appear

in the instrument panel display and an audible

signal will sound.

When at least one remote key has been

returned to the car, the message will be

erased in the display and the audible signal

will stop when:

•A door has been opened and closed

•The remote key has been inserted in the

ignition slot

•The OK button has been pressed. For the

location of this button, see Information

display – menu controls (p. 111)

2Power seats only

06 Locks and alarm

158 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

CAUTION

•Keyless drive remote keys should

never be left in the vehicle. In the event

of a break-in, a remote found in the

vehicle could make it possible to start

the engine.

•Electromagnetic fields or metal

obstructions can interfere with the

keyless drive system. The remote key

should never be placed closer than

approximately 4-6 in. (10-15 cm) to

cell phones, metallic objects or e.g.,

stored in a metal briefcase.

USA – FCC ID:KR55WK48952,

KR55WK48964

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device must

accept interference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the manufacturer could void the

user's authority to operate the equipment.

Siemens VDO

5WK48891

Tested To Comply With FCC Standards

For Automobile Use

Canada – IC:267T-5WK48952,

267T-5WK48964, 267T-5WK48891

NOTE

This device complies with RSS -210 of Indus-

try Canada. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept interference received,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the manufacturer could void the

user's authority to operate the equipment.

Keyless drive* – antenna locations

The keyless drive system has a number of

antennas located at various points in the vehi-

cle.

On the inside center of the rear bumper

Left rear door handle

Under the floor of the cargo area, near

the rear seat

Right rear door handle

Under the rear section of the center con-

sole

Under the front section of the center con-

sole

06 Locks and alarm
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 159
WARNING
People with implanted pacemakers should
not allow the pacemaker to come closer
than 9 inches (22 cm) to any of the keyless
drive system's antennas. This is to help
prevent interference between the pace-
maker and the keyless drive system.
Related information
•Keyless drive*– locking/unlocking (p. 155)
Locking/unlocking – from the outside
The remote key (p. 146) is used to lock/unlock
all of the doors and the tailgate at the same
time. Different settings for unlocking the vehi-
cle can be selected, see Remote key – func-
tions (p. 149).
Before the vehicle can be locked from the
outside with the remote key, the driver's door
must be closed. If the tailgate or any other
door is open, it will be locked and the alarm
will be armed.
NOTE
Be sure the remote key is outside of the
vehicle before the other doors/tailgate are
closed to help avoid locking the remote
inside the vehicle.
If the vehicle is equipped with the optional
keyless drive system, all doors/tailgate must
be closed before the vehicle can be locked.
The first press on the unlock button unlocks
the driver's door and a second press unlocks
the other doors and the tailgate (see also
remote key and key blade (p. 146)). This set-
ting can be changed in the menu system. See
MY CAR (p. 74) for a description.
If the locks repeatedly do not react when the
unlock button is pressed, it may be necessary
to replace the battery in the remote, see
Remote key – replacing the battery (p. 153).
In this case the vehicle can be unlocked with
the detachable key blade (p. 152).
Related information
•Locking/unlocking – from inside (p. 160)

06 Locks and alarm

160

Manual locking

In certain situations (e.g., if there is no electri-

cal current in the vehicle), the doors can be

locked manually.

The detachable key blade (p. 151) can be

used in the lock cylinder in the driver's door

to lock that door.

The other doors do not have lock cylinders

and the slot on the rear edge of each door

has to be used to lock it. This will lock the

door from the outside but it can still be

opened from inside the vehicle. To do so:

Manually locking a door

–Insert the key blade into the slot and turn

it 90 degrees to lock that door (the slot in

a particular door locks that door only).

In the horizontal position, the door cannot

be opened from the outside.

In the vertical position, the door can be

opened from the inside and the outside.

NOTE

If the manual child safety lock (p. 61) is

activated for a rear side door and that door

is also locked manually, the door cannot

be opened from the outside or inside. The

door can only be unlocked with the remote

key or the central locking button.

Related information

•Remote key – replacing the battery

(p. 153)

Locking/unlocking – from inside

The lock buttons on the door panel can be

used to lock or unlock all doors and the tail-

gate at the same time. Press to lock and

to unlock.

From inside the vehicle (central locking

button)

Central locking button

The lock buttons on the door panel can be

used to lock or unlock all doors and the tail-

gate at the same time. Press to lock and

to unlock.

06 Locks and alarm

}}

161

Unlocking

The vehicle can be unlocked from inside the

vehicle in two ways:

•By pressing the unlock button .

•The front doors can be unlocked and

opened by pulling the door handle once.

The rear doors can be unlocked by pull-

ing the door handle once and opened by

pulling the handle again.

Locking

•Press the lock button after the front

doors have been closed.

•Press the lock button : all of the

doors that are closed will lock.

•Each door can be locked individually with

the lock button on the respective doors.

The door must be closed first.

Alternative locking when parking

The central locking button on the driver's

door can also be used to lock the vehicle

when you leave it. To do so:

1. Open the door.

2. Press the lock section of the button.

3. Close the door. This will lock the vehicle

completely and arm the alarm.

NOTE

Please be aware that locking the vehicle in

this way makes it possible to lock the

remote key in the passenger compartment.

To help avoid this, lock the vehicle from

the outside by pressing the lock button on

the remote key.

If the vehicle is locked using the central

locking button, be sure that the remote key

is in your possession before closing the

door.

Indicator light in the lock buttons

There are two versions of the central locking

system that affect the indicator light in the

driver's door central locking button.

If only the driver's door has a central locking

button:

•If the light is on, this indicates that all of

the doors are locked.

If there are central locking buttons in both

front doors and electric lock buttons in the

rear side doors:

•If a light is on in one of the buttons, this

means that only that door is locked.

When the lights are on in all of the but-

tons, all of the doors are locked.

Lock buttons in the rear side doors

The indicator light in the button is on when the

door is locked

The button in each of the rear side doors

locks that door only.

To unlock the door:

•The door can be unlocked by pulling the

door handle once and opened by pulling

the handle again.

Automatic relocking

If the doors are unlocked, the locks will auto-

matically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will

re-arm after 2 minutes unless a door or the

tailgate has been opened.

Automatic locking

When the vehicle starts to move, the doors

and tailgate can be locked automatically. This

feature can be turned on or off by pressing

06 Locks and alarm

162

MY CAR and going to Car settings Lock

settings Automatic door locking.

Related information

•Locking/unlocking – from the outside

(p. 159)

•Alarm – general information (p. 164)

•Remote key – functions (p. 149)

Locking/unlocking – glove

compartment

The glove compartment can only be locked

and unlocked using the detachable key blade

in the remote key. For information on remov-

ing the key blade from the remote key, see

Detachable key blade – detaching/reinserting

(p. 151).

Insert the key blade in the glove compart-

ment lock.

Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.

Remove the key blade from the lock.

Locking/unlocking – tailgate

The tailgate can be opened, locked and

unlocked in several ways.

Tailgate unlock button on the remote key

06 Locks and alarm

}}

163

Unlocking the tailgate with the remote

key

–Press the tailgate unlock button on the

remote key to unlock (but not open) the

tailgate. See Remote key and key

blade (p. 146) for more information.

> The alarm indicator light on the dash-

board will go out to indicate that the

alarm is not monitoring the entire vehi-

cle.

NOTE

•If the doors are locked while the tail-

gate is open, the tailgate will remain

unlocked until the vehicle is relocked

by pressing the Lock button on the

remote key.

•On keyless drive vehicles, the gear

selector must be in the Park (P) posi-

tion, all doors and the tailgate must be

closed and the ignition must be

switched off before the vehicle can be

locked.

Unlocking the tailgate from the driver's

seat

–Press the button on the lighting panel (1)

to unlock (but not open) the tailgate.

NOTE

The taillights will illuminate automatically

for a short period when the tailgate has

been opened.

Locking the tailgate with the remote

key

Press the lock button ( ) on the remote.

See also (p. 146).

The alarm indicator on the dashboard will

begin flashing to show that the vehicle is

locked and that the alarm has been armed.

Opening that tailgate manually

The tailgate is held closed by an electronic

locking mechanism. To open:

1. Press lightly on the wider rubberized plate

under the handle to release the lock.

2. Lift the handle to open the tailgate.

CAUTION

•When pressing the rubberized plate,

only light pressure is necessary to

release the tailgate's electronic locking

mechanism.

•When opening the tailgate, pull it up

using the handle. Too much pressure

on the rubberized plate can damage

its electrical connections.

06 Locks and alarm

164

Related information

•Locking/unlocking – from inside (p. 160)

•Locking/unlocking – from the outside

(p. 159)

Alarm – general information

The alarm system provides a warning if an

attempt is made to break into the vehicle.

The alarm is automatically armed (p. 165)

whenever the vehicle is locked with the

remote key.

When armed, the alarm continuously monitors

a number of points on the vehicle. The follow-

ing conditions will trigger the alarm:

•The hood is forced open.

•The tailgate is forced open.

•A door is forced open.

•The ignition slot is tampered with.

•An attempt is made to start the vehicle

with a non-approved key (a key not

coded to the car's ignition).

•The battery is disconnected (while the

alarm is armed).

•The siren is disconnected when the alarm

is disarmed.

A message will appear in the information dis-

play if a fault should occur in the alarm sys-

tem. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician.

NOTE

Do not attempt to repair any of the compo-

nents in the alarm system yourself. This

could affect the insurance policy on the

vehicle.

Related information

•Alarm – turning off (p. 166)

•Alarm signal (p. 166)

•Alarm indicator (p. 165)

06 Locks and alarm
06
165
Alarm indicator
The status of the alarm system is indicated by
the red indicator light on the dashboard (see
illustration):
•Indicator light off: the alarm is not
armed (p. 165)
•The indicator light flashes at one-second
intervals: the alarm is armed
•The indicator light flashes rapidly before
the remote key is inserted in the ignition
slot and the ignition is put in mode I: the
alarm has been triggered.
Related information
•Alarm – general information (p. 164)
•Alarm – turning off (p. 166)
•Alarm signal (p. 166)
Alarm – arming/disarming
The alarm system provides a warning if an
attempt is made to break into the vehicle.
Arming the alarm
–Press the Lock button on the remote key.
One long flash of the turn signals will con-
firm that the alarm (p. 164) is armed.
Alarm confirmation settings can be changed
in MY CAR, under Car settings Lock
settings Keyless entry. For a description
of the menu system, see My Car – introduc-
tion (p. 74).
USA FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3)
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules. Operation is subject to the following
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
 Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3)
This device is subject to the following condi-
tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Disarming the alarm
–Press the Unlock button on the remote
key.
> Two short flashes from the car's direc-
tion indicators confirm that the alarm
has been deactivated and that all
doors are unlocked.
Related information
•Alarm indicator (p. 165)
•Alarm signal (p. 166)
•Alarm – turning off (p. 166)
•Alarm-related functions (p. 166)

06 Locks and alarm

166

Alarm signal

An audible (p. 164) signal is given by a battery

powered siren. The alarm cycle lasts for

30 seconds.

The visual alarm signal is given by flashing all

turn signals for approximately 5 minutes or

until the alarm is turned off.

Related information

•Alarm indicator (p. 165)

•Alarm – arming/disarming (p. 165)

•Alarm – turning off (p. 166)

Alarm – turning off

The alarm system provides a warning if an

attempt is made to break into the vehicle.

If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped by

pressing the Unlock button on the remote key

or by inserting the remote key in the ignition

slot. Two short flashes from the car's turn sig-

nals confirm that the alarm has been turned

off.

Related information

•Alarm indicator (p. 165)

•Alarm – arming/disarming (p. 165)

•Remote key – replacing the battery

(p. 153)

Alarm-related functions

The following is general information regarding

the alarm system in your vehicle.

Automatic re-arming

If the doors are unlocked, the locks will auto-

matically re-engage (re-lock) and the alarm

will re-arm after 2 minutes unless a door or

the tailgate has been opened.

Remote key not functioning

If the remote key is not functioning properly,

the alarm can be turned off and the vehicle

can be started as follows:

1. Open the driver's door with the key blade.

>This will trigger the alarm.

2. To turn off the alarm, insert the remote

key into the ignition slot (also on vehicles

with the optional keyless drive).

3. Start the engine.

06 Locks and alarm

167

Related information

•Detachable key blade – unlocking (p. 152)

•Detachable key blade – general informa-

tion (p. 151)

•Starting the engine (p. 252)

D R I V E R S U P P O R T

07 Driver support

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169

Active chassis* (Four C)

Active chassis, Four-C (Continuously

Controlled Chassis Concept), regulates the

characteristics of the shock absorbers so that

the vehicle's driving characteristics can be

adjusted. There are three settings: Comfort,

Sport and Advanced.

Operation

Chassis settings

Use the buttons in the center console to

change setting. The setting in use when the

engine is switched off is activated the next

time the engine is started.

Comfort

Comfort mode offers a somewhat softer ride

and the transmission shifts gears at lower

rpm. This mode is particularly suitable for

long-distance highway driving. The indicator

light in the button will be on when this mode

is selected.

Sport

In this mode, the vehicle's body sway is

reduced during cornering and steering

response is more immediate. The transmis-

sion shifts up at higher rpm for sportier driv-

ing. The indicator light in the button will be on

to indicate that Sport mode has been

selected.

Advanced

In this mode, body sway in curves is minimal

and steering response is very direct. Gear

shifting is done at high rpm in each gear for

dynamic and active driving.

Related information

•Adjustable steering force* (p. 174)

Stability system – introduction

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system

consists of a number of functions designed to

help reduce wheel spin, counteract skidding

and to generally help improve directional sta-

bility.

A pulsating sound will be audible

when the system is actively operat-

ing and is normal. Acceleration will

also be slightly slower than normal.

WARNING

ESC is a supplementary aid and cannot

deal with all situations or road conditions.

The driver is always responsible for oper-

ating the vehicle in a safe manner in

accordance with current traffic regulations.

ESC consists of the following functions:

•Traction control

•Spin control

•Active Yaw Control

•Engine Drag Control

•Corner Traction Control

Traction Control (TC)

This function is designed to help reduce

wheel spin at low speeds by transferring

power from a drive wheel that begins to lose

traction to the wheel on the opposite side of

the vehicle (on the same axle).

07 Driver support

170

Spin Control (SC)

The SC function is designed to help prevent

the drive wheels from spinning while the vehi-

cle is accelerating.

Active Yaw Control (AYC)

This function helps maintain directional stabil-

ity, for example when cornering, by braking

one or more of the wheels if the vehicle

shows a tendency to skid or slide laterally.

Corner Traction Control (CTC)

CTC compensates for understeering and

helps provide additional stability when accel-

erating through a curve by preventing the

inside wheel from spinning. This is particularly

useful when accelerating on a curving high-

way on-ramp.

CTC is most effective if the stability system's

Sport mode is selected. See the section

about Sport mode.

Engine Drag Control (EDC)

EDC helps keep the engine running if the

wheels show a tendency to lock, e.g., when

shifting down in the Geartronic manual shift-

ing mode or while using the engine's braking

function on a slippery surface. If the engine

were to stop, power steering would not func-

tion, making the vehicle more difficult to

steer.

Trailer Stability Assist (TSA)

The TSA helps stabilize a vehicle that is tow-

ing a trailer when the vehicle and trailer have

begun to sway. See Trailer Stability Assist

(TSA) (p. 288) for more information.

This system is automatically deactivated if the

driver selects Sport mode.

Related information

•Stability system – operation (p. 170)

•Stability system – symbols and messages

(p. 172)

•Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) (p. 288)

Stability system – operation

Operation

Sport mode

The stability system is always activated and

cannot be switched off.

However, the driver can

select Sport mode, which

offers more active driving

characteristics.

Sport mode can be selected

in the MY CAR menus, see

My Car – introduction (p. 74).

In Sport mode, the engine management sys-

tem monitors movement of the accelerator

pedal and steering wheel for sportier driving

by allowing more lateral movement of the rear

wheels before ESC is activated.

Under certain circumstances, such as when

driving with snow chains, or driving in deep

snow or loose sand, it may be advisable to

temporarily use Sport mode for maximum

tractive force.

If the driver releases pressure on the acceler-

ator pedal, ETC will also activate to help sta-

bilize the vehicle.

To switch to Sport mode:

Sport mode remains active until the driver

switches it off in the menu or until the engine

is switched off. ETC will return to normal

mode when the engine is restarted.

07 Driver support

171

Related information

•Stability system – introduction (p. 169)

•Stability system – symbols and messages

(p. 172)

07 Driver support

172

Stability system – symbols and

messages

Symbols and messages in the main

instrument panel

A text message can be erased by pressing

briefly the OK button on the turn signal lever.

Symbol Message Description

ESC Temporarily OFF The ESC system function has been temporarily reduced due to high brake disc temperature. The function

reactivates automatically when the brakes have cooled.

ESC Service required The ESC system is not functioning properly.

•Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine and restart it.

•If the message is still displayed when the engine has restarted, drive to an authorized Volvo work-

shop to have the system inspected.

and

"Message" Read the message in the instrument panel.

Steady glow for

2 seconds.

The system is performing a self-diagnostic test.

07 Driver support

173

Symbol Message Description

Flashing symbol. ESC is actively functioning to help counteract wheel spin and/or a skid.

Steady glow. Sport mode has been activated.

Please note that ESC is not deactivated at this time but its functionality is reduced.

WARNING

The stability system is intended to help

improve driving safety. It supplements, but

can never replace, the driver's judgment

and responsibility when operating the vehi-

cle. Speed and driving style should always

be adapted to traffic and road conditions.

Related information

•Stability system – introduction (p. 169)

•Stability system – operation (p. 170)

07 Driver support
07
174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Adjustable steering force*
Steering force increases with the speed of the
vehicle to give the driver enhanced sense of
control and stability. At low speed the vehicle
is easy to steer in order to facilitate parking,
etc.
Adjustable steering force*
Steering force can be changed under MY
CAR Car settings Steering wheel
force. Select Low, Medium or High. For a
description of the menu system, My Car –
introduction (p. 74).
NOTE
This steering force level menu function
cannot be accessed when the vehicle is in
motion.
NOTE
In certain situations, the power steering
may become too warm and will have to be
temporarily cooled down. While this is
happening, the power steering effect will
be reduced slightly and somewhat more
effort may be required to turn the steering
wheel.
If this occurs, a message will be displayed
in the instrument panel.
Related information
•Active chassis* (Four C) (p. 169)
Road Sign Information (RSI)* –
introduction
RSI is a feature that helps the driver see road
signs with the posted speed limit.
Introduction
Examples of readable road signs
If the vehicle passes a sign showing the
speed limit, this will be displayed in the center
console.
WARNING
RSI does not function in all situations and
is only intended to provide supplementary
information.
The driver is always responsible for oper-
ating the vehicle safely.
Related information
•Road Sign Information (RSI) – operation
(p. 175)
•Road Sign Information (RSI) – limitations
(p. 175)

07 Driver support
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 175
Road Sign Information (RSI) –
operation
Speed limit information
When RSI registers a road sign showing the
speed limit, this sign is displayed as a symbol
on the instrument panel.
Settings in MY CAR
Possible settings in MY CAR
Displaying the speed limit indication can be
deactivated. To do so:
•Deselect the alternative in MY CAR
Settings Car settings Road Sign
Information or cancel by pressing EXIT.
Speed alert
The driver can opt to be alerted if the vehicle
exceeds the posted speed limit by more than
3 mph (5 km/h). The alert is given when the
symbol with the posted speed limit in the
instrument panel begins to flash.
To activate speed alert:
•Check the Speed alert box in MY CAR
Settings Car settings Speed alert
or cancel by pressing EXIT.
Related information
•Road Sign Information (RSI)* – introduc-
tion (p. 174)
•Road Sign Information (RSI) – limitations
(p. 175)
•My Car – introduction (p. 74)
Road Sign Information (RSI) –
limitations
RSI's camera has the same limitations as the
human eye. See The camera’s limitations
(p. 212) for more information about the cam-
era's limitations.
Signs that indirectly indicate the speed limit
(such as a sign with a town's name and the
permitted speed limit) will not be registered
by RSI.
Other factors that may interfere with RSI
include:
•Faded signs
•Signs located in a curve
•Twisted or damaged signs
•Obstructed signs
•Signs that are partially covered by snow,
ice, etc.
Related information
•Road Sign Information (RSI)* – introduc-
tion (p. 174)
•Road Sign Information (RSI) – operation
(p. 175)
•The camera’s limitations (p. 212)

07 Driver support

176

Cruise control (CC) – introduction

Cruise control is designed to assist the driver

by maintaining a set speed. It is primarily

intended for use on long straight roads in

steady traffic, such as on highways and other

main roads.

Operation

Steering wheel-mounted controls and display

Standby mode

Resume set speed

Deactivating

Activate/set speed

Selected speed (gray symbol indicates

standby mode)

Cruise control active: white symbol (gray

symbol indicates standby mode)

Related information

•Cruise control (CC) – engaging and set-

ting speed (p. 176)

•Cruise control (CC) – deactivating

(p. 178)

Cruise control (CC) – engaging and

setting speed

Cruise control is designed to assist the driver

by maintaining a set speed. It is primarily

intended for use on long straight roads in

steady traffic, such as on highways and other

main roads.

Engaging the cruise control function

Steering wheel-mounted controls and display

Standby mode

Resume set speed

Deactivating

Activate/set speed

Selected speed (gray symbol indicates

standby mode)

Cruise control active: white symbol (gray

symbol indicates standby mode)

07 Driver support

177

Before a speed can be set, the cruise control

system must be engaged (put in standby

mode).

–Press the CRUISE button (1).

>The symbol illuminates and the text

(---) mph (5) indicates that cruise con-

trol is in standby mode.

NOTE

Putting cruise control in standby mode

does not set a cruising speed.

Setting a speed

Use the or buttons set the vehicle's

current speed. The set speed is shown in the

display.

NOTE

Cruise control cannot be engaged at

speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h).

Adjusting the set speed

After a speed has been set, it can be

increased or decreased by using the or

buttons.

1. Press or briefly and release the

button to increase or decrease vehicle

speed by approximately 1 mph or 1 km/h.

> This will become the set speed when

the button is released.

2. Press and hold one of these buttons to

increase/decrease the speed in 1-mph or

1-km/h increments. Release the button

when you have reached the desired

speed.

NOTE

•A temporary increase in speed by

pressing the accelerator pedal, for less

than 1 minute (e.g. when passing

another car), does not affect the cur-

rent cruise control setting. The vehicle

will automatically return to the previ-

ously set speed when the accelerator

pedal is released.

•If one of the cruise control buttons is

kept depressed for more than approx.

1 minute cruise control is disengaged.

The engine must then be switched off

in order to reset cruise control.

Related information

•Cruise control (CC) – introduction (p. 176)

•Cruise control (CC) – deactivating

(p. 178)

07 Driver support

178

Toggling between ACC and CC

(standard Cruise Control)

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) helps the

driver maintain a safe distance/time interval to

the vehicle ahead.

Switching from ACC to CC

This may be useful if, for example, the radar

sensor is obstructed in some way. See

Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations (p. 188)

for additional information.

•Press and hold the button; the symbol

in the instrument panel will switch from

to .

> This activates the standard cruise control

function (see Cruise control (CC) – intro-

duction (p. 176)).

WARNING

Switching from ACC to CC means that:

•Your vehicle will no longer automati-

cally maintain a set distance to a vehi-

cle ahead.

•Only the set speed will be maintained

and the driver will have to apply the

brakes when needed.

Switching from CC to ACC

Switch off cruise control by pressing once

or twice as needed according to the instruc-

tions in the previous section "Turning ACC off

completely." The next time the system is

switched on, ACC will be reactivated.

Related information

•Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 179)

•Adaptive Cruise Control – function

(p. 180)

Cruise control (CC) – deactivating

Cruise control is designed to assist the driver

by maintaining a set speed. It is primarily

intended for use on long straight roads in

steady traffic, such as on highways and other

main roads.

Automatic deactivation

The cruise control is automatically deacti-

vated temporarily if one of the following

occurs:

•If the speed drops below approximately

20 mph (30 km/h).

•When the brake pedal is depressed.

•If the gear selector is moved to position

•During wheel spin or wheel lock-up.

•If the vehicle's speed is increased by

using the accelerator pedal for more than

1 minute.

•Engine speed (rpm) is too high or too low.

The currently set speed will be saved in the

system's memory.

Temporary deactivation

The driver can temporarily deactivate the

cruise control by pressing 0. The saved

speed is shown in brackets in the information

display.

07 Driver support

}}

179

Resume set speed

If the cruise control has been deactivated

temporarily, it can be reactivated by pressing

. The vehicle's speed returns to the most

recently set speed.

WARNING

There may be a significant increase in

speed after the button has been

pressed.

Deactivation

The Cruise control is disengaged by pressing

or by switching off the engine. The set

speed is cleared.

WARNING

Cruise control should not be used in heavy

traffic or when driving on wet or slippery

roads. Cruise control may not maintain set

speed on steep downgrades.

Related information

•Cruise control (CC) – introduction (p. 176)

•Cruise control (CC) – engaging and set-

ting speed (p. 176)

Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

ACC is an optional system designed to assist

the driver by maintaining a set speed or a set

time interval to the vehicle ahead. It is primar-

ily intended for use on long straight roads in

steady traffic, such as on highways and other

main roads.

When the driver has set the desired speed

and the time interval to the vehicle ahead,

ACC functions as follows:

•If there are no other vehicles in the lane

ahead of you, your vehicle will travel at

the set speed.

•If ACC's radar sensor detects a slower

moving vehicle in the lane ahead, the sys-

tem will adapt your vehicle's speed to

help maintain the set time interval to the

vehicle ahead. When there are no longer

slower moving vehicles ahead, your vehi-

cle will accelerate to resume the set

speed.

If ACC is switched off completely or in

standby mode and your vehicle comes too

close to another vehicle ahead, the driver will

be warned by the Distance Alert system (see

Distance Alert – introduction (p. 193)).

WARNING

•Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover

all driving situations and traffic,

weather and road conditions. The

"Function" section provides informa-

tion about limitations that the driver

must be aware of before using this

feature.

•This system is designed to be a sup-

plementary driving aid. It is not, how-

ever, intended to replace the driver's

attention and judgement. The driver is

responsible for maintaining a safe dis-

tance and speed and must intervene if

Adaptive Cruise Control does not

maintain a suitable speed or suitable

distance to the vehicle ahead.

•Maintenance of ACC components may

only be performed by a trained and

qualified Volvo technician.

||
07 Driver support
07
180
Operation
Controls and display
Resume previous settings.
Off/On/Standby mode
Decrease/increase time interval
Put in active mode and set a speed (each
additional press increases/decreases
speed by 1 mph (approximately 2 km/h))
Set speed (shown in green when active,
shown in white when in standby mode)
Time interval
ACC active (green symbol) or in standby
mode (white symbol)
Related information
•Toggling between ACC and CC (standard
Cruise Control) (p. 178)
•Cruise control (CC) – introduction (p. 176)
•Adaptive Cruise Control – troubleshooting
(p. 192)
•Adaptive Cruise Control – symbols and
messages (p. 190)
•Adaptive Cruise Control – setting time
interval (p. 184)
•Adaptive Cruise Control – setting speed
(p. 183)
•Radar sensor (p. 188)
•Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) – Queue
Assist (p. 186)
•Adaptive Cruise Control – passing
another vehicle (p. 186)
•Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations
(p. 188)
•Adaptive Cruise Control – function
(p. 180)
•Adaptive Cruise Control – engaging
(p. 182)
•Adaptive Cruise Control – deactivating
(p. 184)
Adaptive Cruise Control – function
Function
Function overview1
Warning light, braking by driver required
Controls in steering wheel
Radar sensor in front grille
Adaptive Cruise Control consists of:
•A cruise control system to maintain a set
speed
•A system to maintain a set distance to the
vehicle ahead, which is expressed as a
time interval. For example, you can
choose to remain approximately 2 sec-
onds behind the vehicle ahead. The
actual distance required to maintain a
2-second interval will vary according the
speed of the vehicles.

07 Driver support

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 181

WARNING

•Adaptive Cruise Control is not a colli-

sion avoidance system. The driver is

always responsible for applying the

brakes if the system does not detect

another vehicle.

•Adaptive Cruise Control does not react

to people or animals, or small vehicles

such as bicycles and motorcycles. It

also does not react to slow moving,

parked or approaching vehicles, or

stationary objects.

•Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in

demanding driving conditions such as

city driving or other heavy traffic situa-

tions, in slippery conditions, when

there is a great deal of water or slush

on the road, during heavy rain or

snow, in poor visibility, on winding

roads or on highway on- or off-ramps.

The distance to the vehicle ahead (in the

same lane) is monitored by a radar sensor.

Your vehicle's speed is regulated by acceler-

ating and braking. The brakes may emit a

sound when they are being modulated by the

adaptive cruise control system. This is nor-

mal.

WARNING

The brake pedal moves when the adaptive

cruise control system modulates the

brakes. Do not rest your foot under the

brake pedal.

The ACC system is designed to smoothly

regulate speed. However, the driver must

apply the brakes in situations that require

immediate braking. This applies when there

are great differences in speed between vehi-

cles, or if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly.

WARNING

Due to limitations in the radar sensor,

braking may occur unexpectedly or not at

all, see Adaptive Cruise Control – limita-

tions (p. 188).

Adaptive Cruise Control can be put in active

mode at any permitted speed. However, if the

vehicle's speed falls below 18 mph (30 km/h)

or if engine speed (rpm) becomes too low,

ACC disengages (goes into standby mode)

and will no longer modulate the brakes. The

driver will then have to maintain a safe dis-

tance to the vehicle ahead.

WARNING

When Adaptive Cruise Control is in

standby mode or is switched off com-

pletely, the brakes will not be modulated

automatically. The driver must assume full

control over the vehicle.

Warning light—driver braking required

Adaptive Cruise Control can exert brake force

that is equivalent to approximately 40% of

the vehicle's total braking capacity. In situa-

tions requiring more brake force than ACC

can provide and if the driver does not apply

the brakes, an audible signal from the Colli-

sion Warning system will sound and warning

light will illuminate (see Collision warning* –

function (p. 206)) in the windshield to alert

the driver to react.

NOTE

Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light

contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the

driver is not looking straight ahead may

make the visual warning signal in the wind-

shield difficult to see.

1The illustration is generic; details will vary, depending on the model

07 Driver support

182

WARNING

Adaptive Cruise Control only warns of

vehicles detected by the radar sensor, see

Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations

(p. 188). In some cases there may be no

warning or the warning may be delayed.

The driver should always apply the brakes

when necessary.

Steep inclines and/or heavy loads

ACC is primarily intended for use on fairly

level roads. The system may have difficulty

maintaining the correct distance to a vehicle

ahead on steep inclines, if the vehicle is car-

rying a heavy load or is towing a trailer. In

these situations, the driver should always be

prepared to apply the brakes if necessary.

Related information

•Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 179)

Adaptive Cruise Control – engaging

Putting ACC in standby mode

Before ACC can be used to regulate speed

and/or the distance to a vehicle ahead, it

must first be put in standby mode.

To do so:

Controls and display

Off/On/Standby mode

•Press (2).

> The same symbol (7) appears (in white) in

the instrument panel to indicate that ACC

is in standby mode.

NOTE

The driver's door must be closed and the

driver's seat belt must be fastened before

ACC can be put in active mode. If the driv-

er's seat belt is taken off or if the driver's

door is opened, ACC will return to standby

mode.

Related information

•Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 179)

07 Driver support

183

Adaptive Cruise Control – setting

speed

Setting a speed

Once ACC has been put in standby mode:

Controls and display

Put in active mode and set a speed (each

additional press increases/decreases

speed by 1 mph (approximately 2 km/h))

•Press or (4).

> The set speed, for example 60 mph (5),

will be magnified for several seconds and

the frame around the speed will change

colors from white to green to indicate

that this speed has been stored (set).

When this symbol has changed col-

ors from white to green, ACC is in

active mode and the vehicle will

maintain the set speed.

This symbol indicates that

you are approaching a vehi-

cle ahead.

ACC will switch from main-

taining a set speed to main-

taining a set distance from

that vehicle.

When this happens, a speed

range will be indicated on

the speedometer:

The higher speed (the cur-

rently set speed (5)) will be

marked in green.

The lower speed in the range is the speed of

the vehicle ahead.

Changing the set speed

•After a speed has been set, it can be

increased or decreased by briefly press-

ing the or buttons. Each time one

of these buttons is pressed, the vehicle's

speed changes by 5 mph or 5 km/h. If the

speed is increased by pressing the accel-

erator pedal, the vehicle's speed when

the button is pressed will be set.

•Press and hold one of these buttons to

increase/decrease the speed in 1-mph or

1-km/h increments. Release the button

when you have reached the desired

speed.

NOTE

•If one of the Adaptive Cruise Control

buttons is pressed for more than

approximately one minute, ACC will be

deactivated. The engine must then be

switched off and restarted to reset

ACC.

•In some situations Adaptive Cruise

Control cannot be put in active mode.

Cruise control Unavailable is shown

in the display, see Adaptive Cruise

Control – symbols and messages

(p. 190).

Related information

•Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 179)

07 Driver support

184

Adaptive Cruise Control – setting time

interval

Setting a time interval

Controls and display

Decrease/increase time interval

The set time interval to vehicles ahead can be

increased by pressing and decreased by

pressing . The current time interval is

shown briefly in the display following adjust-

ment.

Different time intervals can

be selected and are shown in

the instrument panel2 as 1–5

horizontal bars. The greater

the number of bars, the

longer the time interval. One

bar represents a time interval

of approximately 1 second; 5 bars is approxi-

mately 3 seconds.

To set/change a time interval:

•Press the / buttons (3).

At low speeds, when the distance to the vehi-

cle ahead is short, ACC increases the time

interval slightly. In order to follow the vehicle

ahead as smoothly as possible, ACC allows

the time interval to vary considerably in cer-

tain situations.

WARNING

•Only use a time interval that is suitable

in current traffic conditions.

•A short time interval gives the driver

limited reaction time if an unexpected

situation occurs in traffic.

Related information

•Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 179)

Adaptive Cruise Control –

deactivating

Standby mode (temporary deactivation)

To temporarily deactivate ACC (put it in

standby mode):

Controls and display

Resume previous settings.

Off/On/Standby mode

•Press (2).

This symbol and the marking for the set

speed with change colors from green to

white.

The previously set speed and time interval are

resumed by pressing (1).

2The same symbol appears if Distance Alert (see Distance Alert – introduction (p. 193)) is activated

07 Driver support

185

WARNING

The vehicle may accelerate quickly after

has been pressed if its current speed is

considerably lower than the set speed.

Standby mode due to action by the

driver

ACC is temporarily deactivated and put in

standby mode:

•if the brakes are applied

•if the gear selector is moved to N

•if the driver drives faster than the set

speed for more than 1 minute.

In this happens, the driver will have to regu-

late the vehicle's speed.

NOTE

If the accelerator pedal is only depressed

for a short time, such as when passing

another vehicle, ACC is deactivated tem-

porarily and is reactivated when the pedal

is released.

Automatic standby mode

ACC is linked to other systems such as the

stability system. If this system is not function-

ing properly, ACC will switch off automati-

cally.

In the event of automatic deactivation, an

audible signal will sound and the message

Cruise control Cancelled is shown in the

instrument panel. The driver must then inter-

vene and adapt the vehicle's speed to the

surrounding traffic and regulate the distance

to the vehicle ahead.

An automatic switch to standby mode may be

caused if:

•engine speed (rpm) is too high/low

•The driver's door is opened

•The driver unbuckles his/her seat belt

•the vehicle's speed goes below 18 mph

(30 km/h)

•the wheels lose traction

•brake temperature is high

•the radar sensor is obstructed by, for

example, wet snow or rain.

Resuming the set speed

If ACC is in standby mode, it can be reactiva-

ted by pressing the button on the steering

wheel keypad. The vehicle will return to the

most recently set speed.

WARNING

The vehicle may accelerate quickly after

has been pressed if its current speed is

considerably lower than the set speed.

Turning ACC off completely

Controls and display

Resume previous settings.

Off/On/Standby mode

•From standby mode, press (2) once.

•From active mode, press (2) twice.

The set speed and time interval are then

cleared from the system's memory and can-

not be resumed by pressing (1) .

Related information

•Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 179)

07 Driver support

186

Adaptive Cruise Control – passing

another vehicle

Passing another vehicle

If your vehicle’s speed is being regulated by

ACC and the driver indicates that he/she

would like to pass the vehicle ahead by using

the left turn signal, ACC can assist by accel-

erating briefly.

This function is active at speeds above

approximately 45 mph (70 km/h).

WARNING

Please be aware that this function will also

cause the vehicle to accelerate briefly in

certain situations other than passing

another vehicle, for example using the left

turn signal to indicate a lane change or a

turn toward a highway exit at speeds

above approximately 45 mph (70 km/h).

Related information

•Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 179)

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) –

Queue Assist

Queue Assist is an added ACC feature that is

linked to your vehicle's automatic transmis-

sion.

Introduction

Queue Assist is an added ACC feature that is

linked to your vehicle's automatic transmis-

sion.

Queue Assist consists of the following func-

tions:

•Enhanced speed interval (including when

the vehicle is at a complete stop or is

moving at speed below 18 mph

(30 km/h))

•Automatic standby mode when ACC

changes target vehicles

•No automatic braking when at a standstill

•The parking brake is applied automati-

cally

Please note that the lowest speed that can be

set is 18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC can

maintain a set speed/distance to a vehicle

ahead down to a standstill. Queue Assist

consists of the following features:

Enhanced speed interval

NOTE

The driver's door must be closed and the

driver's seat belt must be fastened before

ACC can be put in active mode. If the driv-

er's seat belt is taken off or if the driver's

door is opened, ACC will return to standby

mode.

Your vehicle can maintain the set time interval

to the vehicle ahead at any permissible

speed, including a complete stop.

In order to activate ACC at speeds below

18 mph (30 km/h):

•The vehicle ahead must be within a rea-

sonable distance (not farther away than

approx. 100 ft/30 meters)

•The lowest speed that can be selected is

18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC will also

help maintain the set time interval to the

vehicle ahead at lower speeds, including

a complete stop.

During short stops (less than approximately

3 seconds) in slow-moving traffic, your vehi-

cle will begin moving again automatically as

soon as the vehicle ahead begins to move.

If it takes more than 3 seconds for the vehicle

ahead to begin moving, ACC will be automat-

ically go into standby mode.

07 Driver support

187

The driver will then have to reactivate ACC in

one of the following ways:

•By pressing

•By accelerating up to at least 3 mph

(4 km/h). ACC will then resume following

the vehicle ahead.

Your vehicle will then resume following the

vehicle ahead at the set time interval.

NOTE

ACC can remain active and keep your

vehicle at a standstill for up to 4 minutes.

After 4 minutes have elapsed, the parking

brake will be engaged and ACC will go into

standby mode.

To reactivate ACC, the driver must release

the parking brake (see Parking brake –

general information (p. 274)).

Automatic standby mode when ACC

changes target vehicles

If the vehicle ahead turns suddenly, there may be

a stationary vehicle ahead

The following only applies at speeds below

approximately 18 mph (30 km/h):

If ACC changes target vehicles (the vehicle

that the radar sensor has detected) from a

moving vehicle to a stationary one, the sys-

tem will apply the brakes in your vehicle.

WARNING

At speeds above 18 mph (30 km/h), ACC

will not react to a stationary vehicle and

apply the brakes but will instead acceler-

ate to the previously set speed. The driver

must actively apply the brakes to stop the

vehicle.

ACC disengages and goes into standby

mode if:

•Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph

(15 km/h) and ACC cannot determine if

the target object is a stationary vehicle or

some other type of object such as e.g., a

speed bump.

•Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph

(15 km/h) and the vehicle ahead turns so

that ACC no longer has a target vehicle to

follow.

No automatic braking when at a

standstill

In certain situations, ACC will no longer apply

the brakes and go into standby mode while

the vehicle is not moving. This means that the

driver will have to apply the brakes.

This happens if:

•The driver presses the brake pedal

•The parking brake is activated

•The gear selected is moved to P, N or R

•The driver presses the button to put

ACC in standby mode

The parking brake is applied

automatically

In certain situations, ACC will apply the park-

ing brake in order to continue keeping the

vehicle at a standstill.

This happens if:

•The driver opens the door or takes off

his/her seat belt

•The stability system is put in Sport mode

(see Stability system – operation (p. 170))

•ACC has kept the vehicle at a standstill

for more than 2 minutes

•The engine has been switched off

•The brakes have overheated

Related information

•Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 179)

07 Driver support
07
188
Radar sensor
The radar sensor is designed to help detect
cars or larger vehicles driving in the same
direction as your vehicle, in the same lane.
The radar sensor and its limitations
In addition to being used by the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC), the radar sensor is also
used by Distance Alert (see Distance Alert –
introduction (p. 193)) and Collision Warning
with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detec-
tion (see Collision warning – introduction
(p. 204)).
WARNING
•If there is visible damage to the front
grille or you suspect that the radar
sensor may be damaged in any way,
contact a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician as soon as possible.
The radar sensor may only function
partially (or not at all) if it is damaged
or is not securely fastened in place.
•Accessories or other objects, such as
extra headlights, must not be installed
in front of the grille.
•Modification of the radar sensor could
make its use illegal.
The radar sensor's capacity to detect vehi-
cles ahead is impeded:
•if the radar sensor is obstructed and can-
not detect other vehicles, for example in
heavy rain, or if snow or other objects are
obscuring the radar sensor.
NOTE
Keep the area in front of the radar sensor
clean.
•if the speed of vehicles ahead is signifi-
cantly different from your own speed.
Related information
•Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction
(p. 179)
•Collision warning – introduction (p. 204)
•Distance Alert – introduction (p. 193)
Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations
The ACC cannot cover all driving situations
and traffic, weather and road conditions.
Situations where ACC may not function
optimally
WARNING
•The radar sensor has a limited field of
vision. In some situations it may detect
a vehicle later than expected or not
detect other vehicles at all.
•If ACC is not functioning properly,
cruise control will also be disabled.

07 Driver support

189

Radar sensor's field of vision (shown in pink)

In certain situations, the radar sensor

cannot detect vehicles at close quarters,

for example a vehicle that suddenly

enters the lane between your vehicle and

the target vehicle.

Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or

vehicles not driving in the center of the

lane may remain undetected.

In curves, the radar sensor may detect

the wrong vehicle or lose sight of the tar-

get vehicle.

WARNING

•Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover

all driving situations and traffic,

weather and road conditions. The

"Function" section provides informa-

tion about limitations that the driver

must be aware of before using this

feature.

•This system is designed to be a sup-

plementary driving aid. It is not, how-

ever, intended to replace the driver's

attention and judgement. The driver is

responsible for maintaining a safe dis-

tance and speed and must intervene if

Adaptive Cruise Control does not

maintain a suitable speed or suitable

distance to the vehicle ahead.

•Maintenance of ACC components may

only be performed by a trained and

qualified Volvo technician.

WARNING

•Adaptive Cruise Control is not a colli-

sion avoidance system. The driver is

always responsible for applying the

brakes if the system does not detect

another vehicle.

•Adaptive Cruise Control does not react

to people or animals, or small vehicles

such as bicycles and motorcycles. It

also does not react to slow moving,

parked or approaching vehicles, or

stationary objects.

•Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in

demanding driving conditions such as

city driving or other heavy traffic situa-

tions, in slippery conditions, when

there is a great deal of water or slush

on the road, during heavy rain or

snow, in poor visibility, on winding

roads or on highway on- or off-ramps.

Related information

•Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 179)

07 Driver support

190

Adaptive Cruise Control – symbols

and messages

Symbols and messages in the display

A text message can be erased by pressing

briefly on the OK button on the turn signal

lever.

Symbol Message Description

Green symbol A speed has been set.

White symbol ACC is in standby mode but no speed has been set.

- Standard cruise control has been selected manually.

-Set ESC to Normal to

enable Cruise

ACC cannot be put in active mode until the stability system is switched normal operating mode, see

Stability system – introduction (p. 169) for more information.

-Cruise control Cancel-

led

ACC has been automatically switched off. The driver has to regulate the vehicle’s speed/distance to the

vehicle ahead.

-Cruise control Unavail-

able

ACC cannot be put in active mode. This may be due to:

•high brake temperature

•the radar sensor is obstructed (by heavy rain, snow, etc.)

Radar blocked See

manual

ACC has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannot detect

other vehicles.

In this situation, the driver can switch to standard cruise control, see Toggling between ACC and CC

(standard Cruise Control) (p. 178)

See Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations (p. 188) for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

07 Driver support

191

Symbol Message Description

-Cruise control Service

required

ACC is not functioning.

Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

-Press Brake To hold +

an audible signal

The vehicle is at a standstill and ACC will release the brakes before the parking brake engages to keep

the vehicle stopped but a problem with the parking brake means that the vehicle may begin to roll.

The driver will have to apply the brakes. The message will remain in the display and the audible signal

will continue until the driver applies the brakes or presses the accelerator pedal.

-Below 30 km/h Only

following

This is displayed if you try to activate ACC at speeds below approx. 18 mph (30 km/h) without a vehicle

ahead within range (approx. 100 ft/30 meters).

Related information

•Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 179)

07 Driver support

192

Adaptive Cruise Control –

troubleshooting

If the message Radar blocked See manual

is displayed, this means that the radar signals

from the sensor have been obstructed and

that a vehicle ahead cannot be detected.

This, in turn, means that the functions of the

ACC, Distance Alert, and Collision Warning

System with Auto-brake and Pedestrian

Detection will not function.

The table lists possible causes for this mes-

sage being displayed, and suitable actions.

Cause Action

The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some

way.

Clean the radar surface, or remove the object causing the obstruction.

Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the

radar.

Swirling water or snow from the surface of the road may interfere

with the radar signals.

No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect

the function of the radar.

The surface of the radar is clean but the message remains in the

display.

Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that

it is no longer obstructed.

Related information

•Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 179)

07 Driver support

}}

193

Distance Alert – introduction

Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol and is a function that provides information

about the time interval to the vehicle ahead.

Introduction

Distance Alert is active at speeds above

approximately 18 mph (30 km/h). Time inter-

val information is only given for a vehicle that

is driving ahead of your vehicle in the same

direction. No information is provided for vehi-

cles driving toward you, moving very slowly,

or at a standstill.

Amber warning light3.

An amber warning light in the windshield

glows steadily if your vehicle is closer to the

one ahead than the set time interval.

NOTE

Distance Alert only monitors distance to

the vehicle ahead while Adaptive Cruise

Control is in standby mode or off.

WARNING

Distance Alert only indicates the distance

to the vehicle ahead. It does not affect the

speed of your vehicle.

Related information

•Distance Alert – operation (p. 193)

•Distance Alert – limitations (p. 194)

•Distance Alert – symbols and messages

(p. 196)

Distance Alert – operation

Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol and is a function that provides information

about the time interval to the vehicle ahead.

Press the button in the center instrument

panel to switch this function on or off. The

indicator light in the button illuminates when

the function is on.

Depending on the optional equipment

selected, there may not be room for a Dis-

tance Alert button in the center console. In

this case, the function is controlled through

the menu system. Press MY CAR and go to

Settings Car settings Distance alert

On/Off.

3The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model

||
07 Driver support
07
194
Setting a time interval
Controls and display
Time interval: Increase/decrease
Time interval On
Press   to increase the interval or   to
decrease it.
Five different time intervals
can be selected and are
shown in the display as 1–5
horizontal bars. The greater
the number of bars, the
longer the time interval. One
bar represents approximately
1 second to the vehicle ahead; 5 bars is
approximately 3 seconds.
NOTE
•The higher your vehicle’s speed, the
greater the distance to the vehicle
ahead, measured in feet (meters), for a
given time interval.
•The set time interval is also used by
Adaptive Cruise Control, see Adaptive
Cruise Control – setting speed (p. 183).
WARNING
Only use a time interval that is suitable in
current traffic conditions.
Related information
•Distance Alert – introduction (p. 193)
•Distance Alert – limitations (p. 194)
•Distance Alert – symbols and messages
(p. 196)
Distance Alert – limitations
Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol and is a function that provides information
about the time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Limitations
Distance Alert uses the same radar sensor
used by Adaptive Cruise Control and the Col-
lision Warning system. See Adaptive Cruise
Control – limitations (p. 188) for more infor-
mation on the radar sensor’s limitations.
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light
contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the
driver is not looking straight ahead may
make the visual warning signal in the wind-
shield difficult to see.
WARNING
•Bad weather or winding roads may
affect the radar sensor’s capacity to
detect vehicles ahead.
•The size of the vehicle ahead, such as
a motorcycle, may also make it difficult
to detect. This may result in the warn-
ing light illuminating at a shorter dis-
tance than the one that has been set,
or that the light will not come on at all.

07 Driver support

195

Related information

•Distance Alert – introduction (p. 193)

•Distance Alert – operation (p. 193)

•Distance Alert – symbols and messages

(p. 196)

07 Driver support

196

Distance Alert – symbols and

messages

Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol and is a function that provides information

about the time interval to the vehicle ahead.

Symbols and text messages

A text message can be erased by pressing

briefly on the OK button on the turn signal

lever.

Symbol Message Description

Radar blocked See

manual

Distance Alert has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and can-

not detect other vehicles. See Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations (p. 188) for information on the radar

sensor’s limitations.

Collision warn. Serv-

ice required

Distance Alert or Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection is not functioning prop-

erly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Related information

•Distance Alert – introduction (p. 193)

•Distance Alert – operation (p. 193)

•Distance Alert – limitations (p. 194)

07 Driver support

}}

197

City Safety – introduction

City Safety™4 is a support system designed

to help the driver avoid low speed collisions

when driving in slow-moving, stop-and-go

traffic.

City Safety™ is not active if your vehicle’s

speed is below approximately 2 mph

(4 km/h). This means that City Safety™ will

not react if your vehicle approaches another

vehicle at very low speed, for example, when

parking.

The function is active at speeds up to

approximately 30 mph (50 km/h) and assists

the driver by applying the brakes automati-

cally, thereby avoiding or helping to reduce

the effects of a collision.

City Safety™ is designed to intervene as late

as possible to help avoid unnecessary activa-

tion.

City Safety™ triggers brief, forceful braking if

a low-speed collision is imminent. However,

the system will not intervene in situations

where the driver actively steers the vehicle or

applies the brakes, even if a collision cannot

be avoided. This is done in order to always

give the driver’s actions highest priority.

City Safety™ activates in situations where the

driver has not applied the brakes in time,

which means that the system cannot help the

driver in all situations.

City Safety™ should not be used to alter the

way in which the driver operates the vehicle.

The driver should never rely solely on this

system to safely stop the vehicle.

Normally, the occupants of the vehicle will

not be aware of City Safety™ except when

the system intervenes when a low-speed col-

lision is imminent.

If the vehicle is also equipped with the

optional Collision Warning with Full Auto-

brake and Pedestrian Detection system, the

two systems interact. For more information

about the Collision Warning with Auto-brake

system, see Collision warning – introduction

(p. 204) .

WARNING

•City Safety™ is a supplemental aid to

the driver. It can never replace the

driver’s attention to traffic conditions

or his/her responsibility for operating

the vehicle in a safe manner.

•City Safety™ does not function in all

driving situations or in all traffic,

weather or road conditions.

WARNING

•City Safety™ only reacts to vehicles

traveling in the same direction as your

vehicle and does not react to small

vehicles or motorcycles or to people or

animals.

•City Safety™ is not activated when

your vehicle is backing up.

•City Safety™ functions at speeds up

to 30 mph (50 km/h). This system can

help prevent a collision if the differ-

ence in speed between your vehicle

and the vehicle ahead is less than

9 mph (15 km/h). If the difference in

speed is greater, a collision cannot be

avoided but the speed at which the

collision occurs can be reduced. The

driver must apply the vehicle’s brakes

for full braking effect.

•City Safety™ will not intervene in a

potential collision situation if the vehi-

cle is being driven actively. The driver

is always responsible for maintaining a

safe distance to a vehicle or object

ahead.

Related information

•City Safety – function (p. 198)

•City Safety – operation (p. 199)

•City Safety – limitations (p. 199)

4City Safety is a registered trademark of the Volvo Car Corporation

07 Driver support
07
198
•City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 200)
•City Safety – symbols and messages
(p. 202)
•City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 203)
City Safety – function
Function
Location of the laser sensor in the windshield5
City Safety™ monitors traffic ahead of you
using a laser sensor mounted in the upper
section of the windshield. If a collision is
imminent, City Safety™ will automatically
apply the brakes, which may feel like hard
braking.
If the difference in speed between your vehi-
cle and the vehicle ahead is more than
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), City Safety™
alone cannot prevent a collision from taking
place. The driver must apply the brakes to
help avoid a collision or reduce its effect.
When the function activates and applies the
brakes, a message will appear in the informa-
tion display to indicate that the system is/has
been active.
NOTE
•When City Safety™ applies the
brakes, the brake lights will illuminate.
•In cases where City Safety™ has stop-
ped the vehicle, the system will then
release the brakes. The driver must
apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at
a standstill.
Related information
•City Safety – introduction (p. 197)
•City Safety – operation (p. 199)
•City Safety – limitations (p. 199)
•City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 200)
•City Safety – symbols and messages
(p. 202)
•City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 203)
5The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model

07 Driver support
07
}}
199
City Safety – operation
Using City Safety™
NOTE
The City Safety™ function is activated
automatically each time the engine has
been switched off and restarted.
On and Off
In certain situations, it may be desirable to
switch City Safety™ off, such as when driving
in close quarters where leaves, branches, etc.
may obscure the hood and windshield.
When the engine is running, City Safety™ can
be switched off as follows:
Press My Car in the center console control
panel and go to Settings Car settings
Driver support systems City Safety.
Select Off.
If the engine is switched off, City Safety™ will
reactivate when the engine is restarted.
WARNING
The laser sensor emits light when the igni-
tion is in mode II or higher, even if City
Safety™ has been switched off.
To switch City Safety™ on again:
•Follow the same procedure as for switch-
ing City Safety™ off but select On.
Related information
•City Safety – introduction (p. 197)
•City Safety – function (p. 198)
•City Safety – limitations (p. 199)
•City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 200)
•City Safety – symbols and messages
(p. 202)
•City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 203)
•My Car – introduction (p. 74)
City Safety – limitations
Limitations
WARNING
The laser sensor has certain limitations
and its function may be reduced (or it may
not function at all) in conditions such as
heavy rain or snowfall, or by dense fog or
thick, blowing dust or snow. Condensa-
tion, dirt, ice or snow on the windshield
may also interfere with the sensor’s func-
tion.
The sensor used by City Safety™ is designed
to detect cars and other larger motor vehicles
ahead of your vehicle in both daylight and
darkness.
Objects such as warning flags hanging from
long objects on the roof or accessories such
as auxiliary lights or protective arches on the
front of the vehicle that are higher than the
hood may also impede the sensor’s function.
Braking distance to the vehicle ahead increa-
ses on slippery road surfaces, which may
reduce City Safety’s capacity to avoid a colli-
sion. In situations like this, the stability sys-
tem (see Stability system – introduction
(p. 169)) will help provide the best possible
braking capacity and stability.
City Safety™ emits a laser beam and meas-
ures the way in which the light is reflected.

||
07 Driver support
07
200
Therefore, vehicles or objects with low-reflec-
tive surfaces may not be detected. Normally,
the license plate and taillight reflectors give
the rear section of a vehicle ahead sufficient
reflective surfaces to be detected.
NOTE
•Keep the windshield in front of the
laser sensor free of ice, snow, dirt,
etc., see City Safety – function
(p. 198).
•Snow or ice on the hood deeper than
2 inches (5 cm) may obstruct the sen-
sor. Keep the hood free of ice and
snow.
•Do not mount or in any way attach
anything on the windshield that could
obstruct the laser sensor.
Related information
•City Safety – introduction (p. 197)
•City Safety – function (p. 198)
•City Safety – operation (p. 199)
•City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 200)
•City Safety – symbols and messages
(p. 202)
•City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 203)
City Safety – troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
If Windscreen Sensors blocked appears in
the information display, this indicates that the
City Safety™ laser sensor is obstructed in
some way and cannot detect vehicles ahead
of you, which means that the system is not
functioning.
However, this message will not be displayed
in all situations in which the sensor is
obstructed. For this reason, the driver must
ensure that the area of the windshield in front
of the sensor is always kept clean.
The following table shows some of the situa-
tions that can cause the message to be dis-
played and suggested actions.
Cause Action
The area of the wind-
shield in front of the sen-
sor is dirty or covered by
ice or snow.
Clean the
windshield or
remove the ice/
snow.
The laser sensor's field
of view is obstructed.
Remove the
obstruction.
NOTE
If a crack, scratch or stone chip should
occur in the section of the windshield in
front the laser sensor, contact a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician to
repair or replace the windshield (see the
illustration showing the location of the sen-
sor in City Safety – function (p. 198)). Fail-
ing to do so may result in reduced City
Safety™ functionality.
To help prevent limited or reduced func-
tionality, please also observe the following:
•Volvo recommends that cracks,
scratches or stone chips on the wind-
shield in front of the laser sensor
should not be repaired; in such cases,
the entire windshield should be
replaced.
•Before the windshield is replaced,
contact a Volvo retailer to ensure that
the correct windshield is ordered and
installed. If the wrong type of wind-
shield is used, this may cause City
Safety™ to function improperly or not
at all. Volvo recommends the use of
only Genuine Volvo Replacement
Windshields.
•When replacing windshield wipers, use
the same type or ones approved by
Volvo.

07 Driver support

201

Related information

•City Safety – introduction (p. 197)

•City Safety – function (p. 198)

•City Safety – operation (p. 199)

•City Safety – limitations (p. 199)

•City Safety – symbols and messages

(p. 202)

•City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 203)

07 Driver support

202

City Safety – symbols and messages

Symbols and messages in the display

When City Safety™ automatically applies the

brakes, one or more of the symbols in the

main instrument panel may illuminate and its

associated message will be displayed.

A text message can be erased by pressing

briefly on the OK button on the turn signal

lever.

Symbol Message Meaning/action required

Auto braking by City

Safety

City Safety™ is applying/has applied the brakes automatically.

Windscreen Sensors

blocked

The laser sensor is temporarily not functioning due to an obstruction.

•Remove the obstruction and/or clean the windshield in front of the sensor(s).

For more information on the sensor’s limitations, see City Safety – limitations (p. 199).

City Safety Service

required

City Safety™ is not functioning.

•If this message remains in the display, have the system checked by a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician.

Related information

•City Safety – introduction (p. 197)

•City Safety – function (p. 198)

•City Safety – operation (p. 199)

•City Safety – limitations (p. 199)

•City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 200)

•City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 203)

07 Driver support

}}

203

City Safety – Laser sensor

The laser sensor

The upper decal describes the laser beam's

classification and contains the following text:

Invisible Laser radiation – Do not view directly

with optical instruments (magnifiers) – Class

1M laser product.

The lower decal describes the laser beam's

physical data and contains the text:

IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies with

FDA performance standards for laser prod-

ucts except for deviations pursuant to Laser

Notice No. 50, dated July 26th, 2001

The laser beam's physical data is listed in the

following table:

Maximum pulse energy 2.64 μJ

Maximum average output 45 mW

Pulse length 33 ns

Divergence (horizontal × verti-

cal)

28° × 12°

NOTE

The function of aftermarket laser detectors

may be affected by City Safety's laser sen-

sor.

WARNING

The laser sensor emits light when the igni-

tion is in mode II or higher, even if City

Safety™ has been switched off.

WARNING

Eye injury may occur if any of the following

points are not followed:

•It is essential that all pertinent instruc-

tions be followed when handling laser

instruments. Testing, repairing, remov-

ing, adjusting and/or replacing any

components in the laser sensor may

only be done by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician.

•Do not remove the laser sensor

(including removal of the lenses). A

laser sensor that has been removed

belongs to laser class 3B according to

standard IEC 60825-1. Devices in laser

class 3B present a risk of injury to the

eyes.

•The laser sensor’s connector must be

disconnected before the sensor is

removed from the windshield.

•The laser sensor must be mounted in

place on the windshield before con-

necting the sensor’s connector.

•Do not view the laser sensor (which

emits spreading, invisible laser beams)

with optical instruments from a dis-

tance of less than 4 inches (100 mm).

Related information

•City Safety – introduction (p. 197)

•City Safety – function (p. 198)

•City Safety – operation (p. 199)

07 Driver support

204

•City Safety – limitations (p. 199)

•City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 200)

•City Safety – symbols and messages

(p. 202)

Collision warning – introduction

Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full

Auto Brake is designed to assist the driver if

there is a risk of a collision with a pedestrian,

a cyclist, a vehicle ahead that is at a standstill

or one that is moving in the same direction as

your vehicle.

This system consists of the following three

functions:

•Collision Warning warns the driver of a

potential collision situation.

•Brake Support helps the driver brake

efficiently in a critical situation.

•Auto-brake brakes the vehicle automati-

cally if a collision with a pedestrian, a

cyclist or another vehicle cannot be avoi-

ded and the driver does not apply the

brakes in time or steer around the per-

son/vehicle. Auto-brake can help prevent

a collision or reduce the speed at which a

collision occurs.

Since Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with

Full Auto Brake is activated in circumstances

where the driver should have begun braking

much sooner, the system will not be able to

assist the driver in all situations.

This system is designed to activate as late as

possible to help avoid unnecessary interven-

tion.

The system should not be used in such a way

that the driver changes his/her way of operat-

ing the vehicle. If the driver relies entirely on

the system, the chances of an accident even-

tually occurring increase considerably.

The Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full

Auto Brake and City Safety™ systems sup-

plement each other. See City Safety – intro-

duction (p. 197) for detailed information about

City Safety™.

WARNING

No automatic system can be guaranteed

to function 100% correctly in all situations.

For that reason, never test the Auto-brake

system by driving toward a person or

object. This could result in serious injury or

death.

07 Driver support
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 205
WARNING
•Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with
Full Auto Brake does not work in all
driving, traffic, weather and road con-
ditions. It does not react to vehicles
not traveling in the same direction as
your vehicle.
•Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with
Full Auto Brake does not react to ani-
mals.
•Warnings are only provided when the
risk of collision is high. The "Function"
section provides information about
limitations that the driver must be
aware of before using Collision Warn-
ing.
•Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with
Full Auto Brake will not provide a
warning or brake the vehicle for
pedestrians or cyclists at speeds
above 50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING
•Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with
Full Auto Brake will not provide a
warning or brake the vehicle for
pedestrians in darkness or in tunnels,
even if there is street lighting in the
area.
•The auto-brake function can help pre-
vent a collision or reduce the speed at
impact but the driver should always
apply the brakes for the best possible
braking effect, even if auto-brake is
actively applying the brakes.
•Never wait for a collision warning. This
system is designed to be a supple-
mentary driving aid. It is not, however,
intended to replace the driver's atten-
tion and judgement. The driver is
responsible for maintaining a safe dis-
tance and speed, even when the colli-
sion warning system is in use.
•Maintenance of the Pedestrian and
Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake
system's components must only be
performed by a trained and qualified
Volvo technician.
Related information
•Collision warning* – function (p. 206)
•Collision warning* – operation (p. 207)
•Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection
(p. 209)
•Collision warning* – Cyclist detection
(p. 208)
•Collision warning* – limitations (p. 210)
•The camera’s limitations (p. 212)
•The camera’s limitations (p. 212)
•Collision warning – troubleshooting
(p. 213)
•Collision warning – symbols and mes-
sages (p. 215)

07 Driver support
07
206 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Collision warning* – function
Function overview
Audio-visual warning signals, collision risk
Radar sensor
Camera
Collision Warning
The radar sensor and the camera work
together to detect a pedestrian, a cyclist, sta-
tionary vehicles and vehicles that are moving
in the same direction as your vehicle. If there
is a risk of collision with a vehicle, a cyclist or
a pedestrian, the driver is alerted by a flash-
ing red warning light and an audible warning
signal. The system is active at speeds above
3 mph (4 km/h).
Brake Support
If the risk of collision continues to increase
after the collision warning has been given,
Brake Support is activated. Brake Support
prepares the brake system to react quickly,
and the brakes are applied slightly. This may
be experienced as a light tug.
If the brakes are applied quickly, full braking
effect will be provided. Brake Support also
increases brake force if the system deter-
mines that the driver has not applied ade-
quate pressure on the brake pedal.
Auto-brake
If a collision is imminent and the driver has
not applied the brakes or begun to steer
around the vehicle, pedestrian or a cyclist,
the auto-brake function is activated without
the driver pressing the brake pedal. Full brake
force is applied to help reduce the vehicle’s
speed when the collision occurs or limited
brake force is applied if this is sufficient to
avoid the collision.
NOTE
The auto-brake and brake support func-
tions are always on and cannot be turned
off.
Related information
•Collision warning – introduction (p. 204)
•Collision warning* – operation (p. 207)
•Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection
(p. 209)
•Collision warning* – Cyclist detection
(p. 208)
•Collision warning* – limitations (p. 210)
•Collision warning – troubleshooting
(p. 213)
•Collision warning – symbols and mes-
sages (p. 215)

07 Driver support
07
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 207
Collision warning* – operation
Settings are made by pressing MY CAR on
the center console control panel and using
the menus displayed.
Activating/deactivating both warning
signals
To switch the system's audible and visual
signals on or off at the same time, press MY
CAR on the center console control panel and
go to Settings Car settings Driver
support systems Collision Warning. If
Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full
Auto Brake is on, the system will perform a
self-test each time the engine is started by
briefly illuminating the warning light. See My
Car – introduction (p. 74) for a description of
the menu system.
When the engine is switched on, the system
setting that was being used when it was
switched off will be the default setting.
NOTE
The auto-brake and pedestrian/cyclist
detection features are always on, even if
the audible and visual warning signals
have been deactivated.
Activating/deactivating the audible
warning signal only
The audible warning signal can be activated/
deactivated by pressing MY CAR on the cen-
ter console control panel and going to
Settings Car settings Driver support
systems Warning sound if risk of
collision.
Setting a warning distance
This setting determines the distance at which
the visual and audible warnings are triggered.
Select Long, Normal or Short by pressing
MY CAR on the center console control panel
and going to Settings Car settings
Driver support systems Collision
Warning Warning distance.
The warning distance determines the level of
sensitivity used by the system. The warning
distance Long provides an earlier warning.
Begin by using Long and if the system gives
too many warnings, try changing to Normal.
WARNING
•The setting Short should only be used
in situations where traffic is light and
moving at low speeds.
•Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with
Full Auto Brake alerts the driver to the
risk of a collision but this function can-
not reduce the driver’s reaction time.
•For the system to be as effective as
possible, it is recommended that Dis-
tance Alert be set to 4 or 5, see Dis-
tance Alert – operation (p. 193).
NOTE
•When Adaptive Cruise Control is used,
the warning light and signal will be
used by that function, even if the
warnings provided by Pedestrian and
Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake
have been deactivated by the driver.
•In situations where traffic is moving at
considerably different speeds, or if the
vehicle ahead brakes suddenly, warn-
ings may be considered to be late,
even if the setting Long has been
selected.
Checking settings
The current system settings can be checked
by pressing MY CAR on the center console
control panel and going to Settings Car
settings Driver support systems
Collision Warning.
Related information
•Collision warning – introduction (p. 204)
•Collision warning* – function (p. 206)
•Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection
(p. 209)
•Collision warning* – Cyclist detection
(p. 208)
•Collision warning* – limitations (p. 210)
•The camera’s limitations (p. 212)

07 Driver support

208 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

•Collision warning – symbols and mes-

sages (p. 215)

•Collision warning – troubleshooting

(p. 213)

Collision warning* – Cyclist detection

The system can detect a cyclist and auto-

brake if certain parameters are fulfilled.

Optimal example of what the system considers

to be a cyclist: clear body/bike contours, straight

from behind and directly in front of the vehicle

In order to help detect a cyclist, the system

has to receive clear information about the

contours of the cyclist's body and the bike. It

has to able to clearly detect the bike, the

cyclist's head, arms, shoulders, legs and

upper and lower body combined with the per-

son's pattern of movement when cycling.

The function only detects cyclists from behind

who are moving in the same direction as your

vehicle

The Cyclist Detection feature requires the fol-

lowing in order to function:

•The cyclist must be an adult riding an

"adult-size" bike

•The bike must be equipped with an

approved and clearly visible rear-facing

red reflector that is mounted at least

27 in. (70 cm) above the road surface

•The feature can only detect a cyclist

straight from behind and who is moving in

the same direction as your vehicle

•A cyclist who is to the left or right of your

vehicle may be detected late or not at all.

•The camera's capacity to see a cyclist at

dawn or dusk is limited, much as it is for

the human eye.

•The camera's function is deactivated and

will not detect a cyclist in darkness or in

07 Driver support
07
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 209
tunnels, even if there is street lighting in
the area.
•For optimal cyclist detection, City
Safety™ must be activated.
WARNING
Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full
Auto Brake is designed to be a supple-
mentary driving aid. It is not, however,
intended to replace the driver's attention
and judgement. The driver is always
responsible for operating the vehicle in a
safe manner.
The system cannot detect a bike/cyclist if:
•He/she is wearing loose-fitting clothing
that may obscure body contours
•The bike is approaching your vehicle
from the side
•The bike is not equipped with a rear-
facing red reflector
•The bike is carrying large objects
•Most of the cyclist's body or the bike
itself cannot be "seen" by the system's
camera
Related information
•Collision warning – introduction (p. 204)
•Collision warning* – function (p. 206)
•Collision warning* – operation (p. 207)
•Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection
(p. 209)
•Collision warning* – limitations (p. 210)
•Collision warning – troubleshooting
(p. 213)
•Collision warning – symbols and mes-
sages (p. 215)
Collision warning* – Pedestrian
detection
The system cannot identify all pedestrians
The Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full
Auto Brake system can only identify and
detect a pedestrian who is standing upright.
This person can be standing still, walking or
running.
This means that the system has to be able to
identify a person's head, arms, shoulders,
legs, the upper and lower parts of the body
and a person's pattern of movement when
walking or running.
If parts of the body are not visible to the cam-
era, the system cannot detect the pedestrian.
The following conditions apply:
•In order to detect a pedestrian, the sys-
tem must have a full view of the person's

||
07 Driver support
07
210 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
entire body and the person must be at
least 32 in. (80 cm) tall.
•The system cannot detect a pedestrian
carrying a large object.
•The camera's capacity to see a pedes-
trian at dawn or dusk is limited, much as
it is for the human eye.
•The camera's function is deactivated and
will not detect a pedestrian in darkness or
in tunnels, even if there is street lighting in
the area.
WARNING
•Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with
Full Auto Brake is designed to be a
supplementary driving aid. It is not,
however, intended to replace the driv-
er's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for operat-
ing the vehicle in a safe manner.
•The system cannot detect all pedes-
trians in all situations, such as in dark-
ness/at night and cannot detect parti-
ally hidden pedestrians, people who
are less than approx. 32 in. (80 cm)
tall, or people wearing clothing that
obscures the contours of their bodies.
Related information
•Collision warning – introduction (p. 204)
•Collision warning* – function (p. 206)
•Collision warning* – operation (p. 207)
•Collision warning* – Cyclist detection
(p. 208)
•Collision warning* – limitations (p. 210)
•Collision warning – troubleshooting
(p. 213)
•Collision warning – symbols and mes-
sages (p. 215)
Collision warning* – limitations
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light
contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the
driver is not looking straight ahead may make
the visual warning signal in the windshield dif-
ficult to see. For this reason, always activate
the audible warning signal.
Slippery driving conditions increase braking
distance, which can reduce the system's
capacity to avoid a collision. In these condi-
tions, the ABS and stability systems provide
the best possible braking effect while helping
to maintain stability.
NOTE
The visual warning signal may be tempo-
rarily disengaged in the event of high pas-
senger compartment temperature due to
strong sunlight, etc. If this occurs, the
audible warning signal will be used, even if
it has been deactivated in the menu sys-
tem.

07 Driver support
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 211
WARNING
•In certain situations, the system can-
not provide warnings or warnings may
be delayed if traffic conditions or other
external factors make it impossible for
the radar sensor or camera to detect a
pedestrian, a cyclist or a vehicle
ahead.
•Warnings may not be provided if the
distance to the vehicle ahead is short,
or if movements of the steering wheel/
brake pedal are great, such as during
active driving.
•The sensor system has a limited range
for pedestrians/cyclists and provides
warnings and braking effect most
effectively at speeds up to 30 mph
(50 km/h). For stationary or slow-mov-
ing vehicles, the system functions best
if your vehicle’s speed is below
approximately 45 mph (70 km/h).
•Warnings for stationary or slow-mov-
ing vehicles may not be provided in
dark conditions or in poor visibility.
The Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full
Auto Brake system uses the same radar sen-
sors as Adaptive Cruise Control. For more
information on the radar sensor and its limita-
tions, see Adaptive Cruise Control – limita-
tions (p. 188).
NOTE
If warnings are given too frequently, the
warning distance can be reduced (see Col-
lision warning* – operation (p. 207)). This
causes the system to provide later warn-
ings, which decreases the total number of
warnings provided.
WARNING
•The system is not activated at speeds
under approx. 2 mph (4 km/h). There-
fore, it will not brake your vehicle if you
approach a vehicle ahead at very low
speed, such as when parking.
•The driver's actions always have high-
est priority and override the Pedestrian
and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto
Brake system. This means that the
system will not intervene in situations
where the driver is actively steering,
braking or pressing the accelerator
pedal, even if a collision is imminent.
•When Auto-brake has prevented a col-
lision with a stationary object, your
vehicle will remain at a standstill for
approx. 1.5 seconds. If your vehicle
has been braked for a moving vehicle
ahead, your vehicle's speed will be
reduced to the same speed as that
vehicle's.
Related information
•Collision warning – introduction (p. 204)
•Collision warning* – operation (p. 207)
•Collision warning* – function (p. 206)
•Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection
(p. 209)
•Collision warning* – Cyclist detection
(p. 208)
•The camera’s limitations (p. 212)
•Collision warning – symbols and mes-
sages (p. 215)
•Collision warning – troubleshooting
(p. 213)

07 Driver support
07
212 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The camera’s limitations
The camera has the same limitations as the
human eye.
The camera is used by Pedestrian and Cyclist
Detection with Full Auto Brake Collision warn-
ing – introduction (p. 204), Active High Beams
(Active high beams (AHB)* (p. 88)), Road Sign
Information (Road Sign Information (RSI)* –
introduction (p. 174)) and Driver Alert System
(Driver Alert System (p. 217)) with Lane
Departure Warning or Lane Keeping Aid.
NOTE
•To help protect the camera in very hot
conditions, it may be temporarily
switched off for approximately 15
minutes after the engine has been
started.
•Keep the section of the windshield in
front of the camera clean and free of
ice, snow, or condensation.
WARNING
•The camera has the same type of limi-
tations as the human eye, i.e., it can-
not see as well in heavy snowfall or
rain, thick fog or in heavy blowing dust
or snow. In such conditions, systems
depending on the camera may experi-
ence greatly reduced functionality or
may be temporarily deactivated.
•Never place any objects, decals, etc.,
on the windshield in front of the cam-
era. This could reduce or block the
camera’s function, and could cause
one or more of the systems that utilize
the camera to stop functioning.
•Strong sunlight, reflections from the
road surface, ice or snow covering the
road, a dirty road surface, or unclear
lane marker lines may drastically
reduce the camera’s capacity to
detect the side of a lane, a pedestrian,
a cyclist or another vehicle.
Related information
•Collision warning – introduction (p. 204)
•Collision warning* – function (p. 206)
•Collision warning* – operation (p. 207)
•Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection
(p. 209)
•Collision warning* – Cyclist detection
(p. 208)
•Collision warning* – limitations (p. 210)
•Collision warning – troubleshooting
(p. 213)
•Collision warning – symbols and mes-
sages (p. 215)
•Road Sign Information (RSI)* – introduc-
tion (p. 174)
•Driver Alert System (p. 217)
•Active high beams (AHB)* (p. 88)

07 Driver support

}}

213

Collision warning – troubleshooting

Fault tracing and actions

If the message Windscreen Sensors

blocked is displayed, this means that the

camera is obscured and cannot detect

pedestrians, cyclists, vehicles or road marker

lines in front of the vehicle.

This, in turn, means that Pedestrian and

Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake, Driver

Alert Control, Lane Departure Warning or

Lane Keeping Aid will not have full functional-

ity.

The table lists possible causes for this mes-

sage being displayed, and suitable actions.

Cause Action

The surface of the windshield in front of the camera is dirty or covered

with ice or snow.

Clean or clear the section of the windshield in front of the camera.

Fog, heavy rain or snow is interfering with the function of the camera. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the

camera.

The surface of the windshield is clean but the message remains in the

display.

Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the camera to regis-

ter visibility.

The surface between the inside of the windshield and the camera is

dirty.

Contact an authorized Volvo retailer or service technician to have this

surface cleaned.

||
07 Driver support
07
214 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Maintenance
Camera and radar sensor6.
In order to function properly, the camera and
radar sensor must be kept clean. Dirt, ice,
snow, etc., will reduce the function of these
components.
Remove ice and snow when necessary and
wash these areas regularly with a suitable car
washing liquid.
Related information
•Collision warning – introduction (p. 204)
•Collision warning* – function (p. 206)
•Collision warning* – operation (p. 207)
•Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection
(p. 209)
•Collision warning* – Cyclist detection
(p. 208)
•Collision warning* – limitations (p. 210)
•The camera’s limitations (p. 212)
•Collision warning – symbols and mes-
sages (p. 215)
6The illustration is generic; details will vary, depending on the model

07 Driver support

}}

215

Collision warning – symbols and

messages

The table lists possible causes for collision

warning-related messages being displayed,

and suitable actions.

A text message can be erased by pressing

briefly on the OK button on the turn signal

lever.

Symbol Message Description

Collis'n warning

OFF

Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is switched off. This message is displayed when the

engine is started and will disappear after approx. 5 seconds. It can also be erased by pressing the OK but-

ton.

Collision Warning

Unavailable

Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake cannot be activated. This message is displayed when

the driver attempts to activate the function. It will disappear after approx. 5 seconds or can be erased by

pressing the OK button.

Auto braking was

activated

Auto-braking has been active. This message can be erased by pressing the OK button.

Windscreen Sen-

sors blocked

The camera is temporarily not functioning. This message is displayed if the camera is obstructed by snow,

ice, dirt, etc., on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera, see The camera’s

limitations (p. 212) for more information on the camera’s limitations.

Radar blocked See

manual

Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is temporarily not functioning. The radar sensor is

blocked, for example by heavy rain or snow that has accumulated in front of the sensor, and cannot detect

other vehicles, see Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations (p. 188) for more information on the radar sensor’s

limitations.

Collision warn.

Service required

Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is partially or completely not functioning.

Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display.

||
07 Driver support
07
216 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Related information
•Collision warning – introduction (p. 204)
•Collision warning* – function (p. 206)
•Collision warning* – operation (p. 207)
•Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection
(p. 209)
•Collision warning* – Cyclist detection
(p. 208)
•Collision warning* – limitations (p. 210)
•Collision warning – troubleshooting
(p. 213)

07 Driver support

}}

217

Driver Alert System

The Driver Alert System is designed to help a

driver who may be becoming fatigued or who

is inadvertently leaving the lane.

Introduction

The Driver Alert System consists of two differ-

ent functions that can be switched on

together or separately.

•Driver Alert Control (DAC), see Driver

Alert Control (DAC) – introduction

(p. 217)

•Lane Departure Warning (LDW)7, see

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – intro-

duction (p. 222)

•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)8, see Lane

Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction (p. 227)

When one or both of the functions has been

switched on, it is in standby mode and is acti-

vated when the vehicle exceeds a speed of

40 mph (65 km/h).

The function deactivates if the vehicle's

speed goes under 37 mph (60 km/h).

Both functions use a camera that is depend-

ent on the road/lane being clearly marked by

painted lines on each side.

WARNING

The Driver Alert System does not function

in all situations and is designed to be a

supplementary aid. It is not, however,

intended to replace the driver’s attention

and judgement.

Driver Alert Control (DAC) –

introduction

DAC is intended to alert the driver if his/her

driving becomes erratic, such as if the driver

is distracted or fatigued.

DAC is designed to help detect a slowly

changing driving pattern. It is primarily

intended to be used on main roads and is not

meant for use in city traffic.

A camera monitors the painted lines marking

the lane in which the vehicle is traveling and

compares the direction of the road with the

driver’s movements of the steering wheel.

The driver is alerted if the vehicle does not

follow the lane smoothly.

7Models with 5- or 6-cylinder engines only.

8Models with 4-cylinder engines only.

||
07 Driver support
07
218
NOTE
The camera has certain limitations, see
Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations
(p. 188).
WARNING
•DAC is not intended to extend the
duration of driving. Always plan breaks
at regular intervals to help remain alert.
•A warning from DAC should not be
ignored. A driver may not be aware of
how fatigued he/she has become.
•In certain cases, fatigue may not affect
the driver’s behavior. In situations of
this type, no warning will be provided.
Therefore, it is important to take
breaks at regular intervals, regardless
of whether or not DAC has given a
warning.
Related information
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function
(p. 219)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – operation
(p. 218)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – limitations
(p. 219)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – symbols and
messages (p. 220)
•Driver Alert System (p. 217)
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – intro-
duction (p. 222)
•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction
(p. 227)
Driver Alert Control (DAC) – operation
Operating DAC
Settings are made using menu system and
the display in the center console. See My Car
– introduction (p. 74) for more information on
the menu system.
On/Off
To put Driver Alert in standby mode:
•In the MY CAR menu, scroll to Car
settings Driver support systems
Driver Alert and check the box. If the box
is not checked, the function is off.
Related information
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction
(p. 217)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function
(p. 219)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – limitations
(p. 219)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – symbols and
messages (p. 220)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction
(p. 217)
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – intro-
duction (p. 222)
•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction
(p. 227)

07 Driver support
07
219
Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function
Function
Driver Alert is activated when the vehicle
exceeds a speed of 40 mph (65 km/h) and will
remain active as long as the speed is over
approx. 37 mph (60 km/h).
If the vehicle is being driven errati-
cally, the driver will be alerted by an
audible signal and the message
Driver Alert Time for a break is
displayed. The warning will be repeated after
a short time if the driving pattern remains the
same.
Press the OK button to erase a message.
WARNING
•An alert should be taken seriously
since it is sometimes difficult for a
driver to realize that he/she is fatigued.
•In the event of a warning or if the
driver feels fatigued, stop as soon as
possible in a safe place and rest.
Related information
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction
(p. 217)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – operation
(p. 218)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – limitations
(p. 219)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – symbols and
messages (p. 220)
•Driver Alert System (p. 217)
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – intro-
duction (p. 222)
•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction
(p. 227)
Driver Alert Control (DAC) –
limitations
Limitations
In certain situations, DAC may provide warn-
ings even if the driver’s driving pattern has
not become erratic:
•in strong crosswinds
•on grooved road surfaces.
•if the driver is testing the LDW function,
see Lane Departure Warning (LDW) –
introduction (p. 222)
or
•if the driver is testing the LKA function,
see Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduc-
tion (p. 227)
Related information
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction
(p. 217)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function
(p. 219)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – operation
(p. 218)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – symbols and
messages (p. 220)
•Driver Alert System (p. 217)
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – intro-
duction (p. 222)
•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction
(p. 227)

07 Driver support

220

Driver Alert Control (DAC) – symbols

and messages

Depending on the situation, DAC may display

certain symbols and text messages in the

instrument panel or center console screen.

Symbols and messages

Instrument panel

Symbol Message Description

Driver Alert Time for a

break

The vehicle has been driven erratically. The driver receives an audible signal and a text message.

Windscreen Sensors

blocked

The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area of

the windshield in front of the camera. See The camera’s limitations (p. 212) for information on the cam-

era’s limitations.

Driver Alert Sys Service

required

The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message

remains in the display.

07 Driver support
07
221
Center console display
Symbol Message Description
-Driver Alert OFF The function is not switched on.
-Driver Alert Available The function is active.
-Driver Alert Standby <65
km/h
The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph (65 km/h).
-Driver Alert Unavailable The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area
of the windshield in front of the camera. See The camera’s limitations (p. 212) for information on the
camera’s limitations.
Related information
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction
(p. 217)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function
(p. 219)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – operation
(p. 218)
•Driver Alert Control (DAC) – limitations
(p. 219)
•Driver Alert System (p. 217)
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – intro-
duction (p. 222)
•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction
(p. 227)

07 Driver support
07
222
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) –
introduction
The LDW function is designed to help reduce
the risk of accidents in situations where the
vehicle unintentionally leaves its lane and
there is a risk of driving off the road or into the
opposite lane.
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)9
Your vehicle may be equipped with Lane
Departure Warning (LDW) or Lane Keeping
Aid (LKA), depending on your choice of
engine. If you are uncertain as to which of
these optional systems is in your vehicle:
•Press the MY CAR button on the center
console to open the menu system. Scroll
to Settings Driver support system.
The system in your vehicle (Lane
Departure Warning or Lane Keeping
Aid) will be displayed there.
If your vehicle is equipped with Lane Keeping
Aid (LKA), see Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – intro-
duction (p. 227) for detailed information.
The illustration is generic
LDW uses the camera located at the center,
upper edge of the windshield to monitor the
road's/lane’s side marker lines. If the vehicle
crosses a side marker line or the road’s cen-
ter dividing line, the driver will be alerted by
an audible signal.
WARNING
This feature is only intended to assist the
driver and does not function in all driving,
weather, traffic or road conditions.
As the driver, you have full responsibility
for operating the vehicle in a safe manner.
Related information
•Driver Alert System (p. 217)
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – symbols
and messages (p. 225)
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – opera-
tion (p. 223)
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita-
tions (p. 224)
9Models with 5- or 6-cylinder engines only.

07 Driver support

}}

223

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) –

operation

Operation and function

LDW can be switched on or off by pressing

the button on the center console. A light in

the button illuminates when the function is

on. This is supplemented by graphic displays

in the instrument panel, for example:

LDW displayed in the instrument panel

•The LDW symbol has white side marker

lines: – the function is active and "sees"

one or both of the road's side marker

lines.

•The LDW symbol has gray side marker

lines: – the function is active but cannot

"see" one or both of the road's side

marker lines.

•The LDW symbol has gray side marker

lines: – the function is in standby mode

because the vehicle's speed is below

40 mph (65 km/h).

•The LDW symbol has no side marker

lines: – the function is deactivated.

WARNING

The driver will only be warned once for

each time the wheels cross a marker line.

No alarm will be given if a marker line is

between the wheels.

Settings

Settings for Lane Departure Warning can be

made in the menu system by pressing My

Car. Go to Settings Car settings

Driver support systems Lane Departure

Warning.

There are two alternatives:

•On at start-up: This selection switches

LDW on each time the engine is started.

Otherwise, the system will be in the mode

that it was in when the engine was

switched off.

•Increased sensitivity: This selection

increases the function’s sensitivity. Warn-

ings will be given at an earlier stage and

fewer limitations apply. When this setting

is being used, the system only needs to

monitor lane marker lines on one side of

the vehicle to change status to Lane

Depart Warn Available.

Related information

•Driver Alert System (p. 217)

•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – symbols

and messages (p. 225)

07 Driver support
07
224
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – intro-
duction (p. 222)
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita-
tions (p. 224)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) -
limitations
Limitations
The camera used by LDW has the same limi-
tations as the human eye. See The camera’s
limitations (p. 212) for more information about
the camera's limitations.
NOTE
No warning signal will be given in the cer-
tain situations, such as:
•If the turn signal is being used
•The driver’s foot is on the brake
pedal10
•The accelerator pedal is pressed
quickly10
•If the steering wheel is moved
quickly10
•In sharp turns that cause the vehicle’s
body to sway
Related information
•Driver Alert System (p. 217)
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – symbols
and messages (p. 225)
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – opera-
tion (p. 223)
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – intro-
duction (p. 222)
10 When Increased sensitivity has been selected, a warning will be issued if a side marker line is crossed in this situation.

07 Driver support

}}

225

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) –

symbols and messages

Symbols and messages

A text message can be erased by pressing

briefly on the OK button on the turn signal

lever.

Symbol Message Description

Lane departure warning ON/

Lane departure warning OFF

The function is switched on or off. The text disappears after 5 seconds.

-Lane Depart Warn Available The function is monitoring the road’s marker lines.

-Lane Depart. Warning

Unavailable at this speed

The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph

(65 km/h).

-Lane Depart Warn Unavaila-

ble

The road lacks clear marker lines or the camera is not functioning properly. See The camera’s

limitations (p. 212) for information on the camera’s limitations.

Windscreen Sensors blocked The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the

area of the windshield in front of the camera. See The camera’s limitations (p. 212) for information

on the camera’s limitations.

Driver Alert Sys Service

required

The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the mes-

sage remains in the display.

07 Driver support

226

Related information

•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – opera-

tion (p. 223)

•Driver Alert System (p. 217)

•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – intro-

duction (p. 222)

•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita-

tions (p. 224)

07 Driver support
07
227
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction
The LKA function is designed to help reduce
the risk of accidents in situations where the
vehicle unintentionally leaves its lane and
there is a risk of driving off the road or into the
opposite lane.
LDW or LKA
Your vehicle may be equipped with Lane
Departure Warning (LDW) or Lane Keeping
Aid (LKA), depending on your choice of
engine. If you are uncertain as to which of
these optional systems is in your vehicle:
•Press the MY CAR button on the center
console to open the menu system. Scroll
to Settings Driver support system.
The system in your vehicle (Lane
Departure Warning or Lane Keeping
Aid) will be displayed there.
If your vehicle is equipped with Lane
Departure Warning (LDW), see Lane Depar-
ture Warning (LDW) – introduction (p. 222) for
detailed information.
LKA function
The LKA function is primarily intended for use
on highways or other major roads with clearly
marked side marker and center lines.
The illustration is generic
LKA uses the camera located at the center,
upper edge of the windshield to monitor the
road's/lane’s side marker lines.
If the vehicle crosses a side marker line or the
road’s center dividing line, LKA will provide
active steering assistance to help steer it
back into the lane.
The driver will also be alerted by vibrations in
the steering wheel.
WARNING
This feature is only intended to assist the
driver and does not function in all driving,
weather, traffic or road conditions.
As the driver, you have full responsibility
for operating the vehicle in a safe manner.
Related information
•Driver Alert System (p. 217)
•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – operation
(p. 228)
•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – limitations
(p. 230)
•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – symbols and
messages (p. 231)
•The camera’s limitations (p. 212)

07 Driver support

228

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – operation

LKA is active at speeds above 40 mph

(65 km/h) on highways or other major roads

with clearly marked side/lane marker and

center lines. On narrow roads where the dis-

tance between side/lane marker lines is less

than approximately 8.5 feet ( 2.6 meters), LKA

will be temporarily deactivated.

LKA monitors and follows the marker lines (the

red lines in the illustration)

•White side marker lines: the function is

active and "sees" one or both of the

road's side marker lines.

•Gray side marker lines: the function is

active but cannot "see" one or both of the

road's side marker lines.

LKA intervening on the right side (the red line)

When LKA is working actively, this is indi-

cated by:

•Red side marker line: the line being

crossed.

On/Off

LKA can be switched on or off by pressing

the button on the center console. A light in

the button illuminates when the function is

on.

Depending on the number of optional fea-

tures installed in the vehicle, there may not be

space for the On/Off button on the center

console. If this is the case, LKA can be

switched on or off in the MY CAR menu sys-

tem.

The following LKA-related settings can also

be made in MY CAR, under Settings Lane

Keeping Aid settings Assistance mode:

•Vibration only: Warning by vibrations in

the steering wheel On or Off.

•Steering assist only: Active steering On

or Off.

•Full function: Both vibrations and active

steering On or Off.

07 Driver support

229

Steering assist

LKA attempts to keep the vehicle within the

lane's side marker lines.

LKA provides steering assistance

If the vehicle approaches one of the lane's

side marker lines and the turn signals are

not being used, LKA will attempt to steer the

vehicle back into the lane.

Vibration warnings

LKA provides vibrations in the steering wheel

and steering assistance11.

If the vehicle crosses a marker line, LKA pro-

vides a warning in the form of vibrations in

the steering wheel. This occurs even if the

steering assist function has been deactivated.

Dynamic cornering

LKA does not intervene in sharp left curves

In certain cases, LKA allows the vehicle to

cross marker lines without providing a vibra-

tion warning or steering assistance, for exam-

ple, during dynamic cornering as shown in

the illustration where the driver's view of the

road and traffic conditions make this possi-

ble.

Related information

•Driver Alert System (p. 217)

•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction

(p. 227)

•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – limitations

(p. 230)

•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – symbols and

messages (p. 231)

11 The illustration shows 3 vibration warnings when the vehicle crosses the marker line

07 Driver support
07
230
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – limitations
The camera used by LKA has the same limi-
tations as the human eye. See The camera’s
limitations (p. 212) for more information about
the camera's limitations.
NOTE
In certain cases, it may be difficult for LKA
to assist the driver correctly. In the follow-
ing conditions, it may be preferable to turn
LKA off:
•Road construction areas
•Winter road conditions
•Poor road surfaces
•A very sporty driving style
•Bad weather conditions with poor visi-
bility
WARNING
Hands on the steering wheel: In order for
LKA to function correctly, the driver's
hands have to be on the steering wheel,
which LKA monitors steadily. If this is not
the case, the driver will be alerted by a text
message to actively steer the vehicle.
If this is not done, LKA will go into standby
mode and will remain disengaged until the
driver begins to actively steer the vehicle
again.
Related information
•Driver Alert System (p. 217)
•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction
(p. 227)
•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – operation
(p. 228)
•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – symbols and
messages (p. 231)

07 Driver support
07
231
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – symbols
and messages
A text message can be erased by pressing
briefly on the OK button on the turn signal
lever.
Symbol Message Description
-Lane Keeping Aid Unavailable
at this speed
The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph
(65 km/h).
-Lane Keeping Aid Unavailable
for current markings
The road lacks clear marker lines or the camera is not functioning properly. See The camera’s
limitations (p. 212) for information on the camera’s limitations.
-Lane Keeping Aid Available The function is monitoring the road’s marker lines.
Windscreen sensors blocked
See manual
The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the
area of the windshield in front of the camera. See The camera’s limitations (p. 212) for informa-
tion on the camera’s limitations.
Lane Keeping Aid Service
required
The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the
message remains in the display.
Lane Keeping Aid Interrupted The function has gone into standby mode. The lines in the LKA symbol in the instrument panel
will indicate when the function is active again.
Related information
•Driver Alert System (p. 217)
•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – introduction
(p. 227)
•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – operation
(p. 228)
•Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) – limitations
(p. 230)

07 Driver support

232

Park assist – introduction

The park assist system is designed to assist

you when driving into parking spaces,

garages, etc. An audible signal and symbols

in the audio system’s display indicate the dis-

tance to the object.

The park assist system utilizes ultrasound

sensors in the front bumper and rear

bumper(s) to measure the distance to a vehi-

cle or an object that may be close to the front

or rear of your vehicle.

NOTE

A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated

with the vehicle's electrical system will be

included in the measurement of the availa-

ble space behind the vehicle.

WARNING

Park Assist is an information system, NOT

a safety system. This system is designed

to be a supplementary aid when parking

the vehicle. It is not, however, intended to

replace the driver's attention and judge-

ment.

Related information

•Park assist – limitations (p. 235)

•Park assist – function (p. 232)

•Park assist – operation (p. 234)

•Park assist – troubleshooting (p. 240)

•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – function

(p. 241)

Park assist – function

Signals from the park assist system

View in the display (warning for objects front left/

right rear)

Visual indicator

The audio system’s display gives an overview

of the vehicle’s position in relation to a

detected object.

The marked sectors in the display indicate

that one or more of the sensors has detected

an object. The closer the car symbol comes

to a sector, the closer the vehicle is to the

object.

If the infotainment system is switched off, the

park assist system will not be able to provide

a visual indicator. An audible signal will still

be provided.

07 Driver support

}}

233

Audible signal

The Park Assist system uses an intermittent

tone that pulses faster as you come close to

an object, and becomes constant when you

are within approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an

object in front of or behind the vehicle. If

there are objects within this distance both

behind and in front of the vehicle, the tone

alternates between front and rear speakers.

NOTE

The level of the audible signal can be low-

ered/raised with the infotainment volume

control. The level can also be set in the MY

CAR menu system. See My Car – introduc-

tion (p. 74) for a description of the menu

system.

If the volume of another source from the

audio system is high, this will be automati-

cally lowered.

Rear park assist

The distance monitored behind the vehicle is

approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The audible signal

comes from the rear speakers.

The system must be deactivated when towing

a trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mounted

carrier, etc, which could trigger the rear park

assist system's sensors.

NOTE

•Rear park assist is deactivated auto-

matically when towing a trailer if Volvo

genuine trailer wiring is used. If a non-

Volvo trailer hitch is being used, it may

be necessary to switch off the system

manually, see Park assist – operation

(p. 234).

•The system will not detect high

objects, such as a loading dock, etc.

•Objects such as chains, thin shiny

poles or low objects may temporarily

not be detected by the system. This

may result in the pulsing tone unex-

pectedly stopping instead of changing

to a constant tone as the vehicle

approaches the object. In such cases,

use caution when backing up or stop

the vehicle to help avoid damage.

07 Driver support

234 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Front park assist

The distance monitored in front of the vehicle

is approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible

signal comes from the audio system's front

speakers.

It may not be possible to combine auxiliary

headlights and front park assist since these

lights could trigger the system's sensors.

NOTE

Front park assist is deactivated when the

parking brake is applied and or when the

gear selector is in the P position.

Related information

•Park assist – introduction (p. 232)

•Park assist – limitations (p. 235)

•Park assist – operation (p. 234)

•Park assist – troubleshooting (p. 240)

•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – function

(p. 241)

Park assist – operation

Function

Park assist and CTA* button

The system is activated automatically when

the vehicle is started. The indicator light in the

button in the center console illuminates when

the system is on.

•The front park assist system is active

from the time the engine is started until

the vehicle exceeds a speed of approxi-

mately 6 mph (10 km/h). It is also active

when the vehicle is backing up.

•Rear park assist is active when the engine

is running and reverse gear has been

selected.

07 Driver support
07
235
Activating/deactivating
The system is activated automatically when
the vehicle is started.
–Press the Park assist button on the center
console to temporarily deactivate the sys-
tem(s).
> The indicator light in the button will go
out when the system has been deacti-
vated.
Park assist will be automatically reactivated
the next time the engine is started, or if the
button is pressed (the indicator light in the
button will illuminate).
NOTE
Park assist is disengaged automatically
when the parking brake is applied.
Related information
•Park assist – introduction (p. 232)
•Park assist – limitations (p. 235)
•Park assist – function (p. 232)
•Park assist – troubleshooting (p. 240)
•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – function
(p. 241)
Park assist – limitations
Cleaning the sensors
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to
ensure that they work properly. Clean them
with water and a suitable car washing deter-
gent.
Location of the front sensors
Location of the rear sensors
Ice and snow covering the sensors may
cause incorrect warning signals.
NOTE
If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt,
snow, or ice, this could result in false
warning signals from the park assist sys-
tem.
Related information
•Park assist – introduction (p. 232)
•Park assist – function (p. 232)
•Park assist – operation (p. 234)
•Park assist – troubleshooting (p. 240)
•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – function
(p. 241)

07 Driver support
07
236 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – introduction
The Park Assist Pilot provides assistance
when parallel parking by measuring the park-
ing space and turning the steering wheel.
Introduction
The off/on button shown is located on the center
console
Park Assist Pilot (PAP) is a semi-automatic
system that provides assistance when parallel
parking by:
•Finding a parking space and determining
if it is big enough for the vehicle
•Helping to steer the vehicle into the park-
ing space
Information about the actions required of the
driver is provided in the instrument panel in
the form of symbols, images and text.
NOTE
If a trailer hitch is configured in the vehi-
cle's electrical system, PAP will take the
trailer hitch into consideration when deter-
mining the necessary size of a parking
space.
WARNING
•PAP does not function in all situations
and is only intended to assist the
driver when parallel parking.
•As the driver, you have full responsibil-
ity for parking the vehicle in a safe
manner.
Related information
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – function
(p. 236)
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – operation
(p. 237)
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – limitations
(p. 239)
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – symbols and
messages (p. 240)
•Park assist – introduction (p. 232)
•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – intro-
duction (p. 241)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – function
PAP's function is to measure the parking
space and to turn the steering wheel during
the parallel parking procedure. The driver is
responsible for following the instructions
shown in the instrument panel and for: shift-
ing between R (Reverse) and D (Drive) when
required, regulating the vehicle's speed,
applying the brakes and stopping the vehicle.
PAP can be activated in the following condi-
tions:
•When the stability or ABS systems are
not working actively
•The vehicle is not towing a trailer
•The vehicle's speed is below
30 mph (50 km/h)
How PAP works
PAP helps park the vehicle by:

07 Driver support
07
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 237
1. Searching for and measuring a parking
space. While this is taking place, the vehi-
cle's speed must be below 20 mph
(30 km/h). See also steps A and B in the
illustration in the section "1: Searching
and measuring" in Park Assist Pilot (PAP)*
– operation (p. 237).
2. Steering the vehicle as it backs into the
parking space. See also steps C and D in
the illustration in the section "2: Backing
into the parking space" in Park Assist
Pilot (PAP)* – operation (p. 237).
3. Adjusting the vehicle's position in the
parking space by moving forward and
rearward. See also steps E and F in the
illustration in the section "3: Adjusting the
vehicle's position" in Park Assist Pilot
(PAP)* – operation (p. 237).
Related information
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – introduction
(p. 236)
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – limitations
(p. 239)
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – symbols and
messages (p. 240)
•Park assist – introduction (p. 232)
•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – intro-
duction (p. 241)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – operation
1: Searching and measuring
PAP searches for a potential parking space
and measures it to see if there is sufficient
space for your vehicle. To start this proce-
dure:
1. Activate PAP by pressing
this button on the center
console and if necessary
slowing down to a speed
below 20 mph (30 km/h).
2. Keep an eye on the instru-
ment panel and be prepared to stop the vehi-
cle when you are instructed by PAP to do so.
NOTE
PAP normally searches for available park-
ing spaces along the curb on the right
(passenger's) side of the vehicle. However,
it can also assist in finding and parking in
spaces on the driver's side. To do so:
•Activate the left turn signal. PAP will
then search for a parking space on the
left side of the vehicle.

||
07 Driver support
07
238 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
2: Backing into the parking space
When the vehicle is backing up, PAP will
steer it into the parking space.
1. Check that the area behind the vehicle is
clear and put the gear selector in R.
2. Back up slowly without moving the steer-
ing wheel. The vehicle's speed must be
below approximately 4 mph 7 km/h.
3. Keep an eye on the instrument panel and
be prepared to stop the vehicle when you
are instructed by PAP to do so.
NOTE
•Release the wheel while PAP is steer-
ing the vehicle.
•The steering wheel must be able to
turn freely.
•For PAP to function optimally, wait
until the steering wheel is no longer
turning before beginning the next
phase of the parking procedure.
3: Adjusting the vehicle's position
After the vehicle has backed into the parking
space, its position in the space has to be
adjusted by driving slightly forward and back-
ing up.
1. Put the gear selector in D, wait until the
steering wheel has turned and drive for-
ward slowly.
2. Stop the vehicle when you are instructed
by PAP to do so.
3. Put the gear selector in R, back up slowly
and stop when you are instructed by PAP
to do so.
When the parking procedure is finished (this
will be indicated by a text message and a
graphic image in the instrument panel) , PAP
switches off automatically. If necessary, the
driver may need to make minor adjustments
to ensure that the vehicle is parked correctly.
Related information
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – introduction
(p. 236)
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – function (p. 236)
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – limitations
(p. 239)
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – symbols and
messages (p. 240)
•Park assist – introduction (p. 232)
•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – intro-
duction (p. 241)

07 Driver support

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 239

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – limitations

The PAP parking procedure will be cancelled

if.

•The vehicle's speed goes above approxi-

mately 4 mph 7 km/h

•The driver moves the steering wheel

•If the stability or ABS systems are acti-

vated (e.g., if a wheel starts to spin

because of a slippery road surface

If the system has been switched off, this will

be indicated by a text message in the instru-

ment panel.

NOTE

•PAP will not function correctly if its

sensors are obstructed by dirt, snow,

etc.

•In certain situations, PAP may not be

able to measure a parking space. This

could be due to external sources of

sound (e.g., a vehicle's horn, tires on

wet asphalt, pneumatic brakes, noise

from a motorcycle's exhaust, etc.)

emitting ultrasound using approxi-

mately the same frequencies as PAP.

Information to keep in mind

PAP is only intended to provide parallel park-

ing assistance but may not be able to func-

tion fully in all situations.

•PAP's function is based on the way that

the vehicles are parked behind and in

front of your parking space. If they are,

for example, parked too close to the curb,

there is a risk that your vehicle's tires or

wheel rims could be damaged by the

curb during the parking procedure.

•PAP is intended to provide parking assis-

tance on straight streets, not sections of

street with curved or irregular curbs. Be

sure that your vehicle is parallel to the

curb when PAP measures the parking

space.

•PAP may not be able to provide parking

assistance on narrow streets due to lack

of space to maneuver the vehicle. In sit-

uations like this, it may help to drive as

close to the side of the road as possible

where the parking space is located.

•Use only approved tires with the correct

inflation pressure because this affects

PAP's capacity to provide parking assis-

tance. See the table in Tire inflation –

pressure table (p. 305). Changing to a

different approved tire size may affect

PAP's parameters. Consult a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician.

•Heavy rain or snow may inhibit PAP's

capacity to correctly measure a parking

space.

•Do not use PAP if snow chains or a tem-

porary spare tire is being used.

•Do not use PAP if there are any objects

protruding from the vehicle.

WARNING

•The front end of your vehicle may turn

out toward oncoming traffic during the

parking procedure.

•Objects located above the parking

sensors' field of vision are not included

when PAP measures a parking space.

For this reason, PAP may turn into the

parking space too soon. Avoid parking

spaces of this type.

•The driver is always responsible for

determining if PAP has selected a suit-

able parking space.

Maintenance

Generic illustration. The PAP sensors are located

in the front and rear bumpers

PAP uses the same sensors as the Park

assist system, see Park assist – limitations

(p. 235)).

||
07 Driver support
07
240 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to
ensure that they work properly. Clean them
with water and a suitable car washing deter-
gent.
Related information
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – introduction
(p. 236)
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – function (p. 236)
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – operation
(p. 237)
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – symbols and
messages (p. 240)
•Park assist – introduction (p. 232)
•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – intro-
duction (p. 241)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – symbols and
messages
Various PAP-related combinations of sym-
bols, graphics and text messages are dis-
played in the instrument panel and some-
times also include suitable actions.
A text message can be erased by pressing
briefly on the OK button on the turn signal
lever.
Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician If a mes-
sage indicating that PAP is not functioning
properly is displayed.
Related information
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – introduction
(p. 236)
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – function (p. 236)
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – operation
(p. 237)
•Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* – limitations
(p. 239)
•Park assist – introduction (p. 232)
•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – intro-
duction (p. 241)
Park assist – troubleshooting
Faults in the system
If the information symbol illuminates and
Park assist syst Service required is shown
on the information display, this indicates that
the system is not functioning properly and
has been disengaged. Consult a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
CAUTION
In certain circumstances, the park assist
system may give unexpected warning sig-
nals that can be caused by external sound
sources that use the same ultrasound fre-
quencies as the system. This may include
such things as the horns of other vehicles,
wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes,
motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This does
not indicate a fault in the system.
Related information
•Park assist – introduction (p. 232)
•Park assist – limitations (p. 235)
•Park assist – function (p. 232)
•Park assist – operation (p. 234)
•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – function
(p. 241)

07 Driver support

}}

241

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) –

introduction

The Park Assist Camera is designed to pro-

vide the driver with a view of the area behind

the vehicle when backing up.

Introduction

PAC uses the display in the center console to

show the area behind the car while you are

backing up.

PAC also shows guiding lines in the on-

screen image to indicate the direction that the

vehicle will take as it moves rearward, which

helps simplify parallel parking, backing into a

tight space or when attaching a trailer to the

vehicle.

The images of vehicles in this section are

generic and may not depict your specific

model.

NOTE

A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated

with the vehicle's electrical system will be

included in the measurement of the availa-

ble space behind the vehicle.

WARNING

•PAC is designed to be a supplemen-

tary aid when parking the vehicle. It is

not, however, intended to replace the

driver’s attention and judgment.

•The camera has blind spots where it

cannot detect objects or people

behind the vehicle.

•Pay particular attention to people or

animals that are close to the vehicle.

•Objects seen on the screen may be

closer than they appear to be.

Related information

•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – opera-

tion (p. 242)

•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – limita-

tions (p. 245)

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) –

function

Function

The driver sees what is behind the vehicle

and if a person or animal should suddenly

appear from the side.

PAC is mounted on the tailgate, near the

opening handle.

The camera has built-in electronics that help

reduce the “fish-eye” effect so that the image

shown on the screen is as natural as possi-

ble. This may cause some objects on the

screen to “lean,” which is normal.

||
07 Driver support
07
242
Ambient lighting conditions
The camera automatically monitors the ambi-
ent lighting conditions behind the vehicle and
constantly adjusts sensitivity to light. This
may cause the brightness and quality of the
image on the screen to vary slightly. Sensitiv-
ity to light is increased in dark conditions or in
bad weather, which may affect image quality.
If the image on the screen seems too dark,
brightness can be increased with the thumb
wheel on the lighting panel.
NOTE
In order to function properly, the camera
lens should always be kept clean. This is
particularly important in bad weather.
Keep the lens free of dirt, ice or snow.
Related information
•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – intro-
duction (p. 241)
•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – opera-
tion (p. 242)
•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – limita-
tions (p. 245)
Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) –
operation
Activation
PAC is activated when the gear selector is
moved to R if the system is selected in the
MY CAR menu system or by pressing the
CAM button in the center console. See My
Car – introduction (p. 74) for a description of
the menu system.
If PAC is not activated when the gear selector
is moved to R, press the CAM button on the
center console.
PAC will automatically override the view cur-
rently on the screen and will display the cam-
era's view behind the vehicle.
Trailer hitches
The camera can be useful when attaching a
trailer. With the camera zoomed in on the
trailer hitch, a guiding line showing the hitch's
path toward the trailer will be projected.
The guiding lines for the wheels and for the
trailer hitch cannot be displayed at the same
time. To select a view:
1. Press OK/MENU when a camera view is
displayed.
2. Turn TUNE to scroll to Tow bar
trajectory guide line.
3. Confirm by pressing OK/MENU and
press EXIT.
Zoom
When necessary, the camera view can be
zoomed:
•PressCAM or turn TUNE. Pressing or
turning again returns you to normal view.
If there are additional alternatives, press/turn
until the desired camera view is displayed.
Automatic zoom
Automatic zoom is a feature that is available
on models equipped with a trailer hitch and
the optional (p. 232)Park assist system. With
this alternative selected, the camera will
zoom in on the trailer hitch automatically if
the vehicle approaches an object/trailer.
See also the "Settings" section below.
Deactivation
Move the gear selector from R to another
gear. The camera remains active for approx.

07 Driver support

}}

243

5 seconds after the gear selector has been

moved from R or until the vehicle's forward

speed exceeds 6 mph/10 km/h

(21 mph/35 km/h in reverse). The screen will

then revert to the view that was displayed

before R was selected.

NOTE

If any button on the center console control

panel is pressed, the camera image will

disappear from the display. Pressing CAM

will return the camera image to the display.

Settings

By default, PAC is set to activate when the

gear selector is moved to R

To change PAC settings when a camera view

is displayed:

1. Press OK/MENU when a camera view is

on the screen. A menu will be displayed.

2. Turn TUNE to scroll to the desired set-

ting.

3. Press OK/MENU to make the setting and

exit the menu by pressing EXIT.

Summary

•Pressing CAM will activate the camera

even if the gear selector is not in Reverse.

•Toggle between normal view and zoom

by pressing CAM or by turning TUNE.

Related information

•Park assist – introduction (p. 232)

•Park assist – function (p. 232)

•Park assist – troubleshooting (p. 240)

•Park assist – limitations (p. 235)

•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – intro-

duction (p. 241)

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) –

guiding and marker lines

Guiding lines

The lines on the screen are projected as if

they were a path on the ground behind the

vehicle and are directly affected by the way in

which the steering wheel is turned. This ena-

bles the driver to see path the vehicle will

take, even if he/she turns the steering wheel

while backing up.

NOTE

When backing up with a trailer, the guiding

lines show the path that the vehicle will

take, not the trailer.

07 Driver support

244

WARNING

Keep in mind that the image on the screen

only shows the area behind the vehicle.

The driver must always watch for people,

animals, other vehicles, etc., near the sides

of the vehicle when turning while backing

up.

Marker lines

The PAC system's lines

The unobstructed area behind the vehicle

"Wheel tracks"

The dashed line (1) indicates the clear zone of

approximately 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the

bumper. These lines also indicate the outer-

most limits that any object (door mirrors, cor-

ners of the body, etc.) extends out from the

vehicle, even when it turns.

The "wheel tracks" (2) show where the wheels

will roll and can extend up to approximately

10.5 ft (3.2 m) behind the bumper if there are

no objects in the way.

Vehicles equipped with Park Assist

Colored markers (one for each sensor) indicate

distance

If the vehicle is equipped with the optional

Park Assist system (see Park assist – intro-

duction (p. 232)), the distance to an object

will be indicated more exactly and colored

markers in the display indicate which of the

sensor(s) has detected the object.

Color Distance to object

Pale yellow 2.3–5 ft (0.7–1.5 m )

Yellow 1.6–2.3 ft (0.5–0.7 m)

Color Distance to object

Orange 1–1.6 ft (0.3–0.5 m)

Red 0–1 ft (0–0.3 m)

Related information

•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – opera-

tion (p. 242)

•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – limita-

tions (p. 245)

07 Driver support

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 245

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) –

limitations

Limitations

Even if a fairly small section of the screen

image appears to be obstructed, this may

mean that a relatively large area behind the

vehicle is hidden and objects there may not

be detected until they are very near the vehi-

cle.

NOTE

Bicycle carriers or other accessories

mounted on the tailgate may obstruct the

camera's field of view.

Keep in mind

•Keep the camera's lens free of dirt, ice

and snow. Remove ice and snow care-

fully to avoid scratching the lens.

•Clean the lens regularly with warm water

and a suitable car washing detergent.

Related information

•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – intro-

duction (p. 241)

•Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – opera-

tion (p. 242)

•Park assist – introduction (p. 232)

BLIS* – introduction

The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is

an information system that indicates the pres-

ence of another vehicle moving in the same

direction as your vehicle on roads with several

lanes.

Location of the BLIS indicator light12.

Indicator light

BLIS symbol

BLIS and CTA13 are activated when the

engine is started; this is confirmed when the

indicator lights on the front door panels flash

once.

NOTE

The door panel indicator light illuminates

on the side of the vehicle where the sys-

tem has detected another vehicle. If your

vehicle is passed on both sides at the

same time, both lights will illuminate.

The system helps provide information about:

•Other vehicles in your door mirrors' "blind

area"

•Vehicles that are about to pass your vehi-

cle in the left and/or right lanes

•Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) is a supple-

mentary BLIS function intended to

detect vehicles crossing behind your

vehicle while you are backing up.

12 The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model

13 Cross Traffic Alert

||
07 Driver support
07
246 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
•BLIS and CTA are information sys-
tems, NOT warning or safety systems
and do not function in all situations.
•BLIS and CTA do not eliminate the
need for you to visually confirm the
conditions around you, and the need
for you to turn your head and should-
ers to make sure that you can safely
change lanes or back up.
•As the driver, you have full responsibil-
ity for changing lanes/backing up in a
safe manner.
Related information
•BLIS* – function (p. 246)
•BLIS* – operation (p. 247)
•BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) (p. 247)
•BLIS* – limitations (p. 249)
•BLIS* – messages (p. 250)
BLIS* – function
When does BLIS function
The system functions when your vehicle is
moving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).
Zone 1. Blind area, Zone 2. Area for passing
vehicles
BLIS is designed to react to:
•Other vehicles in your door mirrors' "blind
area"
•Vehicles that are passing your vehicle
When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a
passing vehicle in zone 2, the indicator light in
the door panel will glow steadily. If the driver
then uses the turn signal on the side on which
the warning is given, the indicator light will
flash and become brighter.
WARNING
•BLIS does not function in sharp
curves.
•BLIS does not function when your
vehicle is backing up.
Related information
•BLIS* – introduction (p. 245)
•BLIS* – operation (p. 247)
•BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) (p. 247)
•BLIS* – limitations (p. 249)
•BLIS* – messages (p. 250)

07 Driver support

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 247

BLIS* – operation

Activating/deactivating BLIS

Button for activating/deactivating BLIS

BLIS and CTA14 are activated when the

engine is started; this is confirmed when the

indicator lights on the front door panels flash

once.

BLIS can be deactivated/reactivated by

pressing the button on the center console.

The number or combinations of options on

the vehicle may not leave a space available

on the center console for the BLIS button. If

this is the case, BLIS can be deactivated/

reactivated in the MY CAR menu system, see

My Car – introduction (p. 74)

•Select Off or On in Settings Car

settings BLIS.

When BLIS is deactivated/reactivated, the

indicator lights will go out/illuminate (the indi-

cators will also flash once when the function

is reactivated) and a message will appear in

the instrument panel.

To erase the message:

•Press the OK button on the left steering

wheel lever

•Wait for approx. 5 seconds for the mes-

sage to disappear

Related information

•BLIS* – introduction (p. 245)

•BLIS* – function (p. 246)

•BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) (p. 247)

•BLIS* – limitations (p. 249)

•BLIS* – messages (p. 250)

BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)

Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) is a supplementary

BLIS15 function intended to detect vehicles

crossing behind your vehicle while you are

backing up.

Park assist/CTA button

On vehicles equipped with the optional Park

assist system (p. 232), Cross Traffic Alert

(CTA) can be deactivated/reactivated by

pressing the Park assist button on the center

console. The BLIS indicator lights on the front

doors will flash when CTA is reactivated by

pressing the button.

14 Cross Traffic Alert

07 Driver support

248

WARNING

•BLIS and CTA are information sys-

tems, NOT warning or safety systems

and do not function in all situations.

•BLIS and CTA do not eliminate the

need for you to visually confirm the

conditions around you, and the need

for you to turn your head and should-

ers to make sure that you can safely

change lanes or back up.

•As the driver, you have full responsibil-

ity for changing lanes/backing up in a

safe manner.

When does CTA function

How CTA works

CTA supplements BLIS by warning the driver

of crossing traffic behind your vehicle, for

example, when backing out of a parking

space.

It is primarily designed to detect another vehi-

cle but in certain cases may also detect

pedestrians or smaller objects such as bicy-

cles.

CTA is only activated when the vehicle is

backing up and is activated automatically

when the gear selector is put in reverse.

•An audible signal indicates that CTA has

detected something that is approaching

from the side. The signal will come from

either the left or right audio system

speakers, depending on which the side of

your vehicle the approaching vehicle/

object has been detected.

•CTA also provides a warning by illuminat-

ing the BLIS indicator lights.

•An icon will also illuminate in the Park

assist graphic on the center console dis-

play.

Limitations

CTA has limitations in certain situations, for

example, the CTA sensors cannot "see"

through other parked vehicles or obstruc-

tions.

The following are several examples where

CTA's "field of vision" may initially be limited

and approaching vehicles cannot be detected

until they are too close:

The vehicle is pulled far into a parking space

CTA's blind area

CTA's "field of vision"

In angled parking spaces, CTA may be "blind" on

one side

15 Blind Spot Information System

07 Driver support
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 249
However, as you back your vehicle out of a
parking space, CTA's "field of vision"
expands.
Examples of other limitations include:
•Dirt, ice or snow obstructing the sensors
may reduce the system's function or
make it impossible to detect other vehi-
cles or objects.
•Do not attach tape, decals, etc., on the
surface of the sensors (see the illustration
in the following "Maintenance" section).
•BLIS and CTA are deactivated if a trailer's
wiring is connected to the vehicle's elec-
trical system.
Related information
•BLIS* – introduction (p. 245)
•BLIS* – function (p. 246)
•BLIS* – operation (p. 247)
•BLIS* – limitations (p. 249)
•BLIS* – messages (p. 250)
BLIS* – limitations
Maintenance
Location of the BLIS/CTA sensors16
The BLIS/CTA17 sensors are located on the
inside of the rear fenders/bumper.
The surfaces in front of the sensors must be
kept clean for the system to function opti-
mally.
CAUTION
Repairs to the BLIS/CTA systems and/or
repainting the rear bumper should only be
done by a trained and qualified Volvo serv-
ice technician.
Related information
•BLIS* – introduction (p. 245)
•BLIS* – function (p. 246)
•BLIS* – operation (p. 247)
•BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) (p. 247)
•BLIS* – messages (p. 250)
16 Generic illustration
17 Cross Traffic Alert

07 Driver support

250 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

BLIS* – messages

If BLIS/CTA18 are not functioning normally, a

symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel

and a text message will be displayed. Follow

any instructions that may be provided.

These messages include:

Message System status

CTA OFF CTA has been switched off

manually. BLIS remains

active.

BLIS and

CTA OFF

Trailer

attached

BLIS and CTA are tempo-

rarily deactivated because

a trailer's wiring has been

connected to the vehicle's

electrical system.

BLIS and

CTA Serv-

ice required

BLIS and CTA are not

functioning normally.

•If this message recurs,

the systems should be

inspected by a trained

and qualified Volvo

service technician.

Messages can be erased by pressing the OK

button on the left steering wheel lever.

Related information

•BLIS* – introduction (p. 245)

•BLIS* – function (p. 246)

•BLIS* – operation (p. 247)

•BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) (p. 247)

•BLIS* – limitations (p. 249)

18 Cross Traffic Alert

S T A R T I N G A N D D R I V I N G

08 Starting and driving

252 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Starting the engine

The engine can be started/switched off using

the remote key and the START/STOP

ENGINE button.

Ignition slot with remote key inserted (see Igni-

tion modes (p. 77) for more information on igni-

tion modes)

WARNING

Before starting the engine:

•Fasten the seat belt.

•Check that the seat, steering wheel

and mirrors are adjusted properly.

•Make sure the brake pedal can be

depressed completely. Adjust the seat

if necessary.

WARNING

•Never use more than one floor mat at

a time on the driver's floor. Before

driving, remove the original mat from

the driver's seat floor before using any

other type of floor mat. Any mat used

in this position should be securely and

properly anchored in the attaching

pins. An extra mat on the driver's floor

can cause the accelerator and/or

brake pedal to catch. Check that the

movement of these pedals is not impe-

ded.

•Volvo's floor mats are specially manu-

factured for your car. They must be

firmly secured in the clips on the floor

so that they cannot slide and become

trapped under the pedals on the driv-

er's side.

1. Press the remote key into the ignition slot

as far as possible, with the metallic key

blade pointing outward (not inserted into

the slot)1.

2. Depress the brake pedal2.

3. Press and release the START/STOP

ENGINE button. The autostart function

will operate the starter motor until the

engine starts or until its overheating func-

tion stops it.

The starter motor operates for a maxi-

mum of 10 seconds. If the engine has not

started, repeat the procedure.

CAUTION

If the engine does not start after the third

try, wait for approximately 3 minutes

before trying to start it again to give the

battery time to recover its starting

capacity.

NOTE

Keyless drive*

To start a vehicle equipped with the key-

less drive feature, one of the remote keys

must be in the passenger compartment.

Follow the instructions in steps 2 and 3 to

start the vehicle.

1On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, it is only necessary to have a remote key in the passenger’s compartment.

2If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the vehicle.

08 Starting and driving

253

WARNING

•Always remove the remote key from

the ignition slot when leaving the vehi-

cle and ensure that the ignition in

mode 0 (see Ignition modes (p. 77) for

information about the ignition modes).

•On vehicles with the optional keyless

drive, never remove the remote key

from the vehicle while it is being driven

or towed.

•Always place the gear selector in Park

and apply the parking brake before

leaving the vehicle. Never leave the

vehicle unattended with the engine

running.

•Always open garage doors fully before

starting the engine inside a garage to

ensure adequate ventilation. The

exhaust gases contain carbon monox-

ide, which is invisible and odorless but

very poisonous.

NOTE

•After a cold start, idle speed may be

noticeably higher than normal for a

short period. This is done to help bring

components in the emission control

system to their normal operating tem-

perature as quickly as possible, which

enables them to control emissions and

help reduce the vehicle's impact on

the environment3.

CAUTION

•When starting in cold weather, the

automatic transmission may shift up at

slightly higher engine speeds than nor-

mal until the automatic transmission

fluid reaches normal operating tem-

perature.

•Do not race a cold engine immediately

after starting. Oil flow may not reach

some lubrication points fast enough to

prevent engine damage.

•The engine should be idling when you

move the gear selector. Never acceler-

ate until after you feel the transmission

engage. Accelerating immediately after

selecting a gear will cause harsh

engagement and premature transmis-

sion wear.

•Selecting P or N when idling at a

standstill for prolonged periods of time

will help prevent overheating of the

automatic transmission fluid.

Related information

•Switching off the engine (p. 254)

3If the gear selector is in the D or R positions and the car is not moving, engine speed (rpm) will be lower and it will take longer for the engine to reach normal operating temperature.

08 Starting and driving

254 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Switching off the engine

Switch off the engine by pressing the START/

STOP ENGINE button.

If the gear selector is not in the P position or

if the vehicle is moving, press the START/

STOP ENGINE button twice or press and

hold it in until the engine switches off.

Related information

•Ignition modes (p. 77)

Engine Remote Start (ERS)* –

introduction

ERS is a feature that makes it possible to

remotely start the engine using the remote

key to cool or heat the passenger compart-

ment before driving.

The climate/ and infotainment systems will

start using the same settings as when the

engine was switched off.

When the engine is started using ERS, it will

run for a maximum of 15 minutes before

automatically switching off again. After 2 ERS

starts, the engine must be started in the nor-

mal way before ERS can be used again.

NOTE

•Always adhere to applicable State,

Province and/or Local laws regarding

engine idling when using ERS.

•The service life of the remote key's

battery is affected by ERS use. If this

feature is used frequently, the battery

should be replaced once a year, see

Remote key – replacing the battery

(p. 153).

WARNING

Keep the following in mind before using

ERS:

•The vehicle should be in view.

•The vehicle should be unoccupied.

•The vehicle must not be parked

indoors or in an enclosed area.

Exhaust fumes are harmful to the

health.

Related information

•Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – starting the

engine (p. 255)

•Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – switching

off the engine (p. 255)

08 Starting and driving

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 255

Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – starting

the engine

Remote key buttons used for remote engine start

Lock

Approach lighting

Starting the engine

The maximum range for ERS is approximately

100 ft (30 meters) if the view of the vehicle is

unobstructed. The vehicle must also be

locked.

To start the engine:

1. Press the lock button (1 ) briefly.

2. Immediately press the approach lighting

button (2) for approximately 2 seconds.

If the requirements for ERS have been met,

the following will occur:

1. The turn signals will flash several times.

2. The engine will start.

3. The turn signals will illuminate for

3 seconds to indicate that the engine has

started.

After the engine has started, the vehicle

remains locked but the alarm is disarmed.

Active functions

When the engine is started with ERS, the fol-

lowing functions are activated:

•The climate control system

•The infotainment system.

Deactivated functions

When the engine is started with ERS, the fol-

lowing functions are deactivated:

•Headlights

•Parking lights

•License plate lights

•Windshield wipers

Related information

•Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – switching

off the engine (p. 255)

•Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – introduction

(p. 254)

Engine Remote Start (ERS)* –

switching off the engine

Any of the following will switch off the engine

if it has been started with ERS:

•Pressing the lock button (1) or the unlock

button (2) on the remote key

•Unlocking the vehicle

•Opening a door

•Depressing the accelerator or brake pedal

•Moving the gear selector from the P posi-

tion

•If there are less than approx. 2.5 gallons

(10 liters) of fuel in the tank

•More than 15 minutes have elapsed.

If the engine has been started with ERS and

switches off, the turn signals will illuminate for

3 seconds.

Message in the instrument panel

display

If ERS is interrupted, a text message will be

displayed in the instrument panel.

Related information

•Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – introduction

(p. 254)

•Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – starting the

engine (p. 255)

08 Starting and driving

256

Jump starting

Follow these instructions to jump start your

vehicle's dead battery or to jump start another

vehicle's dead battery using your vehicle.

G021347

Connecting the jumper cables

If the 12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in

another vehicle, check that the vehicles are

not touching to prevent premature comple-

tion of a circuit. Be sure to follow jump star-

ting instructions provided for the other vehi-

cle.

To jump start your vehicle:

1. Switch off the ignition (set the ignition to

mode 0, see Ignition modes (p. 77)).

2. First connect the red jumper cable to the

auxiliary battery's positive (+) terminal (1).

3. Fold back the cover over the positive (+)

terminal on your vehicle's battery (2),

marked with a "+" sign, located under a

folding cover.

4. Connect the black jumper cable to the

auxiliary battery's negative (–) terminal (3)

and to the ground point in your vehicle's

engine compartment (right engine mount

at the top, on the outer screw) (4).

5. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle,

then start the engine in the vehicle with

dead battery.

6. After the engine has started, first remove

the negative (–) terminal jumper cable

(black). Then remove the positive (+) ter-

minal jumper cable (red).

WARNING

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!

Battery posts, terminals, and related

accessories contain lead and lead com-

pounds, chemicals known to the state of

California to cause cancer and reproduc-

tive harm. Wash hands after handling.

CAUTION

Connect the jumper cables carefully to

avoid short circuits with other components

in the engine compartment.

WARNING

•Do not connect the jumper cable to

any part of the fuel system or to any

moving parts. Avoid touching hot

manifolds.

•Batteries generate hydrogen gas,

which is flammable and explosive.

•Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do

not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,

skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If

contact occurs, flush the affected area

immediately with water. Obtain medi-

cal help immediately if eyes are affec-

ted.

•Never expose the battery to open

flame or electric spark.

•Do not smoke near the battery.

•Failure to follow the instructions for

jump starting can lead to injury.

Related information

•Starting the engine (p. 252)

08 Starting and driving

}}

257

Transmission – general information

The transmission automatically shifts between

the various forward gears, based on the level

of acceleration and speed.

G021351

Shiftgate positions

Depress the button on the front of the gear

selector knob to move the gear selector

between the R, N, D, and P positions.

The gear selector can be moved freely

between the Geartronic (manual shifting) and

Drive (D) positions while driving.

CAUTION

The transmission’s temperature is moni-

tored to help prevent damage to the trans-

mission or other drivetrain components. If

there is a risk of overheating, the warning

symbol on the instrument panel will illumi-

nate and a text message will be displayed.

Follow the instructions provided there.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)4

HSA makes it easier to start or back up on a

hill by retaining pressure on the brake pedal

for several seconds after the pedal has been

released in order to keep the vehicle at a

standstill.

The brakes will be released after several sec-

onds or when the driver presses the accelera-

tor pedal.

Related information

•Transmission – positions (p. 257)

•Transmission – Geartronic (p. 259)

•Transmission – shiftlock override (p. 261)

•All Wheel Drive (AWD) (p. 269)

•Fuel tank volume – specification and vol-

ume (p. 384)

Transmission – positions

Park: position P

Select the P position when starting or park-

ing.

4Certain models only

||
08 Starting and driving
08
258
Shiftlock
When P has been selected, the transmission
is mechanically blocked in this position. The
brake pedal must be depressed and the igni-
tion must be in at least mode II (see Ignition
modes (p. 77)) before the gear lever can be
moved from the P position.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when the
vehicle is parked, particularly when park-
ing on a hill. The transmission's P mode
may not be able to keep the vehicle sta-
tionary if it is parked on an incline.
Press the control to apply the parking brake,
see Parking brake – general information
(p. 274).
CAUTION
The vehicle must be stationary when posi-
tion P is selected.
Gear indicator
The gear currently being
used is displayed on the right
side of the instrument panel.
The "S" symbol turns orange
if Sport mode is being used.
Reverse: position R
The vehicle must be stationary when position
R is selected.
Neutral: position N
No gear is engaged and the engine can be
started with the gear selector in this position.
Apply the parking brake if the vehicle is sta-
tionary with the gear selector in position N. In
order to move the gear selector from the N
position, the brake pedal must be depressed
and the ignition must be in at least mode II.
Drive: position D
D is the normal driving position. The car auto-
matically shifts between the various forward
gears, based on the level of acceleration and
speed. The car must be at a standstill when
shifting from position R to position D.
Related information
•Transmission – general information
(p. 257)
•Transmission – Geartronic (p. 259)
•Transmission – shiftlock override (p. 261)
•Fuel tank volume – specification and vol-
ume (p. 384)

08 Starting and driving

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 259

Transmission – Geartronic

Geartronic allows you to manually shift among

your vehicle's forward gears. The manual

position (+S–) can be selected at any time.

Geartronic: manual shifting (+S–)

To shift gears manually, move the

gear selector to the side from D

toward +S–. The +S– symbol in the

instrument panel will change from

white to orange and the number of the gear

currently being used (1, 2, 3, etc.) will be dis-

played (see the following illustration)5.

•To return to automatic shifting mode from

+S–, move the gear selector to the side

toward D.

Gear shift indicator*

Gear shift indicator in a digital instrument panel*6

This option indicates when to shift up or

down to help conserve fuel. A white arrow will

appear above or below the number of the

current gear to prompt the driver to shift up

or down.

While driving

•If you select the manual shifting position

while driving, the gear that was being

used in the Drive position will also initially

be selected in the manual shifting posi-

tion.

•Move the gear selector forward (toward +)

to shift to a higher gear or rearward

(toward –) to shift to a lower gear.

•If you hold the gear selector toward "–",

the transmission will downshift one gear

at a time and will utilize the braking power

of the engine. If the current speed is too

high for using a lower gear, the downshift

will not occur until the speed has

decreased enough to allow the lower gear

to be used.

•If you slow to a very low speed, the trans-

mission will automatically shift down.

Shiftlock: Neutral (N)

If the gear selector is in the N position and

the vehicle has been stationary for at least

3 seconds (irrespective of whether the engine

is running) then the gear selector is locked.

In order to move the gear selector from N to

another gear position, the brake pedal must

be depressed and the ignition must be in at

least position II, see Ignition modes (p. 77).

5If Sport mode is being used, the symbol will change to "S".

6Analog instrument panel: the gear shift indicator is displayed in the center of the speedometer.

08 Starting and driving

260 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Geartronic: steering wheel paddles*

In addition to the manual gearshift function

using the gear selector, this option makes it

possible to manually shift gears from the

steering wheel.

Steering-wheel mounted gear shift paddles

"–": Shift down to a lower gear.

"+": Shift up to a higher gear.

In order to shift gears with the paddles, they

have to first be activated. The gear selector

can be in either the D or S position.

Activating the paddles:

•Pull either paddle toward the steering

wheel and release it; the D in the instru-

ment panel will change to the number of

the gear currently being used.

Shifting gears:

•Pull the paddle toward the steering wheel

and release it.

Deactivating the paddles:

•Hold the "+" paddle for approximately

3 seconds.

NOTE

If the gear selector was in D when paddle

shifting was activated (D changed to the

number of the gear being used), the trans-

mission will automatically revert to D after

approximately 5 seconds if the paddles

are not used to shift gears.

This will not occur:

•during active driving (e.g., on a wind-

ing road, while accelerating, etc)

•if the gear selector was in S when the

paddles were activated

If the transmission reverts to D, the pad-

dles will have to be reactivated (pull either

paddle toward the steering wheel and

release it) before they can be used to shift

gears again.

The paddles can also be manually deacti-

vated by pulling both paddles toward the

steering wheel and holding them until the

gear number shown in the instrument

panel changes to D.

Geartronic: Sport mode (S)7

This transmission mode provides sportier

shifting characteristics and enables a more

active driving style by making it possible to

drive at higher rpm in each gear before shift-

ing up. The engine also responds faster when

the accelerator pedal is pressed.

To access Sport mode from Drive (D), move

the gear selector to the left. The transmission

will not switch to manual shifting mode until

the gear selector is moved forward or rear-

ward toward + or –.

Sport mode can be selected any time.

NOTE

•On vehicles equipped with Sport

mode, the transmission symbol in the

main instrument panel will change

from D to S when the gear selector is

moved to the manual shifting mode. If

the gear selector is moved toward "+"

or "-", the number of the gear currently

being used will be displayed, see Infor-

mation displays – introduction (p. 66).

•Please be aware that using Sport

mode may result in a slight decrease in

fuel economy. Driving in D can help

improve fuel economy.

7Certain models only

08 Starting and driving
08
261
Geartronic: starting on slippery
surfaces
Selecting 3rd gear in Geartronic’s manual
shifting mode can help provide better traction
when starting off on slippery surfaces. To do
so:
1. Depress the brake pedal and move the
gear selector to the side from D toward
+S–.
2. Press the gear selector forward and
release it (this selects 2nd gear). Press
the selector forward again and release it
to select 3rd gear. The optional steering
wheel paddles can also be used; see the
previous section "Geartronic: steering
wheel paddles."
3. Release the brake pedal and press gently
on the accelerator pedal.
Related information
•Transmission – general information
(p. 257)
•Transmission – positions (p. 257)
•Transmission – shiftlock override (p. 261)
•Fuel tank volume – specification and vol-
ume (p. 384)
Transmission – shiftlock override
If the vehicle cannot be driven, for example
because of a dead battery, the gear selector
must be moved from the P position before the
vehicle can be moved8.
Shiftlock override
Lift away the rubber mat on the floor of
the storage compartment behind the cen-
ter console to expose the small opening
for overriding the shiftlock system.
Insert the key blade into the opening.
Press the key blade down as far as possi-
ble and keep it held down.
Move the gear selector from the P posi-
tion. For information on the key blade,
see Detachable key blade – general infor-
mation (p. 151).
Related information
•Transmission – general information
(p. 257)
•Transmission – positions (p. 257)
•Transmission – Geartronic (p. 259)
•Fuel tank volume – specification and vol-
ume (p. 384)
8If the battery is dead, the electric parking brake cannot be applied or released. Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too low, see Jump starting (p. 256).

08 Starting and driving
08
262
Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA)
When starting on steep hills, HSA (see Trans-
mission – general information (p. 257)) retains
pressure on the brake pedal for several sec-
onds after the pedal has been released in
order to keep the vehicle at a standstill. The
brakes will be released after several seconds
or when the driver presses the accelerator
pedal. The pedal will return to its normal posi-
tion somewhat slower than normal.
Related information
•Start/Stop – introduction (p. 262)
•Start/Stop – function (p. 262)
•Start/Stop – settings (p. 265)
•Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions
(p. 263)
•Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions
(p. 264)
•Start/Stop – symbols and messages
(p. 266)
Start/Stop – introduction
Start/Stop is a function that temporarily
switches off the engine when the vehicle is
not moving, for instance in heavy traffic or at a
traffic light to help reduce fuel consumption.
Start/Stop is available with certain engines/
transmissions.
Related information
•Start/Stop – function (p. 262)
•Start/Stop – settings (p. 265)
•Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions
(p. 263)
•Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions
(p. 264)
•Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA)
(p. 262)
•Start/Stop – symbols and messages
(p. 266)
Start/Stop – function
Function and use
Start/Stop symbol in the instrument panel
Start/Stop button on the center console
Start/Stop is activated automatically each
time the engine is started9. The symbol in the
instrument panel will be displayed for several
seconds when the engine starts and the indi-
cator light in the On/Off button will remain
illuminated while the function is activated.
All of the vehicle's systems will function while
the engine is auto-stopped, although the
function of certain systems may reduced at
this time. For example, blower speed and
high infotainment system volume may be
reduced to help conserve the battery's
capacity.
9Not when the engine is started using the optional Engine Remote Start feature, Starting the engine (p. 252)

08 Starting and driving
08
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 263
Auto-stopping the engine
Normally, when Start/Stop is activated and
the brakes are applied until the vehicle comes
to a standstill, the engine will auto-stop auto-
matically if the driver keeps the brake pedal
depressed.
To remind the driver that the engine
has been auto-stopped, the
Start/Stop symbol will illuminate in
the instrument panel and remain on
until the engine restarts.
If the ECO function* (ECO*
(p. 267)) is activated, the
engine may auto-stop before
the vehicle comes to a com-
plete standstill.
Auto-starting the engine
The engine restarts as soon as the driver
releases the brake pedal.
Deactivating Start/Stop
In certain situations (e.g.,
driving in heavy, stop-and-go
traffic), it may be preferable
to deactivate Start/Stop.
This is done by pressing the
button in the center console.
The indicator light in the button will go out.
Start/Stop will remain deactivated until the
button is pressed again or until the engine is
switched off and restarted by the driver.
Related information
•Start/Stop – introduction (p. 262)
•Start/Stop – settings (p. 265)
•Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions
(p. 263)
•Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions
(p. 264)
•Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA)
(p. 262)
•Start/Stop – symbols and messages
(p. 266)
Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions
In certain situations or conditions, the engine
may not auto-stop when the vehicle comes
to a standstill, such as if:
Condition/situation
The vehicle's speed has not reached a
speed of approx. 5 mph (8 km/h) after the
most recent auto-start or after the driver
has started the engine.
The driver unbuckles his/her seat belt.
The main battery's charge is below the
minimum level.
The engine has not reached its normal
operating temperature.
The ambient temperature is below approx.
25°F (-4°C) or above approx. 85°F (30°C).
The windshield's heating function* is acti-
vated.
The climate system cannot keep the
desired settings in the passenger compart-
ment; the blower will operate at high
speed.
The vehicle is backing up.
The main battery's temperature is below
freezing or too high.

||
08 Starting and driving
08
264 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Condition/situation
The driver is turning the steering wheel
hard.
The road's incline is very steep.
A trailer's electrical system is connected to
the vehicle.
The hood has been openedA.
The transmission has not reached its nor-
mal operating temperature.
Atmospheric pressure is below a level
equivalent to an altitude of approx. 4,900–
8,200 ft (1500–2500 m) above sea level.
The actual pressure is also affected by cur-
rent weather conditions.
The Adaptive Cruise Control's* Queue
Assist feature is activated.
The gear selector is in the SB or "+/–" posi-
tion.
ACertain engines only
BSport mode (where applicable)
Related information
•Start/Stop – introduction (p. 262)
•Start/Stop – function (p. 262)
•Start/Stop – settings (p. 265)
•Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions
(p. 264)
•Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA)
(p. 262)
•Start/Stop – symbols and messages
(p. 266)
Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions
In certain situations or conditions, the engine
may auto-start even though the driver is still
pressing the brake pedal, such as if:
Condition/situation
Condensation forms on the windows.
The climate system cannot keep the
desired settings in the passenger compart-
ment.
Electrical current consumption is tempo-
rarily high or the main battery's charge is
below the minimum level.
The brake pedal is pumped repeatedly.
The hood has been openedA.
The vehicle begins to move or increases
speed slightly (if the engine auto-stopped
before the vehicle was at a standstill (see
ECO* (p. 267))).
The driver unbuckles his/her seat belt while
the gear selector is in the D or N positions.
The steering wheel is turnedA.

08 Starting and driving
08
265
Condition/situation
The gear selector is moved from D to SB, R
or "+/–".
The driver's door is opened with the gear
selector in D – an audible signal and a text
message will inform the driver that
Start/Stop is active.
ACertain engines only
BSport mode (where applicable)
WARNING
Do not open the hood if the engine has
auto-stopped. The engine could suddenly
auto-start.
Before opening the hood:
•Switch off the ignition using the
START/STOP ENGINE button.
•Be aware that if the engine has been
running, components in the engine
compartment will be very hot.
If the engine does not auto-start, this
could be due to:
•The driver's seat belt is not fastened
•The gear selector is in P and the driver's
door is opened
In these cases, the driver will have to restart
the engine by pressing the START/STOP
ENGINE button.
Related information
•Start/Stop – introduction (p. 262)
•Start/Stop – function (p. 262)
•Start/Stop – settings (p. 265)
•Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions
(p. 263)
•Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA)
(p. 262)
•Start/Stop – symbols and messages
(p. 266)
Start/Stop – settings
Settings for the Start/Stop function can be
made in the MY CAR menu system.
Related information
•Start/Stop – introduction (p. 262)
•Start/Stop – function (p. 262)
•Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions
(p. 263)
•Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions
(p. 264)
•Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA)
(p. 262)
•Start/Stop – symbols and messages
(p. 266)

08 Starting and driving
08
266
Start/Stop – symbols and messages
Text messages
Combined with the information sym-
bol in the instrument panel, the
Start/Stop function may also display mes-
sages in certain situations. Follow the instruc-
tions provided in the message. The following
table gives several examples.
Symbol Message Information/action
Auto Start/Stop Service
required
Start/Stop is not functioning properly. Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.
Autostart Engine running + an
audible signal
This is triggered if the driver's door is opened while the engine is auto-stopped.
-Press Start button The engine will not auto-start. Start the engine normally by pressing the START/STOP ENGINE
button.
-Select P or N to start Start/Stop has been deactivated. Move the gear selector to N or P and start the engine normally
be pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button.
-Press Start button The engine will not auto-start. Move the gear selector to N or P and start the engine normally be
pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button.
If the message does not disappear after the
suggested action has been taken, contact a
Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.
Related information
•Start/Stop – introduction (p. 262)
•Start/Stop – function (p. 262)
•Start/Stop – settings (p. 265)
•Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions
(p. 263)
•Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions
(p. 264)
•Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA)
(p. 262)

08 Starting and driving

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 267

ECO*

Eco is a function10 developed by Volvo to give

the driver the opportunity to actively drive

more economically and to help reduce fuel

consumption.

Introduction

When Eco is activated, the

following functions are modi-

fied:

•The automatic transmission's shifting

points

•The engine management system and

accelerator pedal response

•Stop/stop function (Start/Stop – introduc-

tion (p. 262)): the engine can auto-stop

before the vehicle has come to a full stop

•Eco Coast functionality is activated:

engine braking is disabled

•Climate system settings: certain functions

(e.g., air conditioning) will be temporarily

reduced or deactivated

NOTE

When Eco is activated, several climate

system parameters are changed and the

function of certain current-consuming sys-

tems will be reduced.

Some of these functions can be restarted

manually but full functionality will not be

restored until Eco is deactivated.

Function

ECO On/Off button in the center console

ECO symbol in the instrument panel

When the engine is switched off, ECO is

deactivated and must be reactivated each

time the engine is started (with the exception

of certain engines).

The ECO symbol will be displayed in the

instrument panel and the indicator light in the

ECO button will be on when Eco is activated.

Eco on or off

When ECO is deactivated,

the ECO symbol will not be

displayed in the instrument

panel and the indicator light

in the ECO button will be off.

The function will remain

deactivated until the button

is pressed again.

Eco Coast

Eco Coast is an integral part of the Eco func-

tion and essentially deactivates engine brak-

ing, allowing the vehicle to roll freely.

NOTE

To function optimally, Eco Coast should

primarily be used when the vehicle can

coast as far as possible.

When the driver releases the accelerator

pedal, the transmission is automatically dis-

engaged from the engine and engine rpm will

be reduced to the idle level

(approx. 700-800 rpm), which helps reduce

fuel consumption.

10 Option on models equipped with certain 4-cylinder engines

08 Starting and driving

268 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

This feature is primarily intended to be used

in driving situations where a decrease in

speed is expected, such as when approach-

ing an intersection or a traffic light.

Eco Coast enables proactive driving with as

little braking as possible.

Combinations of On and Off

Depending on the driving situation, Eco can

be used in different ways to help reduce fuel

consumption:

•With Eco activated: this enables Eco

Coast, which allows the vehicle to roll

freely for as far as possible when the

driver releases the accelerator pedal (e.g.,

when approaching a traffic light or inter-

section).

•With Eco deactivated: engine braking

can be used when the vehicle will only

roll for a short distance (in heavy traffic,

etc.) or when driving down hills.

To help keep fuel consumption as low as

possible, Eco Coast should not be used in

traffic situations where the brakes have to be

used frequently.

Activating Eco Coast

Eco Coast is activated when the accelerator

pedal is released completely if:

•Eco is activated

•The gear selector is in D

•The vehicle's speed is between approxi-

mately 40–85 mph (65–140 km/h). Always

observe posted speed limits

•The gradient of a down-slope is less than

approximately 6%

Deactivating Eco Coast

In certain situations, it may be advisable to

switch off the Eco Coast function, such as:

•When driving down steep hills, in order to

utilize engine braking

•Prior to passing another vehicle, in order

to do so as safely as possible

Deactivating Eco Coast (and reactivating

engine braking) can be done in the following

ways:

•Press the ECO button on the center con-

sole

•Move the gear selector to the manual "S

+/–" position

•Change gears using the steering wheel

paddles*

•Press the brake or accelerator pedal

Eco Coast limitations

This function will not be available if:

•Cruise control is activated

•The gradient of a down-slope is more

than approximately 6%

•The steering wheel paddles* are used to

manually change gears

•The engine and/or transmission have not

reached their normal operating tempera-

ture

•The gear selector is moved from D to the

manual "S+/–" position

•The vehicle's speed is not within the

40–85 mph (65–140 km/h). interval

Additional information and settings

Other ECO-related settings can be made in

the vehicle's MY CAR menu. See My Car –

introduction (p. 74) for more information.

Related information

•Climate – general information (p. 122)

•Transmission – general information

(p. 257)

08 Starting and driving

}}

269

All Wheel Drive (AWD)

Your Volvo can be equipped with permanent

All Wheel Drive, which means that power is

distributed automatically between the front

and rear wheels.

Under normal driving conditions, most of the

engine's power is directed to the front

wheels. However, if there is any tendency for

the front wheels to spin, an electronically

controlled coupling distributes power to the

wheels that have the best traction.

NOTE

The message AWD disabled Service

required will be appear in the information

display if an electrical fault should occur in

the AWD system. A warning light will also

illuminate in the instrument panel. If this

occurs, have the system checked by a

trained and qualified Volvo service techni-

cian.

Related information

•Transmission – general information

(p. 257)

Hill Descent Control (HDC)11 –

introduction

HDC is a type of automatic engine brake and

makes it possible to increase or decrease the

vehicle's speed on downhill gradients using

only the accelerator pedal, without applying

the brakes. The brake system functions auto-

matically to maintain a low and steady speed.

Introduction

Normally, when the accelerator pedal is

released while driving down hills, the vehicle's

speed slows as the engine runs at lower rpm

(the normal engine braking effect). However, if

the downhill gradient becomes steeper and if

the vehicle is carrying a load, speed increases

despite the engine braking effect. In this sit-

uation, the brakes must be applied to reduce

the vehicle's speed.

HDC is particularly useful when driving down

steep hills with rough surfaces, and where the

road may have slippery patches.

WARNING

HDC does not function in all situations,

and is a supplementary braking aid. The

driver has full responsibility for driving in a

safe manner.

11 Available on the V60 Cross Country in combination with certain engines only.

08 Starting and driving

270

Related information

•Hill Descent Control (HDC) – operation

(p. 270)

•Brakes – general (p. 271)

Hill Descent Control (HDC)13 –

operation

Function

•HDC can be switched on and off with the

button in the center console. An indicator

light in the button illuminates when HDC

is activated.

•The indicator light in the instrument

panel illuminates and a message is dis-

played when the system is controlling the

vehicle's speed.

•HDC only functions when first or reverse

gears are selected (1 will be shown in the

instrument panel display when first gear

is selected).

NOTE

HDC cannot be activated if the gear selec-

tor is the D position.

Using HDC

HDC allows the car to roll forward at a maxi-

mum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h), and 4 mph

(7 km/h) in reverse. However, the accelerator

pedal can be used to select any speed that is

possible in first or reverse gears. When the

accelerator pedal is released, speed is

quickly reduced again to 6 mph (10 km/h) or

4 mph (7 km/h), depending on the gear

selected, regardless of the hill's gradient. It is

not necessary to apply the brakes.

•The brake lights illuminate automatically

when HDC is controlling the vehicle's

speed.

•The driver can slow or stop the vehicle at

any time by applying the brakes.

HDC is deactivated when:

•The button on the center console is

pressed

•A gear higher than first gear is selected

•D is selected on vehicles with an auto-

matic transmission

HDC can be deactivated at any time. If this is

done while driving down a steep hill, the sys-

tem's braking effect will decrease gradually.

13 Available on the V60 Cross Country in combination with certain engines only.

08 Starting and driving

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 271

NOTE

Engine response to pressure on the accel-

erator pedal may be slightly slower than

normal when HDC is activated.

Related information

•Hill Descent Control (HDC) – introduction

(p. 269)

•Brakes – general (p. 271)

Brakes – general

The brake system is a hydraulic system con-

sisting of two separate brake circuits. If a

problem should occur in one of these circuits,

it is still possible to stop the vehicle with the

other brake circuit.

If the brake pedal must be depressed farther

than normal and requires greater foot pres-

sure, the stopping distance will be longer.

A warning light in the instrument panel will

light up to warn the driver that a fault has

occurred.

If this light comes on while driving or braking,

stop immediately and check the brake fluid

level in the reservoir.

NOTE

Press the brake pedal hard and maintain

pressure on the pedal – do not pump the

brakes.

WARNING

If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in

the reservoir or if a brake system message

is shown in the information display: DO

NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a

trained and qualified Volvo service techni-

cian and have the brake system inspected.

Brake pad inspection

On vehicles equipped with a jack*, the condi-

tion of the brake pads can be checked by

raising the vehicle (see Changing a wheel –

removing wheel (p. 296) for information

about using the jack and removing a wheel)

and performing a visual inspection of the

brake pads.

WARNING

•If the vehicle has been driven immedi-

ately prior to a brake pad inspection,

the wheel hub, brake components,

etc., will be very hot. Allow time for

these components to cool before car-

rying out the inspection.

•Apply the parking brake and put the

gear selector in the Park (P) position.

•Block the wheels standing on the

ground, use rigid wooden blocks or

large stones.

08 Starting and driving

272

WARNING

•Use the jack intended for the vehicle

when changing a tire. For any other

job, use stands to support the vehicle.

•The jack should be kept well-greased

and clean, and should not be dam-

aged.

•Be sure the jack is on a firm, level,

non-slippery surface.

•No objects should be placed between

the base of jack and the ground, or

between the jack and the attachment

bar on the vehicle.

•The jack must correctly engage the

jack attachment.

•Never allow any part of your body to

be extended under a vehicle suppor-

ted by a jack.

Power brakes function only when the

engine is running

The power brakes utilize vacuum pressure

which is only created when the engine is run-

ning. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with

the engine switched off.

If the power brakes are not working, consid-

erably higher pressure will be required on the

brake pedal to compensate for the lack of

power assistance. This can happen for exam-

ple when towing your vehicle or if the engine

is switched off when the vehicle is rolling. The

brake pedal feels harder than usual.

Water on brake discs and brake pads

affects braking

Driving in rain and slush or passing through

an automatic car wash can cause water to

collect on the brake discs and pads. This will

cause a delay in braking effect when the

pedal is depressed. To avoid such a delay

when the brakes are needed, depress the

pedal occasionally when driving through rain,

slush, etc. This will remove the water from the

brakes. Check that brake application feels

normal. This should also be done after wash-

ing or starting in very damp or cold weather.

Severe strain on the brake system

The brakes will be subject to severe strain

when driving in mountains or hilly areas, or

when towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usually

slower, which means that the cooling of the

brakes is less efficient than when driving on

level roads. To reduce the strain on the

brakes, shift into a lower gear and let the

engine help with the braking. Do not forget

that if you are towing a trailer, the brakes will

be subjected to a greater than normal load.

Cleaning the brake discs

Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs

may result in delayed brake function. This

delay is minimized by cleaning the brake lin-

ings.

Cleaning the brake pads is advisable in wet

weather, prior to long-term parking, and after

the vehicle has been washed. Do this by

braking gently for a short period while the

vehicle is moving.

Related information

•Parking brake – general information

(p. 274)

•Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA)

(p. 274)

•Brakes – general (p. 271)

•Anti-lock braking system (ABS) (p. 273)

08 Starting and driving
08
273
Brakes – symbols
Symbols in the instrument panel
Symbol Specification
Steady glow – Check the brake
fluid level. If the level is low, fill
with brake fluid and check for
the cause of the brake fluid
loss.
Automatic function check:
steady glow for two seconds
when the engine is started.
WARNING
If   and   come on at the
same time and the brake level is below the
MIN mark in the reservoir or if a brake sys-
tem-related message is shown in the infor-
mation display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the
vehicle towed to a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician and have the
brake system inspected.
Related information
•Brakes – general (p. 271)
•Parking brake – general information
(p. 274)
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
The ABS system helps to improve vehicle
control (stopping and steering) during severe
braking conditions by limiting brake lockup.
When the system "senses" impending lockup,
braking pressure is automatically modulated
in order to help prevent lockup that could
lead to a skid.
The system performs a brief self-diagnostic
test when the engine has been started and
driver releases the brake pedal. Another auto-
matic test may be performed when the vehi-
cle first reaches a speed of approximately
6 mph (10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate
several times and a sound may be audible
from the ABS control module, which is nor-
mal.
Related information
•Parking brake – general information
(p. 274)
•Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA)
(p. 274)
•Brakes – general (p. 271)
Brake lights
The brake lights come on automatically when
the brakes are applied.
Adaptive brake lights
The adaptive brake lights activate in the event
of sudden braking or if the ABS system is
activated. This function causes an additional
taillight on each side of the vehicle to illumi-
nate to help alert vehicles traveling behind.
The adaptive brake lights activate if:
•The ABS system activates for more than
approximately a half second
•In the event of sudden braking while the
vehicle is moving at speeds above
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
When the vehicle has come to a stop, the
brake lights and additional taillights remain on
for as long as the brake pedal is depressed or
until braking force on the vehicle is reduced.
Related information
•Brakes – general (p. 271)
•Parking brake – general information
(p. 274)

08 Starting and driving

274

Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA)

EBA is designed to provide full brake effect

immediately in the event of sudden, hard

braking.

Emergency Brake Assistance

The EBA system is activated by the speed

with which the brake pedal is depressed.

When the EBA system is activated, the brake

pedal will go down and pressure in the brake

system immediately increases to the maxi-

mum level. Maintain full pressure on the

brake pedal in order to utilize the system

completely. EBA is automatically deactivated

when the brake pedal is released.

NOTE

•When the EBA system is activated, the

brake pedal will go down and pressure

in the brake system immediately

increases to the maximum level. You

must maintain full pressure on the

brake pedal in order to utilize the sys-

tem completely. There will be no brak-

ing effect if the pedal is released. EBA

is automatically deactivated when the

brake pedal is released.

•When the vehicle has been parked for

some time, the brake pedal may sink

more than usual when the engine is

started. This is normal and the pedal

will return to its usual position when it

is released.

Related information

•Parking brake – general information

(p. 274)

•Brakes – general (p. 271)

•Anti-lock braking system (ABS) (p. 273)

Parking brake – general information

The electric parking brake helps to keep the

vehicle stationary when it is parked.

Electric parking brake

Parking brake control

NOTE

•A faint sound from the parking brake's

electric motor can be heard when the

parking brake is being applied. This

sound can also be heard during the

automatic function check of the park-

ing brake.

•The brake pedal will move slightly

when the electric parking brake is

applied or released.

Low battery voltage

If the battery voltage is too low, the park-

ing brake cannot be applied or released.

08 Starting and driving
08
275
Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery
voltage is too low, see Jump starting (p. 256).
Parking on a hill
•If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the
front wheels so that they point away from
the curb.
•If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the
front wheels so that they point toward the
curb.
The parking brake should also be applied.
Related information
•Parking brake – applying (p. 275)
•Parking brake – releasing (p. 276)
•Parking brake – symbols and messages
(p. 277)
•Brakes – general (p. 271)
Parking brake – applying
Applying the electric parking brake
Parking brake control
1. Press firmly on the brake pedal.
2. Push the control.
>The   symbol in the instrument
panel flashes while the parking brake is
being applied and glows steadily when
the parking brake has been fully
applied.
3. Release the brake pedal and ensure that
the vehicle is at a standstill.
4. When the vehicle is parked, the gear
selector must be in position P.
NOTE
•In an emergency the parking brake can
be applied when the vehicle is moving
by holding in the control. Braking will
be interrupted when the accelerator
pedal is depressed or the control is
released.
•An audible signal will sound during this
procedure if the vehicle is moving at
speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).
Related information
•Parking brake – general information
(p. 274)
•Parking brake – releasing (p. 276)
•Parking brake – symbols and messages
(p. 277)
•Brakes – general (p. 271)

08 Starting and driving

276

Parking brake – releasing

Releasing the electric parking brake

Parking brake control

Manual release

1. Fasten the seat belt.

2. Insert the remote key in the ignition slot

and press the START/STOP ENGINE

button (or press the START/STOP

ENGINE button with a valid remote key in

the passenger compartment on vehicles

with the optional keyless drive).

3. Press firmly on the brake pedal.

4. Pull the parking brake control.

Automatic release

1. Start the engine.

NOTE

•For safety reasons, the parking brake is

only released automatically if the engine

is running and the driver is wearing a

seat belt.

•The electric parking brake will be

released immediately when the acceler-

ator pedal is pressed and the gear

selector is in position D or R.

2. Fasten the seat belt.

3. Move the gear selector to position D or R

and press the accelerator pedal. The

parking brake will release when the vehi-

cle begins to move.

Heavy load uphill

A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the

vehicle to roll backward when the parking

brake is released automatically on a steep

incline. To help avoid this:

1. Keep the electric parking brake lever

pushed in with the left hand while shifting

into Drive with the right.

2. While pressing the accelerator pedal to

pull away, release the parking brake lever

only after the vehicle begins to move.

Related information

•Parking brake – general information

(p. 274)

•Parking brake – applying (p. 275)

•Parking brake – symbols and messages

(p. 277)

•Brakes – general (p. 271)

08 Starting and driving

277

Parking brake – symbols and

messages

A text message can be erased by pressing

briefly on the OK button on the turn signal

lever.

Symbol and messages in the instrument panel

Symbol Message Description/action

"Message"Read the message in the information display

A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is being applied. If the symbol flashes in any other situation

then this means that a fault has arisen. Read the message on the information display.

-Park brake not

fully released

A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released. Try to apply the parking brake and release it sev-

eral times. If the problem persists, contact an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off with this error mes-

sage showing, a warning signal sounds.

-Parking brake not

applied

A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied. Try to apply the parking brake and release it several

times. If the problem persists, contact an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off with this error message

showing, a warning signal sounds.

-Parking brake

Service required

A fault has occurred. Try to apply and release. Contact a Volvo workshop if the fault remains

WARNING

If the vehicle must be parked before the

fault has been corrected, always put the

gear selector in P and turn the wheels so

that they point away from the curb if the

vehicle is pointing uphill or toward the curb

if it is pointing downhill.

Related information

•Parking brake – general information

(p. 274)

•Parking brake – applying (p. 275)

•Parking brake – releasing (p. 276)

•Brakes – general (p. 271)

08 Starting and driving

278

Driving through water

The vehicle should be driven with extreme

caution if it is necessary to drive through

standing water.

The vehicle can be driven through water up to

a depth of approximately 10 in. (25 cm), (V60

Cross Country: approximately 12 in. (30 cm))

at walking speed to help prevent water from

entering the differential and the transmission.

Water reduces the oil's lubricating capacity

and may shorten the service life of these

components.

•Take particular care when driving through

flowing water.

•Clean the electrical connections for trailer

wiring after driving in mud or water.

•When driving through water, maintain low

speed and do not stop in the water.

WARNING

•Avoid driving through standing or

rushing water. Doing so can be dan-

gerous and it may also be difficult to

determine the actual depth of the

water.

•If water cannot be avoided, after driv-

ing through the water, press lightly on

the brake pedal to ensure that the

brakes are functioning normally. Water

or mud can make the brake linings

slippery, resulting in delayed braking

effect.

CAUTION

•Engine damage will occur if water is

drawn into the air cleaner.

•If the vehicle is driven through water

deeper than approximately 10 in.

(25 cm), (V60 Cross Country: approxi-

mately 12 in. (30 cm)), water may enter

the differential and the transmission.

This reduces the oil's lubricating

capacity and may shorten the service

life of these components.

•Damage to any components, the

engine, transmission, turbo-charger,

differential or its internal components

caused by flooding, vapor lock or

insufficient oil is not covered under

warranty.

•Do not allow the vehicle to stand in

water up to the door sills longer than

absolutely necessary. This could result

in electrical malfunctions.

•If the engine has been stopped while

the vehicle is in water, do not attempt

to restart it. Have the vehicle towed

out of the water.

Related information

•Towing the vehicle (p. 289)

•Towing by tow truck (p. 291)

08 Starting and driving

}}

279

Engine and cooling system

Under special conditions, for example when

driving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with

heavy loads, there is a risk that the engine and

cooling system will overheat.

Proceed as follows to avoid overheating the

engine.

•Maintain a low speed when driving with a

trailer up long, steep hills. For informa-

tion, see Towing a trailer (p. 287)

•Do not turn the engine off immediately

when stopping after a hard drive.

WARNING

The cooling fan may start or continue to

operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the

engine has been switched off.

•Remove any auxiliary lights from in front

of the grille when driving in hot weather

conditions.

•Do not exceed engine speeds of

4500 rpm if driving with a trailer in hilly

terrain. The oil temperature could become

too high.

Conserving electrical current

Keep the following in mind to help minimize

battery drain:

•When the engine is not running, avoid

using ignition mode II. Many electrical

systems (the audio system, the optional

navigation system, power windows, etc)

will function in ignition modes 0 and I.

These modes reduce drain on the battery.

•Please keep in mind that using systems,

accessories, etc., that consume a great

deal of current when the engine is not

running could result in the battery being

completely drained. Driving or having the

engine running for approximately

15 minutes will help keep the battery

charged.

•The optional 12-volt socket in the cargo

area (p. 138) area provides electrical cur-

rent even with the ignition switched off,

which drains the battery.

Before a long distance trip

It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle

checked by a trained and qualified Volvo serv-

ice technician before driving long distances.

Your retailer will also be able to supply you

with bulbs, fuses, spark plugs and wiper

blades for your use in the event that problems

occur.

As a minimum, the following items should be

checked before any long trip:

•Check that engine runs smoothly and that

fuel consumption is normal.

•Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage.

•Have the transmission oil level (p. 384)

checked.

•Check condition of drive belts.

•Check state of the battery's charge.

•Examine tires carefully (the spare tire as

well), and replace those that are

worn (p. 295). Check tire pres-

sure (p. 302).

•The brakes, front wheel alignment, and

steering gear should be checked by a

trained and qualified Volvo service techni-

cian only.

•Check all lights, including high beams.

•Reflective warning triangles are legally

required in some states/provinces.

•Have a word with a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician if you intend to

||
08 Starting and driving
08
280
drive in countries where it may be difficult
to obtain the correct fuel.
•Consider your destination. If you will be
driving through an area where snow or ice
are likely to occur, consider snow
tires (p. 310).
Related information
•Changing a wheel – removing wheel
(p. 296)
•Bulbs – introduction (p. 338)
Driving in cold weather
Check your vehicle before the approach of
cold weather.
The following advice is worth noting:
•Make sure that the engine cool-
ant (p. 335) contains 50 percent anti-
freeze. Any other mixture will reduce
freeze protection. This gives protection
against freezing down to –31 °F (–35 °C).
The use of "recycled" antifreeze is not
approved by Volvo. Different types of
antifreeze must not be mixed.
•Volvo recommends using only genuine
Volvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator.
•Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – this
helps prevent the formation of condensa-
tion in the tank. In addition, in extremely
cold weather conditions it is worthwhile
to add fuel line de-icer before refueling.
•The viscosity of the engine oil is impor-
tant. Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil)
improves cold-weather starting as well as
decreasing fuel consumption while the
engine is warming up. Full synthetic
0W-30 oil is recommended for driving in
areas with sustained low temperatures.
•The load placed on the battery is greater
during the winter since the windshield
wipers, lighting, etc., are used more
often. Moreover, the capacity of the bat-
tery decreases as the temperature drops.
In very cold weather, a poorly charged
battery can freeze and be damaged. It is
therefore advisable to check the state of
charge more frequently and spray an anti-
rust oil on the battery posts.
•Volvo recommends the use of snow tires
on all four wheels for winter driving, see
Snow tires/studded tires (p. 310).
•To prevent the washer fluid (p. 348)reser-
voir from freezing, add washer solvents
containing antifreeze. This is important
since dirt is often splashed on the wind-
shield during winter driving, requiring the
frequent use of the washers and wipers.
Volvo Washer Solvent should be diluted
as follows: Down to 14 °F (–10 °C): 1 part
washer solvent and 4 parts water Down
to 5 °F (–15 °C): 1 part washer solvent
and 3 parts water Down to 0 °F (–18 °C):
1 part washer solvent and 2 parts water
Down to –18 °F (–28 °C): 1 part washer
solvent and 1 part water.
•Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks.
•Avoid using de-icing sprays as they can
cause damage to the locks.

08 Starting and driving

281

Refueling – fuel requirements

Volvo recommends the use of detergent gas-

oline to control engine deposits.

Deposit control gasoline (detergent

additives)

Detergent gasoline is effective in keeping

injectors and intake valves clean. Consistent

use of deposit control gasolines will help

ensure good drivability and fuel economy. If

you are not sure whether the gasoline con-

tains deposit control additives, check with the

service station operator.

NOTE

Volvo does not recommend the use of

external fuel injector cleaning systems.

Unleaded fuel

Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic con-

verter and must use only unleaded gasoline.

U.S. and Canadian regulations require that

pumps delivering unleaded gasoline be

labeled "UNLEADED". Only these pumps

have nozzles which fit your vehicle's filler

inlet. It is unlawful to dispense leaded fuel

into a vehicle labeled "unleaded gasoline

only". Leaded gasoline damages the three-

way catalytic converter and the heated oxy-

gen sensor system. Repeated use of leaded

gasoline will lessen the effectiveness of the

emission control system (p. 285) and could

result in loss of emission warranty coverage.

State and local vehicle inspection programs

will make detection of misfueling easier, pos-

sibly resulting in emission test failure for mis-

fueled vehicles.

NOTE

Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines con-

tain an octane enhancing additive called

methyl-cyclopentadienyl manganese tri-

carbonyl (MMT). If such fuels are used,

your Emission Control System perform-

ance may be affected, and the Check

Engine Light (malfunction indicator light)

located on your instrument panel may

light. If this occurs, please return your

vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician for service.

Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers,

"Oxygenated fuels"

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing

"oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or

ethers. In some areas, state or local laws

require that the service pump be marked indi-

cating use of alcohols or ethers. However,

there are areas in which the pumps are

unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is

alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy,

check with the service station operator. To

meet seasonal air quality standards, some

areas require the use of "oxygenated" fuel.

Volvo allows the use of the following "oxy-

genated" fuels; however, the octane rat-

ings (p. 282) listed must still be met.

Alcohol – Ethanol

Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by vol-

ume may be used. Ethanol may also be refer-

red to as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol".

Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to

15% MTBE may be used.

Methanol

Do not use gasolines containing methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice

can result in vehicle performance deteriora-

tion and can damage critical parts in the fuel

system. Such damage may not be covered

under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

08 Starting and driving

282

Refueling – octane rating

Volvo recommends premium fuel for best per-

formance, but using 87 octane15 or above will

not affect engine reliability.

Minimum octane

G028920

Typical pump octane label

NOTE

Vehicles equipped with the high perform-

ance 4-cylinder engines (B4204T9 and

B4204T10) require premium fuel16.

TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline

Volvo endorses the use of “TOP TIER Deter-

gent Gasoline” where available to help main-

tain engine performance and reliability. TOP

TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new stand-

ard jointly established by leading automotive

manufactures to meet the needs of today’s

advanced engines. Qualifying gasoline retail-

ers (stations) will, in most cases, identify their

gasoline as having met the “TOP TIER Deter-

gent Gasoline” standards.

NOTE

Information about TOP TIER Detergent

Gasoline is available at

www.toptiergas.com.

Demanding driving

In demanding driving conditions, such as

operating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a

trailer, or driving for extended periods at

higher altitudes than normal, it may be advis-

able to switch to higher octane fuel (91 or

higher) or to change gasoline brands to fully

utilize your engine's capacity, and for the

smoothest possible operation.

NOTE

When switching to higher octane fuel or

changing gasoline brands, it may be nec-

essary to fill the tank more than once

before a difference in engine operation is

noticeable.

Fuel Formulations

Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a

knock inhibitor, and do not use lead addi-

tives. Besides damaging the exhaust emis-

sion control systems on your vehicle, lead

has been strongly linked to certain forms of

cancer.

Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent.

Unburned benzene has been strongly linked

to certain forms of cancer. If you live in an

area where you must fill your own gas tank,

take precautions. These may include:

•standing upwind away from the filler noz-

zle while refueling

•refueling only at gas stations with vapor

recovery systems that fully seal the

mouth of the filler neck during refueling

•wearing neoprene gloves while handling a

fuel filler nozzle.

Use of Additives

With the exception of gas line antifreeze dur-

ing winter months, do not add solvents, thick-

eners, or other store-bought additives to your

vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems.

Overuse may damage your engine, and some

of these additives contain organically volatile

chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself

to these chemicals.

15 AKI (ANTI KNOCK INDEX) is an average of the Research Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number (MON), MON+RON/2.

16 Refer to your Warranty and Maintenance Records booklet for additional information.

08 Starting and driving

}}

283

WARNING

Never carry a cell phone that is switched

on while refueling your vehicle. If the

phone rings, this may cause a spark that

could ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in

fire and injury.

WARNING

Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, color-

less, and odorless gas. It is present in all

exhaust gases. If you ever smell exhaust

fumes inside the vehicle, make sure the

passenger compartment is ventilated, and

immediately return the vehicle to a trained

and qualified Volvo service technician for

correction.

Related information

•Refueling – fuel requirements (p. 281)

Refueling – opening/closing fuel filler

door

The fuel filler door is located on the right rear

fender (indicated by an arrow beside the fuel

tank symbol on the information display )

With the ignition switched off, press and

release the button on the lighting panel to

unlock the fuel filler door. Please note that the

fuel filler door will remain unlocked until the

vehicle begins to move forward. An audible

click will be heard when the fuel filler door

relocks.

•If you intend to leave your vehicle while it

is being refueled, this feature enables you

to lock the doors/tailgate while leaving

the fuel filler door unlocked.

•You can also keep the vehicle locked if

you remain inside it during refueling. The

central locking button does not lock the

fuel filler door.

•Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstruc-

ted and is completely closed after refuel-

ing.

•Open the fuel filler cap slowly during hot

weather.

Close the fuel filler door by pressing it; a click

indicates that it is closed.

CAUTION

Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling. In

addition to causing damage to the environ-

ment, gasolines containing alcohol can

cause damage to painted surfaces, which

may not be covered under the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

Manually opening the fuel filler door

1. Open the side hatch in the cargo area (on

the same side as the fuel filler door).

08 Starting and driving

284

2. Open a perforated section of the insula-

tion and grasp the handle on the green

cord.

3. Gently pull the cord straight rearward until

the fuel filler door clicks open.

Related information

•Refueling – opening/closing fuel cap

(p. 284)

•Refueling – fuel requirements (p. 281)

•Refueling – octane rating (p. 282)

Refueling – opening/closing fuel cap

If necessary, the fuel filler door can be

opened manually.

Opening/closing the fuel cap

Fuel vapor expands in hot weather. Open the

filler cap slowly.

After refueling, close the fuel filler cap by

turning it clockwise until it clicks into place.

CAUTION

•Do not refuel with the engine run-

ning17. Turn the ignition off or to posi-

tion I. If the ignition is on, an incorrect

reading could occur in the fuel gauge.

•Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not

press the handle on the filler nozzle

more than one extra time. Too much

fuel in the tank in hot weather condi-

tions can cause the fuel to overflow.

Overfilling could also cause damage to

the emission control systems.

Related information

•Refueling – fuel requirements (p. 281)

•Refueling – octane rating (p. 282)

17 If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle's

performance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.

08 Starting and driving

}}

285

Emission controls

Three-way catalytic converter

•Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain

engine malfunctions, particularly involving

the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition

systems, may cause unusually high three-

way catalytic converter temperatures. Do

not continue to operate your vehicle if

you detect engine misfire, noticeable loss

of power or other unusual operating con-

ditions, such as engine overheating or

backfiring. A properly tuned engine will

help avoid malfunctions that could dam-

age the three-way catalytic converter.

•Do not park your vehicle over combusti-

ble materials, such as grass or leaves,

which can come into contact with the hot

exhaust system and cause such materials

to ignite under certain wind and weather

conditions.

•Excessive starter cranking (in excess of

one minute), or an intermittently firing or

flooded engine can cause three-way cat-

alytic converter or exhaust system over-

heating.

•Remember that tampering or unauthor-

ized modifications to the engine, the

Engine Control Module, or the vehicle

may be illegal and can cause three-way

catalytic converter or exhaust system

overheating. This includes: altering fuel

injection settings or components, altering

emission system components or location

or removing components, and/or repea-

ted use of leaded fuel.

NOTE

Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with

three-way catalytic converters.

Heated oxygen sensors

The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxy-

gen content of the exhaust gases. Readings

are fed into a control module that continu-

ously monitors engine functions and controls

fuel injection. The ratio of fuel to air into the

engine is continuously adjusted for efficient

combustion to help reduce harmful emis-

sions.

Related information

•Information displays – warning symbols

(p. 72)

•Engine and cooling system (p. 279)

Economical driving

Better driving economy may be obtained by

thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and

stops and adjusting the speed of your vehicle

to immediate traffic conditions.

Economical driving conserves natural

resources

Observe the following rules:

•Bring the engine to normal operating tem-

perature as soon as possible by driving

with a light foot on the accelerator pedal

for the first few minutes of operation. A

cold engine uses more fuel and is subject

to increased wear.

•Whenever possible, avoid using the vehi-

cle for driving short distances. This does

not allow the engine to reach normal

operating temperature.

•Drive carefully and avoid rapid accelera-

tion and hard braking.

•Use the transmission's Drive (D) position

as often as possible and avoid using kick-

down.

08 Starting and driving

286 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

•Using the engine's optional Eco func-

tion18 can help improve fuel economy. For

additional information, see ECO* (p. 267).

•Using the transmission's Sport mode19

may increase fuel consumption some-

what. Use the transmission's Drive (D)

position as often as possible. For addi-

tional information about Sport mode, see

Transmission – Geartronic (p. 259).

•Do not exceed posted speed limits.

•Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra

load) in the vehicle.

•Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire

pressure regularly (when tires are cold).

•Remove snow tires when threat of snow

or ice has ended.

•Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc,

increase air resistance and also fuel con-

sumption.

•At highway driving speeds, fuel consump-

tion will be lower with the air conditioning

on and the windows closed than with the

air conditioning off and the windows

open.

•Using the onboard trip computer's fuel

consumption modes can help you learn

how to drive more economically.

Other factors that decrease gas mileage

are:

•Dirty air cleaner

•Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter

•Dragging brakes

•Incorrect front end alignment

Some of the above mentioned items and oth-

ers are checked at the standard maintenance

intervals.

WARNING

Driving with the tailgate open: Driving

with the tailgate open could lead to poi-

sonous exhaust gases entering the pas-

senger compartment. If the tailgate must

be kept open for any reason, proceed as

follows:

•Close the windows

•Set the ventilation system control to air

flow to floor, windshield and side win-

dows and the blower control to its

highest setting.

Handling and roadholding

At the specified curb weight your vehicle has

a tendency to understeer, which means that

the steering wheel has to be turned more

than might seem appropriate for the curva-

ture of a bend. This ensures good stability

and reduces the risk of rear wheel skid.

Remember that these properties can alter

with the vehicle load. The heavier the load in

the cargo area, the less the tendency to

understeer.

•Vehicle load, tire design and inflation

pressure all affect vehicle handling.

Therefore, check that the tires are inflated

to the recommended pressure according

to the vehicle load. Loads should be dis-

tributed so that capacity weight or maxi-

mum permissible axle loads are not

exceeded.

•At the specified curb weight your vehicle

has a tendency to understeer, which

means that the steering wheel has to be

turned more than might seem appropriate

for the curvature of a bend. This ensures

good stability and reduces the risk of rear

wheel skid. Remember that these proper-

ties can alter with the vehicle load. The

heavier the load in the cargo compart-

ment, the less the tendency to under-

steer.

Related information

•Climate – general information (p. 122)

18 Available on certain 4-cyl. engines

19 Models with the T6 turbo engine only.

08 Starting and driving

}}

287

Towing a trailer

When towing a trailer, always observe the

legal requirements of the state/province.

NOTE

For the maximum trailer and tongue

weights recommended by Volvo, see

Weights (p. 378).

•All Volvo models are equipped with

energy-absorbing shock-mounted bump-

ers. Trailer hitch installation should not

interfere with the proper operation of this

bumper system.

Trailer towing does not normally present any

particular problems, but take into considera-

tion:

•Increase tire pressure to recommended

full pressure, see Tire inflation – pressure

table (p. 305).

•When your vehicle is new, avoid towing

heavy trailers during the first 620 miles

(1,000 km).

•Maximum speed when towing a trailer:

50 mph (80 km/h).

•Engine and transmission are subject to

increased loads. Therefore, engine cool-

ant temperature should be closely

watched when driving in hot climates or

hilly terrain. Use a lower gear and turn off

the air conditioner if the temperature

gauge needle enters the red range.

•If the automatic transmission begins to

overheat, a message will be displayed in

the text window.

•Avoid overload and other abusive opera-

tion.

•Hauling a trailer affects handling, durabil-

ity, and economy.

•It is necessary to balance trailer brakes

with the towing vehicle brakes to provide

a safe stop (check and observe state/

local regulations).

•Do not connect the trailer's brake system

directly to the vehicle's brake system.

•More frequent vehicle maintenance is

required.

•Remove the ball holder when the hitch is

not being used.

NOTE

•When parking the vehicle with a trailer

on a hill, apply the parking brake

before putting the gear selector in P.

Always follow the trailer manufactur-

er's recommendations for wheel

chocking.

•When starting on a hill, put the gear

selector in D before releasing the park-

ing brake.

•If you use the manual (Geartronic) shift

positions while towing a trailer, make

sure the gear you select does not put

too much strain on the engine (using

too high a gear).

•The drawbar assembly/trailer hitch

may be rated for trailers heavier than

the vehicle is designed to tow. Please

adhere to Volvo's recommended trailer

weights.

•Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines

of more than 15%.

08 Starting and driving

288

CAUTION

The maximum trailer weights listed are

only applicable for altitudes up to 3,280 ft

(1000 m) above sea level. With increasing

altitude the engine power and therefore

the car's climbing ability are impaired

because of the reduced air density, so the

maximum trailer weight has to be reduced

accordingly. The weight of the vehicle and

trailer must be reduced by 10% for every

further 3,280 ft (1000 m) (or part thereof).

When towing 5,950 lbs (2,700kg) hill incli-

nation is restricted to 14%.

WARNING

•Bumper-attached trailer hitches must

not be used on Volvos, nor should

safety chains be attached to the

bumper.

•Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle

rear axle must not be used.

•Never connect a trailer's hydraulic

brake system directly to the vehicle

brake system, nor a trailer's lighting

system directly to the vehicle lighting

system. Consult your nearest author-

ized Volvo retailer for correct installa-

tion.

•When towing a trailer, the trailer's

safety chains or wire must be correctly

fastened to the attachment points pro-

vided in the trailer hitch on the vehicle.

The safety chain or wire must never be

fastened to or wound around the tow-

ing ball.

Trailer cable

An adapter is required if the vehicle's trailer

hitch has a 13-pin connector and the trailer

has 7 pins. Use an adapter cable approved

by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag

on the ground.

Related information

•Loading – general (p. 139)

Trailer Stability Assist (TSA)

Trailer Stability Assist is a system designed to

help stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer

when the vehicle and trailer have begun to

sway and is part of the stability system. For

information on the stability system, see Stabil-

ity system – introduction (p. 169)

Function

A vehicle towing a trailer may begin to sway

for various reasons. Normally this only occurs

at high speeds but, for example, if the trailer

is overloaded or if the load is unevenly dis-

tributed in the trailer, there is risk of swaying

at speeds between approximately 45-55 mph

(70-90 km/h).

Swaying may be caused by factors such as:

•The vehicle and trailer are hit by a sud-

den, strong crosswind

•The vehicle and trailer are traveling on an

uneven road surface or drive over a bump

•Sudden movements of the steering wheel

Facts about TSA

•TSA intervenes at speeds above approxi-

mately 40 mph (60 km/h)

•The stability system symbol in the instru-

ment panel will flash when TSA is working

•If the driver switches off the stability sys-

tem's Spin Control function, TSA will also

08 Starting and driving

}}

289

be switched off (but will be on again the

next time the engine is started)

•TSA may not intervene when the vehicle

and trailer begin to sway if the driver tries

to compensate for the swaying motion by

moving the steering wheel rapidly

How TSA works

Once swaying has begun, it can be very diffi-

cult to stop, which makes it difficult to control

the vehicle and trailer.

The TSA system continuously monitors the

vehicle's movements, particularly lateral

movement. If the system detects a tendency

to sway, the brakes are applied individually

on the front wheels, which has a stabilizing

effect on the vehicle and trailer. This is often

enough to enable the driver to regain control

of the vehicle.

If this is not adequate to stop the swaying

motion, the brakes are applied to all of the

wheels on the vehicle and on the trailer if it is

equipped with brakes, and engine power is

temporarily reduced. As the swaying motion

begins to decrease and the vehicle-trailer

have once again become stable, TSA will now

stop regulating the brakes/engine power and

the driver regains control of the vehicle.

Related information

•Towing a trailer (p. 287)

•Loading – general (p. 139)

Towing the vehicle

Always check with state and local authorities

before attempting to tow another vehicle

because this type of towing is subject to reg-

ulations regarding maximum towing speed,

length and type of towing device, lighting, etc.

1. With the remote key fully pressed into the

ignition slot20, press START/STOP

ENGINE for approximately 2 seconds to

activate ignition mode II.

2. The remote key must remain in the igni-

tion slot21 for the entire time that the vehi-

cle is being towed.

3. Keep the tow rope taut when the towing

vehicle slows down by applying light

pressure on the brake pedal. This will

help prevent jarring movements of the

vehicle being towed.

4. Be prepared to apply the brakes to stop

the vehicle being towed.

20 Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

08 Starting and driving

290

CAUTION

General towing precautions:

•Please check with state and local

authorities before attempting this type

of towing, as vehicles being towed are

subject to regulations regarding maxi-

mum towing speed, length and type of

towing device, lighting, etc.

•If the vehicle's battery is dead, see

Jump starting (p. 256) to provide cur-

rent for releasing the electric parking

brake and to move the gear selector

from the P position to N. If this is not

possible, see Transmission – shiftlock

override (p. 261) for information about

manually overriding the shiftlock sys-

tem to move the gear selector from P

to N.

•Maximum speed: 50 mph (80 km/h).

Do not exceed the maximum allowable

towing speed.

•Maximum distance with front wheels

on ground: 50 miles (80 km).

•The vehicle should only be towed in

the forward direction.

Related information

•Towing eyelet (p. 290)

•Remote key – functions (p. 149)

Towing eyelet

When used, the towing eyelet should always

be securing attached.

Removing the front/rear covers

Attaching the towing eyelet

The towing eyelet is located under the

floor of the cargo area, with the spare tire.

This eyelet must be screwed into the

positions provided on the right sides of

either the front or rear bumper (see illus-

tration).

There are two different types of covers

over the openings for the towing eyelet

and they have to be opened differently.

•If the cover has a notch, insert a coin,

etc., into the notch and pry open the

edge of the cover. Open the cover

completely and remove it.

•If the cover has a mark along one edge

or in a corner, press the mark while

prying out the opposite side/corner

using a coin, etc. Open the cover and

remove it.

Screw the towing eyelet in place, first by

hand and then using the tire iron until it is

securely in place.

After the vehicle has been towed, the eyelet

should be removed and returned to its stor-

age location.

Press the cover for the attachment point back

into position.

21 For vehicles with the optional keyless drive, the remote key must be in the vehicle.

08 Starting and driving

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 291

WARNING

•When the vehicle is being towed, the

ignition should be in mode II (in mode

I, all of the vehicle's airbags are deac-

tivated). For more information, see

Ignition modes (p. 77)

•Never remove the remote key from the

ignition slot when the vehicle is being

towed. For vehicles with keyless drive,

the remote key must remain inside the

vehicle.

•The power brakes and power steering

will not function when the engine is not

running. Approximately 5 times more

pressure will be required on the brake

pedal and the steering wheel will be

considerably harder to turn.

•The towing eyelets must not be used

for pulling the vehicle out of a ditch or

for any similar purpose involving

severe strain.

Related information

•Towing the vehicle (p. 289)

•Towing by tow truck (p. 291)

Towing by tow truck

When necessary, call for professional help

from an authorized towing company. Volvo

recommends the use of flat bed equipment.

CAUTION

In certain conditions, the towing eyelet

may be used to pull the vehicle onto a

flatbed tow truck.

•The vehicle's position and ground

clearance determine if it can be pulled

up onto a flatbed tow truck using the

towing eyelet.

•If the angle of the tow truck’s ramp is

too steep or the ground clearance

under the vehicle is insufficient, dam-

age could occur by attempting to pull

the vehicle using the towing eyelet.

•If necessary, lift the vehicle using the

tow truck’s lifting device.

WARNING

No person or object should be behind the

tow truck while the vehicle is being pulled

up onto the flatbed.

CAUTION

•The vehicle should always be towed in

the forward direction.

•Vehicles with All Wheel Drive (AWD)*

that are being towed with the front

wheels off the ground should not be

towed at a speed above approx.

45 mph (70 km/h) and should not be

towed farther than 30 miles (50 km).

Related information

•Towing eyelet (p. 290)

W H E E L S A N D T I R E S

09 Wheels and tires

293

Tires – general information

Your vehicle is equipped with tires according

to the vehicle's tire information placard on the

B-pillar (the structural member at the side of

the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door

opening).

Introduction

CAUTION

Some Volvo models are equipped with an

Ultra High Performance tire and wheel

combination designed to provide maxi-

mum dry pavement performance with con-

sideration for hydroplaning resistance.

They may be more susceptible to road

hazard damage and, depending on driving

conditions, may achieve a tread life of less

than 20,000 miles (30,000 km). Even if this

vehicle is equipped with Volvo’s advanced

AWD or stability system, these tires are not

designed for winter driving, and should be

replaced with winter tires when weather

conditions dictate.

The tires have good road holding characteris-

tics and offer good handling on dry and wet

surfaces. It should be noted however that the

tires have been developed to give these fea-

tures on snow/ice-free surfaces.

Most models are equipped with "all-season"

tires, which provide a somewhat higher

degree of road holding on slippery surfaces

than tires without the "all-season" rating.

However, for optimum road holding on icy or

snow-covered roads, we recommend suitable

winter tires on all four wheels.

When replacing tires, be sure that the new

tires are the same size designation, type

(radial) and preferably from the same manu-

facturer, on all four wheels. Otherwise there is

a risk of altering the car's roadholding and

handling characteristics.

Tire rotation

Your vehicle has no required tire rotation. Tire

wear is affected by a number of factors such

as tire inflation, ambient temperature, driving

style, etc.

NOTE

•If the tires are rotated, they should

only be moved from front to rear or

vice versa. They should never be rota-

ted left to right/right to left.

•Ideally, tire rotation should be done the

first time after approximately 3,000

miles (5,000 km) and thereafter at

6,000-mile (10,000-km) intervals.

Some customers find that tire rotation

may help to get extra mileage from tire

life.

•Tire rotation should only be performed

if front/rear tire wear is fairly even and

tread height is above 1/16" (1.6 mm).

Related information

•Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 305)

•Tire specifications (p. 303)

•Changing a wheel – direction of rotation

(p. 296)

•Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 295)

09 Wheels and tires

294

Tires – storage and age

When storing complete wheels (tires mounted

on rims), they should be suspended off the

floor or placed on their sides on the floor.

New Tires

Remember that tires are perishable goods. As

of 2000, the manufacturing week and year

(Department of Transportation (DOT) stamp)

will be indicated with 4 digits (e.g., 1513

means that the tire illustrated was manufac-

tured during week 15 of 2013).

Tire age

Tires degrade over time, even when they are

not being used. It is recommended that tires

generally be replaced after 6 years of normal

service. Heat caused by hot climates, fre-

quent high loading conditions or Ultra Violet

(U.V.) exposure can accelerate the aging

process. The temporary spare1 should also

be replaced at 6-year intervals, even if it has

never been used.

A tire's age can be determined by the DOT

stamp on the sidewall (see the illustration).

A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discoloration

should be replaced immediately.

Storing wheels and tires

When storing completes wheels (tires moun-

ted on rims), they should be suspended off

the floor or placed on their sides on the floor.

Tires not mounted on rims should be stored

on their sides or standing upright, but should

not be suspended.

CAUTION

Tires should preferably be stored in a cool,

dry, dark place, and should never be

stored in close proximity to solvents, gaso-

line, oils, etc.

WARNING

•The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo

are specified to meet stringent stability

and handling requirements. Unap-

proved wheel/tire size combinations

can negatively affect your vehicle's

stability and handling.

•Any damage caused by installation of

unapproved wheel/tire size combina-

tions will not be covered by your new

vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no

responsibility for death, injury, or

expenses that may result from such

installations.

Related information

•Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 305)

•Tire specifications (p. 303)

•Changing a wheel – direction of rotation

(p. 296)

•Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 295)

1Option or accessory on some models

09 Wheels and tires

295

Tires – tread wear indicator

The tires have wear indicator strips running

across or parallel to the tread.

G021829

The letters TWI are printed on the side of the

tire. When approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is

left on the tread, these strips become visible

and indicate that the tire should be replaced.

Tires with less than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer

very poor traction.

When replacing worn tires, it is recommended

that the tire be identical in type (radial) and

size as the one being replaced. Using a tire of

the same make (manufacturer) will prevent

alteration of the driving characteristics of the

vehicle.

Related information

•Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 305)

•Tire specifications (p. 303)

•Changing a wheel – direction of rotation

(p. 296)

•Tires – storage and age (p. 294)

Tires – tire economy

A smooth driving style and correct inflation

pressure can help prolong the tires' service

life.

•Maintain correct tire pressure. The tire

inflation table, see Tire inflation – pressure

table (p. 305).

•Avoid fast starts, hard braking and tire

screeching.

•Tire wear increases with speed.

•Correct front wheel alignment is very

important.

•Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy

and driving comfort.

•Tires must maintain the same direction of

rotation throughout their lifetime.

•When replacing tires, the tires with the

most tread should be mounted on the

rear wheels to reduce the chance of over-

steer during hard braking.

•Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the

tires and/or wheels permanently.

09 Wheels and tires

296 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Changing a wheel – direction of

rotation

Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's

braking properties and ability to force aside

rain, snow and slush.

Summer and winter tires

G021778

The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the

tire

•The tires with the most tread should

always be on the rear axle (to help reduce

the risk of skidding).

•When switching between summer and

winter tires, mark the tires to indicate

where they were mounted on the car,

e.g., LF = left front, RR = right rear

•Tires with tread designed to roll in only

one direction are marked with an arrow

on the sidewall.

•Contact a Volvo workshop if you are

unsure about the tread depth.

Related information

•Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 305)

•Tire specifications (p. 303)

•Tires – storage and age (p. 294)

•Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 295)

Changing a wheel – removing wheel

Wheel changes should always be carried out

correctly.

Location of jack and tools

Changing a wheel

1. Apply the parking brake and put the gear

selector in P.

2. Take out the jack*, lug wrench*, the tool

for removing the plastic covers on the

wheel nuts, the towing eyelet and the

wheel cover removal tool (certain models

only) stowed under the floor of the cargo

area.

09 Wheels and tires

}}

297

Tool for removing the plastic covers on the wheel

nuts

Remove the wheel cover (where applica-

ble) using the removal tool or remove the

wheel cover by hand.

4. Block the wheels that are on the ground

with wooden blocks or large stones.

Lug wrench and towing eyelet

5. Screw the towing eyelet into the lug

wrench as shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

The towing eyelet must be screwed into

the lug wrench as far as possible.

6. With the vehicle still on the ground,

remove the plastic covers on the wheel

nuts with the tool provided and use the

lug wrench/towing eyelet to loosen the

wheel nuts ½ – 1 turn by exerting down-

ward (counterclockwise) pressure.

Jack attachment points

09 Wheels and tires

298

7. There are two jack attachment points on

each side of the vehicle. Position the jack

under the attachment point to be used on

a level, firm, non-slippery surface and

crank it up until it is correctly aligned and

seated in the attachment point. Before

raising the vehicle, check that the jack is

still correctly positioned in the attach-

ment.

8. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be

changed is lifted off the ground.

9. Unscrew the wheel nuts completely and

remove the wheel.

WARNING

•The jack must correctly engage the

jack attachment.

•Be sure the jack is on a firm, level,

non-slippery surface.

•Never allow any part of your body to

be extended under a vehicle suppor-

ted by a jack.

•Use the jack intended for the vehicle

when changing a tire. For any other

job, use stands to support the vehicle.

•Apply the parking brake and put the

gear selector in the Park (P) position.

•Block the wheels standing on the

ground, use rigid wooden blocks or

large stones.

•The jack should be kept well-greased

and clean, and should not be dam-

aged.

•No objects should be placed between

the base of jack and the ground, or

between the jack and the attachment

bar on the vehicle.

NOTE

The jack provided with your vehicle is

intended to be used only in temporary sit-

uations such as changing wheels in the

event of a flat tire. Only the jack that came

with your particular model should be used

to lift the vehicle. If the vehicle needs to be

lifted more frequently or for a prolonged

period, using a garage jack or hoist is rec-

ommended. Always follow this device’s

instructions for use.

Related information

•Changing a wheel – installing a wheel

(p. 300)

09 Wheels and tires
09
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 299
Changing a wheel – spare wheel
Wheel changes should always be carried out
correctly.
Spare tire
A spare tire can be purchased for your vehi-
cle as an accessory. Follow the instructions
included with the spare tire regarding use and
stowing in the vehicle. See also Changing a
wheel – removing wheel (p. 296) for additional
information.
Spare wheel
The following instructions only apply if you
have purchased a temporary spare wheel* for
your vehicle.
If there is no temporary spare wheel in your
vehicle, please see Tire sealing system* –
general information (p. 318) for instructions
on using the tire sealing system.
The accessory temporary spare wheel is pro-
vided in a bag that must be securely strapped
in place in the cargo area while the vehicle is
being driven.
The spare wheel is only intended for tempo-
rary use. Replace it with a normal wheel as
soon as possible. The vehicle's handling may
be altered by the use of the spare wheel. The
correct tire pressure is stated in the tire pres-
sure table, see Tire inflation – pressure table
(p. 305) and in the tire inflation placard on the
driver's side door jamb at the rear of the driv-
er's door opening.
Turn the handle on the spare wheel bag out
toward you. Secure the stitched strap hooks
in the front loading eyelets. Secure the long
strap in one of the front loading eyelets, wrap
the strap diagonally over the spare wheel and
through the upper handle. Secure the short
strap on the long strap. Secure in the rear
loading eyelet and tighten.
WARNING
Current legislation prohibits the use of the
“Temporary Spare” tire other than as a
temporary replacement for a punctured
tire. It must be replaced as soon as possi-
ble by a standard tire. Road holding and
handling may be affected with the “Tem-
porary Spare” in use.
CAUTION
The vehicle must never be driven with
more than one temporary spare wheel.
Related information
•Changing a wheel – installing a wheel
(p. 300)
•Changing a wheel – removing wheel
(p. 296)

09 Wheels and tires

300 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Changing a wheel – accessing the

spare wheel

The following procedure explains how to

access the spare wheel (where applicable).

1. Release the bag's retaining straps.

2. Lift the bag out of the vehicle and remove

the spare wheel from the bag.

3. Fold up the floor hatch in the cargo area.

4. Remove the jack* and tools* from the

foam block and change the wheels (see

the instructions in the following section

"Changing a wheel").

5. After changing wheels, return the jack

and tools to the foam block and close the

floor hatch.

6. If possible, place the wheel with the

punctured tire in the bag.

7. If there is a wheel in the bag, strap the

bag securely in place in the cargo area.

WARNING

•If there is a wheel in the bag, the bag

must be securely restrained using its

straps and the load anchoring eyelets in

the cargo area. See (p. 299) and care-

fully follow the instructions.

•If the wheel with the punctured tire is

too big to fit in the bag, it should be

securely restrained in the cargo area

using suitable straps, a net for anchor-

ing cargo, etc.

Changing a wheel – installing a wheel

It is important to re-install wheels properly.

Re-installing the wheel

1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel

and hub.

2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub.

Tighten the wheel nuts

3. Install the wheel nuts and tighten hand-

tight. Using the lug wrench, tighten cross-

wise until all nuts are snug.

4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alter-

nately tighten the bolts crosswise to

103 ft. lbs. (140 Nm).

5. Press the plastic covers onto the wheel

nuts and Install the wheel cover (where

applicable). The opening in the wheel

cover for the tire's inflation valve must be

positioned over the valve.

09 Wheels and tires

}}

301

Related information

•Changing a wheel – spare wheel (p. 299)

•Changing a wheel – removing wheel

(p. 296)

Tire inflation – general information

Check tire inflation pressure regularly.

Inflation placard

G032521

Tire inflation placard

Tire inflation

See the tire inflation table in Tire inflation –

pressure table (p. 305). A tire inflation pres-

sure placard is also located on the driver's

side B-pillar (the structural member at the

side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's

door opening). This placard indicates the des-

ignation of the factory-mounted tires on your

vehicle, as well as load limits and inflation

pressure.

NOTE

•The placards shown indicate inflation

pressure for the tires installed on the

vehicle at the factory only.

•A certain amount of air seepage from

the tires occurs naturally and tire pres-

sure fluctuates with seasonal changes

in temperature. Always check tire

pressure regularly.

•Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation

pressure, including the spare2, at least

once a month and before long trips. You

are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire

pressure gauge, as automatic service sta-

tion gauges may be inaccurate.

•Use the recommended cold inflation

pressure for optimum tire performance

and wear.

•Under-inflation or over-inflation may

cause uneven treadwear patterns.

2Available as an accessory

09 Wheels and tires

302

WARNING

•Under-inflation is the most common

cause of tire failure and may result in

severe tire cracking, tread separation,

or "blow-out," with unexpected loss of

vehicle control and increased risk of

injury.

•Under-inflated tires reduce the load

carrying capacity of your vehicle.

When weather temperature changes occur,

tire inflation pressures also change. A 10-

degree temperature drop causes a corres-

ponding drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pres-

sure. Check your tire pressures frequently

and adjust them to the proper pressure,

which can be found on the vehicle's tire infor-

mation placard or certification label.

Related information

•Tire specifications (p. 303)

•Tires – storage and age (p. 294)

•Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 295)

•Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 305)

Tire inflation – checking pressure

Inflation pressure should be checked when

the tires are cold.

Cold tires

The tires are considered to be cold when

they have the same temperature as the

surrounding (ambient) air.

This temperature is normally reached after the

vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours.

After driving a distance of approximately

1 mile (1.6 km), the tires are considered to be

hot. If you have to drive farther than this dis-

tance to pump your tire(s), check and record

the tire pressure first and add the appropriate

air pressure when you get to the pump.

If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot,

never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The

tires are hot from driving and it is normal for

pressures to increase above recommended

cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recom-

mended cold inflation pressure could be sig-

nificantly under-inflated.

To check inflation pressure:

1. Remove the cap from the valve on one

tire, then firmly press the tire gauge onto

the valve.

2. Add air to reach the recommended air

pressure.

3. Replace the valve cap.

CAUTION

•After inflating the tires, always reinstall

the valve cap to help avoid damage to

the valve from dirt, gravel, etc.

•Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps

could corrode and become difficult to

remove.

4. Visually inspect the tires to make sure

there are no nails or other objects

embedded that could puncture the tire

and cause an air leak.

5. Check the sidewalls to make sure there

are no gouges, cuts, bulges or other

irregularities.

6. Repeat this procedure for each tire,

including the spare3.

NOTE

•If you overfill the tire, release air by

pushing on the metal stem in the cen-

ter of the valve. Then recheck the

pressure with your tire gauge.

•Some spare tires (available as an

accessory) require higher inflation

pressure than the other tires. Consult

the tire inflation pressure table, see

3Available as an accessory

09 Wheels and tires

}}

303

Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 305)

or see the inflation pressure placard.

Related information

•Tire specifications (p. 303)

•Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 305)

•Tires – storage and age (p. 294)

•Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 295)

Tire specifications

The following information can be found on a

tire's sidewall.

Tire ratings

Speed ratings

The speed ratings in the table translate as fol-

low:

Speed ratings

M 81 mph (130 km/h)

Q 100 mph (160 km/h)

T 118 mph (190 km/h)

H 130 mph (210 km/h)

V 149 mph (240 km/h)

W 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y 186 mph (300 km/h)

Information on the sidewall

Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers

place standardized information on the side-

wall of all tires (see the illustration).

The following information is listed on the tire

sidewall:

The tire designation:

NOTE

Please be aware that the following tire

designation is an example only and that

this particular tire may not be available on

your vehicle.

09 Wheels and tires

304

1. 215: the width of the tire (in millimeters)

from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The

larger the number, the wider the tire.

2. 65: The ratio of the tire's height to its

width in percent.

3. R: Radial tire (the designation RF and the

symbol indicate that the vehicle is

equipped with optional self-supporting

run flat tires4.

4. 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in

inches).

5. 95: The tire's load index. In this example,

a load index of 95 equals a maximum

load of 1521 lbs (690 kg).

6. H: The tire's speed rating, or the maxi-

mum speed at which the tire is designed

to be driven for extended periods of time,

carrying a permissible load for the vehi-

cle, and with correct inflation pressure.

For example, H indicates a speed rating

of 130 mph (210 km/h).

NOTE

The tire's load index and speed rating may

not appear on the sidewall because they

are not required by law.

7. M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow, AT = All

Terrain, AS = All Season

8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number

(TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT"

and indicates that the tire meets all fed-

eral standards. The next two numbers or

letters are the plant code where it was

manufactured, the next two are the tire

size code and the last four numbers rep-

resent the week and year the tire was

built. For example, 1510 means that the

tire was manufactured during week 15 of

2010. The numbers in between are mar-

keting codes used at the manufacturer's

discretion. This information helps a tire

manufacturer identify a tire for safety

recall purposes.

9. Tire Ply Composition and Material

Used: Indicates the number of plies indi-

cates or the number of layers of rubber-

coated fabric in the tire tread and side-

wall. Tire manufacturers also must indi-

cate the ply materials in the tire and the

sidewall, which include steel, nylon, poly-

ester, and others.

10. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum

load in pounds and kilograms that can be

carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's

tire information placard located on the B-

Pillar for the correct tire pressure for your

vehicle.

11. Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature

grades: see Tire specifications – Uniform

Tire Quality Grading (p. 308) for more

information.

12. Maximum permissible inflation

pressure: the greatest amount of air

pressure that should ever be put in the

tire. This limit is set by the tire manufac-

turer.

4Self-supporting run flat tires may not be available on all models

09 Wheels and tires

305

Tire inflation – pressure table

The following tire pressures are recom-

mended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to

the tire inflation placard (see Tire inflation –

general information (p. 301) for its location) for

information specific to the tires installed on

your vehicle at the factory.

Some of the tire sizes listed here may not

be available for all models in all markets.

Tire size Cold tire pressure for up to five persons

Front

psi (kPa)

Rear

psi (kPa)

235/45 R17 Extra load 36 (250) 36 (250)

215/50 R17 Extra load

235/40 R18 Extra load

235/45 R18 Extra load

235/40 R19 Extra load

38 (260) 38 (260)

Temporary spare tireA

T125/80R17

61 (420) 61 (420)

AAvailable as an accessory

WARNING

19” wheels may never be used on vehicles

that are not equipped with the R-design or

the Sport chassis options.

Using 19” wheels on vehicles equipped

the standard chassis presents a safety

risk and the risk of damage to the vehicle,

and impairs the vehicle’s driving characte-

ristics.

NOTE

Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts

department for the most up-to-date speci-

fications.

09 Wheels and tires

306

Loading specifications

Properly loading your vehicle will provide

maximum return of vehicle design perform-

ance.

Before loading your vehicle, familiarize your-

self with the following terms for determining

your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without

a trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/

CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire informa-

tion placard:

Curb weight

The weight of the vehicle including a full tank

of fuel and all standard equipment. It does

not include passengers, cargo, or optional

equipment.

Capacity weight

All weight added to the curb weight, including

cargo and optional equipment. When towing,

trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo

weight.

Permissible axle weight

The maximum allowable weight that can be

carried by a single axle (front or rear). These

numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/

CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle

must never exceed its maximum permissible

weight.

Gross vehicle weight (GVW)

The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passen-

gers.

NOTE

•The location of the various labels in

your vehicle, see Label information

(p. 371).

•A table listing important weight limits

for your vehicle, see Weights (p. 378).

Loading specifications – load limit

The load limit of your vehicle is the combined

weight of the occupants and cargo.

Steps for Determining Correct Load

Limit

1. Locate the statement "the combined

weight of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX pounds" on your vehi-

cle's placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the

driver and passengers that will be riding

in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX kilo-

grams or XXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the available

amount of cargo and luggage load

capacity. For example, if the "XXX"

amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be

five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle,

the amount of available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 –

750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight of lug-

gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-

cle. That weight may not safely exceed

the available cargo and luggage load

capacity calculated in Step 4.

09 Wheels and tires

}}

307

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load

from your trailer will be transferred to your

vehicle.

WARNING

•Exceeding the permissible axle weight,

gross vehicle weight, or any other

weight rating limits can cause tire

overheating resulting in permanent

deformation or catastrophic failure.

•Do not use replacement tires with

lower load carrying capacities than the

tires that were original equipment on

the vehicle because this will lower the

vehicle's GVW rating. Use only tires

with the correct load carrying capacity.

Consult your Volvo retailer for informa-

tion.

Tire specifications – terminology

The following is a glossary of tire-related

terms.

The tire suppliers may have additional mark-

ings, notes or warnings such as standard

load, radial tubeless, etc.

•Tire information placard: A placard

showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire

sizes, recommended inflation pressure,

and the maximum weight the vehicle can

carry.

•Tire Identification Number (TIN): A

number on the sidewall of each tire pro-

viding information about the tire brand

and manufacturing plant, tire size and

date of manufacturer.

•Inflation pressure: A measure of the

amount of air in a tire.

•Standard load: A class of P-metric or

Metric tires designed to carry a maximum

load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric

tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure

beyond this pressure will not increase the

tires load carrying capability.

•Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric

tires designed to carry a heavier maxi-

mum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for

Metric tires]. Increasing the inflation pres-

sure beyond this pressure will not

increase the tire's load carrying capabil-

ity.

•kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres-

sure.

•PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard

unit of air pressure.

•B-pillar: The structural member at the

side of the vehicle behind the front door.

•Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire

next to the rim.

•Sidewall of the tire: Area between the

bead area and the tread.

•Tread area of the tire: Area of the perim-

eter of the tire that contacts the road

when mounted on the vehicle.

•Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire

or a tire and tube assembly upon which

the tire beads are seated.

•Maximum load rating: a figure indicating

the maximum load in pounds and kilo-

grams that can be carried by the tire. This

rating is established by the tire manufac-

turer.

•Maximum permissible inflation

pressure: the greatest amount of air

pressure that should ever be put in the

tire. This limit is set by the tire manufac-

turer.

•Recommended tire inflation pressure:

inflation pressure, established by Volvo,

which is based on the type of tires that

are mounted on a vehicle at the factory.

This information can be found on the tire

inflation placard(s) located on the driver's

09 Wheels and tires

308

side B-pillar and in the tire inflation table

in this chapter.

•Cold tires: The tires are considered to be

cold when they have the same tempera-

ture as the surrounding (ambient) air. This

temperature is normally reached after the

vehicle has been parked for at least

3 hours.

Tire specifications – Uniform Tire

Quality Grading

ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST

CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY

REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE

GRADES.

Quality grades can be found, where appli-

cable, on the tire sidewall between the

tread shoulder and maximum section

width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

TREADWEAR

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tes-

ted under controlled conditions on a specified

government test course. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one and one half

(1 ½) times as well on the government course

as a tire graded 100. The relative perform-

ance of tires depends upon the actual condi-

tions of their use, however, and many depart

significantly from the norm due to variation in

driving habits, maintenance practices and dif-

ferences in road characteristics and climate.

TRACTION

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,

are AA, A, B, and C, as measured under con-

trolled conditions on specified government

test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire

marked C may have poor traction perform-

ance. The traction grade assigned to this tire

is based on braking (straight-ahead) traction

tests and is not a measure of cornering (turn-

ing) traction.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on braking (straight-ahead) traction

tests and is not a measure of cornering

(turning) traction.

TEMPERATURE

The temperature grades are A (the highest),

B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to

the generation of heat and its ability to dissi-

pate heat when tested under controlled con-

ditions on a specified indoor laboratory test

wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause

the material of the tire to degenerate and

reduce tire life, and excessive temperature

can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C

corresponds to a minimum level of perform-

ance that all passenger vehicle tires must

meet under the Federal Motor Safety Stand-

ard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher

levels of performance on the laboratory test

wheel than the minimum required by law.

09 Wheels and tires

309

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly infla-

ted and not overloaded. Excessive speed,

under-inflation, or excessive loading, either

separately or in combination, can cause

heat buildup and tire failure.

Snow chains

Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with

the following restrictions:

•Snow chains should be installed on front

wheels only. Use only Volvo approved

snow chains.

•If accessory, aftermarket or "custom"

tires and wheels are installed and are of a

size different than the original tires and

wheels, chains in some cases CANNOT

be used. Sufficient clearances between

chains and brakes, suspension and body

components must be maintained.

•Some strap-on type chains will interfere

with brake components and therefore

CANNOT be used.

•All Wheel Drive models: Snow chains

should only be installed on the front

wheels.

•Certain size tires may not allow the

assembly of snow chains/traction devi-

ces.

Consult your Volvo retailer for additional

snow chain information.

CAUTION

•Check local regulations regarding the

use of snow chains before installing.

•Use single-sided snow chains only.

•Always follow the chain manufactur-

er's installation instructions carefully.

Install chains as tightly as possible and

retighten periodically.

•Never exceed the chain manufactur-

er's specified maximum speed limit.

(Under no circumstances should you

exceed 31 mph (50 km/h).

•Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns

when driving with snow chains.

•The handling of the vehicle can be

adversely affected when driving with

chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as

well as locked wheel braking.

09 Wheels and tires

310

Snow tires/studded tires5

Owners who live in or regularly commute

through areas with sustained periods of snow

or icy driving conditions are strongly advised

to fit suitable winter tires to help retain the

highest degree of traction.

Tires for winter use:

•It is important to install winter tires on all

four wheels to help retain traction during

cornering, braking, and accelerating. Fail-

ure to do so could reduce traction to an

unsafe level or adversely affect handling.

•Do not mix tires of different design as this

could also negatively affect overall tire

road grip.

•Winter tires wear more quickly on dry

roads in warm weather. They should be

removed when the winter driving season

has ended.

•Studded tires should be run-in 300 –

600 miles (500 – 1000 km) during which

the vehicle should be driven as smoothly

as possible to give the studs the opportu-

nity to seat properly in the tires. The tires

should have the same rotational direction

throughout their entire lifetime.

NOTE

Please consult state or provincial regula-

tions restricting the use of studded winter

tires before installing such tires.

Tire pressure monitoring -

introduction

Volvo provides two different systems to moni-

tor tire pressure: Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) or Tire Monitor.

Determining which tire monitoring

system is in your vehicle

To see which system is installed in your vehi-

cle, press the MY CAR button on the center

console. Go to Settings Car settings.

•If your vehicle has a menu called Tire

monitoring, see Tire Monitor - introduc-

tion (p. 315).

•If your vehicle has a menu called Tire

pressure, see Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) – general information

(p. 311).

Introduction

Each tire, including the spare6 (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recom-

mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size

than the size indicated on the vehicle placard

or tire inflation pressure label, you should

determine the proper tire inflation pressure for

those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has

been equipped with a tire pressure monitor-

ing system that illuminates a low tire pressure

telltale ( ) when one or more of your tires

is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,

when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,

you should stop and check your tires as soon

as possible, and inflate them to the proper

pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire

causes the tire to overheat and can lead to

tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel

efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect

the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that a tire pressure monitoring

system is not a substitute for proper tire

maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-

bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if

under-inflation has not reached the level to

5Where permitted

09 Wheels and tires

}}

311

trigger illumination of the system's low tire

pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when

the system is not operating properly. The

monitoring system's malfunction indicator is

combined with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction, the

telltale will flash for approximately one minute

and then remain continuously illuminated.

This sequence will continue upon subsequent

vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction

exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-

minated, the system may not be able to

detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

System malfunctions may occur for a variety

of reasons, including the installation of

replacement or alternate tires or wheels on

the vehicle that prevent the tire pressure

monitoring system from functioning properly.

Always check the system's malfunction tell-

tale after replacing one or more tires or

wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels

allow the system to continue to function

properly.

NOTE

The system indicates low tire pressure but

does not replace normal tire maintenance.

For information on correct tire pressure,

please refer to the tire inflation pressure

table (see Tire inflation – pressure table

(p. 305)), the tire inflation pressure placard

located on the driver's side B-pillar (the

structural member at the side of the vehi-

cle, at the rear of the driver's door open-

ing) or consult your Volvo retailer.

WARNING

Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to

tire failure, resulting in a loss of control of

the vehicle.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) – general information

TPMS uses sensors mounted in the tire valves

to check inflation pressure levels. When the

vehicle is moving at a speed of approximately

20 mph (30 km/h) or faster, these sensors

transmit inflation pressure data to a receiver

located in the vehicle.

NOTE

USA – FCC ID: KR5S180052050

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing conditions: (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

When low inflation pressure is detected or if a

sensor is not functioning properly, TPMS will

light up the tire pressure warning light ( )

(also referred to as a telltale) in the instrument

panel and will display one of the following

messages: Tire pressure low, Tire needs

air now or Tire press. syst Service

required.

6Available as an accessory

||
09 Wheels and tires
09
312
NOTE
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the
tire pressure warning light will flash for
approximately 1 minute and then remain
illuminated. Tire press. syst Service
required will be displayed.
Related information
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
– recalibrating (p. 313)
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
– messages (p. 314)
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
– activating/deactivating (p. 314)
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
– changing wheels (p. 312)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) – changing wheels
Please keep the following in mind when
changing or replacing the factory installed
TPMS wheels/tires on the vehicle:
•Not all aftermarket wheels are equipped
with TPMS sensors in the valves.
•If the vehicle is equipped with a tempo-
rary spare tire, this tire does not have a
TPMS sensor.
•If wheels without TPMS sensors are
mounted on the vehicle, a text message
will displayed in the instrument panel
each time the vehicle is driven above
20 mph (30 km/h) for 10 minutes or more.
•Once TPMS sensors are properly instal-
led, the warning message should not
reappear. If the message is still displayed,
drive the vehicle for several minutes at a
speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster to
erase the message.
•Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors
be fitted on all wheels used on the vehi-
cle, including winter tires. Volvo does not
recommend moving sensors back and
forth between sets of wheels.
CAUTION
When inflating tires with TPMS sensors,
press the pump's mouthpiece straight
onto the valve to help avoid bending or
otherwise damaging the valve.
CAUTION
•After inflating the tires, always reinstall
the valve cap to help avoid damage to
the valve from dirt, gravel, etc.
•Use plastic valve caps only. Metal
caps could corrode and become diffi-
cult to remove.
NOTE
•If you change to tires with a different
dimension than the factory-installed
ones, the TPMS system must be
reconfigured for these tires. This must
be done by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
•If a tire is changed, or if the TPMS sen-
sor is moved to another wheel, the
sensor's seal, nut, and valve core
should be replaced.
•When installing TPMS sensors, the
vehicle must be parked for at least
15 minutes with the ignition off. If the
vehicle is driven within 15 minutes, a
TPMS error message will be displayed.

09 Wheels and tires
09
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 313
Related information
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
– general information (p. 311)
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
– recalibrating (p. 313)
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
– messages (p. 314)
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
– activating/deactivating (p. 314)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) – recalibrating
In certain cases, it may be necessary to recali-
brate TPMS to conform to Volvo's recom-
mended tire inflation pressures (see the infla-
tion pressure table in Tire inflation – pressure
table (p. 305)), for example, if higher inflation
pressure is necessary when transporting
heavy loads, etc.
Recalibrating TPMS (Canadian models
only)*
This is done in the vehicle's menu system.
To recalibrate:
1. Switch off the engine.
2. Inflate the tires to the desired pressure
and put the ignition in mode I or II (see
Ignition modes (p. 77) for additional infor-
mation).
3. Press the MY CAR key in the center con-
sole control panel and select Settings
Car settings Tire pressure.
4. Press OK/MENU, select Calibrate tire
pressure and press OK/MENU again.
5. Drive the vehicle at a speed above
20 mph (30 km/h) continuously for at
least 10 minutes.
> Calibration is done automatically once
initiated by the driver and the system
does not give any confirmation when
calibration is finished.
The new pressures are used until step 1-5
above are repeated.
Related information
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
– general information (p. 311)
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
– messages (p. 314)
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
– activating/deactivating (p. 314)
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
– changing wheels (p. 312)
•My Car – introduction (p. 74)

09 Wheels and tires

314

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) – activating/deactivating

Activating/deactivating TPMS

(Canadian models only)

1. Switch off the engine.

2. Put the ignition in mode I or II (see Igni-

tion modes (p. 77) for additional informa-

tion).

3. Press the MY CAR key in the center con-

sole control panel and select Settings

Car settings Tire pressure

4. Select Tire monitoring and press OK/

MENU to turn the system on or off.

Related information

•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

– general information (p. 311)

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) – messages

Erasing warning messages

When a low tire pressure warning message

has been displayed and the tire pressure

warning light in the instrument panell ( )

has come on:

1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the

inflation pressure of all four tires.

2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pres-

sure (consult the tire pressure placard

located on the driver's side B-pillar (the

structural member at the side of the vehi-

cle, at the rear of the driver's door open-

ing) or the inflation pressure table, see

Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 305).

3. In certain cases, it may be necessary to

drive the vehicle for several minutes at a

speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster. This

will erase the warning text and the telltale

will go out.

NOTE

•Tire monitoring systems use a tem-

perature compensated pressure value.

This pressure value is dependent on

tire temperature and ambient tempera-

ture, which can differ from the recom-

mended cold tire pressure in the tire

inflation table and on the tire pressure

placard located on the driver's side B-

pillar (the structural member at the

side of the vehicle, at the rear of the

driver's door opening). This means

that it may sometimes be necessary to

inflate them slightly above the recom-

mended cold pressure value

(approx. 3-4 psi or 0.2-0.3 bar) in order

to reset a low tire pressure warning.

•To help avoid incorrect tire inflation

pressure, if possible only inflate the

tires when they are cold. The tires are

considered to be cold when they have

the same temperature as the sur-

rounding (ambient) air. This tempera-

ture is normally reached after the vehi-

cle has been parked for at least

3 hours. After driving a distance of

approximately 1 mile (1.6 km), the tires

are considered to be hot.

09 Wheels and tires
09
315
CAUTION
•After inflating the tires, always reinstall
the valve cap to help avoid damage to
the valve from dirt, gravel, etc.
•Use plastic valve caps only. Metal
caps could corrode and become diffi-
cult to remove.
WARNING
•Incorrect inflation pressure could lead
to tire failure, resulting in a loss of con-
trol of the vehicle.
•Tire monitoring systems cannot indi-
cate sudden tire damage caused by
external factors (e.g., a blowout) in
advance.
Related information
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
– general information (p. 311)
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
– recalibrating (p. 313)
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
– activating/deactivating (p. 314)
•Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
– changing wheels (p. 312)
•Tire pressure monitoring - introduction
(p. 310)
•Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 305)
Tire Monitor - introduction
Tire Monitor uses the rotational speed of the
tires in combination with signal analysis of the
ABS sensor signals to determine if they are
properly inflated.
When a tire is under-inflated, its diameter
(and consequently also its rotational speed)
changes. By comparing the individual tires
with each other it is possible to determine if
one or more tires are under inflated.
When low inflation pressure is detected or if
the system is not functioning properly, Tire
Monitor will light up the tire pressure warning
light ( ) (also referred to as a telltale) in
the instrument panel and will display one of
the following messages in the text window,
for example: Tire pressure low Check rear
right tire7 or Tire press. syst Service
required.
If two or more tires have low pressure or if the
system cannot determine which tire has low
pressure, a general text (Tire pressure low
Check tires) will be displayed.
NOTE
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the
tire pressure warning light will flash for
approximately 1 minute and then remain
illuminated. Tire press. syst Service
required will be displayed.
NOTE
The system indicates low tire pressure but
does not replace normal tire maintenance.
For information on correct tire pressure,
please refer to the tire inflation pressure
table (see Tire inflation – pressure table
(p. 305)), the tire inflation pressure placard
located on the driver's side B-pillar (the
structural member at the side of the vehi-
cle, at the rear of the driver's door open-
ing) or consult your Volvo retailer.
Related information
•Tire pressure monitoring - introduction
(p. 310)
7That last part of this message varies, depending on the tire(s) effected.

09 Wheels and tires

316

Calibrating Tire Monitor

In order for Tire Monitor to work correctly, tire

pressure reference values must be set. This

must be done each time wheels or tire pres-

sures are changed.

Calibration

1. Switch off the engine.

2. Inflate the tires to the desired pressure

(consult tire pressure placard located on

the driver's side B-pillar (the structural

member at the side of the vehicle) and

put the ignition in mode II, see Ignition

modes (p. 77).

3. Press the MY CAR button on the center

console control panel and select Settings

Car settings Tire monitoring.

4. Press OK/MENU, select Calibrate tire

pressure and press OK/MENU again.

5. Drive away.

> The calibration process will be comple-

ted while driving and will be interrupted

if the vehicle is parked and the engine

is switched off. Calibration continues

automatically when driving resumes.

The system will not give any confirma-

tion when calibration is finished

although it will state if calibration fails.

The new reference values will be used until

steps 1-5 stated above are repeated.

NOTE

Always remember to calibrate Tire Monitor

when the wheels have been changed or

the tire pressure has been corrected

according to tire pressure placard or tire

pressure table. If correct reference values

have not been set, the system cannot

issue low tire pressure alerts correctly.

Tire Monitor status information

The current status of the system and the tires

is indicated by color-coded graphics.

This status can be displayed by pressing the

MY CAR button on the center console and

going to Settings Car settings Tire

monitoring.

The following color-coded graphics indicate:

•All green: the system is operational and

all tire pressures are at or above the rec-

ommended levels.

•One yellow wheel: the tire indicated is

under-inflated.

•All wheels yellow: two or more tires are

under-inflated

•All wheels gray: the system is currently

unavailable. It might be necessary to

drive at a speed of at least 20 mph

(30 km/h) for several minutes for the sys-

tem to become operational.

•All wheels gray in combination with the

message Tire press. syst Service

required and the telltale in the instru-

ment panel ( ) is illuminated: the

system is not functioning correctly. Have

it checked by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician.

•All wheels gray in combination with the

message Tire press. syst currently

unavailable and the telltale in the

instrument panel ( ) is illuminated:

09 Wheels and tires

}}

317

the system is temporarily unavailable. It

should become operational again shortly.

Related information

•Tire Monitor – messages (p. 317)

Tire Monitor – messages

When low tire pressure has been detected, a

message will be displayed and the tire pres-

sure warning telltale in the instrument panel

will illuminate.

Erasing warning messages

To erase a low tire pressure message and

turn off the telltale:

1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the

inflation pressure of all four tires (see the

article "Tire inflation – checking pres-

sure").

2. Re-inflate the tires to the correct pressure

(consult the tire pressure placard located

on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural

member at the side of the vehicle, at the

rear of the driver's door opening) or the

inflation pressure table, see Tire inflation –

pressure table (p. 305).

3. Recalibrate Tire Monitor, see Calibrating

Tire Monitor (p. 316).

NOTE

To help avoid incorrect tire inflation pres-

sure, only inflate the tires when they are

cold. The tires are considered to be cold

when they have the same temperature as

the surrounding (ambient) air. This tem-

perature is normally reached after the vehi-

cle has been parked for at least 3 hours.

After driving a distance of approximately

1 mile (1.6 km), the tires are considered to

be hot.

CAUTION

•After inflating the tires, always reinstall

the valve cap to help avoid damage to

the valve from dirt, gravel, etc.

•Use plastic valve caps only. Metal

caps could corrode and become diffi-

cult to remove.

WARNING

•Incorrect inflation pressure could lead

to tire failure, resulting in a loss of con-

trol of the vehicle.

•Tire monitoring systems cannot indi-

cate sudden tire damage caused by

external factors (e.g., a blowout) in

advance.

09 Wheels and tires

318 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Related information

•Tire Monitor – messages (p. 317)

•Tire inflation – checking pressure (p. 302)

•Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 305)

Tire sealing system* – general

information

The vehicle is equipped with a tire sealing

system that enables you to temporarily seal a

hole in the tread surface and re-inflate a flat

tire, or to adjust a tire’s inflation pressure.

Introduction

The tire sealing system consists of an air

compressor, a container for the sealing com-

pound, wiring to connect the system to the

vehicle’s electrical system via one of the 12-

volt sockets, and a hose used to connect the

system to the tire’s inflation valve.

NOTE

The tire sealing system's compressor has

been tested and approved by Volvo.

The 12-volt sockets are located in the front

tunnel console, on the rear side of the center

console in the rear seat and in the cargo

area*.

Accessing the tire sealing system

The tire sealing system is stowed under the

floor of the cargo area. To access it:

1. Lift the floor hatch in the cargo area.

2. Lift out the tire sealing system.

NOTE

•The tire sealing system is only

intended to seal holes on the tire’s

tread area, not the sidewall.

•Tires with large holes or tears cannot

be repaired with the tire sealing sys-

tem.

•After use, stow the tire sealing system

properly to help prevent rattling.

09 Wheels and tires
09
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 319
WARNING
•After using the tire sealing system, the
vehicle should not be driven farther
than approximately 120 miles (200
km).
•Have the tire inspected by a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician
as soon as possible to determine if it
can be permanently repaired or must
be replaced.
•The vehicle should not be driven faster
than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a
tire that has been temporarily repaired
with the tire sealing system.
•After using the tire sealing system,
drive carefully and avoid abrupt steer-
ing maneuvers and sudden stops.
Tire sealing system–temporarily
repairing a flat tire
Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in two
stages:
•Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumping
sealing compound into the tire. The car is
then driven a short distance to distribute
the sealing compound in the tire.
NOTE
Do not remove any foreign objects (nails,
etc.) from the tire before using the sealing
system.
•Stage 2: The tire’s inflation pressure is
checked and adjusted if necessary.
WARNING
•Never leave the tire sealing system
unattended when it is operating.
•Keep the tire sealing system away
from children.
•Be sure the vehicle is parked safely off
the road and away from moving traffic.
•Apply the parking brake.
Related information
•Tire sealing system* – overview (p. 320)
•Tire sealing system* – inflating tires
(p. 323)
•Tire sealing system* – sealing compound
container (p. 324)
•Tire sealing system* – sealing hole
(p. 321)
•Tire sealing system – checking inflation
pressure (p. 323)
•Tunnel console – 12-volt sockets (p. 137)
•12-volt socket in the cargo area* (p. 138)

09 Wheels and tires
09
320 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Tire sealing system* – overview
The vehicle is equipped with a tire sealing
system that enables you to temporarily seal a
hole in the tread surface and re-inflate a flat
tire, or to adjust a tire’s inflation pressure.
Speed limit sticker (on the rear side of the
compressor)
On/Off switch
Electrical wire
Bottle holder (orange cover)
Protective hose cover
Air release knob
Hose
Bottle with sealing compound
Air pressure gauge
WARNING
Please keep the following points in mind
when using the tire sealing system:
•The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in
the illustration) contains 1) rubber
latex, natural and 2) ethanediol. These
substances are harmful if swallowed.
•The contents of this bottle may cause
allergic skin reactions or otherwise be
potentially harmful to the respiratory
tract, the skin, the central nervous sys-
tem, and the eyes.
Precautions:
•Keep out of reach of children.
•Do not ingest the contents.
•Avoid prolonged or repeated contact
with the skin.
•Wash thoroughly after handling.
First aid:
•Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with
soap and water. Get medical attention
if symptoms occur.
•Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for
least 15 minutes, occasionally lifting
the upper and lower eyelids. Get medi-
cal attention if symptoms occur.
•Inhalation: Move the exposed person
to fresh air. If irritation persists, get
medical attention.
•Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting
unless directed to do so by medical
personnel. Get medical attention.
•Disposal: Dispose of this material and
its container to a hazardous or special
waste collection point.
NOTE
Do not break the seal on the bottle. This
occurs automatically when the bottle is
screwed into the holder.
Related information
•Tire sealing system* – general information
(p. 318)
•Tire sealing system* – inflating tires
(p. 323)
•Tire sealing system – checking inflation
pressure (p. 323)
•Tire sealing system* – sealing hole
(p. 321)
•Tire sealing system* – sealing compound
container (p. 324)

09 Wheels and tires

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 321

Tire sealing system* – sealing hole

The tire sealing system can be used to tem-

porarily seal a hole in the tread surface of a

tire.

Stage 1: Sealing the hole

1. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it

to the steering wheel hub where it will be

clearly visible to the driver.

2. Ensure that the on/off switch is in posi-

tion 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be

pressed down).

WARNING

Contact with the sealing compound may

cause skin irritation. If contact occurs,

wash the affected area immediately with

soap and water.

3. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle

holder and unscrew the cap on the bottle

of sealing compound.

NOTE

Do not break the seal on the bottle. This

occurs automatically when the bottle is

screwed into the holder.

4. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder.

WARNING

The bottle is equipped with a catch to

keep it securely in place and help prevent

sealing compound leakage. Once in place,

the bottle cannot be unscrewed. This must

be done by a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician.

5. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s

inflation valve and screw the tire sealing

system’s hose connector onto the valve

as tightly as possible by hand.

6. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest

12-volt socket in the vehicle.

NOTE

Be sure that none of the other 12-volt

sockets is being used while the compres-

sor is in operation.

7. Start the vehicle’s engine.

WARNING

The vehicle´s engine should be running

when the tire sealing system is used to

avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure the

vehicle is parked in a well ventilated place,

or outdoors, before using the system.

8. Start the tire sealing system’s compres-

sor by pressing the on/off switch to posi-

tion I.

09 Wheels and tires

322

WARNING

•Never stand next to the tire being infla-

ted when the compressor is in opera-

tion.

•If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire,

switch off the compressor immediately.

•If there is visible damage to the sidewall

or the rim, the tire cannot be repaired.

The vehicle should not be driven if this

occurs. Contact a towing service or

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance if

applicable.

NOTE

The air pressure gauge will temporarily

show an increase in pressure to approxi-

mately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing

compound is being pumped into the tire.

The pressure should return to a normal

level after approximately 30 seconds.

9. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire to

between 22—44 psi (1.8—3.0 bar).

Switch off the compressor briefly to get a

clear reading from the pressure gauge.

CAUTION

The compressor should not be used for

more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid

overheating.

WARNING

If the pressure remains below 22 psi

(1.8 bar) after approximately seven

minutes, turn off the compressor. In this

case, the hole is too large to be sealed and

the vehicle should not be driven.

10. Switch off the compressor and discon-

nect the electrical wire from the 12-volt

socket.

11. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation

valve and reinstall the valve cap.

CAUTION

•After inflating the tires, always reinstall

the valve cap to help avoid damage to

the valve from dirt, gravel, etc.

•Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps

could corrode and become difficult to

remove.

12. Immediately drive the vehicle for approxi-

mately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum

speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute

the sealing compound in the tire.

CAUTION

If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), the

use of the sealing compound may lead to

incorrect tire pressure readings or in rare

cases, damage to the tire pressure sensor.

Use the tire sealing system to check and

adjust the damaged tire's inflation pres-

sure.

NOTE

•Safely stow the tire sealing system in a

convenient place as it will soon be

used again to check the tire’s inflation

pressure.

•The empty bottle of sealing compound

cannot be removed from the bottle

holder. Consult a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician to have the

bottle removed and properly disposed

of.

WARNING

If heavy vibrations, unsteady steering

behavior, or noises should occur while

driving, reduce speed and park the vehicle

in a safe place. Recheck the tire for

bumps, cracks, or other visible damage,

and recheck its inflation pressure. If the

pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not

continue driving. Have the vehicle towed

to a trained and qualified Volvo service

technician.

09 Wheels and tires

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 323

Tire sealing system – checking

inflation pressure

The tire sealing system can also be used to

check the tires' inflation pressure.

Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure

1. Connect the tire sealing system as

described in stage 1, see Tire sealing

system* – sealing hole (p. 321).

2. Refer to the inflation pressure table in this

chapter for the correct inflation pressure.

If the tire needs to be inflated, start the

tire sealing system’s compressor. If nec-

essary, release air from the tire by turning

the air release knob counterclockwise.

CAUTION

The compressor should not be used for

more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid

overheating.

WARNING

If you interrupt your trip for more than 1

hour, check the inflation pressure in the

damaged tire again before continuing.

Tire sealing system* – inflating tires

The tire sealing system can be used to inflate

the tires.

To do so:

1. Park the car in a safe place.

2. The compressor should be switched off.

Ensure that the on/off switch is in position

0 (the 0 side of the switch should be

pressed down).

3. Take out the electrical wire and hose.

4. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s

inflation valve and screw the hose con-

nector onto the valve as tightly as possi-

ble by hand.

5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest

12-volt socket in the vehicle.

6. Start the vehicle’s engine.

WARNING

•The vehicle’s engine should be running

when the tire sealing system is used to

avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure

the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated

place, or outdoors, before using the

system. The parking brake should be

securely applied and the gear selector

should be in the P (park) position.

•Children should never be left unatten-

ded in the vehicle when the engine is

running.

7. Check the tire’s inflation pressure on the

gauge. Switch off the compressor briefly

to get a clear reading from the pressure

gauge.

8. Refer to the tire inflation table in this

chapter for the correct inflation pressure.

If the tire needs to be inflated, start the

tire sealing system’s compressor (press

the on/off switch to position I). If neces-

sary, release air from the tire by turning

the air release knob counterclockwise.

09 Wheels and tires

324 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

CAUTION

The compressor should not be used for

more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid

overheating.

9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/off

switch to position 0) when the correct

inflation pressure has been reached.

10. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation

valve and reinstall the valve cap.

CAUTION

•After inflating the tires, always reinstall

the valve cap to help avoid damage to

the valve from dirt, gravel, etc.

•Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps

could corrode and become difficult to

remove.

11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the

12-volt socket.

Tire sealing system* – sealing

compound container

The sealing compound container must be

replaced if the tire sealing system has been

used to repair a tire or if the container’s expi-

ration date has passed (see the date on

decal).

Replacing the sealing compound

container

NOTE

•After use, the sealing compound bot-

tle, the hose, and certain other system

components must be replaced. Please

consult your Volvo retailer for replace-

ment parts.

•If the sealing compound bottle’s expi-

ration date has passed, please take it

to a Volvo retailer or a recycling station

that can properly dispose of harmful

substances.

M A I N T E N A N C E A N D S E R V I C I N G

10 Maintenance and servicing

326

Maintenance – introduction

Periodic maintenance will help keep your

vehicle running well.

Introduction

The maintenance services contain several

checks that require special instruments and

tools and therefore must be performed by a

qualified technician. To keep your Volvo in

top condition, specify time-tested and proven

Genuine Volvo Parts and Accessories.

The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S.

The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle

manufacturers to furnish written instructions

to the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper

servicing and function of the components that

control emissions. These services, which are

listed in the "Warranty and Service Records

Information" booklet, are not covered by the

warranty. You will be required to pay for labor

and material used.

Maintenance

Your Volvo passed several major inspections

before it was delivered to you, in accordance

with Volvo specifications. The maintenance

procedures outlined in the Warranty and

Service Records Information booklet, many of

which will positively affect your vehicle's

emissions, should be performed as indicated.

It is recommended that receipts for vehicle

emission maintenance be retained in case

questions arise concerning maintenance.

Inspection and maintenance should also be

performed anytime a malfunction is observed

or suspected.

Applicable warranties – U.S./Canada

In accordance with applicable U.S. and

Canadian regulations, the following list of

warranties is provided.

•New Vehicle Limited Warranty

•Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty

•Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty

•Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint

Systems Limited Warranty

•Emission Design and Defect Warranty

•Emission Performance Warranty

These are the federal warranties; other war-

ranties are provided as required by state/

provincial law. Refer to your separate War-

ranty and Service Records Information book-

let for detailed information concerning each

of the warranties.

Periodic maintenance helps minimize

emissions

NOTE

•Refer to your Warranty and Service

Records Information booklet for a

comprehensive service and mainte-

nance schedule up to 150,000 miles

(240,000 km). This program contains

inspections and services necessary for

the proper function of your vehicle and

includes components that affect vehi-

cle emissions.

•The Warranty and Service Records

Information booklet also contains

detailed information concerning the

warranties that apply to your vehicle.

Related information

•Climate – general information (p. 122)

10 Maintenance and servicing
10
327
Maintenance – owner maintenance
Periodic maintenance requirements and inter-
vals are described in your vehicle's Warranty
and Service Records Information booklet.
The following points can be carried out
between the normally scheduled maintenance
services.
Owner maintenance
Each time the car is refueled:
•Check the engine oil level.
•Clean the windshield, windshield wipers,
headlights, and taillights.
Monthly:
•Check cold tire pressure in all tires.
Inspect the tires for wear.
•Check that engine coolant and other fluid
levels are between the indicated "min"
and "max" markings.
•Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass
cleaner and soft paper towels.
•Wipe driver information displays with a
soft cloth.
•Visually inspect battery terminals for cor-
rosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose
terminal connector, or a battery near the
end of its useful service life. Consult your
Volvo retailer for additional information.
As needed:
Wash the car, including the undercarriage, to
reduce wear that can be caused by a buildup
of dirt, and corrosion that can be caused by
salt residues.
Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents
at the base of the windshield, and from other
places where they may collect.
NOTE
Complete service information for qualified
technicians is available online for purchase
or subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com.
Related information
•Maintenance – opening/closing hood
(p. 331)
•Engine compartment – overview (p. 332)
•Engine compartment – coolant (p. 335)
•Engine compartment – engine oil (p. 333)
•Engine compartment – power steering
fluid (p. 337)
•Engine compartment – washer fluid
(p. 348)
•Cleaning the interior (p. 366)
•Washing the car (p. 364)
•Tire inflation – checking pressure (p. 302)
•Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 295)

10 Maintenance and servicing

328

Maintenance – hoisting

When the vehicle is hoisted, the jack or

garage lift must be positioned in the correct

lifting points.

Hoisting the vehicle

If a garage jack is used to lift the vehicle, it

should be placed:

Front: under either of the two reinforced

areas under the front section of the vehicle,

not under to jack attachment points (the

outermost points shown in the illustration).

Rear: Under the jack attachment points.

Ensure that the jack is positioned so that the

vehicle cannot slide off it. Always use axle

stands or similar structures.

Related information

•Changing a wheel – removing wheel

(p. 296)

10 Maintenance and servicing

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 329

Onboard Diagnostic System

OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized

engine management system. It stores diag-

nostic information about your vehicle's emis-

sion controls. It can light the Check Engine

light (MIL) if it detects an emission control

"fault." A "fault" is a component or system

that is not performing within an expected

range. A fault may be permanent or tempo-

rary. OBD II will store a message about any

fault.

Emission inspection readiness

How do states use OBD II for emission

inspections?

Many states connect a computer directly to a

vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can

then read "faults." In some states, this type of

inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission

test.

How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission

inspection?

Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspec-

tion for any of the following reasons.

•If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your

vehicle may fail inspection.

•If your vehicle's Check Engine light was

lit, but went out without any action on

your part, OBD II will still have a recorded

fault. Your vehicle may pass or fail,

depending on the inspection practices in

your area.

•If you had recent service that required

disconnecting the battery, OBD II diag-

nostic information may be incomplete

and "not ready" for inspection. A vehicle

that is not ready may fail inspection.

How can I prepare for my next OBD II

emission inspection?

•If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – or

was lit but went out without service, have

your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary,

serviced by a qualified Volvo technician.

•If you recently had service for a lit Check

Engine light, or if you had service that

required disconnecting the battery, a

period of driving is necessary to bring the

OBD II system to "ready" for inspection.

Two half-hour trips of mixed stop-and-

go/highway driving are typically needed

to allow OBD II to reach readiness. Your

Volvo retailer can provide you with more

information on planning a trip.

•Maintain your vehicle in accordance with

your vehicle's maintenance schedule.

Booking service and repairs

Connected Service Booking (CSB) makes set-

ting up a time for service, maintenance and/or

repairs directly from the vehicle quick and

convenient.

Prerequisites

•The owner (primary driver) must have a

valid Volvo ID. See Volvo ID (p. 21) for

additional information.

•The vehicle must be connected to the

Internet using a paired Bluetooth® cell

phone. See your Sensus Infotainment

supplement for information on pairing a

cell phone. On models equipped with

Volvo On Call (VOC)*, you can connect to

the Internet using your separate VOC

data plan. Refer to your separate Volvo

On Call manual.

•By default, the retailer where you pur-

chased your vehicle will be your preferred

(primary) retailer/Volvo authorized work-

shop who will perform service and repairs

on your vehicle. To change the preferred

retailer, go to Dealer Locator at

volvocars.com and select a retailer, click

on Service Scheduler and book an

appointment at the new preferred retailer.

•In order to be guided through the on-

screen steps, the menu alternative

Display notifications must be activated.

CSB menu access

Once the prerequisites have been estab-

lished, all CSB-related menus can be

10 Maintenance and servicing

330

accessed in MY CAR by pressing OK/MENU

and then selecting Maintenance & repair.

Booking information and data from the

vehicle

If you request an appointment from your vehi-

cle, with your consent, booking information

and data about your vehicle1 will be transmit-

ted to your preferred retailer.

Using the service

Once the prerequisites have been estab-

lished, all CSB-related menus can be

accessed in MY CAR by pressing OK/MENU

and then selecting Maintenance & repair.

If the time for the next regularly scheduled

service is approaching, if the vehicle requires

certain types of repairs or if a system needs

to be checked, a message will be displayed.

You will then by guided through the steps

required to book service or repairs.

On-screen service messages

On-screen service message

The pop-up service alert menu offers the fol-

lowing alternatives:

•Yes: The vehicle will transmit a booking

request as well as vehicle data directly to

your preferred retailer. In return, you will

receive an email from this retailer with a

link to their booking portal. From a smart-

phone or a computer, you can select a

day and time that suits you and specify

any other service requests that you may

have. When you have submitted your

request, it will be entered into the retail-

er's booking portal and you will receive

immediate confirmation online and via

email. The service reminder light in the

vehicle's instrument panel will also be

turned off remotely by Volvo.

•No: No other messages will be displayed

on the Sensus screen but the Service

Reminder Light on the vehicle's instru-

ment panel will stay on. If you have

answered "No", service can still be

booked manually (see the following sec-

tion).

•Postpone: The pop-up menu will be dis-

played that next time the engine is

started.

Booking service or repairs manually

Access your Volvo On-Line Service Scheduler

portal from a smartphone or a computer to

select a day and time that suits you and

specify any other service requests that you

may have. When you have submitted your

request, it will be entered into the retailer's

booking portal and you will receive immediate

confirmation online and via email.

My Appointments

This displays booking information.

–Select Maintenance & repair My

Appointments.

Transmitting vehicle data

In order for a retailer to access vehicle data,

the information is initially sent to a central

Volvo database (not directly to your retailer)

1This information includes: service requirements, status of various functions, odometer reading and the vehicle's VIN number and software version.

10 Maintenance and servicing

331

where any retailer can access or search for

this information using your vehicle's VIN num-

ber. This number can be found in your war-

ranty booklet or on the dashboard at the

lower left corner of the windshield.

–Select Maintenance & repair Send

vehicle data.

Booking information and vehicle data

When you opt to book service from your vehi-

cle, booking information and vehicle data will

be transmitted. Vehicle data consists of a

number of parameters in the following areas:

•Service requirements

•Function status

•Fluid levels

•Odometer reading (mileage)

•Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

•The vehicle's software version

Related information

•Volvo ID (p. 21)

Maintenance – opening/closing hood

The hood is opened by first releasing the lock

from the passenger compartment and then

pressing the release control.

Opening and closing the hood

Turn the handle located under the left

side of the dash approximately 20-25

degrees clockwise to release the hood

lock.

Lift the hood slightly. Press the release

control (located under the right front edge

of the hood) to the left, and lift the hood.

WARNING

Check that the hood locks properly when

closed.

Related information

•Maintenance – owner maintenance

(p. 327)

•Engine compartment – overview (p. 332)

10 Maintenance and servicing

332

Engine compartment – overview

The overview shows the main inspection

points in the engine compartment.

Coolant expansion tank

Power steering fluid reservoir

Dipstick-engine oil

Filler cap-engine oil

Cover over brake fluid reservoir

Battery

Relay/fuse box

Washer fluid reservoir

Engine compartment - 4-cylinder engines only

Filler cap-engine oil

Coolant expansion tank

Radiator

Brake fluid reservoir

Battery

Relay/fuse box

Washer fluid reservoir

Air cleaner

The appearance of the engine compartment

may vary depending on engine model.

WARNING

The cooling fan (located at the front of the

engine compartment, behind the radiator)

may start or continue to operate (for up to

6 minutes) after the engine has been

switched off.

WARNING

Before performing any operations in the

engine compartment, the ignition should

always be completely switched off (in

mode 0, see Ignition modes (p. 77)) and

there should be no remote keys in the pas-

senger compartment. The gear selector

should be in the P (park) position. If the

engine has been running, wait until it has

cooled before touching any components in

the engine compartment.

The distributor ignition system operates at

very high voltages. Special safety precau-

tions must be followed to prevent injury.

Always turn the ignition off when:

•Replacing distributor ignition compo-

nents e.g. plugs, coil, etc.

•Do not touch any part of the distributor

ignition system while the engine is run-

ning. This may result in unintended

movements and body injury.

10 Maintenance and servicing

}}

333

Related information

•Maintenance – opening/closing hood

(p. 331)

•Maintenance – owner maintenance

(p. 327)

Engine compartment – engine oil

The correct oil must be used for the stated oil

change (service) intervals to apply.

The oil level on 4-cylinder engines is checked

electronically and is checked using a dipstick

on 5- and 6-cylinder engines.

Checking the engine oil (5- and 6-

cylinder engines)

The oil level should be checked at regular

intervals, particularly during the period up to

the first scheduled maintenance service.

•See Oil specifications (p. 381) for oil

specifications.

•Also, refer to the Warranty and Service

Records information booklet for informa-

tion on oil change intervals and oil speci-

fications.

CAUTION

•Not checking the oil level regularly can

result in serious engine damage if the

oil level becomes too low.

•Oil that is lower than the specified

quality can damage the engine.

•Volvo does not recommend the use of

oil additives.

•Always add oil of the same type and

viscosity as already used.

•Never fill oil above the MAX mark. This

could cause an increase in oil con-

sumption.

•Oil changes should be carried out by a

trained and qualified Volvo service

technician.

10 Maintenance and servicing

334

Checking and adding oil

G021734

Location of the filler cap and dipstick

NOTE

Before checking the oil:

•The car should be parked on a level

surface.

•If the engine is warm, wait for at least

10 – 15 minutes after the engine has

been switched off.

G021737

The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX

marks on the dipstick

Checking the oil

1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a

lint-free rag.

2. Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and

check the oil level. The level must be

between the MIN and MAX marks.

3. Add oil if necessary. If the level is close to

the MIN mark, add approximately

0.5 US quarts (0.5 liters) of oil.

4. Recheck the level and add more oil if

necessary until the level is near the MAX

mark.

WARNING

Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into

contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.

Electronic oil level sensor (4-cylinder

engines only)

Oil filler cap

No action is necessary until a message is dis-

played, see the following illustration.

10 Maintenance and servicing

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 335

Left: digital instrument panel*, Right: analog

instrument panel

Message

Oil level

The oil level can be checked when the engine

is not running by scrolling to the oil level sen-

sor using the thumb wheel on the left steering

wheel lever.

CAUTION

•If Oil service required is displayed,

the oil level may be too high. Take the

vehicle to an authorized Volvo work-

shop as soon as possible.

•If the oil level sensor indicates that the

level is too low, using the correct oil,

top up with the amount of oil indicated

as soon as possible, see oil specifica-

tions (p. 381).

WARNING

Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into

contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.

Electronically checking the oil level

The oil level should be checked at regular

intervals, particularly during the period up to

the first scheduled maintenance service.

To check the oil level:

1. Activate ignition mode II, see Ignition

modes (p. 77).

2. Turn the thumb wheel on the left steering

wheel lever until Oil level is displayed.

> The oil level will be displayed.

NOTE

•The system cannot detect changes in

the oil level immediately. The vehicle

must be driven approximately 20 miles

(30 km) or have been parked on level

ground with the engine off for

5 minutes before the oil level reading

will be correct.

•If the necessary conditions are not met

for checking the oil level electronically

(time interval after the engine was

switched off, if the vehicle is parked on

an incline, etc.), No values available

will be displayed. This does not indi-

cate a problem with the oil level sen-

sor.

Engine compartment – coolant

Normally, the coolant does not need to be

changed. If the system must be drained, con-

sult a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-

nician.

Level check and filling

Location of the coolant reservoir

See Fuel tank volume – specification and vol-

ume (p. 384) for information on cooling sys-

tem capacities.

10 Maintenance and servicing

336

CAUTION

•If necessary, top up the cooling sys-

tem with Volvo Genuine Coolant/Anti-

freeze only (a 50/50 mix of water and

antifreeze).

•Different types of antifreeze/coolant

may not be mixed.

•If the cooling system is drained, it

should be flushed with clean water or

premixed anti-freeze before it is refilled

with the correct mixture of water/anti-

freeze.

•The cooling system must always be

kept filled to the correct level, and the

level must be between the MIN and

MAX marks. If it is not kept filled, there

can be high local temperatures in the

engine which could result in damage.

Check coolant regularly!

•Do not top up with water only. This

reduces the rust-protective and anti-

freeze qualities of the coolant and has

a lower boiling point. It can also cause

damage to the cooling system if it

should freeze.

•Do not use chlorinated tap water in the

vehicle's cooling system.

WARNING

•Never remove the expansion tank cap

while the engine is warm. Wait until the

engine cools.

•If it is necessary to top off the coolant

when the engine is warm, unscrew the

expansion tank cap slowly so that the

overpressure dissipates.

Engine compartment – brake fluid

The brake fluid should always be between the

MIN and MAX marks on the inside of the res-

ervoir.

Location of the brake fluid reservoir

10 Maintenance and servicing

}}

337

Checking the level

The fluid reservoir is concealed under the

round cover at the rear of the engine com-

partment. The round cover must be removed

first before the reservoir cap can be

accessed.

Check, without removing the cap, that there

is sufficient fluid in the reservoir.

Fluid type: DOT 4 boiling point >536 °F

(>280 °C).

Replace: The fluid should be replaced

according to the intervals specified in the

Warranty and Service Records Information

booklet.

When driving under extremely hard condi-

tions (mountain driving, etc), it may be neces-

sary to replace the fluid more often. Consult a

trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Always entrust brake fluid changing to a

trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

WARNING

•If the fluid level is below the MIN mark

in the reservoir or if a brake-related

message is shown in the information

display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the car

towed to a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician and have the brake

system inspected.

•Dot 4 should never be mixed with any

other type of brake fluid.

Filling

1. Turn and open the cover.

2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the

fluid. The level must be between the MIN

and MAX marks.

Engine compartment – power steering

fluid

The fluid level must be between the MIN and

MAX marks. For capacities and recom-

mended fluid grade, see Fuel tank volume –

specification and volume (p. 384).

Check the level frequently. It does not nor-

mally require changing.

WARNING

If a problem should occur in the power

steering system or if the vehicle has no

electrical current and must be towed, it is

still possible to steer the vehicle. However,

keep in mind that greater effort will be

required to turn the steering wheel.

10 Maintenance and servicing

338

CAUTION

Keep the area around the power steering

fluid reservoir clean when checking.

Bulbs – introduction

Certain bulbs can be replaced by the vehicle's

owner. However, the bulbs on the following

list should only be replaced by a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician.

All bulb specifications are listed in Bulbs –

specifications (p. 345).

•Active Bending Lights

•Front parking lights

•Front side marker lights

•Cornering lights

•Turn signals in the door mirrors

•Approach lighting in the door mirrors

•Interior lighting (except for the front foot-

well lighting)

•Rear parking lights/side marker lights

•LED bulbs

NOTE

•For information regarding any bulbs

not mentioned in this section, please

contact your Volvo retailer or a trained

and authorized Volvo service techni-

cian.

•Always switch off the ignition before

starting to replace a bulb.

•If an error message remains in the dis-

play after a faulty bulb has been

replaced, contact an authorized Volvo

workshop.

•Condensation may form temporarily on

the inside of the lenses of exterior

lights such as headlights, fog lights, or

taillights. This is normal and the lights

are designed to withstand moisture.

Normally, condensation will dissipate

after the lights have been on for a

short time.

•The optional Active Bending Light

bulbs contain trace amounts of mer-

cury. These bulbs should always be

disposed of by a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician.

10 Maintenance and servicing

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 339

CAUTION

Never touch the glass of bulbs with your

fingers. Grease and oils from your fingers

vaporize in the heat and will leave a

deposit on the reflector, which will damage

it.

WARNING

•The engine should not be running

when changing bulbs.

•If the engine has been running just

prior to replacing bulbs in the head-

light housing, please keep in mind that

components in the engine compart-

ment will be hot.

WARNING

•Active Bending Lights* – due to the

high voltage used by these headlights,

these bulbs should only be replaced

by a trained and qualified Volvo serv-

ice technician.

•Turn off the lights and remove the

remote key from the ignition before

changing any bulbs.

Related information

•Bulbs – headlight housing (p. 339)

•Bulbs – taillight housing (p. 343)

•Bulbs – vanity mirror lighting (p. 345)

•Bulbs – cargo area lighting (p. 344)

•Bulbs – license plate lighting (p. 344)

Bulbs – headlight housing

The entire headlight housing must be lifted

out when replacing all front bulbs.

Removing the headlight housing

Pull out the headlight housing's locking

pins.

Remove the headlight housing by alterna-

tively pulling the front and rear edges until

it can be lifted out.

10 Maintenance and servicing

340

CAUTION

When disconnecting the connector, pull on

the connector itself and not on the wiring.

Unplug the wiring connector by holding

down the clip with your thumb.

Pull the connector out with the other

hand.

5. Lift out the headlight housing and place it

on a soft surface to avoid scratching the

lens.

6. Replace the defective bulb(s).

Reinserting the headlight housing

1. Plug in the connector until it clicks into

place.

2. Reinstall the headlight housing and lock-

ing pins. The short locking pin should be

closest to the grille. Check that they are

correctly inserted.

The headlight housing must be properly

in place and the wiring connector cor-

rectly reconnected before the lighting is

switched on or the remote key is inserted

into the ignition slot.

3. Check that the lights function properly.

Related information

•Bulbs – introduction (p. 338)

•Bulbs – cover (p. 340)

•Bulbs – specifications (p. 345)

Bulbs – cover

The larger cover has to be removed in order

to change the high/low beam headlight bulbs.

Removing the cover to access the bulbs

NOTE

Before starting to replace a bulb, see

Bulbs – introduction (p. 338).

1. Loosen the cover's four retaining screws

(3-4 turns) with a Torx T20 tool (1). The

screws should not be removed com-

pletely.

2. Push the cover to the side.

3. Remove the cover.

Reinstall the cover in the reverse order.

10 Maintenance and servicing
10
}}
341
Related information
•Bulbs – headlight housing (p. 339)
•Bulbs – low beam, Halogen (p. 341)
•Bulbs – high beam, Halogen (p. 341)
•Bulbs – extra high beam (p. 342)
Bulbs – low beam, Halogen
The low beam bulb is concealed by the larger
cover.
1. Remove the headlight housing from the
vehicle (see Bulbs – headlight housing
(p. 339)).
2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see
Bulbs – cover (p. 340)).
3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
5. The guide lug on the new bulb should be
straight up when the bulb is inserted into
the holder and the bulb should snap into
place.
6. Put the cover back into position and rein-
stall the headlight housing.
Related information
•Bulbs – specifications (p. 345)
Bulbs – high beam, Halogen
The high beam bulb is concealed behind the
larger cover.
1. Remove the headlight housing from the
vehicle (see Bulbs – headlight housing
(p. 339)).
2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see
Bulbs – cover (p. 340)).
3. Remove the bulb by turning it counter-
clockwise and pulling it straight out.
4. Remove the connector from the bulb.
5. Press the new bulb into the socket and
turn it clockwise to put it in place. It can
only be secured in one position.
6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight
housing.
7. Put the cover back into position and rein-
stall the headlight housing.

10 Maintenance and servicing

342

Related information

•Bulbs – specifications (p. 345)

Bulbs – extra high beam

The extra high beam bulb is concealed by the

larger cover.

Extra high beam2

1. Remove the headlight housing from the

vehicle (see Bulbs – headlight housing

(p. 339)).

2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see

Bulbs – cover (p. 340)).

3. Remove the bulb by turning it counter-

clockwise and pulling it straight out.

4. Remove the connector from the bulb.

5. Press the new bulb into the socket and

turn it clockwise to put it in place. It can

only be secured in one position.

6. Put the cover back into position and rein-

stall the headlight housing.

Related information

•Bulbs – specifications (p. 345)

2Models with optional Active Bending Lights only.

10 Maintenance and servicing

}}

343

Bulbs – front turn signals

The turn signal bulb is concealed behind the

smaller cover.

1. Remove the headlight housing from the

vehicle (see Bulbs – headlight housing

(p. 339)).

2. Remove the cover by pulling it straight

out.

3. Pull the holder to access the bulb.

4. Press in the bulb and turn it to remove it

from the holder.

5. Press and turn the new bulb into place.

6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight

housing.

7. Put the cover back into position and rein-

stall the headlight housing.

Related information

•Bulbs – specifications (p. 345)

Bulbs – taillight housing

The backup lights, fog lights and turn signals

are replaced from inside the cargo area

Brake light (LED)

Parking lights/side marker light (LED)

Turn signal

Brake light (LED)

Backup light

Rear fog light

10 Maintenance and servicing

344

1. Open the panel.

2. Pull the insulation in front of the bulb

holder straight out.

3. Press down the catch and pull out the

bulb holder.

4. Remove the defective bulb by pressing it

in and turning it counterclockwise.

5. Press a new bulb into place and turn it

clockwise.

6. Hold down the catch and press the bulb

holder back into place.

7. Put the insulation and panel back in

place.

Related information

•Bulbs – introduction (p. 338)

•Bulbs – specifications (p. 345)

Bulbs – license plate lighting

The license plate lighting is located next to

the tailgate handle.

1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.

2. Carefully detach the entire bulb housing

and pull it out.

3. Replace the bulb.

4. Reinsert the entire bulb housing and

tighten the screws.

Related information

•Bulbs – specifications (p. 345)

Bulbs – cargo area lighting

The cargo area light is located in the ceiling

liner.

G031942

1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so

that the bulb housing comes loose.

2. Replace the bulb.

3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press

it back into the bulb housing.

Related information

•Bulbs – specifications (p. 345)

10 Maintenance and servicing

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 345

Bulbs – vanity mirror lighting

The vanity mirror bulbs are located behind the

lens.

Removing the lens

1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the side

of the lens and carefully pry up the lug on

the edge.

2. Carefully detach and lift out the lens.

3. Use needle nose pliers to pull the bulb

straight to the side. Replace the bulb. Do

not exert too much pressure on the bulb

with the pliers to help avoid damaging it.

Reinstalling the lens

1. Put the lens back into position.

2. Press it into place.

Related information

•Bulbs – specifications (p. 345)

Bulbs – specifications

The following bulbs can be replaced by the

vehicles owner. All other bulbs should only be

replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician.

Lighting func-

tion

Wat-

tage

Bulb

Low beam (hal-

ogen)

55 H11 LL

High beam (hal-

ogen)

65 H9

Extra high beam

(models with

Active Bending

Lights*)

55 H7 LL

Front turn sig-

nals

24 PY24W

License plate

lighting

5 C5W LL

Vanity mirror

lighting

1.2 W2x4.6d

type T5

Glove compart-

ment lighting

5 SV8.5

(length

43mm)

Rear turn sig-

nals

21 PY21W LL

Lighting func-

tion

Wat-

tage

Bulb

Rear fog light 21 H21W LL

Backup light 21 H21W LL

Brake light 21 P21W LL

Cargo area

lighting

5 SV8.5

(length

43mm)

Front footwell

lighting

3 W2, 1x9.5d

type T10

NOTE

Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts

department for the most up-to-date bulb

specifications.

Related information

•Bulbs – introduction (p. 338)

10 Maintenance and servicing

346

Wiper blades – service position

The windshield wiper blades must be in the

vertical (service) position for replacement,

washing or to lift them away from the wind-

shield when e.g., removing ice or snow.

Wiper blades in service position

CAUTION

Be sure the wiper blades are not frozen in

position before attempting to move them

to the service position.

To put the windshiield wipers in the service

position:

1. Insert the remote key into the ignition

slot3 and press the START/STOP

ENGINE button briefly to put the ignition

in mode I (see Ignition modes (p. 77) for

detailed information about the ignition

modes).

2. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button

again briefly to switch the ignition off.

3. Within 3 seconds, move the right steering

wheel lever up and hold it for at least

1 second.

> The wipers will then move to the verti-

cal (service) position on the windshield.

The wipers can be returned to the normal

position by pressing the START/STOP

ENGINE button briefly to put the ignition in

mode I (or by starting the engine).

CAUTION

If the wiper arms have been folded out

from the windshield while in the service

position, fold them back against the wind-

shield before returning the wipers to the

normal position to help avoid scratching

the paint on the hood.

Related information

•Engine compartment – washer fluid

(p. 348)

3Not necessary on vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

10 Maintenance and servicing

347

Wiper blades – windshield

The wiper blades should be replaced regularly

for best effect.

The windshield wiper blades must be in the

vertical (service) position for replacement,

washing or to lift them away from the wind-

shield when e.g., removing ice or snow.

Replacing the windshield wiper blades

NOTE

The windshield wiper blades are different

lengths. The blade on the driver’s side is

longer than the one on the passenger side.

With the wipers in the service position,

fold out the wiper arm from the wind-

shield. Press the button on the wiper

blade attachment and pull the wiper

blade straight out, parallel with the wiper

arm.

Slide in the new wiper blade until it clicks

into place.

Check that the blade is securely in place.

4. Press the wipers back against the wind-

shield.

To return the wipers from the service position

to the normal position, fold the wipers back

against the windshield and press the START/

STOP ENGINE button briefly to put the igni-

tion in mode I (or start the engine).

Cleaning

Keeping the windshield and wiper blades

clean helps improve visibility and prolongs

the service life of the wiper blades. Clean the

wiper blades with a stiff-bristle brush and

lukewarm soap solution or car washing deter-

gent.

Related information

•Engine compartment – washer fluid

(p. 348)

•Wiper blades – service position (p. 346)

10 Maintenance and servicing

348

Wiper blades – tailgate

The wiper blades should be replaced regularly

for best effect.

Replacing the tailgate wiper blade

G032770

1. Fold the wiper arm outward.

2. Grasp the inner section of wiper blade (at

the arrow).

3. Pull out the blade to release it from the

wiper arm.

4. Press the new wiper blade into place and

check that it seats securely.

5. Fold the wiper arm back toward the tail-

gate window.

Related information

•Engine compartment – washer fluid

(p. 348)

Engine compartment – washer fluid

Washer fluid helps keep the windshield and

headlights clean. During cold weather, the

reservoir should be filled with windshield

washer solvent containing antifreeze. Use

Volvo Original Washer Fluid or the equivalent

with a recommended pH value between 6 and

Location of the washer fluid reservoir

The windshield and headlight washers share

a common reservoir.

The washer fluid reservoir is located on the

driver's side of the engine compartment. For

capacities, see the printed Owner's Manual.

Specification:Use a washer antifreeze rec-

ommended by Volvo, mixed with water.

Volume:

•6.8 US qts (6.5 liters)

•4.7 US qts (4.5 liters4)

Related information

•Wiper blades – service position (p. 346)

4Models without headlight washers

10 Maintenance and servicing

}}

349

Battery – symbols

There are information and warning symbols

on the battery.

Symbols on the battery

Wear protective goggles.

Keep away from children.

Avoid smoking, open

flames, and/or sparks.

See the owner's manual.

Contains corrosive acid.

Risk of explosion

Recycle properly

NOTE

A used battery should be disposed of in an

environmentally responsible manner. Con-

sult your Volvo retailer or take the battery

to a recycling station.

Related information

•Battery – changing (p. 351)

•Battery – handling (p. 349)

•Battery – maintenance (p. 350)

Battery – handling

The battery's service life is affected by the

number of starts, if it has been discharged,

driving style, driving conditions, weather con-

ditions ,etc.

Handling

•Check that the battery cables are cor-

rectly connected and tightened.

•Never disconnect the battery when the

engine is running (for example, when

replacing the battery).

•If the battery is fully discharged a number

of times, this may shorten its service life.

•The service life of a battery is affected by

factors such as the number of starts, driv-

ing conditions and climate. Extreme cold

may also further decrease the battery’s

starting capacity.

•Because the battery’s starting capacity

decreases with time, it may be necessary

to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven

for an extended period of time or if the

vehicle is usually only driven short dis-

tances.

•Never use a quick charger to charge the

battery. Only traditional types of battery

chargers should be used.

10 Maintenance and servicing

350

CAUTION

The infotainment system's energy-saving

feature may not function correctly or at all,

and/or a message may be displayed if a

battery charger or jumper cables are not

connected properly.

•The negative terminal on the battery

must never be used to connect a

jumper cable or a battery charger.

Only the ground point on the chassis

may be used.

See Jump starting (p. 256) for an illustra-

tion and additional information.

WARNING

•Never expose the battery to open

flame or electric spark.

•Do not smoke near the battery.

•Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do

not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,

skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If

contact occurs, flush the affected area

immediately with water. Obtain medi-

cal help immediately if eyes are affec-

ted.

NOTE

The life of the battery is shortened if it

becomes discharged repeatedly.

Related information

•Battery – changing (p. 351)

•Battery – maintenance (p. 350)

•Battery – symbols (p. 349)

Battery – maintenance

Proper battery maintenance can help prolong

its service life.

Maintenance

•Use a screw driver to open the caps or

cover and a flashlight to inspect the level.

•If necessary, add distilled water. The level

should never be above the indicator.

•The fluid level should be checked if the

battery has been recharged.

•After inspection, be sure the cap over

each battery cell or the cover is securely

in place.

•Check that the battery cables are cor-

rectly connected and properly tightened.

•Never disconnect the battery when the

engine is running, or when the key is in

the ignition. This could damage the vehi-

cle's electrical system.

•The battery should be disconnected from

the vehicle when a battery charger is

used directly on the battery.

•To help keep the battery in good condi-

tion, the vehicle should be driven for at

least 15 minutes a week or connected to

a charger with an automatic charging

function.

•If the battery is fully discharged a number

of times, this may shorten its service life.

Keeping the battery fully charged helps

prolong its service life.

10 Maintenance and servicing

}}

351

•The service life of a battery is affected by

factors such as driving conditions and cli-

mate. Extreme cold may also further

decrease the battery’s starting capacity.

•Because the battery’s starting capacity

decreases with time, it may be necessary

to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven

for an extended period of time or if the

vehicle is usually only driven short dis-

tances.

CAUTION

•Always use distilled or deionized water

(battery water).

•Never fill above the level mark in the

cell.

Related information

•Battery – changing (p. 351)

•Battery – handling (p. 349)

•Battery – symbols (p. 349)

Battery – changing

When changing batteries, be sure to use the

correct battery for your vehicle. Consult a

Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician.

Changing

WARNING

Connect and disconnect the positive and

negative cables in the correct sequence.

10 Maintenance and servicing

352 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Removal

Switch off the ignition, remove the remote key

from the ignition slot and wait at least

5 minutes before disconnecting the battery so

that all information in the vehicle's electrical

system can be stored in the control modules.

Open the clips on the front cover and

remove the cover.

Release the rubber molding so that the

rear cover is free.

Remove the rear cover by pulling it away.

Detach the black negative cable.

Detach the red positive cable

Detach the ventilation hose from the

battery

Loosen the screw holding the battery

clamp.

Move the battery to the side and lift it up.

WARNING

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!

Battery posts, terminals, and related

accessories contain lead and lead com-

pounds, chemicals known to the state of

California to cause cancer and reproduc-

tive harm. Wash hands after handling.

Rally bar R-Design models*

Rally bar and bulkhead hatch

Vehicles with the optional R-Design package

are equipped with a rally bar in the engine

compartment that must be removed before

the battery can be replaced.

1. Remove the hatch in the bulkhead on

both sides of the engine compartment

(pry them up carefully with a plastic knife

or similar object).

2. Remove the screw on each side of the

engine compartment holding the rally bar

in place.

3. Lift out the rally bar.

> The battery can now be removed (see

the instructions in the previous sec-

tion).

•After a new battery has been installed

(see the following section), reinstall the

rally bar in the reverse order.

NOTE

When reinstalling the rally bar, tighten the

screws to 22 ft lbs (30 Nm).

Installation

1. Lower the battery into the battery box.

2. Move the battery inward and to the side

until it reaches the rear edge of the box.

3. Tighten the clamp that secures the bat-

tery.

4. Connect the ventilation hose.

> Be sure that it is correctly connected

to the battery and the vent in the vehi-

cle's body.

5. Connect the red positive cable.

6. Connect the black negative cable.

7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal).

8. Reinstall the molding. (See Removal).

9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it with

the clips. (See Removal).

10 Maintenance and servicing

353

Related information

•Battery – handling (p. 349)

•Battery – symbols (p. 349)

Fuses – introduction

The fuses help protect the vehicle's electrical

components from overloading.

There are relay/fuseboxes located in the

engine compartment, the passenger com-

partment and the cargo area.

If an electrical component fails to function,

this may be due to a blown fuse. The easiest

way to see if a fuse is blown is to remove it.

To do so:

1. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse is diffi-

cult to remove, a special fuse removal

tool is located on the inside of the

engine compartment fusebox cover.

2. From the side, examine the curved metal

wire in the fuse to see if it is intact.

If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse of the

same color and amperage (written on the

fuse).

If fuses burn out repeatedly, have the electri-

cal system inspected by a trained and quali-

fied Volvo service technician.

WARNING

Never use metal objects or fuses with

higher amperage than those stated on the

following pages. Doing so could seriously

damage or overload the vehicle's electrical

system.

Location of the fuseboxes

Engine compartment

Under the glove compartment

Cargo area (under the floor)

Engine compartment cold zone (Start/

Stop only)

10 Maintenance and servicing

354

Fuses – engine compartment

The fuses in the engine compartment protect

e.g., engine and brake functions.

10 Maintenance and servicing

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 355

Engine compartment, upper

Engine compartment, front

Engine compartment, lower

Positions

These fuses are all located in the engine com-

partment box. Fuses in C are located under

A decal on the inside of the cover shows the

positions of the fuses.

•Fuses 1 – 15, 34 and 42 – 44 are relays/

circuit breakers and should only be

removed or replaced by a trained and

qualified Volvo service technician.

•Fuses 16 – 33 and 35 – 41 may be

changed at any time when necessary.

There is a special fuse removal tool on the

underside of the cover.

Pos Function A

Circuit breaker: central

electrical module

under the glove com-

partmentA

Circuit breaker: central

electrical module

under the glove com-

partment

Pos Function A

Circuit breaker: central

electrical module in the

cargo compartmentA

Circuit breaker: central

electrical module

under the glove com-

partmentA

Circuit breaker: central

electrical module

under the glove com-

partmentA

–

Headed windshield*,

driver's side

Windshield wipers 30

–

Climate system

blowerA

Headed windshield*,

passenger's side

ABS pump 40

Pos Function A

ABS valves 20

Headlight washers 20

Active Bending Lights-

headlight leveling*

Central electrical mod-

ule (under the glove

compartment)

ABS 5

Adjustable steering

force*

Engine Control Module

(ECM), transmission,

SRS

Heated washer noz-

zles*

Lighting panel 5

Relay coils 5

10 Maintenance and servicing

356 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Pos Function A

Auxiliary lights* 20

Horn 15

Relay coils, Engine

Control Module (ECM)

Control module - auto-

matic transmission

A/C compressor (not

4-cyl. engines)

Relay-coils A/C, relay

coils in engine com-

partment cold zone for

Start/Stop

Starter motor relayA30

Engine control module

(4-cyl. engines)

Ignition coils (5-/6-cyl.

engines), condenser

(6-cyl. engines)

Engine Control Module

(4-cyl. engines)

Engine Control Module

(5-cyl. & 6-cyl. engines)

Pos Function A

4-cyl. engines: mass

air meter, thermostat,

EVAP valve

5-/6-cyl. engines:

Injection system, mass

air meter (6-cyl.

engines only), engine

control module

A/C compressor (5-/6-

cyl. engines), engine

valves, engine control

module (6-cyl.

engines), solenoids (6-

cyl. non-turbo only),

mass air meter (6-cyl.

only), oil level sensor

(5-cyl. only)

Engine valves/oil

pump/center heated

oxygen sensor (4-cyl.

engines)

Front/rear heated oxy-

gen sensors (4-cyl.

engines), EVAP valve

(5-/6-cyl. engines),

heated oxygen sensors

(5-/6-cyl. engines)

Pos Function A

Oil pump/crankcase

ventilation heater/cool-

ant pump (5-cyl.

engines)

Ignition coils (4-cyl.

engines)

Fuel leakage detection

(5-/6-cyl. engines),

control module for

radiator shutter (5-cyl.

engines)

Fuel leakage detection,

A/C solenoid (4-cyl.

engines)

7.5

Coolant pump (4-cyl.

engines)

Cooling fan 60 (4/5-

cyl.

engines)

80 (6-cyl.

engines)

Power steering 100

AThis position is not used on vehicles with the optional

Start/Stop function, refer to the table "Engine compart-

ment cold zone" in Fuses – engine compartment cold zone

(Start/Stop only) (p. 362).

10 Maintenance and servicing

357

Related information

•Fuses – glove compartment (p. 358)

•Fuses – cargo area/trunk (p. 361)

10 Maintenance and servicing

358 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Fuses – glove compartment

The fuses under the glove compartment pro-

tect components such as the infotainment

system and optional power seat.

Fusebox A: General fuses

Fusebox B: Control module fuses

Fold aside the upholstery covering the fuse-

boxes.

1. Press the cover's lock and fold it up.

2. The fuses are accessible.

Positions: fusebox A

Pos Function A

Circuit breaker for the info-

tainment system and for fuses

16-20

Windshield/tailgate washers 25

Pos Function A

Keyless drive* (door handles) 5

Controls in driver's door 20

Controls in front passenger's

door

Controls in right rear pas-

senger's door

10 Maintenance and servicing

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 359

Pos Function A

Controls in left rear passeng-

er's door

Keyless drive* 7.5

Power driver's seat* 20

Power front passenger's seat* 20

Infotainment system display 5

Infotainment system: ampli-

fier, SiriusXM™ satellite radio*

Sensus control module 15

Bluetooth hands-free system 5

Power moonroof*

Courtesy lighting, climate sys-

tem sensor

12-volt sockets in tunnel con-

sole

Heated rear seat* (passeng-

er's side)

Heated rear seat* (driver's

side)

Pos Function A

Heated front passenger's

seat*

Heated driver's seat* 15

Park assist*

Blind Spot Information Sys-

tem (BLIS)*, park assist cam-

era*

All Wheel Drive* control mod-

ule

Active chassis system* 10

Positions: fusebox B

Pos Function A

Tailgate wiper 15

Front courtesy lighting, driv-

er's door power window con-

trols, power seat(s)*,

7.5

Instrument panel 5

Adaptive cruise control/colli-

sion warning*

Pos Function A

Courtesy lighting, rain sen-

sor*, HomeLInk® Wireless

Control System*

7.5

Steering wheel module 7.5

Cental locking: fuel filler door 10

Electrically heated steering

wheel*

Electrically heated windshield* 15

Tailgate unlock 10

Electrical folding rear seat

outboard head restraints*

Fuel pump 20

Climate system control panel 5

Alarm, On-board diagnostic

system

Satellite radio *, audio system

amplifier

Airbag system, occupant

weight sensor

Collision warning system* 5

10 Maintenance and servicing

360 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Pos Function A

Accelerator pedal sensor,

auto-dim mirror function,

heated rear seats*

7.5

Brake lights 5

Power moonroof* 20

Immobilizer 5

Related information

•Fuses – engine compartment (p. 354)

•Fuses – cargo area/trunk (p. 361)

•Fuses – engine compartment cold zone

(Start/Stop only) (p. 362)

10 Maintenance and servicing

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 361

Fuses – cargo area/trunk

The fuses in the cargo area/trunk protect

components such as trailer connections, the

parking brake, etc.

Positions

Pos Function A

Electric parking brake (left

side)

Electric parking brake (right

side)

Heated rear window 30

Trailer socket 2* 15

Pos Function A

12-volt socket in cargo area 15

Pos Function A

Trailer socket 1* 40

Related information

•Fuses – engine compartment (p. 354)

•Fuses – glove compartment (p. 358)

•Fuses – engine compartment cold zone

(Start/Stop only) (p. 362)

10 Maintenance and servicing

362

Fuses – engine compartment cold

zone (Start/Stop only)7

There are fuses in the engine compartment

cold zone on models with the Start/Stop

function.

Location of Start/Stop fuses

Positions

•Fuses A1, A2 and 1–11 are relays/circuit

breakers and should only be removed or

replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo

service technician.

•Fuse 12 may be changed at any time

when necessary.

Pos Function A

Circuit breaker: central elec-

trical module in the engine

compartment

175

Circuit breaker: fuseboxes

under the glove compart-

ment, central electrical mod-

ule in the cargo area

175

Pos Function A

Circuit breaker: fusebox B

under the glove compartment

(see Fuses – glove compart-

ment (p. 358))

7Option on 4-cyl. engines

10 Maintenance and servicing

363

Pos Function A

Circuit breaker: fusebox A

under the glove compartment

(see Fuses – glove compart-

ment (p. 358))

Circuit breaker: fusebox A

under the glove compartment

(see Fuses – glove compart-

ment (p. 358))

Circuit breaker: central elec-

trical module in the cargo

area

Climate system blower 40

– –

Starter motor relay 30

Internal diode 50

Auxiliary battery 70

Central electrical module:

auxiliary battery reference

voltage, auxiliary battery

charging point

Related information

•Fuses – engine compartment (p. 354)

•Fuses – glove compartment (p. 358)

•Fuses – cargo area/trunk (p. 361)

•Start/Stop – introduction (p. 262)

10 Maintenance and servicing

364

Washing the car

The vehicle should be washed at regular inter-

vals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spots

adhere to the paint and may cause damage.

To help prevent corrosion, it is particularly

important to wash the car frequently in the

wintertime.

The following points should be kept in mind

when washing and cleaning the car:

•Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight.

Doing so may cause detergents and wax

to dry out and become abrasive. To avoid

scratching, use lukewarm water to soften

the dirt before you wash with a soft

sponge, and plenty of sudsy water.

•Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork

as soon as possible. Otherwise the finish

may be permanently damaged.

•A detergent can be used to facilitate the

softening of dirt and oil.

•Dry the car with a clean chamois and

remember to clean the drain holes in the

doors and rocker panels.

•Tar spots can be removed with tar

remover after the car has been washed.

•A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy

water can be used to clean the wiper

blades. Frequent cleaning of the wind-

shield and wiper blades improves visibility

considerably and also helps prolong the

service life of the wiper blades.

•Wash off the dirt from the underside

(wheel housings, fenders, etc).

•In areas of high industrial fallout, more

frequent washing is recommended.

NOTE

When washing the car, remember to

remove dirt from the drain holes in the

doors and sills.

CAUTION

•During high pressure washing, the

spray mouthpiece must never be

closer to the vehicle than 13" (30 cm).

Do not spray into the locks.

•Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can

reduce lighting capacity considerably.

Clean the headlights regularly, for

example when refueling.

Special moonroof cautions:

•Always close the moonroof and sun

shade before washing your vehicle.

•Never use abrasive cleaning agents on

the moonroof.

•Never use wax on the rubber seals

around the moonroof.

Exterior components

Volvo recommends the use of special clean-

ing products, available at your Volvo retailer,

for cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or orna-

mental components such as chromed strips

on the exterior of your vehicle. The instruc-

tions for using these products should be fol-

lowed carefully. Solvents or stain removers

should not be used.

CAUTION

•Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or

rubber components

•Polishing chromed strips can wear

away or damage the surface

•Polishes containing abrasive sub-

stances should not be used

Related information

•Polishing and waxing (p. 365)

•Cleaning the interior (p. 366)

10 Maintenance and servicing

}}

365

Automatic car wash

The vehicle should be washed at regular inter-

vals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spots

adhere to the paint and may cause damage.

To help prevent corrosion, it is particularly

important to wash the car frequently in the

wintertime.

•We do NOT recommend washing your

car in an automatic wash during the first

few months (because the paint will not

have hardened sufficiently).

•An automatic wash is a simple and quick

way to clean your car, but it is worth

remembering that it may not be as thor-

ough as when you yourself go over the

car with sponge and water. Keeping the

underbody clean is most important, espe-

cially in the winter. Some automatic

washers do not have facilities for washing

the underbody.

NOTE

Condensation may form temporarily on the

inside of the lenses of exterior lights such

as headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This

is normal and the lights are designed to

withstand moisture. Normally, condensa-

tion will dissipate after the lights have been

on for a short time.

CAUTION

•Before driving into an automatic car

wash, turn off the optional rain sensor

to avoid damaging the windshield wip-

ers.

•Make sure that side view mirrors, aux-

iliary lamps, etc, are secure, and that

any antenna(s) are retracted or

removed. Otherwise there is risk of the

machine dislodging them.

•Chromed wheels: Clean chrome-

plated wheels using the same deter-

gents used for the body of the vehicle.

Aggressive wheel-cleaning agents can

permanently stain chrome-plated

wheels.

WARNING

•When the vehicle is driven immediately

after being washed, apply the brakes,

including the parking brake, several

times in order to remove any moisture

from the brake linings.

•Engine cleaning agents should not be

used when the engine is warm. This

constitutes a fire risk.

Related information

•Polishing and waxing (p. 365)

•Cleaning the interior (p. 366)

•Washing the car (p. 364)

Polishing and waxing

Normally, polishing is not required during the

first year after delivery, however, waxing may

be beneficial.

•Before applying polish or wax the vehicle

must be washed and dried. Tar spots can

be removed with kerosene or tar remover.

Difficult spots may require a fine rubbing

compound.

•After polishing use liquid or paste wax.

•Several commercially available products

contain both polish and wax.

•Waxing alone does not substitute for pol-

ishing a dull surface.

•A wide range of polymer-based waxes

can be purchased today. These waxes

are easy to use and produce a long-last-

ing, high-gloss finish that protects the

bodywork against oxidation, road dirt and

fading.

•Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct

sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should

not be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C).

10 Maintenance and servicing

366

CAUTION

Volvo does not recommend the use of

long-life or durable paint protection coat-

ings, some of which may claim to prevent

pitting, fading, oxidation, etc. These coat-

ings have not been tested by Volvo for

compatibility with your vehicle's clear coat.

Some of them may cause the clear coat to

soften, crack, or cloud. Damage caused by

application of paint protection coatings

may not be covered under your vehicle's

paint warranty.

Related information

•Washing the car (p. 364)

Cleaning the interior

Only use cleaning agents and car care prod-

ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly

and follow the instructions included with the

car care product.

Cleaning the interior

Upholstery care

Fabric

Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For

more difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream,

shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/

fabric stain remover. Consult your Volvo

retailer.

AlcanteraTM suede-like material

Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with a

soft cloth and mild soap solution.

Leather care

Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured

with a protectant to repel soiling. Over time,

sunlight, grease and dirt can break down the

protection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, and

fading can result.

Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy

leather care kit formulated to clean and beau-

tify your vehicle's leather, and to renew the

protective qualities of its finish. The cleaner

removes dirt and oil buildup. The light cream

protectant restores a barrier against soil and

sunlight.

Volvo also offers a special leather softener

that should be applied after the cleaner and

protectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth,

and reduces friction between leather and

other finishes in the vehicle.

Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and

conditioning your vehicle's leather two to four

times a year. Ask your Volvo retailer about

Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Soft-

ener 943 7429.

Cleaning leather upholstery

1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge

and squeeze it until the cleaner foams.

2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving the

sponge with circular movements.

3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the

sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain,

do not rub.

4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a

towel, and allow the leather to dry com-

pletely.

10 Maintenance and servicing

}}

367

Protecting leather upholstery

1. Put a small amount of protectant cream

on a cloth and apply a thin coating of

cream to the upholstery with light circular

movements.

2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes.

This will help the leather resist staining and

protect against sunlight's harmful UV rays.

CAUTION

•Under no circumstances should gaso-

line, naphtha or similar cleaning agents

be used on the plastic or the leather

since these can cause damage.

•Take extra care when removing stains

such as ink or lipstick since the color-

ing can spread.

•Use solvents sparingly. Too much sol-

vent can damage the seat padding.

•Start from the outside of the stain and

work toward the center.

•Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a

pocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothing

may damage the textile upholstery.

•Clothing that is not colorfast, such as

new jeans or suede garments, may

stain the upholstery.

Cleaning a leather-covered steering

wheel

•Remove soil, dust, etc., with a damp

sponge and a neutral soap solution.

•Leather should be allowed to breath.

Never cover the steering wheel with a

plastic protector.

•Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting

and conditioning the steering wheel with

Volvo's Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and

Leather Softener 943 7429.

If there are stains on the steering wheel:

Type 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat or

blood)

–Use a soft cloth or sponge. Wipe the

wheel with a solution with 5% ammonia.

For blood stains, mix approx. 1 cup (2 dl)

of water and one ounce (25g) of salt and

wipe the stain.

Type 2 (fat, oil, sauces, or chocolate)

1. Same procedure as for type I stains.

2. Finish by rubbing the wheel with absorb-

ent paper or a towel.

Type 3 (dry soil or dust)

1. Remove the soil/dust with a soft brush.

2. Same procedure as for type I stains.

CAUTION

Sharp objects, such as rings, could dam-

age the leather on the steering wheel.

Cleaning the seat belts

Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild

soap solution.

Cleaning floor mats

The floor mats should be vacuumed or

brushed clean regularly, especially during

winter when they should be taken out for dry-

ing. Spots on textile mats can be removed

with a mild detergent. For best protection in

winter, Volvo recommends the use of Volvo

rubber floor mats. Consult your Volvo retailer.

Spots on interior plastic, metal, or wood

surfaces

Cleaning interior plastic components should

be done with a cleaning agent specially

designed for this purpose. Consult your Volvo

retailer.

10 Maintenance and servicing

368

CAUTION

•Do not use cleaning agents with high

alcohol content such as washer fluid

to clean instrument panel glass.

•Never spray cleaning agents or water

directly onto components with electri-

cal buttons or controls. Clean compo-

nents of this type by applying the

cleaning agent/water sparingly to a

cloth and wiping the components so

that no liquid penetrates into these

components.

Related information

•Washing the car (p. 364)

Touching up paintwork

Paint damage requires immediate attention to

avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the fin-

ish regularly, for instance washing the vehicle.

Touch-up if necessary.

Paint repairs require special equipment and

skill. Contact your Volvo retailer for any

extensive damage.

Minor scratches can be repaired by using

Volvo touch-up paint.

Color code

Sample color code: US models

Sample color code: Canadian models

Make sure you have the right color. See Label

information (p. 371) for the location of this

label (label number 4 in the illustration).

Minor stone chips and scratches

Material:

•Primer – can

•Paint – touch-up pen

•Brush

•Masking tape

If the stone chip has not gone down to the

bare metal and an undamaged color coat

remains, you can add paint immediately after

removing dirt.

NOTE

When touching up the vehicle, it should be

clean and dry. The surface temperature

should be above 60 °F (15 °C).

10 Maintenance and servicing

369

Repairing stone chips

G021832

1. Place a strip of masking tape over the

damaged surface. Pull the tape off so that

any loose flakes of paint adhere to it.

2. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it

with a small brush.

3. When the primer surface is dry, the paint

can be applied using a brush. Mix the

paint thoroughly; apply several thin paint

coats and let dry after each application.

4. If there is a longer scratch, you may want

to protect surrounding paint by masking it

off

5. After a few days, polish the touched-up

areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount

of polish.

Related information

•Label information (p. 371)

S P E C I F I C A T I O N S

11 Specifications

}}

371

Label information

The labels in your vehicle provide information

such as the chassis number, paint code, tire

inflation pressure, etc.

11 Specifications

372

Location of labels

11 Specifications

373

List of labels

Vehicle Emission Control Information.

Your Volvo is designed to meet all appli-

cable emission standards, as evidenced

by the certification label on the underside

of the hood. For further information regar-

ding these regulations, please consult

your Volvo retailer.

Engine oil. This label contains the recom-

mended engine oil specifications.

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

The VIN plate is located on the top left

surface of the dashboard. The Vehicle

Identification Number (VIN) should always

be quoted in all correspondence concern-

ing your vehicle with the retailer and when

ordering parts.

Tire inflation pressures. This label indi-

cates the correct inflation pressures for

the tires that were on the vehicle when it

left the factory.

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand-

ards (FMVSS) specifications (USA) and

Ministry of Transport (CMVSS) stand-

ards (Canada). Your Volvo is designed to

meet all applicable safety standards, as

evidenced by the certification label on the

driver's side B-pillar (the structural mem-

ber at the side of the vehicle, at the rear

of the driver's door opening). This label

also includes codes for paint color, etc.

For further information regarding these

regulations, please consult your Volvo

retailer. U.S. models have the upper

decal; Canadian models have the lower

one.

Related information

•Weights (p. 378)

•Engine specifications (p. 380)

11 Specifications

374

Dimensions

This section lists your vehicle's most impor-

tant dimensions.

11 Specifications

}}

375

11 Specifications

376

Dimensions–V60

Posi-

tion

Dimension in. (mm)

A Ground clear-

ance (curb

weight + 2 peo-

ple)A4.9 (124)

B Wheelbase 109.3 (2776)

C Length 182.5 (4635)

D Load length,

floor, seatback

down 68.9 (1749)

Posi-

tion

Dimension in. (mm)

E Load length,

floor 38.5 (978)

F Height 58.4 (1484)

G Load height 25.9 (658)

H Track, front 62.5 (1588)B/

62.1 (1578)C

I Track, rear 62.4 (1585)B/

62.0 (1575)C

Posi-

tion

Dimension in. (mm)

J Load width,

floor 42.6 (1082)

K Width 73.4 (1865)

11 Specifications

377

Posi-

tion

Dimension in. (mm)

L Width incl. door

mirrors (folded

out) 82.6 (2097)

M Width incl. door

mirrors (folded

in) 74.8 (1899)

AVaries slightly depending on tire size, optional sport chas-

sis, etc.

Bwith 16" wheels

Cwith 17" wheels

11 Specifications

378

Weights

The following table lists important weight data

for your vehicle.

Category USA Canada

Gross vehicle weight

4-cyl. FWDA

5-cyl. AWDB

6-cyl. AWD

4740 lbs

4920 lbs

5100 lbs

2150 kg

2230 kg

2310 kg

Capacity weight All models: 950 lbs 430 kg

Permissible axle weights, front

4-cyl. FWD

5-cyl. AWD

6-cyl. AWD

2580 lbs

2650 lbs

2760 lbs

1170 kg

1200 kg

1250 kg

Permissible axle weights, rear

4-cyl. FWD

5-cyl. AWD

6-cyl. AWD

2300 lbs

2410 lbs

1040 kg

1090 kg

Curb weight 3620 - 3960 lbs 1640 - 1800 kg

Max. roof load 165 lbs 75 kg

11 Specifications

379

Category USA Canada

Max. trailer weights Without brakes: 1650 lbs

With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 2,000 lbs

With brakes, 2” ball: 3,300 lbs

Without brakes: 750 kg

With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 900 kg

With brakes, 2” ball: 1500 kg

Max. tongue weight 165 lbs 75 kg

AFront Wheel Drive

BAll Wheel Drive

Related information

•Loading specifications (p. 306)

•Loading specifications – load limit (p. 306)

11 Specifications

380

Engine specifications

The following table provides technical data for

the respective engines. Engine specifications

for Special Edition vehicles may vary.

Some of the engines listed here may not

be available in all markets.

Engine specifications

Specification/Model 5-cyl. 3.0 T6 2.0 4-cyl. T9 2.0 4-cyl. T11

Engine designation B5254T12 B6304T4 B4204T9 B4204T11

Output (kW/rps) 187/90 224/93 225/95 179/93

Output (hp/rpm) 250/5400 rpm 300/5600 302/5700 240/5600

Torque (Nm/rps) 360/30-70 440/35–70 400/35–75 350/25-75

Torque (ft. lbs./rpm) 266/1800-4200 325/2100– 4200 295/2100–4500 258/1500–4500

No. of cylinders 5 6 4 4

Bore (in/mm) 3.27/83 3.23/82 3.27/82 3.23/82

Stroke (in/mm) 3.63/92.3 3.67/93.2 3.63/93.2 3.67/93.2

Displacement 2.497 liters / (152.4 cu. in.) 2.95 liters (175 cu. in.) 1.97 liters (120.2 cu. in.) 1.97 liters (120.2 cu. in.)

Compression ratio 9.5:1 9.3:1 10.3:1 10.8:1

Related information

•Coolant – specification and volume

(p. 383)

•Oil specifications (p. 381)

•Oil volume (p. 382)

11 Specifications

381

Oil specifications

Full synthetic engine oil meeting the minimum

ACEA A5/B5 must be used. Lower quality oils

may not offer the same fuel economy, engine

performance, or engine protection.

Volvo recommends:

Refer to the warranty and Service Records

information booklet for information on oil

change intervals and oil type requirements.

NOTE

This vehicle comes from the factory with

synthetic oil.

Oil additives must not be used.

Oil viscosity

Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine life

under normal use. SAE 5W-30 will provide

good fuel economy and engine protection.

See the viscosity chart.

Viscosity chart

Extreme engine operation

SAE 0W-30 oil meeting ACEA A5/B5 require-

ments is recommended for extreme driving

conditions.

CAUTION

4-cylinder engines only: Volvo oil VCC

RBS0-2AE/SAE 0W20 is recommended for

extreme driving conditions.

This oil must never be used in 5- or 6-cyl-

inder engines.

Related information

•Oil volume (p. 382)

•Engine compartment – engine oil (p. 333)

11 Specifications

382

Oil volume

The following table provides technical data for

the respective engines. Some of these

engines may not be available in all markets.

Engine specifications for Special Edition vehi-

cles may vary.

Engine model Volume (incl. filter)

3.0 T6 (6 cyl.) B6304T4 7.18 US qts (6.8 liters)

T12 (5 cyl.) B5254T12 5.8 US qts (5.5 liters)

All 4-cyl. engines 5.7 US qts (5.4 liters)

Related information

•Engine compartment – engine oil (p. 333)

•Oil specifications (p. 381)

11 Specifications

383

Coolant – specification and volume

The table lists coolant volumes and specifica-

tions.

System Volume Specifica-

tion

3.0 T6/T5 9.4 US qts.

(8.9 liters)

Coolant with

corrosion

inhibitor mixed

with water

(50/50 mix),

see packag-

ing.

All 4-cyl.

engines

8.8 US qts.

(8.3 liters)

Related information

•Engine compartment – coolant (p. 335)

Transmission oil – specification and

volumes

The table lists transmission oil1 volumes and

specifications.

Auto-

matic

trans-

mission

Volume Specifi-

cation

TF-80SC 7.4 US qts

(7 liters)

Transmis-

sion fluid

AW1

TG-81SC 7 US qts ( 6.6

liters)

TF-71SC 7.1 US qts

(6.8 liters)

Related information

•Label information (p. 371)

Brake fluid – specification and volume

Brake fluid transfers braking force when the

brake pedal is depressed to the master cylin-

der and to the slave cylinders on each wheel.

Specification: DOT 4 boiling point >536 °F

(>280 °C)

Volume: 0.63 US qts (0.6 liters)

Related information

•Engine compartment – brake fluid (p. 336)

1Under normal driving conditions the transmission oil does not need changing during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions.

11 Specifications

384

Power steering – specification

This fluid is used to help reduce and regulate

steering force.

Specification:Power steering fluid recom-

mended by Volvo.

Related information

•Engine compartment – power steering

fluid (p. 337)

Fuel tank volume – specification and

volume

The table lists the fuel tank volume for your

vehicle.

Volume Specification

17.8 US gallons (67.5 lit-

ers)

–

Related information

•Refueling – opening/closing fuel filler door

(p. 283)

•Refueling – opening/closing fuel cap

(p. 284)

•Refueling – octane rating (p. 282)

•Engine specifications (p. 380)

Air conditioning – specification and

volume

The air conditioning system in your vehicle

contains the following:

Refrigerant: R134a (HFC134a)

Volume: 1.7 lbs (770 g)

Compressor oil: PAG

11 Specifications

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 385

Battery specifications

If the battery is replaced, replace it with a bat-

tery of the same cold start capacity as the

original (see the decal on the battery).

General information

WARNING

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!

Battery posts, terminals, and related

accessories contain lead and lead com-

pounds, chemicals known to the state of

California to cause cancer and reproduc-

tive harm. Wash hands after handling.

12 volt system with a voltage-regulated alter-

nator. Single pole system in which the chas-

sis and engine block are used as conductors.

The negative terminal is connected to the

chassis.

Motor Voltage (V) Cold start capacity

CCA (Cold Cranking Amperes) (A)

Engines with Start/Stop* 12 800A

All other engines 12 520–800

AAGM (Absorbed Glass Mat) batteries have to be used on models with Start/Stop

11 Specifications

386

Symbols – general information

The following tables list the most common

warning and indicator lights and symbols and

a reference to where more detailed informa-

tion can be found.

Introduction

The symbols in the vehicle's various displays

are divided into three main categories:

•Warning symbols

•Indicator symbols

•Information symbols

The following tables list the most common

symbols, their meaning and the pages in this

manual that provide more detailed informa-

tion.

NOTE

Not all of the symbols shown in the related

articles are available in all models or on all

markets. Local variations may occur.

Warning symbol

: The red warning symbol illuminates to

indicate a problem related to safety and/or

drivability. A message will also appear in the

main instruments panel's display.

Information symbol

: The information symbol illuminates and

a text message is displayed to provide the

driver with necessary information about one

of the vehicle's systems.

Related information

•Information displays – indicator symbols

(p. 70)

•Information displays – warning symbols

(p. 72)

•Information display – messages (p. 112)

Warning symbols

The following tables list the most common

warning and indicator lights and symbols and

a reference to where more detailed informa-

tion can be found.

: The red warning symbol illuminates to

indicate a problem related to safety and/or

drivability. A message will also appear in the

main instruments panel's display.

: The information symbol illuminates and

a text message is displayed to provide the

driver with necessary information about one

of the vehicle's systems.

11 Specifications
11
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 387
Symbols in the main instrument panel
Warning symbols in the instrument
panel
Symbol Description See
Low oil pressure (p. 72)
Parking brakeA(p. 72)
SRS airbags (p. 72)
Seat belt reminder (p. 72)
Generator not charg-
ing
(p. 72)
Fault in the brake sys-
tem
(p. 72)
Warning symbol (p. 72)
AThe symbol is Park only on models with the optional digital
instrument panel.
Related information
•Information displays – indicator symbols
(p. 70)
•Information displays – warning symbols
(p. 72)
•Information display – messages (p. 112)
Indicator symbols
The following tables list the most common
warning and indicator lights and symbols and
a reference to where more detailed informa-
tion can be found.
: The red warning symbol illuminates to
indicate a problem related to safety and/or
drivability. A message will also appear in the
main instruments panel's display.
: The information symbol illuminates and
a text message is displayed to provide the
driver with necessary information about one
of the vehicle's systems.
Indicator symbols in the instrument
panel
Symbol Description See
Fault in the Active
Bending Light
(ABL)*system
(p. 70)
Malfunction indicator
light
(p. 70)
Anti-lock brake sys-
tem (ABS)
(p. 70)
Rear fog lights on (p. 70)
Symbol Description See
Stability system, Hill
Descent Control,
Trailer Stability
Assist*
(p. 70)
Tire pressure moni-
toring sensor (TPMS)
(p. 70)
Low fuel level (p. 70)
Information symbol,
see text in informa-
tion display
(p. 70)
High beam indicator (p. 70)
Left turn signal indi-
cator
(p. 70)
Right turn signal indi-
cator
(p. 70)
Stability system ,
Sport mode
(p. 170)
Related information
•Information displays – indicator symbols
(p. 70)
•Information displays – warning symbols
(p. 72)
•Information display – messages (p. 112)

11 Specifications
11
388 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Information symbols
The following tables list the most common
warning and indicator lights and symbols and
a reference to where more detailed informa-
tion can be found.
: The red warning symbol illuminates to
indicate a problem related to safety and/or
drivability. A message will also appear in the
main instruments panel's display.
: The information symbol illuminates and
a text message is displayed to provide the
driver with necessary information about one
of the vehicle's systems.
Information symbols in the instrument
panel
Symbol Description See
Adaptive Cruise
Control *
(p. 179)
Adaptive Cruise
Control *
(p. 179)
Adaptive Cruise
Control *
(p. 179)
Adaptive Cruise
Control * (Distance
alert)
(p. 179)
Radar sensor* (p. 188)
Symbol Description See
Camera sensor,
laser sensor
(p. 210)
(p. 203)
Collision Warning
with Full Auto-
brake and Pedes-
trian Detection*
(p. 215)
Active Bending
Lights (ABL)*
(p. 90)
Driver Alert Sys-
tem*
(p. 217)
Driver Alert Sys-
tem*
(p. 217)
Parking brake (p. 274)
Rain sensor* (p. 97)
Active High Beams
(AHB)*
(p. 88)
Windshield sensor* (p. 88)
Symbol Description See
Driver Alert Sys-
tem* (Lane
Departure Warning/
Lane Keeping Aid)
(p. 222)
Driver Alert Sys-
tem* (Lane
Departure Warning/
Lane Keeping Aid)
(p. 222)
Driver Alert Sys-
tem* (Lane
Departure Warning/
Lane Keeping Aid)
(p. 222)
Fuel tank on pas-
senger's side of the
vehicle
(p. 283)
Related information
•Information displays – indicator symbols
(p. 70)
•Information displays – warning symbols
(p. 72)
•Information display – messages (p. 112)

11 Specifications
11
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 389
Information symbols – ceiling console
The following tables list the most common
warning and indicator lights and symbols and
a reference to where more detailed informa-
tion can be found.
: The red warning symbol illuminates to
indicate a problem related to safety and/or
drivability. A message will also appear in the
main instruments panel's display.
: The information symbol illuminates and
a text message is displayed to provide the
driver with necessary information about one
of the vehicle's systems.
Symbol Description See
Seat belt reminder (p. 30)
Occupant Weight Sen-
sor
(p. 36)
Related information
•Information displays – indicator symbols
(p. 70)
•Information displays – warning symbols
(p. 72)
•Information display – messages (p. 112)
Information symbols – center console
The following tables list the most common
warning and indicator lights and symbols and
a reference to where more detailed informa-
tion can be found.
: The red warning symbol illuminates to
indicate a problem related to safety and/or
drivability. A message will also appear in the
main instruments panel's display.
: The information symbol illuminates and
a text message is displayed to provide the
driver with necessary information about one
of the vehicle's systems.
Symbol Description See
Audio files Sensus Info-
tainment sup-
plement
CD folder Sensus Info-
tainment sup-
plement
Video files Sensus Info-
tainment sup-
plement
Bluetooth-
connected cell
phone
Sensus Info-
tainment sup-
plement
Symbol Description See
BluetoothTM
hands-free
Sensus Info-
tainment sup-
plement
HD radio Sensus Info-
tainment sup-
plement
Park Assist* (p. 232)
Related information
•Information displays – indicator symbols
(p. 70)
•Information displays – warning symbols
(p. 72)
•Information display – messages (p. 112)

12 Index
12
390
A
ABS (anti-lock brake system).................. 273
Accessory installation warning.................. 23
Active chassis system............................. 169
Active high beams..................................... 88
Active yaw control........................... 169, 170
Adaptive brake lights............................... 273
Adaptive cruise control.................... 179, 180
Airbags
disconnecting the front passenger’s
side....................................................... 36
front...................................................... 33
inflatable curtain................................... 41
side impact........................................... 39
Air conditioning................................ 128, 129
Air distribution.................................. 124, 130
Air distribution table................................. 132
Air vents................................................... 124
Alarm........................................ 164, 165, 166
All Wheel Drive......................................... 269
Ambient temperature sensor..................... 75
Anti-freeze....................................... 280, 335
Anti-lock brake system
warning light......................................... 71
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)................. 273
Approach lighting.............................. 96, 149
Auto-dim rearview mirror......................... 102
Automatic locking retractor....................... 47
Automatic transmission
Eco (driving function).......................... 267
Geartronic........................................... 259
general description..................... 257, 259
oil........................................................ 383
shiftlock override................................ 261
Axle weight.............................................. 306
B
Battery
maintenance............................... 350, 351
remote key, replacing......................... 154
replacing............................................. 351
specifications...................................... 385
start/stop............................................ 385
warning symbols................................. 349
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)..... 245
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)..................... 247
Booster cushion, integrated.......... 57, 59, 60
Booster cushions....................................... 54
Brake lights.............................................. 273
Brake system
ABS..................................................... 273
Brake pad inspection.......................... 271
checking fluid level............................. 336
emergency brake assistance.............. 274
fluid..................................................... 383
general information............................. 271
Hill Descent Control.................... 269, 270
Bulbs
cargo area lighting.............................. 344
headlights... 338, 339, 340, 341, 342, 343
introduction......................................... 338
license plate lights.............................. 344
specifications...................................... 345
C
Camera, Park Assist................................ 241
Capacity weight....................................... 306
Cargo area
changing bulbs................................... 344
steel grid............................................. 143
Cargo area cover..................................... 143
Cargo area net......................................... 141
Cargo net................................................. 141
Catalytic converter................................... 285

12 Index
12
391
Central locking system, introduction 146,
147, 150, 153
Chains...................................................... 309
Check Engine warning light....................... 71
Child restraints
recalls and registration......................... 47
Child restraint systems.............................. 47
booster cushions.................................. 54
convertible seats.................................. 51
infant seats........................................... 49
ISOFIX/LATCH anchors........................ 55
top tether anchors................................ 56
Child safety................................................ 46
booster cushions.................................. 54
child restraint systems.......................... 47
convertible seats.................................. 51
infant seats........................................... 49
Child safety locks...................................... 61
City safety........................................ 197, 198
Climate system........................................ 129
air distribution..................... 124, 130, 132
air vents.............................................. 124
Interior Air Quality System.................. 123
introduction......................................... 122
passenger compartment filter............ 123
refrigerant........................................... 122
Clock, setting............................................. 76
Cold weather driving................................ 280
Collision warning system.. 204, 206, 209,
210, 212, 213
Compass in rearview mirror..................... 103
Connected service booking..................... 329
Conserving electrical current................... 279
Convertible seats....................................... 51
Coolant............................................ 335, 383
Cooling system, general information....... 279
Corner traction control............................. 170
Courtesy lighting........................................ 94
Crash event data....................................... 18
Crash mode......................................... 44, 45
Cruise control.................................. 176, 178
adaptive.............................................. 179
Curb weight............................................. 306
Current, conserving................................. 279
Cyclist detection.............................. 208, 212
D
Daytime running lights............................... 87
Defroster.................................................. 129
Detachable key blade...................... 151, 152
Disconnecting the front passenger’s air-
bag............................................................. 36
Distance Alert.......................................... 193
Dome lighting............................................. 94
Door mirrors..................................... 100, 101
Driver alert....................... 217, 218, 219, 220
Lane Departure Warning..... 222, 223,
224,  225
Lane Keeping Aid....... 227, 228, 230, 231
Driver distraction warning.......................... 23
Driving economically................................ 285
Driving in cold weather............................ 280
Driving through water.............................. 278
E
ECC................................................. 127, 128
Eco (driving function)............................... 267
Eco coast................................................. 267
Eco guide................................................... 69
Economical driving.................................. 285
Electrically heated steering wheel............. 86
Electrical sockets..................................... 137
Electric parking brake...... 274, 275, 276, 277
Electronic Climate Control............... 126, 128
air distribution table............................ 132
Interior Air Quality System.................. 123

12 Index
12
392
Electronic oil level sensor........................ 334
Electronic stability control....................... 169
Emergency locking retractor...................... 47
Emergency starting.................................. 256
Emergency towing................... 289, 290, 291
Emission inspection readiness................ 329
Engine
overheating........................................... 73
specifications...................................... 380
Start/Stop........... 262, 263, 264, 265, 266
starting................................................ 252
switching off............................... 254, 255
Engine compartment overview................ 332
Engine Drag Control (EDC)...................... 170
Engine oil................................................. 381
checking............................................. 333
low pressure warning light.................... 72
volumes.............................................. 382
Engine remote start (ERS)........................ 254
Environment............................................... 22
F
Federal Clean Air Act............................... 326
Flat tires
repairing with tire sealing system....... 318
Floor mats
cleaning.............................................. 367
placing correctly................................. 252
Fluid specifications.......................... 383, 384
Fog lights................................................... 71
rear........................................................ 92
Four C (active chassis system)................ 169
Front airbags.............................................. 33
disconnecting passenger’s side airbag 36
Front park assist.............................. 232, 240
Front seats................................................. 78
heated................................................. 127
Fuel filler cap........................................... 284
Fuel filler door, opening................... 283, 284
Fuel level warning light.............................. 71
Fuel requirements............................ 281, 282
Fuel tank volume..................................... 384
Fuses....................................... 353, 354, 361
G
Garage door opener
HomeLink® Wireless Control
System........................................ 106, 107
Gasoline requirements............................. 282
Gas tank volume...................................... 384
Gauges...................................................... 66
Geartronic................................................ 259
Geartronic automatic transmission.......... 259
Generator warning light............................. 73
Glossary of tire terminology..................... 307
Grocery bag holder.................................. 141
Gross vehicle weight............................... 306
H
Hazard warning flashers............................ 93
Headlights
Active Bending Lights........................... 90
active high beams................................. 88
changing bulbs... 339, 340, 341, 342, 343
daytime running lights.......................... 87
high/low beams.................................... 88
high beam flash.................................... 88
tunnel detection.................................... 90
Headlight washers..................................... 97
Head restraints, rear seat.................... 82, 83
Heated front seats................................... 127
Heated oxygen sensors........................... 285
Heated rear seats.................................... 127
Heated steering wheel............................... 86
Heated windshield........................... 102, 129

12 Index
12
393
High beams................................................ 88
active.................................................... 88
Hill Descent Control......................... 269, 270
Hill Start Assist (HSA).............................. 257
Hoisting the vehicle................................. 328
HomeLink® Wireless Control
System............................................. 106, 107
Home safe lighting..................................... 95
Hood, opening/closing............................ 331
Horn........................................................... 86
I
ID, Volvo.................................................... 21
Ignition modes..................................... 76, 77
Immobilizer.............................................. 148
Important information.......................... 13, 14
Indicator lights............................... 66, 68, 72
Infant seats................................................ 49
Inflatable Curtain........................................ 41
Inflation pressure............................. 301, 302
Inflation pressure table............................ 305
Information and warning symbols, table
of.............................................................. 386
Information lights........................... 66, 68, 72
Inspection readiness................................ 329
Instrument lighting..................................... 91
"theater" lighting................................... 91
Instrument overview............................ 63, 66
Instrument panel........................ 66, 111, 112
Integrated two-stage booster
cushion.......................................... 57, 59, 60
Interior Air Quality System....................... 123
Interior lighting........................................... 94
Internet connection
booking service.................................. 329
ISOFIX/LATCH anchors............................. 55
J
Jack
attaching............................................. 296
location of........................................... 296
Jump starting........................................... 256
K
Key blade. 146, 147, 150, 151, 152, 153, 156
private locking.................................... 152
Keyless drive............................................ 155
general description............. 156, 157, 158
starting the vehicle............................. 252
Keyless locking/unlocking....................... 155
L
Labels
list of................................................... 373
location of........................................... 372
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) 222, 223,
224, 225
Lane Keeping Aid............ 227, 228, 230, 231
LATCH anchors......................................... 55
Leather care............................................. 366
Lighting panel............................................ 87
Loading the vehicle.................. 139, 140, 306
roof loads............................................ 139
Locking.................................... 159, 160, 162
tailgate................................................ 162
Locking the vehicle.................................. 149
Locks, child safety..................................... 61

12 Index
12
394
Low beams................................................ 88
Low oil pressure warning light................... 72
M
Main instrument panel..................... 111, 112
Maintenance............................................ 326
hoisting the vehicle............................. 328
performed by the owner..................... 327
Malfunction indicator light......................... 71
Messages in the instrument panel... 111, 112
Mirrors
defroster............................................. 102
power door................................. 100, 101
rearview, auto-dim function................ 102
retractable................................... 100, 101
vanity.................................................. 138
Moonroof......................................... 104, 105
Motor oil
checking............................................. 333
volumes.............................................. 382
N
Net in cargo area..................................... 141
O
Occupant safety........................................ 26
Occupant weight sensor............................ 36
Octane recommendations....................... 282
Odometer, trip........................................... 76
Oil
checking............................................. 333
volumes.............................................. 382
Oil level sensor........................................ 334
Oil quality................................................. 381
OK button........................................ 111, 112
On Call Roadside Assistance.................... 24
Outside temperature sensor...................... 75
Overhead courtesy lighting........................ 94
Overheating, engine................................... 73
Ownership, changing................................. 18
Oxygen sensors, heated.......................... 285
P
Paint, touching up.................................... 368
Park assist....................................... 232, 240
Park Assist Camera................................. 241
Park Assist Pilot....................................... 236
Parking brake
electric, applying/releasing. 274, 275,
276,  277
warning light......................................... 72
Parking lights............................................. 92
Pedestrian detection........................ 209, 212
Polishing.................................................. 365
Power front seat
memory function................................... 79
Power meter.............................................. 69
Power mirrors.................................. 100, 101
defroster............................................. 102
Power moonroof.............................. 104, 105
Power steering
adjustable........................................... 174
fluid..................................................... 337
Power steering fluid................................. 384
Power windows......................................... 99
Pregnancy, using seat belts during........... 31
Private locking......................................... 152
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING.. 256, 352, 385
R
Rain sensor................................................ 97
Rear fog lights............................................ 92

12 Index
12
395
Rear park assist............................... 232, 240
Rear seat head restraints........................... 83
Rear seats
center head restraint............................. 82
folding............................................. 82, 84
heated................................................. 127
Rearview mirror
auto-dim function............................... 102
compass............................................. 103
Rear window defroster............................ 102
Recalls....................................................... 26
Recalls, child restraints.............................. 47
Refrigerant............................................... 384
Refueling.......................................... 281, 282
fuel filler cap....................................... 284
fuel filler door.............................. 283, 284
fuel tank volume................................. 384
Registering child restraints........................ 47
Remote control
private locking.................................... 152
Remote key...................... 146, 147, 150, 153
approach lighting................................ 149
immobilizer......................................... 148
key blade.... 146, 147, 150, 151, 152, 153
locking the vehicle.............................. 149
replacing the battery........................... 154
unlocking the vehicle.......................... 149
Reporting safety defects............................ 27
Roadside Assistance................................. 24
Road sign information (RSI)..................... 174
Roof loads............................................... 139
S
Safety, occupant........................................ 26
Safety defects, reporting........................... 27
Safety mode.............................................. 44
Seat belt
reminder................................................ 30
Seat belts
Automatic locking retractor/Emer-
gency locking retractor......................... 47
buckling................................................ 29
maintenance......................................... 29
pretensioners........................................ 28
reminder................................................ 30
reminder warning light.......................... 72
securing child restraint systems.... 49,
51,  54
unbuckling............................................ 29
use during pregnancy........................... 31
using..................................................... 28
Seats, front.......................................... 78, 79
Sensus..................................................... 110
Service
connected service booking................ 329
Shiftlock..................................................... 14
override............................................... 261
Side door mirrors............................. 100, 101
Side impact airbags................................... 39
Sign information (RSI).............................. 174
Snow chains............................................ 309
Snow tires........................................ 309, 310
Spare tire................................................. 299
Spin control..................................... 169, 170
SRS............................................................ 31
Stability system....................... 169, 170, 172
Corner Traction Control (CTC)............ 170
Engine Drag Control (EDC)................. 170
indicator light........................................ 71
Start/Stop (engine function)..... 262, 263,
264, 265, 266
Starting the engine.................................. 252
remote start........................................ 254
with keyless drive............................... 252
Starting the vehicle
after a crash (crash mode).............. 44, 45
Start inhibitor (immobilizer)...................... 148
Steel grid in cargo area............................ 143

12 Index
12
396
Steering wheel
adjusting............................................... 85
heated................................................... 86
horn....................................................... 86
keypad.................................................. 86
Steering wheel paddles............................. 86
Stone chips, touching up......................... 368
Storage spaces........................................ 135
Studded tires................................... 309, 310
Sunroof (moonroof).......................... 104, 105
Sun shade.................................................. 99
Supplemental restraint system.................. 31
warning light......................................... 72
Symbols, overview................................... 386
T
Tailgate
locking/unlocking................................ 162
opening manually............................... 163
wiper/washer........................................ 98
Tailgate wipers......................................... 348
Temperature sensor
ambient................................................. 75
Temporary spare tire............................... 299
Three-way catalytic converter................. 285
Tire designations..................................... 303
Tire inflation pressure.............................. 305
Tire Monitor............................. 315, 316, 317
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.... 311, 314
indicator light........................................ 71
Tires......................................................... 293
age...................................................... 294
changing from summer to winter........ 296
glossary of terms................................ 307
improving economy............................ 295
inflation pressure........................ 301, 302
inflation pressure table....................... 305
rotation............................................... 293
snow........................................... 309, 310
spare................................................... 299
specifications...................................... 303
speed ratings...................................... 303
storing................................................. 294
studded....................................... 309, 310
tire pressure monitoring system......... 311
tire sealing system.............................. 318
tread wear indicator............................ 295
uniform tire quality grading................. 308
Tire sealing system.................................. 318
Top tether anchors (child restraint sys-
tems).......................................................... 56
Touching up paint.................................... 368
Towing a trailer................................ 287, 288
Towing the vehicle................... 289, 290, 291
Traction control................................ 169, 170
Trailer towing................................... 287, 288
Transmission
general description..................... 257, 259
Hill Start Assist................................... 257
oil........................................................ 383
shiftlock override................................ 261
Tread wear indicator................................ 295
Trip computer.......................................... 113
Trip odometers.......................................... 76
Trips, long distance................................. 279
Tunnel detection........................................ 90
Turn signals............................................... 93
changing bulbs................................... 343
indicator lights...................................... 71
Two-stage booster cushion........... 57, 59, 60
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading................... 308
Unlocking the tailgate.............................. 162
Unlocking the vehicle...... 149, 159, 160, 162

12 Index
12
397
V
Vanity mirror............................................ 138
changing bulbs................................... 345
Vehicle Event Data..................................... 18
Vehicle information.................................... 20
Vehicle loading........................ 139, 140, 306
roof loads............................................ 139
Vehicle maintenance................................ 326
performed by the owner..................... 327
Vehicle weights........................................ 378
Volvo and the environment........................ 22
Volvo ID..................................................... 21
Volvo maintenance.................................. 326
Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance.......... 24
Volvo programs......................................... 24
Volvo Sensus........................................... 110
W
Warning flashers, hazard........................... 93
Warning lights................................ 66, 68, 72
Warning symbol......................................... 73
Warning system, collision........ 204, 206, 212
Warranties................................................ 326
Washer fluid............................................. 348
Washers
headlight............................................... 97
windshield............................................. 96
Water, driving through............................. 278
Waxing..................................................... 365
Weights.................................................... 378
Wheels..................................................... 293
changing............................................. 296
storing................................................. 294
Whiplash Protection System..................... 42
Windows
power.................................................... 99
sun shade............................................. 99
Windshield
heated......................................... 102, 129
rain sensor............................................ 97
washers................................................ 97
wipers/washers..................................... 96
Windshield washer fluid........................... 348
Windshield wipers.................................... 346
service position................................... 346
Wiper blades
replacing............................................. 346
replacing tailgate wiper...................... 348

12 Index

398

Volvo 2016 V60 Owners Manual V1

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation